QUEENSBOROUGH COMMUNITY CENTRE EXPANSION AND … · a.301.1 detail exterior elevations a.301.2...

URBAN ARTS ARCHITECTURE 401 – 134 Abbott Street, Vancouver, BC, V6B 2K4 t: 604.683.5060. e: [email protected]

QUEENSBOROUGH COMMUNITY CENTRE EXPANSION AND RENOVATION NEW WESTMINSTER, BC PROJECT MANUAL Issued for Tender: 08 SEPTEMBER 2011

QUEENSBOROUGH COMMUNITY CENTRE EXPANSION AND RENOVATION Issued for Tender – 08 September 2011

URBAN ARTS ARCHITECTURE 401 – 134 Abbott St, Vancouver, BC V6B 2K4 (604) 683 5060

00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS SECTION 00 01 01 PROJECT CONTACT LIST page 1 of 2 PROJECT CONTACT LIST ROLE FIRM & ADDRESS CONTACT PROJECT: QUEENSBOROUGH COMMUNITY CENTRE EXPANSION New Westminster, BC OWNER: City of New Westminster 511 Royal Ave Wayne Werbovetski, MAIBC New Westminster, BC Building Management Coordinator T: 604.527.4597 ARCHITECT: Urban Arts Architecture 401 – 134 Abbott Street Jennifer Marshall, MAIBC Vancouver, BC, V6B 2K4 E: [email protected] T: 604.683.5060 STRUCTURAL ENGINEER: Bush, Bohlman & Partners Andrew W. Metten

#1550-1500 West Georgia Street Justine O'Sullivan Vancouver BC, V6G 2Z6 E: [email protected]

T: 604.688.9861 MECHANICAL ENGINEER: MMM Group Greg Lee (Mechanical) #700-1045 Howe Street Frank Feng (Plumbing)

Vancouver, BC V6Z 2A9 E: [email protected] T: 604.685.9381

ELECTRICAL ENGINEER: Acumen Engineering

#650-2700 Production Way Rob McCourt Burnaby, BC, V5A 4X1 E: [email protected]

T: 604.676.9545

ENVELOPE ENGINEER: RDH Building Engineering Ltd 224 West 8th Ave Paul Kernan Vancouver BC, V5Y 1N5 E: [email protected]

T: 604.873.0933 CIVIL ENGINEER: exp. Systems Inc

7025 Greenwood Street Peter Yan Burnaby, BC V5A 1X7 E: [email protected]

T: 604.874.1245

GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER: exp. Systems Inc 7025 Greenwood Street Kai-Sing Hui

Burnaby, BC V5A 1X7 E: [email protected] T: 604.874.1245

CODE CONSULTANT: LMDG Building Code Consultants Ltd

4th Floor – 780 Beatty St Emmanuel A Domingo Vancouver, BC V6B 2M1 E: [email protected]

T: 604.682.7146 COST CONSULTANT: James Bush & Associates 13657-20A Avenue Jim Bush South Surrey, BC V4A 9V7 E: [email protected] T: 604.535.5863



00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS SECTION 00 01 01 PROJECT CONTACT LIST page 2 of 2 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS: Astech Consultants Ltd. #101-Bldg C-17802-66th Avenue Cloverdale, BC, V3S 7X1 E: T: 604.575.1122 COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY: CES Engineering Ltd 220 – 4211 Kingsway Ave Rudy Sawatzky Burnaby, BC V5H 1Z6 E: [email protected] T: 604.788.8561 LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT: Richard Findlay Landscape Architect Inc. 100-1450 Creekside Drive Richard Findlay Vancouver, B.C. V6J 5B3 E: [email protected] T: 604-730-7407

END OF SECTION 00 01 01



00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS SECTION 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS page 1 of 5

00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS

01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 10 00 SUMMARY OF WORK

01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS

01 18 13 UTILITY CONNECTIONS

01 21 16 CONTINGENCY WORK

01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

01 33 00 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

01 33 23 SURVEY AND LAYOUT DATA

01 40 00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

01 43 00 QUALITY ASSURANCE

01 43 26 TESTING AND INSPECTING AGENCY QUALIFICATIONS

01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

01 54 23 SCAFFOLDING

01 74 00 CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT

01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

01 81 13 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

01 91 13 COMMISSIONING – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 91 14 COMMISSIONING – PLAN

01 91 15 COMMISSIONING – TRAINING

02 EXISTING CONDITIONS

02 40 00 DEMOLITION OF EXISTING STRUCTURE

02 82 13 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL ABATEMENT – Astech Consultants

03 CONCRETE

03 11 00 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES – Bush Bohlman

03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT – Bush Bohlman

03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE – Bush Bohlman




05 METALS

05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL – Bush Bohlman

05 41 00 METAL STUD FRAMING

05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS

05 55 00 METAL LADDERS

06 WOOD, PLASTIC AND COMPOSITES

06 05 73 WOOD TREATMENT

06 10 00 ROUGH FRAMING

06 18 00 GLU-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION - Bush Bohlman

06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY

06 40 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

07 THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 11 00 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

07 13 00 CONCRETE WATERPROOFING

07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION

07 27 13 SHEATHING PAPER/AIR BARRIER

07 27 19 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE

07 46 23 WOOD SIDING

07 46 46 FIBRE CEMENT CLADDING

07 52 16 ROOF MEMBRANE

07 61 13 METAL ROOFING - RDH

07 62 00 METAL FLASHINGS AND TRIM

07 71 00 SEISMIC JOINT ASSEMBLIES

07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING

07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS




08 OPENINGS

08 06 10 DOOR SCHEDULE

08 06 70 DOOR HARDWARE

08 12 00 PRESSED STEEL FRAMES

08 14 00 WOOD DOORS

08 33 00 COILING FIRE AND SMOKE RATED DOORS

08 34 00 SLIDING SECURITY GRILLES

08 41 00 INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOORS AND WINDOWS

08 44 00 EXTERIOR ALUMINUM DOORS AND WINDOWS

08 60 00 ALUMINUM SKYLIGHTS

08 80 00 GLAZING AND MIRRORS

09 FINISHES

09 06 00 SCHEDULE OF FINISHES

09 21 00 GYPSUM WALL BOARD

09 21 16 SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES

09 30 00 TILING

09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL TILE AND T-BAR

09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING

09 68 00 CARPETING

09 72 00 PRESENTATION ERASEABLE WALL COVERING

09 84 00 ACOUSTIC WALL PANELS

09 90 00 PAINTING

09 96 46 INTUMESCENT COATINGS




10 SPECIALITIES

10 11 00 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS

10 14 00 SIGNAGE

10 21 13 TOILET COMPARTMENTS

10 22 26 OPERABLE PARTITIONS

10 26 00 WALL + DOOR PROTECTION

10 28 00 WASHROOM ACCESSORIES

10 51 13 METAL LOCKERS

11 EQUIPMENT

11 40 00 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT

11 51 00 LIBRARY EQUIPMENT

12 FURNISHINGS

12 20 00 WINDOW TREATMENTS

12 48 16 ENTRANCE FLOOR GRILLES

14 CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

14 42 00 ELEVATOR

31 EARTHWORKS

31 14 00 EARTH REMOVAL AND STOCKPILING

31 23 00 EXCAVATION AND FILL

APPENDICES

01 LEED SAMPLE MATERIALS SUBMITTAL FORM

02 LEED SCORECARD

03 LEED SAMPLE CONSTRUCTION WASTE SUBMITTAL FORM

22 PLUMBING

23 HVAC

26 ELECTRICAL



00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS SECTION 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS page 5 of 5 APPENDICES: 01. SAMPLE LEED SUBMITTAL FORM 02. LEED SCORECARD 03. SAMPLE WASTE MANAGEMENT SUBMITTAL FORM




00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS SECTION 00 01 15 LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS page 1 of 4 ARCHITECTURAL: A.001 LIST OF DRAWINGS, PROJECT TEAM, + GENERAL NOTES A.101.1 SITE PLAN A.101.2 LIMIT OF WORK PLAN A.201 GROUND FLOOR PLAN A.201.1 GROUND FLOOR PLAN DETAIL - LIBRARY A.201.2 GROUND FLOOR PLAN DETAIL - ADMIN + MULTI-PURPOSE A.201.3 GROUND FLOOR PLAN DETAIL - CHILDCARE A.202 SECOND FLOOR PLAN A.202.1 SECOND FLOOR PLAN DETAIL - FITNESS A.203 ROOF PLAN A.204 GROUND FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN A.205 SECOND FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN A.300 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS A.301.1 DETAIL EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS A.301.2 DETAIL EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS A.401 BUILDING SECTIONS A.402 BUILDING SECTIONS A.501 WALL SECTIONS - ATRIUM + MULTI-PURPOSE A.502 WALL SECTIONS - ATRIUM SKYLIGHT + FITNESS A.503 WALL SECTIONS – ENTRY + LIBRARY A.504 WALL SECTIONS – CHILDCARE + EQUIPMENT STORAGE A.505 WALL SECTIONS - MULTI-PURPOSE + FITNESS ROOM A.506 WALL SECTIONS – VESTIBULE 1 + ATRIUM A.507 WALL SECTIONS – EXIT STAIR + FITNESS TERRACE A.508 WALL SECTIONS - LIBRARY + ATRIUM ROOF A.509 WALL SECTIONS - FRONT ENTRY + CANOPY A.510 WALL SECTIONS – ELEVATOR + ATRIUM BRIDGE A.515 DETAILS ELEVATIONS – EXIT STAIR 1 A.516 DETAILS ELEVATIONS – EXIT STAIR 2 A.601 DOOR + WINDOW SCHEDULES + DETAILS A.602 DOOR + WINDOW SCHEDULES + DETAILS A.603 DOOR + WINDOW SCHEDULES + DETAILS A.610 TYPICAL PLAN + SECTION DETAILS A.611 TYPICAL PLAN + SECTION DETAILS A.612 TYPICAL PLAN + SECTION DETAILS A.613 TYPICAL PLAN + SECTION DETAILS A.614 TYPICAL PLAN + SECTION DETAILS A.701 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS - ATRIUM + LOBBY A.702 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS - LIBRARY A.703 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS - ADMINISTRATION A.704 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS - MULTI-PURPOSE A.705 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS - CHILDCARE A.706 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS - FITNESS A.707 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS – WASHROOMS



00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS SECTION 00 01 15 LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS page 2 of 4 A.801 MILLWORK - ATRIUM BENCH + VANITIES A.802 MILLWORK - LIBRARY A.803 MILLWORK - RECEPTION A.804 MILLWORK - ADMINISTRATION A.805 MILLWORK - COMMUNITY KITCHEN A.806 MILLWORK - CHILDCARE A.807 MILLWORK - FITNESS + JANITOR ENVELOPE REMEDIATION: ER.0.00 COVER SHEET ER.1.01 GROUND FLOOR PLAN ER.102 ROOF PLAN ER.201 BUILDING ELEVATIONS ER.301 WINDOW AND DOOR SCHEDULE SURVEY

CERTIFIED SITE + BUILDING SURVEY STRUCTURAL: S-1.00 GENERAL NOTES S-1.01 TYPICAL DETAILS SHEET 1 S-1.02 TYPICAL DETAILS SHEET 2 S-2.00A PILING PLAN S-2.01 FOUNDATION / MAIN FLOOR PLAN S-2.02 SECOND FLOOR PLAN S-2.03 ROOF PLAN S-3.00 FOUNDATION SECTIONS & DETAILS SHEET 1 S-3.01 FOUNDATION SECTIONS & DETAILS SHEET 2 S-3.02 FOUNDATION SECTIONS & DETAILS SHEET 3 S-3.10 SECOND FLOOR SECTIONS & DETAILS SHEET 1 S-3.11 SECOND FLOOR SECTIONS & DETAILS SHEET 2 S-3.12 SECOND FLOOR SECTIONS & DETAILS SHEET 3 S-3.13 SECOND FLOOR SECTIONS & DETAILS SHEET 4 S-3.14 SECOND FLOOR SECTIONS & DETAILS SHEET 5 S-3.15 SECOND FLOOR SECTIONS & DETAILS SHEET 6 S-3.20 ROOF SECTIONS & DETAILS SHEET 1 S-3.21 ROOF SECTIONS & DETAILS SHEET 2 S-4.00 BRACE BAY ELEVATIONS S-4.01 BRACE BAY DETAILS SHEET 1 S-4.02 BRACE BAY DETAILS SHEET 2 S-5.00 ELEVATOR PLAN, SECTIONS & DETAILS



00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS SECTION 00 01 15 LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS page 3 of 4 ELECTRICAL: E 1.00 SITE PLAN E 1.10 DEMOLITION PLANS E 1.20 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM E 1.30 EXISTING PANEL DIRECTORIES E 1.40 NEW PANEL DIRECTORIES E 2.00 GROUND LIGHTING PLAN E 2.10 SECOND FLOOR LIGHTING PLAN E 2.20 ASHRA 90.1 CALCULATION E 3.00 GROUND FLOOR POWER PLAN E 3.10 SECOND FLOOR POWER PLAN E 4.00 GROUND FLOOR LOW TENSION PLAN E 4.10 SECOND FLOOR LOW VOLTAGE PLAN ER.E 1.00 ELECTRICAL GROUND FLOOR PLAN - ENVELOPE REMEDIATION ER..E 1.10 ELECTRICAL ROOF PLAN - ENVELOPE REMEDIATION FIRE PROTECTION: FP-1 GROUND FLOOR SPRINKLER MAIN FP-2 SECOND FLOOR SPRINKLER MAIN PLUMBING: P-1 SITE PLAN PLUMBING P-2 FOUNDATION PLAN PLUMBING P-3 GROUND FLOOR PLAN PLUMBING P-4 SECOND FLOOR PLAN PLUMBING P-5 ROOF FLOOR PLAN PLUMBING P-6 SCHEMATIC/DETAILS PLUMBING P-7 DETAILS PLUMBING P-8 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES PLUMBING MECHANICAL: M-1 GROUND FLOOR PLAN HVAC M-2 SECOND FLOOR PLAN HVAC M-3 GROUND FLOOR PLAN HVAC - PIPING M-4 ROOF PLAN HVAC M-5 MECHANICAL ROOM LAYOUT HVAC M-6 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES M-7 DETAILS 1 M-8 DETAILS 2



00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS SECTION 00 01 15 LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS page 4 of 4 CIVIL: 1 OF 2 EROSION + SEDIMENT CONTROL PLAN 2 OF 2 EROSION + SEDIMENT CONTROL DETAILS GEOTECHNICAL: PL 01 WORKING SURFACE AND PRELOAD PLAN (FOR REFERENCE) PL02 FILL/PRELOAD SECTIONS AND NOTES (FOR REFERENCE) MVS-01 METHANE VENTING SYSTEM PLAN + DETAILS




1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 10 00 SUMMARY OF WORK

page 1 of 12

1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 General description of the scope of work at the wood-framed building located at 920 Ewen Avenue, New Westminster, BC, and known as Queensborough Community Centre as follows:

.1 Expansion and Renovation Work:

.1 Approximately 13,000 square feet of new construction, to be added to the existing Community Centre.

.2 Renovation of approximately 1,800 square feet.

.3 Separate prices for additional renovation work to existing Community Centre Washrooms, Community Living Room and Circulation Spaces.

.2 Envelope Remediation Work:

.1 Rehabilitation of exterior walls, low-slope and sloped roofs, and replacement of existing windows, doors, and skylights.

.2 Contract method: CCDC 2 – 2008 Stipulated Price with Supplementary Conditions.

.3 Owner’s Occupancy: Fully Occupied

.4 This section provides only a general description of the scope of the work and process. This section is not definitive and the Work must be completed in accordance with all of the Contract Documents. The word 'install' means 'supply and install' unless there is a specific instruction that the materials or products are to be re-used or Owner supplied.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Bid Documents

.1 All bid documents are relevant to this section.

.2 Technical Specification

.1 All technical specifications are relevant to this section.

1.3 PROJECT COORDINATION

.1 Co-ordinate progress of the Work, progress schedules, submittals, use of site, temporary utilities, construction facilities and controls.

.2 Maintain at the job site, one copy of each of the following:

.1 Contract Drawings, attachments and specifications

.2 Project manual

.3 Addenda

.4 Reviewed Shop Drawings

.5 Change Orders

.6 Other Modifications to Contract




page 2 of 12

.7 Field Test Reports

.8 Manufacturer’s installation and application instructions

.9 Standards of Workmanship

.10 WorkSafe BC approved safety program.

1.4 SCOPE OF WORK

.1 Contractual Requirements

.1 The Contractor shall provide all labour, materials, products, equipment, services, and incidentals required to complete the Contract Work as indicated in the Contract Documents and amendments. The Contractor shall coordinate and direct the execution of the work, including directing the subcontractors.

.2 The Project shall be known as the Queensborough Community Centre Expansion and Renovation.

.3 The Contractor shall execute a CCDC-2 2008 – Stipulated Sum Contract with the Owner. The General Conditions of the Contract, and these General Requirements, together with all Drawings and Details, form an integral part of all Specification Sections.

.4 Complete the Work so as to be certifiable by the Consultant as having attained Substantial Performance on or before the date and time proposed on the Bid Form.

.5 The Contractor is required take the leading role in the organizing, scheduling and coordinating all of the work for an efficient and speedy completion. Scheduling of the Work is the responsibility of the Contractor.

.6 Provide sufficient labour and materials to complete the Work within the time required for each construction phase, as well as to meet overall completion within the Contract Time. Any required overtime and similar costs to complete the project by the agreed completion date is included in the Contract Price.

.7 These General Requirements as well as the related Sections of the Specification shall form part of all sub-trade contracts and agreements.

.8 The Contractor shall maintain liability insurance as specified in the Contract in good standing throughout the term of the Contract with the Owner. The Consultant shall be notified immediately if for whatever reasons the insurance policy is in jeopardy. The Owner, Consultant and sub-consultants shall be named in the liability as co-insured.

.9 Supply for distribution a minimum of every month a written description of the project status and specific information about the work that will affect the Owner. Increase the frequency of the submissions as necessary to keep the Owner informed. Liaise with Owner’s representative and Consultant with respect to all issues impacting the building occupant’s use of the site and building.

.10 Prepare for and attend all project progress meetings.




page 3 of 12

.11 Protect all landscaping material outside of work areas. Work areas shall include areas where scaffolding is erected and circulation routes required to provide access to areas where work will be undertaken.

.12 Consult the Owner before removal and disposal of landscaping material (plants) within work areas that is preventing the timely performance of the work. Removal and disposal to be undertaken by the Owner’s forces.

.2 Construction Requirements

.1 Supply and maintain suitable scaffolding, ladders and other necessary means to access the work safely for all trades and the Consultant’s field representatives.

.2 Erect hoarding and weather protection.

.3 Obtain and pay for trade permits as required (not including Building Permit and Plumbing Permit).

.4 Maintain all code required means of egress from the buildings at all times during work.

.5 Maintain all existing means of access to and egress from the buildings at all times during work. Provide wood frame and plywood hoarding sidewalls and roofs.

.6 Note that the Queensborough Community Centre is to remain open to the public for the duration of the construction period, with the following exception:

.1 The Community Centre will close to the public for approximately 2 months duration, extending through July and August 2012.

.3 Start-Up

.1 Supply and maintain all temporary construction facilities and services.

.2 Make all submittals as described in the Contract Documents and ensure project schedules are submitted and accepted at project start-up.

.3 Clearly identify the value of the work in each area as a percentage of the total project value and break each area into tasks, attaching the value of the work of each task as a percentage of the total project value for the purpose of evaluating applications for payment and change orders. Submit these completed schedules prior to commencing with the work.

.4 EXPANSION AND RENOVATION

.1 Demolish select portions of the building as indicated in Contract Documents

.1 Elements to be salvaged are noted in Section 01 74 00.

.2 Hazardous materials, including asbestos-contaminated material, to be disposed of in accordance with Specifications.

.2 Construct LEED Gold-Certified two-storey addition, of approximately 13,000 square feet of new construction, to existing Community Centre.

.3 Execute LEED-Gold Certified renovation of approximately 1,800 sq.ft. of existing Community Centre Space.




page 4 of 12

.4 Provide Erosion and Sedimentation Control Work as outlined in Specifications and Drawings.

.5 Provide Structural Work as outlined on Drawings. Note that new piles to support the expansion have been installed under separate contract. Refer to Certified Survey and Structural Drawings for detailed layout.

.6 Provide Mechanical Work as outlined in Specifications and Drawings.

.7 Provide Electrical Work as outlined in Specifications and Drawings.

.8 Renovate existing spaces as follows:

.1 Existing Fitness and Office spaces to be renovated and expanded to create new Library 200 - 203 spaces. All existing exposed finishes (glulam beams and T+G decking ceiling) to be refinished to match new.

.2 A portion of the existing slab is being retained in the Atrium 103 – to be patched into the new slab.

.3 Vestibule 4: 113 – add standpipe and cabinet, add new annunciator panel, provide 3/4 hour rated enclosure – including new wired glass in steel frame doors and sidelites, rated GWB partitions, and new rated door and frame to Commercial Kitchen. Rated partitions are to extend to underside of roof decking and beams – this will require new Cedar soffit ceiling to match existing.

.4 Gym 118 - Remove and reframe a partition of the south wall to accommodate new openings. Remove existing plastic laminate wainscoting and replace with new on existing plywood cladding. Paint existing doors and frames, and bulkhead above wainscoting.

.5 Community Living Room 102 – Remove existing doors and sidelites to Vestibule 4 and West Corridor. Patch existing GWB bulkhead and walls and make good all surfaces to receive paint.

.9 Provide Exterior work as follows:

.1 Asphalt paving to complete hammerhead turn around at the West driveway, as per Site Plan and Geotechnical specifications.

.2 All hard and soft landscaping, including relocation of the Bridge, unit pavers, asphalt paving (with the exception of above paving), benches, top soil, plantings, lawns, etc. to be provided under Landscape Cash Allowance.

.10 Temporary Facilities – Contractor to assume rental contract from Piling Contractor for all existing temporary fencing and barricades. Contractor to add additional hoarding and fencing as the work requires to maintain public safety.




page 5 of 12

.5 Separate Price #1: Community Living Room 102 Improvements

.1 New tile floors and base. Include demolition of existing tile floor and base. Tile to match Expansion and Renovation floor tile in atrium.

.2 Paint or re-stain all existing wall and ceiling surfaces, except murals, with new colours. Include all work as per Section 09 90 00. Existing Murals are to be protected from damage throughout the course of construction.

.3 Replace all existing lighting with new fixtures.

.6 Separate Price # 2: Ancillary Space Improvements

.1 Doors + Sidelites:

.1 Remove doors and side-lites between Royal Room Vestibule 114 and Community Living Room 102. Patch existing bulkhead and walls, and make good all surfaces to receive paint – protect existing millwork.

.2 Remove and replace doors between Royal Room Vestibule 114 and Royal Rm. Doors to match storefront system in Expansion and Renovation Work.

.2 New Tiles:

.1 Remove existing wall tiles, floor tiles and tile base, make good floor surface for re-tiling, and provide new tile flooring, 12” tile base, and wall tiles as follows:

.1 Royal Room Vestibule 114 – floor + base

.2 Menʼs Washroom 116 - floor, base + walls

.3 Womenʼs Washroom 117 - floor, base + walls

.4 Vestibule 4: 113 – floor + base

.5 West Hall 115 – floor + base

.3 Sinks + Vanities:

.1 Remove existing vanities and sinks and replace with new vanities and sinks to match new in expansion in Existing Menʼs and Womenʼs Washrooms 116 + 117.

.4 Wainscoting:

.1 Remove painted wainscoting and replace with plastic laminate to match new in expansion in the following spaces:

.1 Community Living Room 102

.2 Royal Room Vestibule 114

.3 Vestibule 4 113




page 6 of 12

.5 Painting

.1 Paint the walls and ceilings in following spaces:

.1 West Corridor 115

.2 Royal Room Vestibule 114

.3 Washrooms 116 + 117

.6 Electrical:

.1 Provide additional lighting in Community Living Room as per Electrical Drawings.

.7 ENVELOPE REMEDIATION

.1 Rehabilitation of Exterior Walls − Assembly W1 and W1a

.1 Coordinate work with rehabilitation of adjoining assemblies and with new construction.

.2 Protect adjoining assemblies not included in scope of work.

.3 Remove and protect various exterior fixtures including mechanical and electrical devices as well as any other fixtures or assemblies not specifically identified to be replaced.

.4 Remove existing wood siding and trim, flashings, sheathing paper, plywood or OSB sheathing from wall areas included in the scope of rehabilitation work.

.5 Remove existing blinds and other window and sliding door coverings and store for reinstallation.

.6 Remove and replace existing windows as indicated.

.7 Remove and replace existing swing doors and frames as indicated.

.8 Undertake remedial work to deteriorated framing as directed by Consultant as part of Contingency Allowance. Replace decayed wood with new treated framing.

.9 Remove existing batt insulation and replace with new fibreglass batt insulation.

.10 Install new treated plywood sheathing.

.11 Prepare waterproofing at rough openings for window and doors.

.12 Install new windows.

.13 Install new doors.

.14 Modify penetrations including mechanical and electrical penetrations to accommodate new rainscreen assembly as required.

.15 Install new sheathing paper, self-adhesive membrane, and flashing.

.16 Install new mineral wool insulation and plywood strapping. New wood to be treated with a borate-based preservative except as noted.




page 7 of 12

.17 Detail and prepare all transitions to adjacent materials and components.

.18 Existing mech. grills.

.19 Install new electrical boxes and outlets.

.20 Install new frost-free hose bibs at existing hose bib locations.

.21 Install sheet metal flashing work including cross cavity wall flashings, corners, custom saddles and terminations, head and sill flashings at windows, head flashings at doors, and tie-ins. Provide flashing end caps at terminations.

.22 Provide new rainscreen wood siding.

.23 Install new exterior wall light fixtures.

.24 Reinstall fixtures, assemblies or devices previously removed and stored.

.25 Restore interior gypsum board finishes to a paint-ready state.

.26 Repaint interior walls affected by the work. Where a portion of the wall is affected, the entire wall is to be repainted.

.27 Reinstall previously removed existing blinds and other window and door coverings.

.28 Install new rainwater leaders and connect to new gutters and existing drain hubs.

.29 Seal all joints and penetrations.

.2 Rehabilitation of Low-Slope Roofs – Assembly R1

.1 Coordinate work with rehabilitation of adjoining assemblies.


.3 Remove existing parapet cap flashings and sloped blocking.

.4 Remove existing wood siding, sheathing paper and plywood sheathing at inside of parapet walls.

.5 Remove existing flashings, membranes, cant strips, drains, scuppers, plumbing vent jacks and exhaust vents from roof areas.

.6 Remove existing rigid insulation and vapour retarder.

.7 Remove existing roof drains and make good.

.8 Undertake remedial work to deteriorated plywood sheathing and wood decking as directed by the Consultant as part of Contingency Allowance.

.9 Provide new spray foam insulation at roof to wall interface.

.10 Install new sloped blocking and new plywood sheathing at parapet wall.

.11 Install new roof vents and plumbing vent jacks.

.12 Install new poly vapour retarder, sloped rigid insulation, 2 layers of mineral wool insulation and overlay board.

.13 Install new roof drains in new locations.




page 8 of 12

.14 Install new overflow scupper drains.

.15 Install new 2-ply SBS membrane and associated flashings.

.16 Provide new sloped cap flashing complete with standing seam joints, drips and folded and sealed saddle flashings at the tie-in details.


.3 New Metal Roofing over Exterior Space (Existing Cedar Shake Assembly) − Assembly R2a



.3 Remove existing soffit light fixtures.

.4 Remove all existing wood soffit material.

.5 Remove and protect existing roof fixtures not specifically identified to be replaced.

.6 Remove all existing wood shakes, fascias and flashing, and associated accessories.

.7 Remove existing metal cap flashing, underlayment and sloped blocking at concealed gutter.

.8 Remove existing gutter membrane and underlayment.

.9 Undertake remedial work to deteriorated roof and gutter sheathing and framing as directed by Consultant as part of Contingency Allowance. Replace decayed wood with new treated framing. Replace decayed plywood sheathing with new treated plywood.

.10 Install new spray foam insulation / air barrier at roof to exterior wall interface.

.11 Install new sloped plywood at gutter.

.12 Install new framing at concealed gutter to raise height of parapet wall.

.13 Install new sloped blocking at gutter parapet.

.14 Install new drains at gutters and connect to existing drain lines.

.15 Install new 2-ply membrane system at gutter and at parapet wall. Extend membrane onto sloped plywood.

.16 Install new roofing underlayment, girts, drainage mat, and associated eave flashing.

.17 Install sheet metal flashing work including drip flashings and step flashings and diverters at vertical interfaces.

.18 Install new metal roofing.

.19 Install new plywood strapping at eave and soffit.

.20 Install new parapet cap flashing.

.21 Install new wood soffit assembly.




page 9 of 12


.4 New Metal Roofing over Interior Space (Existing Cedar Shake Assembly) − Assembly R2b



.3 Remove existing light fixtures.

.4 Remove all existing wood soffit material.

.5 Remove and protect existing roof fixtures not specifically identified to be replaced.

.6 Remove all existing wood shakes, fascias and flashing, and associated accessories.

.7 Remove existing metal cap flashing, underlayment and sloped blocking at concealed gutter.

.8 Remove existing gutter membrane and underlayment.

.9 Undertake remedial work to deteriorated roof and gutter sheathing and framing as directed by Consultant as part of Contingency Allowance. Replace decayed wood with new treated framing. Replace decayed plywood sheathing with new treated plywood.

.10 Install new sloped plywood at gutter.

.11 Install new sloped blocking at gutter parapet.

.12 Install new drains at gutters and connect to existing drain lines.

.13 Install new 2-ply membrane system at gutter and at parapet wall. Extend membrane onto sloped plywood.

.14 Install new roofing underlayment, girts, drainage mat, insulation and associated eave flashing.

.15 Install sheet metal flashing work including drip flashings and step flashings and diverters at vertical interfaces.


.17 Install new plywood strapping at eave and soffit.

.18 Install new parapet cap flashing.

.19 Install new wood soffit assembly.


.5 New Metal Roofing over Interior Space (Existing Metal Roof Assembly) − Assembly R2c



.3 Remove existing metal roofing including aluminum t-bars, flashing, and associated accessories.




page 10 of 12

.4 Undertake remedial work to deteriorated roof sheathing and framing as directed by Consultant as part of Contingency Allowance. Replace decayed wood with new treated framing or install new framing and sheathing as directed by consultant as part of Contingency Allowance.

.5 Remove existing wood siding, sheathing paper and sheathing from wall below roof.

.6 Remove cap flashing, sloped blocking, wood siding, sheathing paper and sheathing from adjoining beam.

.7 Provide new framing and sheathing to form new gutter.

.8 Install new spray foam insulation / air barrier at exterior wall interface as indicated.

.9 Install new drains in gutters and connect to new drain pipes.

.10 Install new 2-ply membrane system at gutter. Extend membrane onto sloped plywood.

.11 Install new sheathing paper and plywood strapping at beam.

.12 Install new wood siding and flashing at beam.

.13 Install new roofing underlayment, girts,insulation, drainage mat.

.14 Install all sheet metal flashing work including drip flashings at overhang and step flashings and diverters at vertical interfaces.


.16 Install new plywood strapping at soffit.

.17 Install new metal soffit.

.18 Install new concrete splash pads below drains pipes.


.6 Wood Framing Remedial Work

.1 Replace deteriorated wood framing with new pressure treated wood products. This work to be paid out of Contingency Allowance. (All sheathing replacement, and additional wall, and roof framing indicated on drawings as being new material, forms part of the base Bid).

.2 Undertake removals sufficiently ahead of the repairs to enable reasonable time for the Consultant to evaluate any additional deterioration to the framing, to adjust the scope of the work and for the Contractor to prepare submissions and seek approvals for those changes.

.3 Do not undertake any repairs to the deteriorated regions without receiving direction from the Consultant.

.4 Complete the approved remedial work to the wood framing.

.5 The replacement of framing and new framing in walls, and other assemblies required due to wood decay is to be done as part of the Contingency Allowance. All hours expended on this work must be recorded and verified by the Owner's representative daily or such costs will not be valid.




page 11 of 12

.6 Reframing work as required by the project documents to alter building features is not part of Contingency Allowance.

.7 Exterior Painting

.1 Paint / stain new wood siding

.2 Paint / stain wood trim and fascias.

.3 Paint new hollow metal doors .

.8 Interior Repairs

.1 Co-ordinate access for all interior work by providing the Owner’s representative with a written notice a minimum of 48 hours prior to commencing work. A copy of the notice is to be faxed to the owner’s representative and Consultant at the same time.

.2 Erect temporary interior enclosures and protection for finishes.

.3 Repair any interior damage caused by the exterior wall work. Repairs will be limited to preparation of the surfaces to paint ready status (cracks and holes patched and primer applied).

.4 All interior repair work (not including work described in .3) to interior finishes associated with the repair or replacement of decayed framing, as authorized by the Consultant, to be done as part of Contingency Allowance. All hours expended on this work must be recorded and verified by the Owner's representative daily or such costs will not be valid.

.5 Paint new interior wood trims at windows and doors as indicated.

.9 Owner Work

.1 Owner is responsible for relocation of any landscaping that they wish to ensure will not be damaged in the execution of the Work.

.2 Owner will obtain and pay for the Building Permit. All other temporary permits, damage deposits, or other charges required by the Municipality for the execution of the work are to be obtained and paid for by the contractor

.10 Site Clean-up

.1 Clean site as directed in documents. Ensure that no debris is left in landscaping.

1.5 WORK SEQUENCE

.1 Undertake Work in stages to accommodate Owner's continued use of premises during construction.

1.6 OWNER OCCUPANCY

.1 Owner will occupy premises during entire construction period under normal occupancy.




page 12 of 12

1.7 LEED REQUIREMENTS:

.1 The Expansion and Renovation Work is intended to be a LEED Gold Certified project. As such the General Contractor is required to provide work to meet LEED standards. Refer to all drawings, and the following Sections for LEED requirements:

.1 Section 01 81 13 Sustainable Requirements

.2 Section 01 74 19 Construction Waste Management and Disposal

.3 LEED Scorecard (Appendix 1)

.2 The contractor is to provide LEED Letter Templates as indicated in 01 81 00.




01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS page 1 of 2 1 USE OF SITE 1.1 GENERAL

.1 Refer to Site Plan for Construction limitations. Confine activities / storage to these limits.

.2 Assume full responsibility for protection and safekeeping of products under this Contract. Refer to CCDC General Conditions.

.3 Obtain and pay for use of additional storage or work areas needed for operations.

.4 The Contractor shall at all times keep the site orderly and, as work allows, generally

clean. Remove all trash and debris daily. Sweep clean all floor areas in, and adjacent to, the work area on a daily basis. See Section 01 74 00.

.5 Contractor and his employees are to refrain from use of offensive language within the

Work area.

.6 No alcohol consumption is allowed on site 1.2 ACCESS

.1 Coordinate with City staff prior to commencing work. Parking is available on site.

.2 The Contractor shall not close or obstruct streets, sidewalks, lanes or other public rights of way without having first obtained permission from the City of New Westminster.

.3 The Fire Fighting Access Road, at the southwest side of the site, must be kept clear

and free from obstructions at all times.

1.3 SITE STORAGE/LOADING

.1 Confine the Work and operations of employees to limits indicated by Contract Documents. Do not unreasonably encumber premises with Products.

.2 Do not load, or permit to be loaded, any part of the Work with a weight or force that will endanger the Work or the existing building.

1.4 HOURS OF WORK

.1 The contractor shall carry out all work from 7:30 am through 7:00 pm, Monday through Friday.

.2 The Contractor shall coordinate schedule with the applicable City staff. City staff must

approve the schedule prior to the commencement of work. No workers can be on site outside of pre-approved hours.

1.5 SMOKING

.1 The City does not permit smoking in or on the premises at any time. No smoking is

permitted within 10’-0” of operable windows, doors and mechanical air intakes.



01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS page 2 of 2

1.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT

.1 The Contractor shall remove all waste from the site within forty-eight (48) hours after

demolition IN COMPLIANCE WITH SECTION 01 74 00 AND ALL LEED REQUIREMENTS

.2 The waste bins shall be located in an area that does not interfere with the normal

operations of the building.

.3 The City does not permit the use of existing on-site waste receptacles by the Contractor.

1.7 SECURITY

.1 The security of the building occupants is of paramount importance. The contractor shall take all reasonable measure to prevent unauthorized access to the site.

.2 At the request of the owners, the contractor shall install security lighting controlled by motion detectors.

.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for the security of the job site building as related to

the Work. Comply with all fire regulations during the period of construction. Leave no portion of existing buildings unlocked after public visiting hours at any time. Coordinate with the City as necessary. Except for designated public entrances, all doors will remain locked at all times.

.4 The contractor‘s employees are to wear photo identification (provided by the City) at all

times when in the work area inside the building.

.5 For shut-downs of the fire alarm system in the existing building, provide a fire watch in the affected areas of the building in accordance with the BC Fire Code 2006, and as required by the authority having jurisdiction.

1.8 EMERGENCY CONTACT .1 Provide a 24 hour emergency contact telephone number in the event that an

emergency arises as a result of the work being undertaken. .2 Ensure that emergency service has a maximum response time of 2 hours and can

accommodate all conditions that may arise from the work including water damage, hoarding, security, mechanical failure, electrical failure, gas service interruption, utility interruption, broken glass and any other related failure

1.9 DANGEROUS MATERIALS

.1 No gasoline or other dangerous materials shall be stored on the site.

.2 The Contractor shall separate any dangerous or hazardous materials removed from the site and take to the appropriate recycling or disposal station(s).




01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 18 13 UTILITY SERVICE CONNECTIONS page 1 of 1

1 GENERAL .1 Prior to commencing work, the Contractor is to ascertain the location of all

underground utilities and take precautions to prevent damage. .2 The contractor will be required to complete the City of New Westminster’s

“Underground Utility Locate Process Checklist”. See Section 00 30 00. .3 When breaking into or connecting to existing services or utilities, the Contractor

shall carry out work at times directed by local government authorities with a minimum disturbance to work and/or building occupants and pedestrian and vehicular traffic.

2 UTILITY SERVICE CONNECTIONS

1. The City shall provide, at no cost to the Contractor for the related work, cold water, and

electrical power. 2. All other utilities and/or services required by the Contractor shall be the responsibility of

the Contractor.




01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 21 16 CONTINGENCY WORK page 1 of 1

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Replacement of decayed wood framing and installation of new framing is required. This work is to be completed as part of the Contingency Allowance defined in Appendix D, and in accordance with the hourly or unit rates defined in Appendix E of the Bid Form.

.2 Hourly rates defined in Appendix E are to include all overhead and profit including labour burdens, WCB premiums, the Contractor’s allowance for tools normally used by each trade designation to complete the work in a timely fashion. Rental for tools required for unusual work not normally performed by each trade designation, or for completion of work not defined only will be recognized. Refer to Supplementary Conditions for full description of overhead costs.

.3 The duration of the project defined in the Bid Form is to account for or include the time associated with completion of the Contingency Allowance including all associated site services, access to the work, general condition requirements, supervision and other all overhead costs. No additional costs or invoicing will be recognized for Contingency Work beyond the defined Trade unit rates and Material allowances in the Bid Form.

.4 All hours and material expended on this work must be recorded on a daily basis on material and labour recording forms approved or provided by the Consultant. Location and type of work is to be recorded for each entry. Material and labour recording forms must be verified by the Owner's representative or the Consultant daily or such costs will not be accepted.

.5 Undertake removals sufficiently ahead of the repairs to enable reasonable time for the Consultant to evaluate any additional deterioration to the framing, to adjust the scope of the work and for the Contractor to prepare submissions and seek approvals for those changes as required or directed.

.6 Do not undertake any repairs without receiving direction and receiving approval for the work from the Consultant.

.7 Complete the approved remedial work to the wood framing as directed.

.8 All contingency work and material is to be invoiced each month with each month’s progress draw. .1 Keep daily records of all time spent on Contingency Work. .2 Record all Contingency Work with references to location of work, site instruction,

site visit report or RFI response. .3 All Contingency Work and materials is to be invoiced each month with each

month’s progress draw. .1 Contingency hours that are worked in a given month and not invoiced as

part of that month’s progress draw will not be eligible for reimbursement .2 Contingency materials consumed in a given month will be eligible for

reimbursement as part of that month’s progress draw or as part of the next month’s progress draw. Materials consumed and not invoiced for within two months will not be eligible for reimbursement.

.3 Provide copies of timesheets and materials invoices/receipts with Application for Payment.




01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

page 1 of 1

1 GENERAL

1.1 SITE MEETINGS

.1 The Contractor shall coordinate and attend regular site meetings at such intervals as may be deemed necessary for the purpose of coordinating and expediting the progress of the work.

.2 Distribute written notice of each meeting four days in advance of meeting date to Consultant & Owner.

.3 Provide physical space and make arrangements for meetings.

.4 An authorized representative of the City will attend these meetings, as and when required. The Contractor agrees to attend in person or send an authorized representative to any such meetings that the City may call. The Contractor’s subcontractors shall attend meetings as required to expedite the Work.

.5 The Consultant shall record and distribute the minutes of any such meetings.

2.1 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

.1 The City shall advise the Contractor of the time and location of a pre-construction meeting that representatives of the Contractor and his trades shall attend prior to the start of any construction of this contract. The purpose of the meeting is to review site conditions, scheduling and other contractual items.

3.1 RECTIFY DAMAGES

.1 The Contractor shall make good any damage or spillage to adjacent buildings, areas, grounds, or vehicles at no cost to the City and leave the site in the same state as it was prior to commencement of the contract and to the satisfaction of the City. The Contractor shall perform all work in a manner that ensures the minimum interference with normal use of public spaces and facilities.

4.1 CONSULTATION WITH OWNER

.1 The Contractor shall contact the City immediately:

.1 For clarification regarding the Contract Work for information in addition to what is provided in the Contract Documents;

.2 If any conflicts or inaccuracies are discovered in the Contract Documents;

.3 If any site conditions become apparent that require revisions to the project design and Contract Documents.

.4 For coordination and approval of shutdowns of building systems, the City prohibits any shutdown of building systems during normal working hours as follows:

.1 Monday through Thursday, from 9:00 a.m. through 9:00 p.m.

.2 Friday through Sunday, from 9:00 a.m. through 5:00 p.m.

.3 Extended hours may be required.

.4 Provide 48 hours notice for all building systems shutdowns.

.5 Parking lot lighting may only be shutdown during daylight hours.




01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

page 1 of 2

1 GENERAL

1.1 ADMINISTRATIVE .1 Submit to Consultant submittals listed for review in accordance with schedule so as to

not cause delay in the Work. .2 Work affected by submittal shall not proceed until review is complete. .3 Review submittals prior to submission to Consultant. This review represents that

necessary requirements have been determined and verified, or will be, and that each submittal has been checked and co-ordinated with requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.

.4 Verify field measurements and affected adjacent Work are co-ordinated.

1.2 PRE-CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS:

.1 The following submittals shall be provided by the contractor for the City’s review within seven (7) days of award of the contract:

.1 Construction Progress Schedule;

.2 Proof of Insurance (see Supplementary Conditions and CCDC2-2008);

.3 Clearance Letter from WorkSafe BC

.2 The following submittals shall be provided by the Contractor for the Consultant’s review within ten (10) calendar days of award of contract, or prior to work being done, whichever occurs sooner:

.1 Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management Plan conforming to the requirements of CaGBC LEED NC 2009 Indoor Air Quality Credit 31: Construction IAQ Management Plan – During Occupancy

.2 Waste Management Plan conforming to the requirements of CaGBC LEED NC 2009 Materials and Resources Credit 2: Construction Waste Management.

1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS & SAMPLES:

.1 Samples shall be provided to the Consultant, in duplicate, in a timely manner prior to ordering of the material and equipment, as requested in respective Specification Sections.

1.4 SCHEDULES

.1 Schedules Required: .1 Construction Progress Schedule. .2 Schedule of Values of the Work .3 Submittal Schedule for Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.

.2 Format of Construction Progress Schedule: .1 Prepare schedules in form of a Gantt chart or horizontal bar chart. .2 Provide separate bar for each trade or operation. .3 Provide horizontal time scale identifying first work day of each week. .4 Format for listings: Chronological order of start of each item of work. .5 Three week schedule window to be updated bi-weekly.



01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

page 2 of 2

.3 Submission .1 Submit final construction progress schedule, .2 Submit values of work schedule, and submittals schedule for acceptance a

minimum of 14 days prior to submitting the first application for payment. .3 Submit 2 copies to be retained by Consultant. .4 Include value of total contract for each phase and component of the work

described in the project schedule. .5 Consultant will review schedule and return reviewed copy within 7 days after

receipt. .6 Resubmit finalized schedule within 7 days after return of reviewed copy.

1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE:

.1 The following submittals shall be provided by the contractor for the Consultant's review upon the Contractor's request for Certificate of Completion of the Contract:

.1 Final inspection certificates from the authorities having jurisdiction;

.2 Deficiency list, complete with a cost estimate of the value of remaining deficiencies;

.3 CaGBC LEED 2009 NC Letter Templates, completed and signed, with all required supplementary documentation:

.1 Materials and Resources Credit 2: Construction Waste Management.

.2 Indoor Air Quality Credit 3.1: Construction IAQ Management Plan – During Occupancy

.3 Indoor Air Quality Credit 3.2: Construction IAQ Management Plan – Before Occupancy

.4 Completed LEED Submittal Sheets (sample as per Appendix 1) for all those construction materials in Sections 03 – 10, 31, and 32, used in the Expansion and Renovation Work. Concrete formwork is excluded.

.5 Record Set Drawings –

.1 one set of white print working drawings neatly marked up in red indicating any as-built conditions that vary from the original drawings;

.2 one set of digital drawings in .dwg format indicating as-built conditions.

.6 Data Manuals - 1 copy, typed 8.5” x 11” format, submitted in 3 ring hard cover binder, and one digital PDF copy on compact disc, including the following:

.1 List of Sub-trades;

.2 Shop drawings;

.3 Operations and maintenance information;

.4 Warranties;

.5 As-built drawings

.6 Survey of completed Work prepared by a BC Land Surveyor.



GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 33 23 SURVEY AND LAYOUT DATA page 1 of 1 1 GENERAL .1 Requirements include field engineering survey services to measure and stake out

site, establish invert measurement. .2 All work to be undertaken by a Quality Land Surveyor licensed to practice in the

Province of British Columbia. .3 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS:

a. Existing base horizontal and vertical control points as designated on drawings or established by Consultant.

b. Locate, confirm and protect control points prior to starting site work. Preserve permanent reference points during construction.




01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 41 00 REGULATORY AND STANDARDS REQUIREMENTS page 1 of 3

1 GENERAL

1.1 RELEVANT STANDARDS

.1 It is the responsibility of the Contractor to:

.1 Execute work in accordance with the 2006 BC Building Code, the 2006 BC Fire Code, the Uniform Building Code (UBC), the City of New Westminster Building By-Law, and all codes and standards specified within the text of this specification.

.2 Conform to the latest issue of codes and standards specified.

.3 In case of any conflict or discrepancy between codes and standards, the more stringent requirement shall apply.

.4 Materials and workmanship must conform to or exceed applicable standards of American National Standards Institute (ANSI), Construction Specification Institute (CSI), Materials and Methods Standards Association (MMSA), American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) and other referenced organizations.

.5 All specifications contained in these Contract Documents are in essence abbreviated or outline specifications. Where further information is required both at the time of tender, in the performance and supervision of the Project, the above standards and codes shall apply and will be enforced.

.6 Conform to applicable Canada Green Building Council (CaGBC) LEED 2009 New Construction (NC) requirements to achieve credits listed in LEED Scorecard attached as Appendix 2.

1.2 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

.1 The Contractor shall take adequate measures to protect the public, City of New Westminster staff, and others on site from injury, damage, or other loss resulting from construction and related activities. Included within the Contractor's work are hoarding, signage, and similar items appropriate for construction conditions and the progress of the job. The City shall have complete jurisdiction over entry of Contractor's workers and vehicle access to site and existing buildings. The Contractor shall make building access arrangements in consultation with applicable staff.

.2 The Contractor will be required to meet with the City’s representative on site to review

and accept responsibilities as identified in the City’s Prime Contractor Designation, Risk Assessment, and Pre-Job Meeting forms.

.3 All Contractors and Subcontractors must be registered employers with WorkSafe BC

and must conform to all WorkSafe BC requirements for construction safety.

.4 In the event of conflict between any provisions of above authorities, the most stringent provision will apply.

.5 First Aid:

.1 The Contractor shall arrange for the provision of first aid facilities and an Accident Prevention Program to the requirements of the Workers’ Compensation Board of B.C.

.6 Fire Protection during Construction & Demolition

.1 Refer to Part 8 of the BC Building Code and the requirements of the Fire Services Act, Regulations and Bulletins.




1.3 MOULD AND WORKER SAFETY

.1 The subject buildings have been experiencing water ingress problems and, typical of such buildings, likely contains various moulds that workers may be exposed to. Contractors involved in the demolition and removal of the existing assemblies or in work that may expose workers to mould are required to consider the potential health risks and protect their workers accordingly.

.2 The contractor is to report any condition that is suspected to be mould contaminated, and shall immediately stop work in the affected area. The owner will retain an environmental consultant and contractor experienced in mould mitigation to remove the mould or contaminated material, prior to the resumption of work in the contaminated area.

.3 A safe workplace is mandated by law in Canada under various legislative frameworks. These include the provincial occupational health and safety acts, the Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS), the Canada Labour Code, and Transport Canada's Transportation of Dangerous Goods (TDG) Act and Regulations. Without proper protection, workers can be exposed to high concentrations of mould. It is of paramount importance to have an operating procedure that will protect the health and safety of workers that may be exposed to possible fungal contamination in buildings.

.4 The mycotoxins from toxic moulds can enter the body via ingestion, inhalation or contact with the skin. Therefore, protecting workers during the remediation work requires that protective measures be taken to protect against all possible routes of exposure.

.5 During remediation workers should be protected with: .1 A NIOSH (National Institute of Occupational Health and Safety and Health)

approved half face respirator with a HEPA (High Efficiency Particulate Arresting) filter cartridge. The respirator must be individually fit tested.

.2 Goggles with good peripheral vision.

.3 Approved safety footwear and appropriate safety equipment for use during demolition.

.4 A double layer set of gloves, the inner layer being latex or natural rubber, and the outer layer being work gloves of leather.

.5 A washable or disposable cover suit with full headgear and foot covering.

.6 Depending on the size and location of the cleanup ventilation and filtration of the workspace may also be required.

.6 In addition to the above requirements, during the cleanup phase of a remediation project, workers should be provided with the following protective equipment: .1 Arm length gloves approved for use with chlorine bleach .2 A disposable full coverage suit that resists bleed through of chlorine bleach (a

tyvek suit or equivalent is acceptable) .3 Rubber boots .4 A NIOSH approved full face respirator fitted with a NIOSH acid gas cartridge




.7 Workers who have respiratory deficiencies or immune system suppression should not be involved in remediation work that exposes them to mould.

.1 Exposure to mould can be a problem for some workers, particularly those with asthma and problems with their lungs. In some workers, exposure to mould may be dangerous, even with the proper protective equipment. As a condition of employment on remediation work involving exposure to mould, contractors must ensure that works do not suffer from:

.2 Asthma or other respiratory diseases such as emphysema

.3 Allergy to moulds

.4 Present or recent infection with a virus or bacteria, or lung infection such as bronchitis or pneumonia

.5 Hay fever, Allergic eye diseases, eczema

.6 Any condition that weakens ones ability to fight off infections, for example, HIV, some forms of cancer, or chronic disorders.




01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 43 00 QUALITY ASSURANCE

page 1 of 1

1.1 PRODUCT AND MATERIAL QUALITY .1 Products, materials, equipment and articles (referred to as Products throughout

specifications) incorporated in Work shall be new, not damaged or defective, and of best quality (compatible with specifications) for purpose intended. If requested, furnish evidence as to type, source and quality of Products provided.

.2 Defective Products will be rejected, regardless of previous review. Review does not relieve responsibility, but is precaution against oversight or error. Remove and replace defective Products at own expense and be responsible for delays and expenses caused by rejection.

.3 Should any dispute arise as to quality or fitness of products, decision rests solely with Consultant based upon requirements of Contract Documents.

.4 Contractor shall provide all warranties for materials and installation as described in the Specifications and in accordance with GC 12.3.

1.2 STORAGE, HANDLING AND PROTECTION .1 Handle and store Products in manner to prevent damage, deterioration or soiling and in

accordance with manufacturer's instructions when applicable. .2 Store packaged or bundled Products in original and undamaged condition with

manufacturer's seals and labels intact. .3 Store products subject to damage from weather in weatherproof enclosures.

1.3 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS .1 Unless otherwise indicated in specifications, install or erect Products in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions. Do not rely on labels or enclosures provided with Products. Obtain written instructions directly from manufacturers.

.2 Notify Consultant in writing, of conflicts between specifications and manufacturer's instructions, so that Consultant may establish course of action.

.3 Improper installation of erection of Products, due to failure in complying with these requirements, authorizes Consultant to require removal and reinstallation at no increase in Contract Price.

1.4 WORKMANSHIP .1 Workmanship shall be best quality, executed by workers experienced and skilled in

respective duties for which they are employed. Immediately notify Consultant if required Work is such as to make it impractical to produce required results.

.2 Do not employ any unfit person or anyone unskilled in their required duties.

.3 Decisions as to quality or fitness of workmanship in cases of dispute rest solely with Consultant, whose decision is final.

1.5 CONCEALMENT .1 In finished areas, conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in floors, walls and ceilings, except

where indicated otherwise. .2 Before installation, inform Consultant if there is a contradictory situation. Install as

directed by Consultant.




01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 45 23 TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES

page 1 of 1 1 GENERAL

1. The Owner will engage independent consultants to review the following: a. Erosion and Sedimentation Control b. Asbestos Abatement c. Geotechnical work d. Mould investigation and testing e. Concrete testing f. Skylight, storefront, and curtain wall window air and water leakage.

Refer to GC 2.3 REVIEW AND INSPECTION OF WORK, for governing requirements and any additional testing requirements.

2. The Owner shall: 1. Pay costs for inspections and testing, unless noted otherwise. 3. The Contractor shall: 1. Arrange for the performance of all inspections and testing required by all

Regulatory Authorities having jurisdiction. 2. In addition to inspections, perform all testing work required to insure the proper

and continued performance of the Work of this Contract. 3. Notify appropriate agencies in advance (minimum 72 hours) of the requirements

for tests in order that attendant arrangements may be made. 4. Allow Inspection and Testing Agencies access to all portions of Work and

manufacturing and/or fabrication plants. Co-operate to provide reasonable facilities for such access.

5. Written reports of each test or series of tests shall be prepared and submitted to

the Architect. 4. Refer to GC 2.4 DEFECTIVE WORK for procedures. If defects are revealed during

inspection and/or testing, the Inspection/Testing Agency will request additional inspection and/or testing to ascertain full degree of defect. The Contractor shall correct defects and irregularities as advised by the Architect, at no cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall pay all costs for retesting and reinspection.




01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES + CONTROLS

page of 4

1 GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

.1 The Contractor shall provide the following:

.1 Construction zone fencing complete with lockable vehicle and man doors in locations indicated on Drawings.

.2 The General Contractor shall provide adequate safety barriers, guard-rails, handrails and covers for floor, roof and wall openings in accordance with WorkSafe BC standards.

.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for all temporary supports, bracing or similar structural work as may be required during the carrying out of Contract Work. See also Section 01 54 23: Scaffolding.

.3 Remove from site all such work from site after use.

1.2 SAFETY

.1 Contractor has full responsibility for compliance with Workers Compensation Board ( WCB ) and WHMIS requirements.

.2 Provide temporary safety measures to close off hazardous areas and protect occupants.

.3 Provide temporary shoring, and engineering design for shoring, as required.

1.3 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS

.1 Provide and maintain in clean condition during progress of Work, adequately lighted, heated and ventilated temporary office with space for filing and layout of Contract Documents, telephone, internet, facsimile, and office work area for contractor’s normal site staff.

.2 Contractor will be responsible for power, telephone, internet, and heat for the site office.

.3 Office must have desk and plan space for the use of the Contractor and for, from time to time, the Consultant.

.4 Office and /or storage should be satisfactory in size to be used as a lunch room for employees and Subcontractors, and to be used for site meetings.

1.4 FIRST AID FACILITIES

.1 Provide first aid facilities in compliance with WorkSafe BC requirements.

1.5 SANITARY FACILITIES

.1 Contractor to provide on-site portable toilet facilities.

.2 Washrooms in Queensborough Community Centre are not to be used and any workers urinating in locations other than sanitary facilities to be dismissed.

1.6 WATER SUPPLY

.1 Owner will provide a continuous supply of potable water for construction use.

.2 Owner will pay for utility charge at prevailing rates.




page of 4

1.7 TEMPORARY POWER

.1 Arrange and pay for connection with appropriate utility company or arrange to connect to panel feed from the electrical rooms of the complex. Pay costs for permits, installation, maintenance and removal.

.2 Do not utilize exterior or interior electrical outlets.

1.8 COMMUNICATION

.1 Provide and pay for temporary telephones necessary for own use and use of Consultant.

.2 Provide and pay for temporary site facsimile machine for own use and use of Consultant.

.3 Provide and pay for temporary photocopier machine for own use and use of the Consultant.

.4 Provide and pay for temporary computer and e-mail service for own use and use of Consultant.

.5 Site Superintendent to carry a cellular phone or site radio at all times.

1.9 EQUIPMENT/TOOL/MATERIALS STORAGE

.1 Provide and maintain, in clean and orderly condition, lockable weatherproof sheds for storage of tools, equipment and materials.

.2 Locate materials not required to be stored in weatherproof sheds on site in manner to cause least interference with work activities.

1.10 HOARDING

.1 Erect hoarding to protect public, workers, public and private property from injury or damage. Wood frame and plywood tunnels are to be provided at all access and exit doors, clear of the construction area.

.2 Erect hoarding as required to protect the buildings and the work from the weather and to maintain environmental conditions.

.3 Place protective pads under the feet of scaffolding to ensure that no damage occurs to new waterproofing surfaces.

1.11 WEATHER ENCLOSURES

.1 Provide weather tight enclosures and secure from entry by unauthorized persons to unfinished door and window openings, tops of shafts and other openings in floors and roofs.

.2 Close off floor areas where walls are not finished; seal off other openings.




page of 4

.3 Erect weather protection as required to protect the building and the work from the weather and to maintain environmental conditions, including temperature, to allow for the continuation of work through the fall and winter as necessary.

.4 Include temporary heat and supervision as required to maintain schedule.

.5 Provide screen type enclosure which permits air movement and visual observation through the enclosure unless a solid enclosure is required to maintain temperature. Utilize white tarping material or semi transparent scafnet mesh. Orange or blue tarps are not acceptable.

1.12 ROOFING PROTECTION

.1 Unfinished roofing work is to be fully covered by tarpaulins or plastic sheeting which is properly secured

.2 Roofing material should not be left unsecured at the job site where it may be dislodge by wind.

.3 Drainage points to be cleared of construction debris or excess tar when work is complete.

1.13 DUST TIGHT SCREENS

.1 Provide dust tight screens or partitions to localize dust generating activities, and for protection of workers, finished areas of Work and public.

.2 Maintain and relocate protection until such Work is complete.

.3 Ensure that dust screens or partitions are erected and maintained inside all interior spaces while work inside the building is undertaken.

1.14 INTERIOR SPACE PROTECTION

.1 Undertake a pre-construction survey of each interior space prior to undertaking any work. Record all observations in writing and by photographic or video record and notify the Consultant in writing of any pre-existing conditions prior to commencing work. Any claims for damage that was not identified in the pre-construction survey or that cannot be shown to have pre-existed prior to the work commencing will be borne by the Contractor.

.2 The Owner will be responsible for the removal of all items within the region identified by the Contractor where the dust screen will be erected with the exception of major furniture and appliances. The Contractor will be responsible for moving a reasonable number of furniture and appliance items to an acceptable area outside the dust screen region. The region that the dust screen will enclose must be identified in the notice prepared by the Contractor and issued to the Owner.

.3 All workmen are to wear clean footwear only used for interior work or to wear clean footwear guards at all times while working inside.

.4 No footwear worn outside the building shall be used inside the building without being inspected for dirt and water and, if acceptable, protected by footwear guards.




page 1 of 4

.5 All traffic paths through the building interior outside the dust enclosure shall be protected by canvas drop cloths and protection of the floors must be maintained at all times. Remove the traffic paths at the end of each working day and leave the region of the interior outside the dust enclosure clean and suitable for occupancy.

.6 All floor regions within the dust enclosure must have canvas drop cloths or an acceptable alternative placed over all flooring and secured in a non-destructive manner to ensure service during all work.

.7 Clean all affected surfaces within the dust screen at the completion of the work.

.8 All effort must be made to complete all interior work as quickly and efficiently as possible with a minimum of disruption to the occupants.

1.15 EXTERIOR ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION

.1 Undertake a pre-construction survey of exterior of buildings prior to undertaking any work. Record all observations in writing and by photographic or video record and notify the Consultant in writing of the pre-existing conditions prior to commencing work. Any claims for damage that was not identified in the pre-construction survey or that cannot be shown to have pre-existed prior to the work commencing will be borne by the Contractor.

.2 Undertake a pre-construction survey of soft landscaping outside of work areas prior to undertaking any work. Note work areas are areas within 6 feet of building exterior walls and required access routes to these areas. Record all observations in writing or by photographic or video record and notify the Consultant in writing of the pre-existing damage prior to commencing work. New planting of same species to be reinstalled after the completion of the construction work.

.3 The owners will be responsible for the removal of all portable items to facilitate the execution of the Work.




01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 54 23 SCAFFOLDING

page 1 of 4

1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Work included: labour, materials, equipment and services necessary for the following:

.2 Design, supply, erect and maintain fixed scaffolding to extent shown on drawings and as required as to facilitate the Work, including all bracing, tie backs, outriggers, guardrails, toe boards, platforms, access stair and ladders.

.3 Perform daily safety inspections during the erection of the scaffolding, and maintain the safety of the workmen and pedestrians.

.4 Perform safety inspection upon completion of the scaffold system erection but prior to use of other contractors.

.5 Scaffolding is to extend a minimum of 4 feet above existing roof.

.6 Supply and erect demolition grade garbage chutes as required.

.7 Supply and erect access stairs or ladders as required.

.8 Scaffold system as erected is to be fully compliant with all relevant regulations.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 National Building Code of Canada.

.2 Canadian Standards Association (CSA)

.3 CAN/CSA S269.2-M87 Access Scaffolding for Construction Purposes.

.4 Occupational Health and Safety Act of British Columbia.

.5 Workers’ Compensation Board (WCB) Standards.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SCAFFOLDING COMPONENTS

.1 All metal scaffolding components to be provided by a single source supplier of metal scaffolding components acceptable to the Consultant.

.2 The supplier of metal scaffolding components shall provide test data and test information upon request.

2.2 DESIGN

.1 The scaffolding shall be designed and constructed in accordance to the requirements of the Standards and Codes referenced in Section 1.2.

.2 When required, the scaffolding is to be enclosed with an enclosure capable of providing protection to the pedestrians and adjacent property from dust, dirt, water spray, falling tools and debris, etc.




page 2 of 4

.3 Support Conditions

.4 Soil-bearing conditions shall be verified by the Contractor.

.5 Where the existing structure is to be used for the support of the scaffolding, the Contractor must verify that the existing structure can safely support the imposed loads from the scaffolding. Should the existing structure require strengthening for support of the scaffolding, the Contractor must provide details for shoring or strengthening on the scaffolding erection drawings.

.6 The Contractor is to retain and pay for review, report and design by a structural engineer, registered in the Province of British Columbia. Submit signed and sealed drawings and letters of assurance to Consultant.

.7 When the Contractor relies on the existing structure of the building for lateral support of the scaffolding, the Contractor takes responsibility for not only providing adequate anchorage of the lateral supports for the scaffolding, but also the responsibility to establish whether or not the existing wall framing or structure can adequately support the lateral loads from the scaffolding. Any damage to the wall / floor structure due to the anchorage of the lateral support of the scaffolding must be repaired without disfiguring the building at no cost to the Owner.

2.3 Enclosure .1 The Contractor is responsible for taking into account wind loads that are imposed on

the scaffolding as a result of the scaffolding being enclosed. .2 It is intended that tarping, shrink-wrap and/or scafnet be fixed to the scaffolding and the

scaffolding anchorage designed to resist all wind loads. For design purposes, assume that the scaffold will be fully enclosed with shrink-wrap.

2.4 Access to Scaffolding .1 Access to scaffolding is to be by stairs or ladders. All stairs are to have handrails and

all landings to have railings such that if a workman trips and falls while descending the stairs, it will not be possible for the workman to fall through the railing system.

.2 All ladders or stair openings on planked working areas of the scaffolding to be surrounded by railings to prevent workmen from walking into the back or the sides of the open stair or ladder.

.3 Each building/phase of the work is to have a minimum of one access stair or ladder. Location of stairs/ladder is to be identified by the Consultant.

2.5 Working Platforms .1 All levels of the scaffolding are to be fully planked. .2 Levels of the scaffolding designated for work must be fully planked. On a designated

working platform, Contractors are not to remove isolated areas of planking such that the fully planked platform has areas of missing planks.

.3 If a Contractor deems that fully planked working platforms are not required, or a partially planked platform is required to facilitate lowering or raising material, guardrails must be installed to prevent a workman from falling off the partially planked platform.

.4 With the exception of the front of ladders or stair openings, all openings in working platforms to have railings to prevent workmen from accidentally walking into the openings.




page 3 of 4

2.6 Garbage Chutes .1 Scaffolding is to accommodate and include one garbage chute per building/phase.

Location of garbage chute is to be acceptable to the Consultant and Owner.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER’S CERTIFICATION

.1 The Contractor will retain and pay for all costs associated with the engineering of the scaffolding system including inspections and verification of revision and/or modifications.

.2 The Contractor must provide written certification from a Scaffolding Design Engineer that the scaffolding is erected in accordance with the reviewed erection drawings. The engineer is to be registered in the Province of BC

3.2 DISCLOSURE OF ORDERS TO COMPLY AND WCB INSPECTION REPORTS

.1 Any inspection reports, orders to comply, etc., issued to the Contractor by the representative of the Workers’ Compensation Board of British Columbia, or any authority having jurisdiction, are to be provided to the Consultant and the Engineer responsible for certifying the scaffolding erection drawings and confirming that the scaffolding is erected in accordance with the erection drawings.

.2 Any life safety instructions / work orders by the Workers’ Compensation Board of British Columbia are to be immediately followed by the Contractor prior to continuing with the Work.

.3 At all times compliance with WCB regulations will be considered a contractual requirement on the behalf of the Contractor.

3.3 EXISTING STRUCTURE

.1 The Contractor must verify that the existing structure can safely support all loads imposed by the scaffolding.

.2 The Contractor will be responsible for all damage to the existing building, caused by the erection / dismantling of the scaffolding and by loads imposed by the scaffolding.

3.4 FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION OF HOARDING SCAFFOLDING

.1 All hoarding is to be installed in accordance with the rules and regulations as required by applicable regulations and in accordance with the referenced standards contained in Section 1.2.

.2 Install hoarding protection above all access routes to the building.




page 4 of 4

.3 Provide posts, rafters, planking and plywood sheathing.

.4 The roof structure of the hoarding is to be constructed of wood framing capable of withstanding impact load from falling debris, materials or tools in order to provide overhead protection to public accessing the building during construction.

.5 The roof of all hoarding must also be waterproof with peel and stick membrane.

.6 Remove hoarding from site only when authorized by the Consultant.

.7 Block off scaffolding access locations during non-working hours to restrict access to scaffolding and building.

3.5 MAINTENANCE OF HOARDING

.1 The Contractor will provide sufficient lighting for evening entrance and exit of the building throughout perimeter walkways.

.2 Maintain hoarding in good condition at all times.




01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 74 00 CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT

page 1 of 5

1 GENERAL

1.1 WASTE MANAGEMENT GOALS FOR THE PROJECT

.1 The Owner has established that this Project shall achieve a minimum waste diversion rate of 75% of the total waste generated by the project, either by weight or volume, to achieve 2 points under LEED 2009 NC Material and Resources Credit 2: Construction Waste Management.

.2 Reduce: the project shall generate the least amount of waste possible and processes shall be employed to ensure the generation of as little waste as possible including prevention of damage due to mishandling, improper storage, contamination, inadequate protection or other factors as well as minimizing over packaging and poor quantity estimating.

.3 Reuse: The Contractor and Subcontractors shall reuse materials to the greatest extent possible. Reuse includes the following:

.1 .a Salvage reusable materials for reuse on this Project, for resale, or for storage for use on future projects.

.2 .b Return reusable items (e.g., pallets or unused products) to material suppliers.

.4 Recycle: All waste materials that are generated and not suitable for reuse shall be recycled. All Metro Vancouver materials banned from disposal shall be recycled.


.1 Section 02 42 00 – Removal and Salvage of Construction Materials

.2 Section 31 00 00 – Earthwork

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN: Within 10 calendar days after receipt of Notice of Award of Contract, or prior to any waste removal, whichever occurs sooner, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner and Consultant a Waste Management Plan conforming to the requirements of CaGBC’s LEED 2009 NC Materials and Resources Credit 2: Construction Waste Management.

.2 PROJECT WASTE SUMMARY: The Contractor shall submit to the Consultant, on a monthly basis, a summary of waste materials, recycled, salvaged and disposed of by the Project. A sample Summary form is attached as Appendix 3. The Summary shall contain, at a minimum, the following information:

.1 For each material salvaged or recycled from the Project, include the amount (consistently in cubic meters or tonnes) and the destination (i.e. recycling facility, used building materials yard).

.2 For each material land filled or incinerated from the Project, include the amount (consistently in cubic meters or tonnes) of material and the identity of the landfill, incinerator and/or transfer station.




page 2 of 5

.3 DISPOSAL DOCUMENTATION: Submit to the Consultant way-bills, invoices and supporting letters from each waste management firm, on firm letterhead, confirming end use of all waste materials, and confirming that all materials have been hauled to the required locations.

1.4 CODE OF PRACTICE

.1 In addition to other requirements specified herein it is a requirement for the Work of this project that the Contractor comply with Metro Vancouver’s “3Rs Code of Practice for the Building Industry”. Refer also to “Construction Waste Management: A Guide for Builders and Developers” and “Demolition & Salvage: A Guide for Project Managers and Contractors.” All documents are available from Metro Vancouver, Sustainable Business Services Division, Telephone: 604-451-6575. Website address: www.metrovancouver.org/buildsmart.

1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

.1 Conform to applicable codes and regulations for disposal and removal of common and hazardous waste. See Section 02 08 00 Hazardous Materials Abatement.

.1 Hazardous and banned materials include, but are not limited, to: asbestos, drywall (banned from disposal), underground storage tanks, Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs), abandoned chemicals (gasoline, pesticides, herbicides, flammable and combustible substances), freon from cooling equipment, lead-based paints, smoke detectors, and mercury containing switches.

.2 Hazardous waste to be excluded from LEED calculations.

.2 The following materials are banned or prohibited from the garbage within Metro Vancouver:

.1 Banned Materials:

.1 Corrugated cardboard

.2 Recyclable Paper

.3 Green waste

.4 Containers made of glass, metal or Banned Recycled Plastic (1, 2, 4 & 5)

.5 Beverage containers (all except milk cartons)

.2 Prohibited Materials:

.1 Agricultural waste;

.2 Asbestos;

.3 Automobile bodies and parts;

.4 Batteries;

.5 Barrels or drums in excess of 205 litres (45 gallons) whether full or empty;

.6 Biomedical waste;




page 3 of 5

.7 Clean or treated wood exceeding 2.5 m in length;

.8 Dead animals;

.9 Electronics and electrical products;

.10 Excrement;

.11 Fluorescent lights;

.12 Gypsum

.13 Hazardous waste;

.14 Hospital office waste;

.15 Inert fill materials including soil, sod, gravel, concrete and asphalt in quantities exceeding 0.5 cubic metres per load;

.16 Lead acid batteries;

.17 Liquids and sludge;

.18 Mattresses;

.19 Oil containers, oil filters, paint products, solvents and flammable liquids;

.20 Metal household or commercial appliances;

.21 Pesticide products;

.22 Pharmaceuticals;

.23 Propane tanks;

.24 Radioactive and reactive waste;

.25 Refuse that is on fire, smouldering, flammable or explosive;

.26 Refuse that would cause undue risk of injury or occupational disease to any person at the Disposal Site or that would otherwise contravene the Occupational Health and Safety Regulations;

.27 Single objects longer than 2.5 m in length or weighing more than 100 kilograms;

.28 Thermostats;

.29 Tires;

.30 Any other Refuse that the Manager considers unsuitable for handling at the Disposal Site.

.3 Conform to requirements of the CaGBC’s LEED Canada for New Construction Major Renovations 2009, Materials + Resources Credit 2: Construction Waste Management, to obtain 2 Points (divert a min. of 75% construction + demolition debris from disposal in landfills + incineration facilities). Diversion ratio is based on confirmed weights/ volumes and actual products diverted.




page 4 of 5

.4 Licensed facilities: Only those brokerage, storage, transfer and disposal facilities which comply with the requirements of the “Greater Vancouver Sewerage and Drainage District Municipal Solid Waste and Recyclable Material Regulatory Bylaw No. 181, 1996 as amended by Bylaw 183, 1996” and those licensed by other jurisdictions shall be used by the Contractor for the recycling and disposal of waste materials generated at deconstruction and renovation projects. For a listing of licensed facilities, contact the Metro Vancouver Solid Waste Regulatory program at 604-436-6777.

1.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN

.1 The Waste Management Plan shall contain the following:

.1 Analysis of the proposed job site waste to be generated, including the types of recyclable and waste materials generated (by volume or weight). In the case of demolition, a list of each item proposed to be salvaged during the course of the project should also be prepared (Refer to www.metrovancouver.org/buildsmart for a directory of service providers. This list is not necessarily complete. The Contractor may use any of these or other service providers).

.2 Alternatives to Landfilling: Contractor shall designate responsibility for preparing a list of each material proposed to be salvaged, reused, or recycled during the course of the Project.

.3 Meetings: Contractor shall conduct Project Waste Management meetings. Meetings shall include subcontractors affected by the Waste Management Plan. At a minimum, waste management goals and issues shall be discussed at the following meetings:

.1 Pre-bid meeting.

.2 Pre-construction meeting.

.3 Regular job-site meetings.

.4 Materials Handling Procedures: prevent contamination of materials to be recycled and salvaged and handle materials consistent with requirements for acceptance by designated facilities. Where space permits, source separation is recommended. Where materials must be co-mingled they must be taken to a processing facility for separation off site.

.5 Transportation: The Contractor may engage a hauling sub-contractor, self haul, or make each subcontractor responsible for their own waste. In any case compliance with these requirements is mandatory.

.2 Waste Management Plan Implementation:

.1 Manager: The Contractor shall designate an on-site party (or parties) responsible for instructing workers and overseeing and documenting results of the Waste Management Plan for the project.

.2 Distribution: The Contractor shall distribute copies of the Waste Management Plan to the Job Site Foreman, each Subcontractor, the Owner, and the Consultant.




page 5 of 5

.3 Instruction: The Contractor shall provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation, handling, and recycling to be used by all parties. The Contractor shall provide on-site instructions for salvage and requirements for reusing salvaged materials within the project.

.4 Separation facilities: The Contractor shall lay out and label a specific area to facilitate separation of materials for recycling and salvage. Recycling and waste bin areas are to be kept neat and clean and clearly marked in order to avoid contamination of materials. The requirement for separation will only be waived if the Contractor can demonstrate to the Owner/Consultant that there is insufficient room to accommodate it. If this is the case the materials must be sent to a processing facility for separation off site. Offsite sorting of construction + demolition debris to follow these conditions:

.1 Actual weights and volumes of the construction waste, and estimates of the materials’ composition by weight and/or volume must be provided.

.2 The recycler must confirm the destination and end use for each material diverted from the landfill.

.3 The project diversion rate is based on confirmed weight/volume and the actual products diverted from the landfill.

1.7 PROJECT CLEANLINESS

.1 Maintain the Work in tidy condition, free from accumulation of waste products and debris.

.2 Remove waste material and debris from site and deposit in contractor’s waste container at end of each working day.

.3 Provide and pay for all disposal.

.4 Clean interior areas prior to start of finish work, maintain areas free of dust and other contaminants during finishing operations. Refer to Indoor Air Quality Management Plan.

.5 Clean the interior and exterior of windows immediately following removal and replacement or after undertaking any work that affects those surfaces.

.6 In addition to .4 above, clean the inside of all windows affected by or adjacent to work at the completion of interior repairs.

.7 In addition to .4 above, clean the outside of all windows immediately after the completion of the exterior work.

1.8 FINAL CLEAN-UP

.1 When the work is Substantially Performed, remove surplus products, tools, construction machinery and equipment not required for performance of remaining work.

.2 Remove all rubbish and waste material from site as per this Section’s requirements.




01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

page 1 of 1

1.1 FINAL CLEANING

.1 Flush clear all drains affected by the work;

.2 Clean site of materials and debris created by the Construction.

1.2 SYSTEMS DEMONSTRATION

.1 Prior to final inspection, demonstrate operation of each system to Consultant.

.2 Instruct personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of equipment and systems, using provided operation and maintenance data as basis for instruction.

1.3 DOCUMENTS

.1 Submit written acceptance that utility companies have inspected services to their satisfaction;

.2 Collect reviewed submittals and assemble documents executed by Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers.

.3 Submit material prior to final Application for Payment.

.4 Submit operation and maintenance data, record (as-built) drawings (See Section 01 78 00 Closeout Submittals).

.5 Provide Consultant with all Warranty and Bond Certificates with:

.1 The proper name and address of the Owner and of the Project;

.2 The date the warranty commences, which corresponds to the date of Substantial Performance;

.3 A clear statement of what is being warranted as referenced in the Specifications;

.4 The signature and seal of the company issuing the warranty, countersigned by the Contractor;

.6 Submit a final statement of accounting (See Section 01 78 00 Closeout Submittals)

1.4 INSPECTIONS/TAKEOVER PROCEDURES

.1 Prior to application for certificate of Substantial Performance, carefully inspect the Work and ensure it is complete, that major and minor construction deficiencies are complete, defects are corrected and building is clean and in condition for occupancy. Notify Consultant in writing, of satisfactory completion of the Work and request an inspection.

.2 The Consultant will review completion of deficiencies during one review only. Additional reviews required to check un-rectified deficiencies or incomplete work will be back-charged by the Owner on the Contractor’s progress payments and paid from those funds.

.3 When Consultant considers deficiencies and defects have been corrected and it appears requirements of Contract have been performed, make application for certificate of Substantial Performance. Refer to General Conditions GC 5.4 for specifics to application.




01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

page 1 of 1

1 GENERAL

1.1 FINAL ACCOUNTING

.1 Final statement of account - submit to Owner reflecting all adjustments and the following:

.1 Original Contract Sum;

.2 Additions and deductions resulting from:

.1 Change Orders;

.2 Unit Prices;

.3 Other adjustments;

.4 Deductions for uncorrected work;

.3 Total Contract sum as adjusted;

.4 Previous payments;

.5 Sum remaining due.

.2 The City retains the right to obtain proof of payment, in the form of a Statutory Declaration, of all sub-trades and material suppliers from the Contractor prior to making final payment.

1.2 RECORD DRAWINGS

.1 After award of Contract, the Contractor must request that the Consultant provide an additional set of drawings for the purpose of maintaining record drawings as follows:

.1 The contractor is to accurately and neatly record deviations from Contract Documents caused by site conditions and changes ordered by Consultant.

.2 Record locations of concealed components of mechanical and electrical services.

.3 Identify drawings as "Project Record Copy". Maintain drawings in new condition, update regularly and make available for review on site by Consultant. Indicate on the drawings the name of the company recording, the name of the signatory and his position in the company, a signature by same and the date signed.

.2 On completion of Work and prior to final review, submit record documents to Consultant for review of completeness. Indicate company name, name of signing authority, and their position, signing authority’s signature, and the date.

.3 In addition to hard-copy record set of drawings, Contractor shall pay the Consultant to update their digital drawing files for future records and Owner’s use.

.4 Substantial Performance will not be released until receipt of Master As-Built set, including updated digital files.




01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 81 00 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

page 1 of 4 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 This section specifies the requirements for control of environmental pollution and damage that the Contractor must consider for air, water, and land resources. It includes LEED NC 2009 requirements.

.2 Environmental pollution and damage is defined as the presence of chemical, physical or biological elements or agents which:

.1 Adversely effect human health or welfare,

.2 Unfavourably alter ecological balances or importance to human life,

.3 Effect other species,

.4 Degrade the utility of the environment for aesthetic, cultural and historical purposes.

1.2 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN GOALS:

.1 The Project’s mandate is to achieve LEED Gold Certification as per the attached LEED Scorecard (Appendix 1). The Envelope Remediation Work is not required to comply with any LEED standards.

1.3 REFERENCED STANDARDS

.1 Canada Green Building Council (CaGBC) LEED Canada Reference Guide for Green Building Design and Construction 2009.

.2 Metro Vancouver Best Management Practice Guide for Stormwater – Appendix H: Construction Site Erosion and Sediment Control Guide for Stormwater.

.3 International Standard ISO 14021 – 1999, Environmental Labels and Declarations – Self-Declared Environmental Claims (Type II Environemtnal Labelling) (Or as listed under the Canadian Standards Association CAN/CSA-ISO 14021-00 (R2009)

.4 Forest Stewardship Council Principles (www.fsccanada)

.5 Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction, 2nd Edition, Chapter 3, November 2007.

.6 Greater Vancouver Sewerage and Drainage District Municipal Solid Waste and Recyclable Material Regulatory Bylaw No. 181, 1996, as amended by Bylaw 183, 1996.

.7 South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Amendment to South Coast Rule 1168, VOC Limits, effective January 7, 2005.

.8 South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Amendment to South Coast Rule 1113, Architectural Coatings, effective January 1, 2004.

.9 Green Seal Standard 36 (GS-36), effective October 19, 2000, for commercial adhesives.

.10 Green Seal Standard 11 (GS-11), First Edition, May 20, 1993, for commercial and non-flat paints.




page 2 of 4

.11 Green Seal Standard 03 (GS-03), Second Edition, January 7, 1997, for anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints.

.12 Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI) Green Label Plus Testing Program.

.13 FloorScore Program.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

.1 LEED Submittals shall be for the Expansion and Renovation Work only. Envelope Remediation Work may not be included in any LEED Submittal.

.2 Provide all necessary LEED Submittals, including, but not limited to:

.1 LEED Submittal Forms as per sample (Appendix 1)

.2 Waste Management Plan (see Section 01 74 19)

.3 Indoor Air Quality Management Plan (see Section 02 41 13)

.4 Completed LEED Letter Templates:

.1 Materials and Resources Credit 2: Construction Waste Management.

.2 Indoor Air Quality Credit 3.1: Construction IAQ Management Plan: During Construction

.3 Indoor Air Quality Credit 3.2: Construction IAQ Management Plan: Before Occupancy.

.3 Provide a minimum of 6 date-stamped photos every week to the Consultant, documenting implementation of Erosion and Sedimentation Control (ESC) Plan. Include written descriptions of any corrective actions taken in response to problems

2 EXECUTION

2.1 LEED REQUIREMENTS

.1 Comply with all requirements of CaGBC LEED 2009 Sustainable Sites Prerequisite 1: Construction Activity Pollution Prevention, including the following measures:

.1 Follow all methods outlined in the Erosion and Sedimentation Control (ESC) Plan.

.2 Follow appropriate Best Management Practices (BMP) outlined in Metro Vancouver’s Best Management Practice Guide for Stormwater – Appendix H.

.1 Reduction of Exposure of Unprotected Erodible Soils: Plan and conduct earthwork to minimize the duration of exposure of unprotected soils. Clear areas in reasonable sized increments only as needed to use. Form earthwork to final grade as shown. Immediately protect side slopes and back slopes upon completion of rough grading.

.2 Temporary Protection of Disturbed Areas: Construct diversion ditches, benches and berms to retard and divert runoff from the construction site to protected drainage areas.




page 3 of 4

.3 Construct or install all required temporary and permanent erosion and sedimentation control features as per the ESC Plan, and maintain until permanent drainage and erosion control facilities are completed and operative.

.4 Protect adjacent areas from despoilment by temporary excavations and embankments.

.5 Protection of Water Resources: Prevent any further sedimentation of drainage canal by implementing ESC management techniques and Metro Vancouver BMP with all sub-trades that are included in this specification.

.6 Washing and Curing Water: Do not allow wastewater directly derived form construction activities to enter water areas. Collect and place wastewater in retention ponds allowing the suspended material to settle, the pollutants to separate, or the water to evaporate.

.7 Reporting: Monitor water areas affected by the construction and report any incidents to the Consultant.

.8 Protection of Air Resources: Keep construction activities under surveillance, management, and control to minimize pollution of air resources as follows:

.1 Comply with all measures in ESC Plan and Metro Vancouver BMP to prevent pollution of the air with dust and particulate matter.

.2 Protect air intake at East side of existing Gymnasium as per SMACNA guidelines.

.3 Burning is not permitted on the job site.

.3 Conform with all requirements of the following CaGBC LEED 2009 Credits:

.1 Sustainable Sites:

.1 Credit 1: Site Selection

.2 Credit 4.1: Alternative Transportation: Public Transportation Access

.3 Credit 4.2: Alternative Transportation: Bicycle Storage & Changing Rooms.

.4 Credit 4.4: Alternative Transportation: Parking Capacity

.5 Credit 5.2: Site Development: Maximize Open Space

.6 Credit 8: Light Pollution

.2 Water Efficiency:

.1 Prerequisite 1: Water Use Reduction

.2 Credit 1: Water Efficient Landscaping

.3 Credit 3: Water Use Reduction (to achieve 2 points)

.3 Energy and Atmosphere:

.1 Prerequisite 1: Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems

.2 Prerequisite 2: Minimum Energy Performance

.3 Prerequisite 3: Fundamental Refrigerant Management

.4 Credit 1: Optimize Energy Performance (to achieve minimum 8 points)




page 4 of 4

.5 Credit 3: Enhanced Commissioning

.6 Credit 4: Enhanced Refrigerant Management

.7 Credit 6: Green Power

.4 Materials and Resources

.1 Prerequisite 1: Storage and Collection of Recyclables

.2 Credit 2: Construciton Waste Management (to achieve 2 points)

.3 Credit 4: Recycled Content (to achieve 2 points)

.4 Credit 5: Regional Materials (to achieve 2 points)

.5 Credit 7: Certified Wood

.5 Indoor Environmental Quality

.1 Prerequisite 1: Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance

.2 Prerequisite 2: Environmental Tobacco Smoke Control

.3 Credit 1: outdoor Air Delivery Monitoring

.4 Credit 3.1: Construction IAQ Management Plan: During Construction.

.5 Credit 3.2: Construction IAQ Management Plan: Before Occupancy.

.6 Credit 4.1: Low-Emitting Materials: Adhesives and Sealants

.7 Credit 4.2: Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and Coatings

.8 Credit 4.3: Low-Emitting Materials: Flooring Systems

.9 Credit 4.4: Low-Emitting Materials: Composite Wood and Agrifibre Products

.10 Credit 5: Indoor Chemical and Pollutant Source Control

.11 Credit 6.1: Controllability of Systems: Lighting

.12 Credit 6.2: Controllability of Systems: Thermal Comfort

.13 Credit 7.1: Thermal Comfort: Design

.14 Credit 7.2: Thermal Comfort: Verification

.15 Credit 8.1: Daylight and Views: Daylight

.16 Credit 8.2: Daylight and Views: Views


Queensborough Community Centre Section 01 91 13 New Westminster, BC Page 1 of 33 COMMISSIONING – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS September 08 2011

CES Engineering Ltd.

TABLE OF CONTENTS 1.1. DESCRIPTION 1.1.1. Related Sections 1.1.2. CES Engineering - Commissioning Authority 1.1.3. LEED 2009 Rating System – Commissioning Requirements 1.1.4. Commissioning definition 1.1.5. Abbreviations 1.2. COORDINATION 1.2.1. Commissioning team 1.2.2. Management 1.2.3. Scheduling 1.3. COMMISSIONING PROCESS 1.3.1. Commissioning plan 1.3.2. Commissioning process 1.4. RELATED WORK 1.4.1. Related commissioning sections 1.5. RESPONSIBILITIES 1.5.1. Overview 1.5.2. All parties 1.5.3. Architect 1.5.4. Mechanical and Electrical Designers 1.5.5. Commissioning authority 1.5.6. General Contractor 1.5.7. Owner’s Project Manager 1.5.8. General Contractor 1.5.9. Equipment Suppliers 1.6. DEFINITIONS 1.7. SYSTEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED 2.1. TEST EQUIPMENT 3.1. MEETINGS 3.2. REPORTING 3.3. SUBMITTALS

Queensborough Community Centre Section 01 91 15 New Westminster, BC Page 2 of 33 COMMISSIONING – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS August 2011


3.4. STARTUP, PREFUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS AND INITIAL CHECKOUT 3.4.1. Application 3.4.2. General 3.4.3. Startup Plan 3.4.4. Sensor Calibrations 3.4.5. Execution 3.4.6. Deficiencies and Approvals 3.5. PHASED COMMISSIONING 3.6. FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING 3.6.1. Objectives and Scope 3.6.2. Development of Test Procedures 3.6.3. Test Methods 3.6.4. Coordination and Scheduling 3.6.5. Problem Solving

3.7. DOCUMENTATION, NON-CONFORMANCE AND APPROVAL OF TESTS 3.7.1. Documentation 3.7.2. Non-Conformance 3.7.3. Failure due to Manufacturer Defect 3.7.4. Approval 3.8. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O & M) MANUALS 3.8.1. Standard O&M Manuals 3.8.2. Commissioning Record in O&M Manuals 3.9. TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL 3.10. DEFERRED TESTING 3.11. WRITTEN WORK PRODUCTS



PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1. DESCRIPTION

1.1.1. This section of the Specification forms part of the Contract Documents and shall be read, interpreted and coordinated with all other parts.

1.1.2. An independent firm (CES Engineering Ltd) specializing in building systems

commissioning type of work has been retained by the Owner to act as the project Commissioning Authority. This firm will be responsible to manage and administrate the commissioning process on this project.

1.1.3. The administration of the commissioning process is based on LEED 2009 Canada for

new Construction Versions 1.0 Energy and Atmosphere Prerequisite 1 – Fundamental Commissioning and Energy and Atmosphere Credit 3 – Best Practice Commissioning requirements.

1.1.4. Commissioning is a systematic process of ensuring that all building systems perform

interactively according to the design intent and the owner’s operational needs. This is achieved by beginning in the design phase and documenting design intent and continuing through construction, acceptance and the warranty period with actual verification of performance. The commissioning process shall encompass and coordinate the traditionally separate functions of system documentation, equipment startup, control system calibration, testing and balancing, performance testing and training.

Commissioning during the construction phase is intended to achieve the following specific objectives according to the Contract Documents:

1.4.1.1. Verify that applicable equipment and systems are installed according to the

manufacturer’s recommendations and to industry accepted minimum standards and that they receive adequate operational checkout by installing contractors.

1.4.1.2. Verify and document proper performance of equipment and systems. 1.4.1.3. Verify that O&M documentation left on site is complete. 1.4.1.4. Verify that the Owner’s operating personnel are adequately trained.

The commissioning process does not take away from or reduce the responsibility of the system designers or installing contractors to provide a finished and fully functioning product.



1.1.5. Abbreviations. The following are common abbreviations used in the Commissioning Specifications and in the Commissioning Plan. Definitions are found in Section 1.6.

A/E- Architect and design engineers FT- Functional performance test CA- Commissioning authority MC- Mechanical contractor CC Controls contractor PC- Prefunctional checklist Cx- Commissioning PM- Project manager (of the Owner) Cx Plan- Commissioning Plan document Subs- Subcontractors to General EC- Electrical contractor TAB- Test and balance contractor GC General Contractor

1.2. COORDINATION

1.2.1. Commissioning Team. The members of the commissioning team consist of the Commissioning authority (CA), the Project Manager (PM), the designated representative of the owner’s firm (OW), the architect and design engineers, the Construction Management Company (GC), the Mechanical Contractor (MC), the Electrical Contractor (EC), the TAB representative, the Controls Contractor (CC), any other installing subcontractors or suppliers of equipment. The future Owner’s building or plant operator/engineer is also a member of the commissioning team. The commissioning team for this project includes the following members

.1 Client – (CoNW) City of New Westminster .2 Project Manager – (PM) Wayne Werbovetski .3 Commissioning Authority – (CA) - CES .4 Architect – (UAA) Urban Arts Architecture .5 Mechanical Consultant – (MMM) – MMM Group .6 Electrical Consultant – (AE) – Acumen Engineering .7. General Contractor – (GC) .8 Mechanical Contractor (MC) .9 Sheet Metal Contractor (SMC) .10 Fire Protection Contractor (FPC) .11 Building Automation Contractor (CC) .12 Testing and balancing Agency (TAB) .13 Division 21, 22, 23 and 25 Specialty Equipment Vendor Specialists .14 Electrical Contractor. (EC) .15 Division 26, 27 and 28 Specialty Equipment Vendor Specialists (Lighting Control, Fire

Alarm)

1.2.2. Management. The CA is hired by the Owner. The CA directs and coordinates the

commissioning activities and the reports to the Owner and PM. All members work together to fulfill their contracted responsibilities and meet the objectives of the Contract Documents.



1.2.3. Scheduling. The CA will work with the GC according to established protocols to schedule the commissioning activities. The CA will provide sufficient notice to the GC for scheduling commissioning activities. The GC will integrate all commissioning activities into the master schedule. All parties will address scheduling problems and make necessary notifications in a timely manner in order to expedite the commissioning process.

The CA will provide the initial schedule of primary commissioning events at the commissioning scoping meeting. The Commissioning Plan—Construction Phase, Section 01 91 14 provides the format for this schedule. As construction progresses more detailed schedules are developed by the CA. The Commissioning Plan also provides a format for detailed schedules.

1.3 COMMISSIONING PROCESS

1.3.1. Commissioning Plan. The Commissioning Plan, Section 01 91 14 provided as part of the bid documents, is binding on the Contractor. The commissioning plan provides guidance in the execution of the commissioning process. Just after the initial commissioning scoping meeting the CA will update the plan which is then considered the “final” plan, though it will continue to evolve and expand as the project progresses. The Specifications will take precedence over the Commissioning Plan.

1.3.2. Commissioning Process. The following narrative provides a brief overview of the typical

commissioning tasks during construction and the general order in which they occur.

1.3.2.1. Commissioning during construction begins with a scoping meeting conducted by the CA where the commissioning process is reviewed with the commissioning team members.

1.3.2.2. Additional meetings will be required throughout construction, scheduled by the

CA with necessary parties attending, to plan, scope, coordinate, schedule future activities and resolve problems.

1.3.2.3. Equipment documentation is submitted to the CA during normal submittals,

including detailed start-up procedures

1.3.2.4. The CA works with the GC, MC, EC and the Subs in developing startup plans and startup documentation formats, including providing the GC, MC, EC and the Subs with pre-functional checklists to be completed, during the startup process.

1.3.2.5. In general, the checkout and performance verification proceeds from simple to

complex; from component level to equipment to systems and intersystem levels with prefunctional checklists being completed before functional testing.



1.3.2.6. The MC, EC and the Subs, under GC direction, execute and document the prefunctional checklists and perform startup and initial checkout. The CA documents that the checklists and startup were completed according to the approved plans. This may include the CA witnessing start-up of selected equipment.

1.3.2.7. The CA develops specific equipment and system functional performance test

procedures. The GC, MC, EC and the Subs review the procedures.

1.3.2.8. The procedures are executed by the GC, MC, EC and the Subs, under the direction of, and documented by the CA.

1.3.2.9. Items of non-compliance in material, installation or setup are corrected at the GC,

MC, EC and the Sub’s expense and the system retested.

1.3.2.10. The CA reviews the O&M documentation for completeness.

1.3.2.11. Commissioning is completed before Substantial Completion.

1.3.2.12. The CA reviews, pre-approves and coordinates the training provided by the GC, MC, EC and the Subs and verifies that is was completed

1.3.2.13. Deferred testing is conducted, as specified or required

.

1.4. RELATED WORK

Specific commissioning requirements are given in the following sections of these specifications. All of the following sections apply to the Work of this section.

1.4.1. 01 00 10 General Requirements. Alerts all parties that additional detail in submittals,

scheduling and contract closeout may be required and directs to Section 01 91 13,

1.4.2. 01 91 14 – Commissioning Plan – Construction Phase

1.4.3. 01 91 15 – Commissioning Training

1.4.4. 21 05 00 – Common Work Results - Mechanical. Alerts the fire protection contractor to Cx responsibilities in 01 91 13, 01 91 14, 01 91 15 and 23 08 00.

1.4.5. 21 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing. Specifies testing, adjusting and balancing requirements for fire suppression systems.

1.4.6. 21 08 00 – Commissioning Mechanical Systems. Describes the Cx responsibilities of the fire protection contractor.

1.4.7. 22 05 00 – Common Work Results - Mechanical. Alerts the plumbing contractor to Cx responsibilities in 01 91 13, 01 91 14, 01 91 15 and 23 08 00.



1.4.8. 22 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing. Specifies testing, adjusting and balancing requirements for plumbing systems.

1.4.9. 22 08 00 – Commissioning Mechanical Systems. Describes the Cx responsibilities of the plumbing contractor.

1.4.10. 23 05 00 – Common Work Results - Mechanical. Alerts the HVAC contractor to Cx responsibilities in 01 91 13, 01 91 14, 01 91 15 and 23 08 00.

1.4.11. 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing HVAC. Specifies testing, adjusting and balancing requirements for HVAC systems.

1.4.12. 23 08 00 – Commissioning of Mechanical Systems. Describes the Cx responsibilities of the mechanical, controls and TAB contractors and the pre-functional testing and startup responsibilities of division 21, 22, 23 and 25 contractors.

1.4.13. 25 01 00 – DDC Controls: Start up, Verification and Commissioning. Describes the Cx responsibilities of the control contractor. Describes training responsibilities of the control contractor. General Requirement. Alerts the control contractor to Cx responsibilities in 01 91 13, 01 91 14, 01 91 15 and 23 08 00.

1.4.14. 26 00 01 – Common Work Results. Alerts the electrical contractor to Cx responsibilities in 01 91 13, 01 91 14, 01 91 15 and 26 08 00.

1.4.15. 23 08 00 – Commissioning. Describes the Cx responsibilities of the electrical, communication and fire alarm contractors and the pre-functional testing and startup responsibilities of division 26, 27 and 28 contractors.

1.5. RESPONSIBILITIES

1.5.1. The responsibilities of various parties in the commissioning process are provided in this section. The responsibilities of the mechanical contractor, TAB and controls contractor are in Section 23 08 00 and those of the electrical contractor in Section 26 08 04.

It is noted that the commissioning services for the Project Manager, Architect, mechanical and electrical designers/engineers, and Commissioning authority are not provided by the contractors in this contract. That is, the Contractor is not responsible for providing their services. Their responsibilities are listed here to clarify the commissioning process. The contractors shall include the cost of providing their commissioning and testing services. The owner is not paying extra for contactors commissioning services.

1.5.2. All Parties

1.5.2.1. Follow the Commissioning Plan. 1.5.2.2. Attend commissioning scoping meeting and additional meetings, as necessary.



1.5.3. Architect (of A/E)

Construction and Acceptance Phase 1.5.3.1. Attend the commissioning scoping meeting and selected commissioning team

meetings. 1.5.3.2. Perform normal submittal review, construction observation, as-built drawing

preparation, O&M manual preparation, etc., as contracted. 1.5.3.3. Provide any design narrative documentation requested by the CA. 1.5.3.4. Coordinate resolution of system deficiencies identified during commissioning,

according to the contract documents 1.5.3.5. Review and approve the O&M manuals

Warranty Period 1.5.3.6. Coordinate resolution of design non-conformance and design deficiencies

identified during warranty-period commissioning.

1.5.4. Mechanical and Electrical Designers/Engineers (of the A/E)

Construction and Acceptance Phase 1.5.4.1. Perform normal submittal review, construction observation, as-built drawing

preparation, etc., as contracted. One site observation should be completed just prior to system startup.

1.5.4.2. Provide any design narrative and sequences documentation requested by the CA. The designers shall assist (along with the contractors) in clarifying the operation and control of commissioned equipment in areas where the specifications, control drawings or equipment documentation is not sufficient for writing detailed testing procedures.

1.5.4.3. Attend commissioning scoping meetings and other selected commissioning team meetings.

1.5.4.4. Participate in the resolution of system deficiencies identified during commissioning, according to the contract documents

1.5.4.5. Review and approve the O&M manuals 1.5.4.6. Provide a presentation at one of the training sessions for the Owner’s

personnel. 1.5.4.7. Witness testing of selected pieces of equipment and systems

Warranty Period 1.5.4.8. Participate in the resolution of non-compliance, non-conformance and design

deficiencies identified during commissioning during warranty-period commissioning.



1.5.5. Commissioning Authority (CA)

1.5.5.1. The CA is not responsible for design concept, design criteria, compliance with codes, design or general construction scheduling, cost estimating, or construction management. The CA may assist with problem-solving non-conformance or deficiencies, but ultimately that responsibility resides with the General Contractor and the A/E. The primary role of the CA is to develop and coordinate the execution of a testing plan, observe and document performance—that systems are functioning in accordance with the documented design intent and in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Contractors will provide all tools or the use of tools to start, check-out and functionally test equipment and systems.

Construction and Acceptance Phase

1.5.5.2. Coordinates and directs the commissioning activities in a logical, sequential and efficient manner using consistent protocols and forms, centralized documentation, clear and regular communications and consultations with all necessary parties, frequently updated timelines and schedules and technical expertise.

1.5.5.3. Coordinate the commissioning work with the GC, ensure that commissioning activities are being scheduled into the master schedule.

1.5.5.4. Revise, as necessary, Commissioning Plan—Construction Phase 1.5.5.5. Plan and conduct a commissioning scoping meeting and other commissioning

meetings. 1.5.5.6. Request and review additional information required to perform commissioning

tasks, including O&M materials, contractor start-up and checkout procedures 1.5.5.7. Before startup, gather and review the current control sequences and interlocks

and work with contractors and design engineers until sufficient clarity has been obtained, in writing, to be able to write detailed testing procedures

1.5.5.8. Review and approve normal Contractor submittals applicable to systems being commissioned for compliance with commissioning needs, concurrent with the A/E reviews

1.5.5.9. Write and distribute pre-functional tests and checklists 1.5.5.10. Develop an enhanced start-up and initial systems checkout plan with Subs. 1.5.5.11. Perform site visits, as necessary, to observe component and system

installations. Attends selected planning and job-site meetings to obtain information on construction progress. Review construction meeting minutes for revisions/substitutions relating to the commissioning process. Assist in resolving any discrepancies

1.5.5.12. Witness all or part of the HVAC piping test and flushing procedure, sufficient to be confident that proper procedures were followed. Document this testing and include the documentation in O&M manuals. Notify owners project manager of any deficiencies in results or procedures.



1.5.5.13. Witness all or part of any ductwork testing and cleaning procedures, sufficient to be confident that proper procedures were followed. Document this testing and include the documentation in O&M manuals. Notify owner’s project manager of any deficiencies in results or procedures.

1.5.5.14. Approve prefunctional tests and checklist completion by reviewing prefunctional checklist reports and by selected site observation and spot checking

1.5.5.15. Approve systems startup by reviewing start-up reports and by selected site observation

1.5.5.16. Review TAB execution plan 1.5.5.17. Oversee sufficient functional testing of the control system and approve it to be

used for TAB, before TAB is executed. 1.5.5.18. Approve air and water systems balancing by spot testing, by reviewing

completed reports and by selected site observation 1.5.5.19. With necessary assistance and review from installing contractors, write the

functional performance test procedures for equipment and systems. This may include energy management control system trending, stand-alone datalogger monitoring or manual functional testing. Submit to GC for review, and for approval if required.

1.5.5.20. Analyze any functional performance trend logs and monitoring data to verify performance

1.5.5.21. Coordinate, witness and approve manual functional performance tests performed by installing contractors. Coordinate retesting as necessary until satisfactory performance is achieved.

1.5.5.22. Maintain a master deficiency and resolution log and a separate testing record. Provide the GC with written progress reports and test results with recommended actions

1.5.5.23. Witness performance testing of smoke control systems by others and all other owner contracted tests or tests by manufacturer’s personnel over which the CA may not have direct control. Document these tests and include this documentation in Commissioning Record in O&M manuals.

1.5.5.24. Review equipment warranties to ensure that the Owner’s responsibilities are clearly defined.

1.5.5.25. Oversee and approve the training of the Owner’s operating personnel 1.5.5.26. Compile and maintain a commissioning record and building systems book(s). 1.5.5.27. Review and approve the preparation of the O&M manuals 1.5.5.28. Provide a final commissioning report (as described in this section 1.5.5.29. Develop a systems manual. 1.5.5.30. Prepare a standard trend logging package of primary parameters that will

provide the operations staff clear indications of system function in order to identify proper system operation and trouble shoot problems. The CA shall also provide any needed information on interpreting the trends



1.5.6. Project Manager (PM)

Construction and Acceptance Phase 1.5.6.1. Manage the contract of the A/E and of the GC. 1.5.6.2. Arrange for facility operating and maintenance personnel to attend various

field commissioning activities and field training sessions according to the Commissioning Plan—Construction Phase

1.5.6.3. Provide final approval for the completion of the commissioning work.

Warranty Period

1.5.6.4. Ensure that any seasonal or deferred testing and any deficiency issues are addressed.

1.5.7. General Contractor (GC)

Construction and Acceptance Phase

1.5.7.1. Facilitate the coordination of the commissioning work by the CA and ensure that commissioning activities are being scheduled into the master schedule.

1.5.7.2. Include the cost of commissioning in the total contract price 1.5.7.3. Furnish a copy of all construction documents, addenda, change orders and

approved submittals and shop drawings related to commissioned equipment to the CA

1.5.7.4. In each purchase order or subcontract written, include requirements for submittal data, O&M data, commissioning tasks and training.

1.5.7.5. Ensure that all Subs execute their commissioning responsibilities according to the Contract Documents and schedule

1.5.7.6. A representative shall attend a commissioning scoping meeting and other necessary meetings scheduled by the CA to facilitate the Cx process

1.5.7.7. Coordinate the training of owner personnel. 1.5.7.8. Prepare O&M manuals, according to the Contract Documents, including

clarifying and updating the original sequences of operation to as-built conditions

Warranty Period 1.5.7.9. Ensure that Subs execute seasonal or deferred functional performance

testing according to the specifications.



1.5.7.10. Ensure that Subs correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to O&M manuals and as-built drawings for applicable issues identified in any seasonal testing

1.5.8. Equipment Suppliers

1.5.8.1. Provide all requested submittal data, including detailed start-up procedures

and specific responsibilities of the Owner to keep warranties in force. 1.5.8.2. Assist in equipment testing per agreements with Subs. 1.5.8.3. Include all special tools and instruments (only available from vendor,

specific to a piece of equipment) required for testing equipment according to these Contract Documents in the base bid price to the Contractor, except for stand-alone datalogging equipment that may be used by the CA

1.5.8.4. Through the contractors they supply products to, analyze specified products and verify that the designer has specified the newest most updated equipment reasonable for this project’s scope and budget

1.5.8.5. Provide information requested by CA regarding equipment sequence of operation and testing procedures

1.5.8.6. Review test procedures for equipment installed by factory representatives 1.6 DEFINITIONS

Acceptance Phase - phase of construction after startup and initial checkout when functional performance tests, O&M documentation review and training occurs.

Approval - acceptance that a piece of equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning in the tested modes according to the Contract Documents.

Architect / Engineer (A/E) - the prime consultant (architect) and sub-consultants who comprise the design team, generally the HVAC mechanical designer/engineer and the electrical designer/engineer.

Basis of Design - The basis of design is the documentation of the primary thought processes and assumptions behind design decisions that were made to meet the design intent. The basis of design describes the systems, components, conditions and methods chosen to meet the intent. Some reiterating of the design intent may be included.

Commissioning authority (CA) - an independent agent, not otherwise associated with the A/E team members or the Contractor. The CA directs and coordinates the day-to-day commissioning activities. The CA does not take an oversight role like the GC. The CA is part of the Owner’s team and shall report directly to the PM.

Commissioning Plan - an overall plan, developed before or after bidding, that provides the structure, schedule and coordination planning for the commissioning process.

Contract Documents - the documents binding on parties involved in the construction of this project (drawings, specifications, change orders, amendments, contracts, Cx Plan, etc.).



Contractor - the contractor in general or authorized representative.

Control system - the central building energy management control system.

Datalogging - monitoring flows, currents, status, pressures, etc. of equipment using stand-alone dataloggers separate from the control system.

Deferred Functional Tests - FTs that are performed later, after substantial completion, due to partial occupancy, equipment, seasonal requirements, design or other site conditions that disallow the test from being performed.

Deficiency - a condition in the installation or function of a component, piece of equipment or system that is not in compliance with the Contract Documents (that is, does not perform properly or is not complying with the design intent).

Design Intent - a dynamic document that provides the explanation of the ideas, concepts and criteria that are considered to be very important to the owner. It is initially the outcome of the programming and conceptual design phases.

Design Narrative or Design Documentation - sections of either the Design Intent or Basis of Design.

Factory Testing - testing of equipment on-site or at the factory by factory personnel with an Owner’s representative present.

Functional Performance Test (FT) - test of the dynamic function and operation of equipment and systems using manual (direct observation) or monitoring methods. Functional testing is the dynamic testing of systems (rather than just components) under full operation (e.g., the chiller pump is tested interactively with the chiller functions to see if the pump ramps up and down to maintain the differential pressure setpoint). Systems are tested under various modes, such as during low cooling or heating loads, high loads, component failures, unoccupied, varying outside air temperatures, fire alarm, power failure, etc. The systems are run through all the control system’s sequences of operation and components are verified to be responding as the sequences state. Traditional air or water test and balancing (TAB) is not functional testing, in the commissioning sense of the word. TAB’s primary work is setting up the system flows and pressures as specified, while functional testing is verifying that which has already been set up. The commissioning authority develops the functional test procedures in a sequential written form, coordinates, oversees and documents the actual testing, which is usually performed by the installing contractor or vendor. FTs are performed after prefunctional checklists and startup are complete.

General Contractor (GC) - The General Contractor (GC) is hired by the owner to manage and construct the project. All sub-contractors report to the GC.

Indirect Indicators - indicators of a response or condition, such as a reading from a control system screen reporting a damper to be 100% closed.

Manual Test - using hand-held instruments, immediate control system readouts or direct observation to verify performance (contrasted to analyzing monitored data taken over time to make the “observation”).

Monitoring - the recording of parameters (flow, current, status, pressure, etc.) of equipment operation using dataloggers or the trending capabilities of control systems.



Non-Compliance - see Deficiency.

Non-Conformance - see Deficiency.

Over-written Value - writing over a sensor value in the control system to see the response of a system (e.g., changing the outside air temperature value from 50F to 75F to verify economizer operation). See also “Simulated Signal.”

Owner-Contracted Tests - tests paid for by the Owner outside the GC’s contract and for which the CA does not oversee. These tests will not be repeated during functional tests if properly documented.

Phased Commissioning - commissioning that is completed in phases (by floors, for example) due to the size of the structure or other scheduling issues, in order minimize the total construction time.

Prefunctional Checklist (PC) - a list of items to inspect and elementary component tests to conduct to verify proper installation of equipment, provided by the CA to the Sub. Prefunctional checklists are primarily static inspections and procedures to prepare the equipment or system for initial operation (e.g., belt tension, oil levels OK, labels affixed, gages in place, sensors calibrated, etc.). However, some prefunctional checklist items entail simple testing of the function of a component, a piece of equipment or system (such as measuring the voltage imbalance on a three phase pump motor of a chiller system). The word prefunctional refers to before functional testing. Prefunctional checklists augment and are combined with the manufacturer’s start-up checklist. Even without a commissioning process, contractors typically perform some, if not many, of the prefunctional checklist items a commissioning authority will recommend. However, few contractors document in writing the execution of these checklist items. Therefore, for most equipment, the contractors execute the checklists on their own. The commissioning authority only requires that the procedures be documented in writing, and does not witness much of the prefunctional checklisting, except for larger or more critical pieces of equipment.

Project Manager (PM) - the contracting and managing authority for the owner over the design and/or construction of the project.

Sampling. - functionally testing only a fraction of the total number of identical or near identical pieces of equipment. Refer to this Section, Part 3.6, F for details.

Seasonal Performance Tests - FT that are deferred until the system(s) will experience conditions closer to their design conditions.

Simulated Condition - condition that is created for the purpose of testing the response of a system (e.g., applying a hair blower to a space sensor to see the response in a VAV box).

Simulated Signal - disconnecting a sensor and using a signal generator to send an amperage, resistance or pressure to the transducer and DDC system to simulate a sensor value.

Specifications - the construction specifications of the Contract Documents.

Startup - the initial starting or activating of dynamic equipment, including executing prefunctional checklists.

Subs - the subcontractors to the GC who provide and install building components and systems.

Test Procedures - the step-by-step process which must be executed to fulfill the test requirements. The test procedures are developed by the CA.



Test Requirements - requirements specifying what modes and functions, etc. shall be tested. The test requirements are not the detailed test procedures.

Trending - monitoring using the building control system.

Vendor - supplier of equipment.

Warranty Period - warranty period for entire project, including equipment components. Warranty begins at Substantial Completion and extends for at least one year, unless specifically noted otherwise in the Contract Documents and accepted submittals.

1.7 SYSTEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED

Mechanical Equipment and Systems

22 10 10 - PLUMBING PUMPS 22 30 05 - DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 22 42 01 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES 22 42 02 - PLUMBING FIXTURES 23 05 21 - THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES - PIPING SYSTEMS 23 05 22 - VALVES 23 05 93 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 08 01 - PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION MECHANICAL PIPING SYSTEMS 23 08 02 - CLEANING AND START-UP OF MECHANICAL PIPING SYSTEMS 23 09 00 - RE-USE OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT 23 11 01 - GEOTHERMAL FIELD DESIGN/PERFORMANCE 23 11 23 - FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING 23 21 14 - HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES 23 21 23 - HYDRONIC PUMPS 23 25 00 - HVAC WATER TREATMENT SYSTEMS 23 31 14 - METAL DUCTS - LOW PRESSURE TO 500 PA 23 33 00 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 14 - DAMPERS 23 33 53 - ACOUSTIC DUCT LINING 23 34 00 - HVAC FAN 23 36 00 - AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 37 13 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES 23 41 00 - PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION 23 52 00 - HEATING BOILERS 23 81 40 - WATER SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS 23 82 36 - FINNED TUBE RADIATION HEATERS 25 01 00 - DDC CONTROLS Electrical Equipment and Systems

26 50 00 - LIGHTING EQUIPMENT AND LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE 17 28 31 00 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM



PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. TEST EQUIPMENT

2.1.1. All standard testing equipment required to perform startup and initial checkout and required functional performance testing shall be provided by the Division contractor for the equipment being tested. For example, the mechanical contractor of Division 15 shall ultimately be responsible for all standard testing equipment for the HVAC system and controls systems in this Division, except for equipment specific to and used by TAB in their commissioning responsibilities. Two-way radios shall be provided by the control contractor (CC).

2.1.2. Special equipment, tools and instruments (only available from vendor, specific to a

piece of equipment) required for testing equipment, according to these Contract Documents shall be included in the base bid price to the Contractor and left on site.

2.1.3. All testing equipment shall be of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and/or measure

system performance with the tolerances specified in the Specifications. If not otherwise noted, the following minimum requirements apply: Temperature sensors and digital thermometers shall have a certified calibration within the past year to an accuracy of 0.5°F and a resolution of + or - 0.1°F. Pressure sensors shall have an accuracy of + or - 2.0% of the value range being measured (not full range of meter) and have been calibrated within the last year. All equipment shall be calibrated according to the manufacturer’s recommended intervals and when dropped or damaged. Calibration tags shall be affixed or certificates readily available.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. MEETINGS

3.1.1. Scoping Meeting. Within 90 days of commencement of construction, the CA will schedule, plan and conduct a commissioning scoping meeting with the entire commissioning team in attendance. Meeting minutes will be distributed to all parties by the CA. Information gathered from this meeting will allow the CA to revise the Commissioning Plan to its “final” version, which will also be distributed to all parties.

3.1.2. Miscellaneous Meetings. Other meetings will be planned and conducted by the CA as construction progresses. These meetings will cover coordination, deficiency resolution and planning issues with particular Subs. The CA will plan these meetings and will minimize unnecessary time being spent by Subs. Within final 2 months of construction these meetings may be held as frequently as one per week.

3.2. REPORTING



3.2.1. The CA will provide regular reports to the GC and PM, with increasing

frequency as construction and commissioning progresses. Standard forms are provided and referenced in the Commissioning Plan.

3.2.2. The CA will regularly communicate with all members of the commissioning team, keeping them apprised of commissioning progress and scheduling changes through memos, progress reports, etc

3.2.3. Testing or review approvals and non-conformance and deficiency reports are made regularly with the review and testing as described in later sections

3.2.4. A final summary report (about four to six pages, not including backup documentation) by the CA will be provided to the GC and PM, focusing on evaluating commissioning process issues and identifying areas where the process could be improved. All acquired documentation, logs, minutes, reports, deficiency lists, communications, findings, unresolved issues, etc., will be compiled in appendices and provided with the summary report. Pre-functional checklists, functional tests and monitoring reports will not be part of the final report, but will be stored in the Commissioning Record in the O&M manuals.

3.3. SUBMITTALS

3.3.1. The CA will provide appropriate contractors with a specific request for the type of submittal documentation the CA requires to facilitate the commissioning work. These requests will be integrated into the normal submittal process and protocol of the construction team. At minimum, the request will include the manufacturer and model number, the manufacturer’s printed installation and detailed start-up procedures, full sequences of operation, O&M data, performance data, any performance test procedures, control drawings and details of owner contracted tests. In addition, the installation and checkout materials that are actually shipped inside the equipment and the actual field checkout sheet forms to be used by the factory or field technicians shall be submitted to the Commissioning authority. All documentation requested by the CA will be included by the Subs in their O&M manual contributions.

3.3.2. The Commissioning authority will review and approve submittals related to

the commissioned equipment for conformance to the Contract Documents as it relates to the commissioning process, to the functional performance of the equipment and adequacy for developing test procedures. This review is intended primarily to aid in the development of functional testing procedures and only secondarily to verify compliance with equipment specifications. The



Commissioning authority will notify the GC, PM or A/E as requested, of items missing or areas that are not in conformance with Contract Documents and which require resubmission

3.3.3. The CA may request additional design narrative from the A/E and Controls

Contractor, depending on the completeness of the design intent documentation and sequences provided with the Specifications.

3.3.4. These submittals to the CA do not constitute compliance for O&M manual

documentation. The O&M manuals are the responsibility of the Contractor, though the CA will review and approve them.

3.4. START-UP, PREFUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS AND INITIAL CHECKOUT

3.4.1. The following procedures apply to all equipment to be commissioned,

according to Paragraph 1.7, Systems to be Commissioned. Some systems that are not comprised so much of actual dynamic machinery, e.g., electrical system power quality, may have very simplified PCs and startup.

3.4.2. General. Pre-functional checklists are important to ensure that the

equipment and systems are hooked up and operational. It ensures that functional performance testing (in-depth system checkout) may proceed without unnecessary delays. Each piece of equipment receives full pre-functional checkout. No sampling strategies are used. The pre-functional testing for a given system must be successfully completed prior to formal functional performance testing of equipment or subsystems of the given system.

3.4.3. Start-up and Initial Checkout Plan. The CA shall assist the commissioning

team members responsible for startup of any equipment in developing detailed start-up plans for all equipment. The primary role of the CA in this process is to ensure that there is written documentation that each of the manufacturer-recommended procedures have been completed. Parties responsible for prefunctional checklists and startup are identified in the commissioning scoping meeting and in the checklist forms. Parties responsible for executing functional performance tests are identified in the testing requirements in Sections 23 08 00 and 26 08 04.

The CA copies the manufacturer’s startup and initial checkout procedures from O&M submittals. The CA marks the applicable areas in the procedures and makes initial and date lines at each procedure or section.



The CA transmits these procedures and the original pre-functional checklist procedures to the Contractor as the startup and initial checkout plan.

3.4.4. SENSOR AND ACTUATOR CALIBRATION.

3.4.4.1 All field-installed temperature, relative humidity, CO, CO2 and pressure sensors and gages, and all actuators (dampers and valves) on all equipment shall be calibrated using the methods described below. Alternate methods may be used, if approved by the Owner before-hand. All test instruments shall have had a certified calibration within the last 12 months. Sensors installed in the unit at the factory with calibration certification provided need not be field calibrated.

3.4.4.2 All procedures used shall be fully documented on the prefunctional checklists or other suitable forms, clearly referencing the procedures followed and written documentation of initial, intermediate and final results.



3.4.4.3 Sensor Calibration Methods

All Sensors. Verify that all sensor locations are appropriate and away from causes of erratic operation. Verify that sensors with shielded cable, are grounded only at one end. For sensor pairs that are used to determine a temperature or pressure difference, make sure they are reading within 0.2°F of each other for temperature and within a tolerance equal to 2% of the reading, of each other, for pressure. Tolerances for critical applications may be tighter.

Sensors Without Transmitters--Standard Application. Make a reading with a calibrated test instrument within 6 inches of the site sensor. Verify that the sensor reading (via the permanent thermostat, gage or building automation system (BAS)) is within the tolerances in the table below of the instrument-measured value. If not, install offset in BAS, calibrate or replace sensor.

Sensors With Transmitters--Standard Application. Disconnect sensor. Connect a signal generator in place of sensor. Connect ammeter in series between transmitter and BAS control panel. Using manufacturer’s resistance-temperature data, simulate minimum desired temperature. Adjust transmitter potentiometer zero until 4 mA is read by the ammeter. Repeat for the maximum temperature matching 20 mA to the potentiometer span or maximum and verify at the BAS. Record all values and recalibrate controller as necessary to conform with specified control ramps, reset schedules, proportional relationship, reset relationship and P/I reaction. Reconnect sensor. Make a reading with a calibrated test instrument within 6 inches of the site sensor. Verify that the sensor reading (via the permanent thermostat, gage or building automation system (BAS)) is within the tolerances in the table below of the instrument-measured value. If not, replace sensor and repeat. For pressure sensors, perform a similar process with a suitable signal generator.



Tolerances, Standard Applications

3.4.5. EXECUTION OF PREFUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS AND STARTUP.

3.4.5.1 Four weeks prior to startup, the Subs and vendors schedule startup and checkout with the GC and CA. The performance of the prefunctional checklists, startup and checkout are directed and executed by the Sub or vendor. When checking off prefunctional checklists, signatures may be required of other Subs for verification of completion of their work.

3.4.5.2 The CA shall observe, at minimum, the procedures for each piece of

primary equipment, unless there are multiple units, (in which case a sampling strategy may be used as approved by the GC). In no case will the number of units witnessed be less than four on any one building, nor less than 20% of the total number of identical or very similar units

3.4.5.3 For lower-level components of equipment, (e.g., controls valves, sensors,

controllers), the CA shall observe a sampling of the prefunctional and start-

Sensor

Required Tolerance (+/-)

Cooling coil, chilled and condenser water temps 0.4F

AHU wet bulb or dew point 2.0F

Hot water coil and boiler water temp 1.5F

Outside air, space air, duct air temps 0.4F

Watthour, voltage & amperage 1% of design

Pressures, air, water and gas 3% of design

Flow rates, air 10% of design

Flow rates, water Relative humidity

4% of design 4% of design

Combustion flue temps 5.0F

Oxygen or CO2 monitor 0.1 % pts

CO monitor 0.01 % pts

Natural gas and oil flow rate 1% of design

Steam flow rate 3% of design

Barometric pressure 0.1 in. of Hg



up procedures. The sampling procedures are identified in the commissioning plan

3.4.5.4 The Subs and vendors shall execute startup and provide the CA with a

signed and dated copy of the completed start-up and prefunctional tests and checklists

3.4.5.5 Only individuals that have direct knowledge and witnessed that a line item

task on the prefunctional checklist was actually performed shall initial or check that item off. It is not acceptable for witnessing supervisors to fill out these forms

3.4.6. DEFICIENCIES, NON-CONFORMANCE AND APPROVAL IN CHECKLISTS AND

STARTUP.

3.4.6.1 The Subs shall clearly list any outstanding items of the initial start-up and prefunctional procedures that were not completed successfully, at the bottom of the procedures form or on an attached sheet. The procedures form and any outstanding deficiencies are provided to the CA within two days of test completion.

3.4.6.2 The CA reviews the report and submits either a non-compliance report or

an approval form to the Sub or GC. The CA shall work with the Subs and vendors to correct and retest deficiencies or uncompleted items. The CA will involve the GC and others as necessary. The installing Subs or vendors shall correct all areas that are deficient or incomplete in the checklists and tests in a timely manner, and shall notify the CA as soon as outstanding items have been corrected and resubmit an updated start-up report and a Statement of Correction on the original non-compliance report. When satisfactorily completed, the CA recommends approval of the execution of the checklists and startup of each system to the GC using a standard form

3.4.6.3 Items left incomplete, which later cause deficiencies or delays during

functional testing may result in backcharges to the responsible party. Refer to Part 3.7 herein for details



3.5. PHASED COMMISSIONING

3.5.1. The project will require startup and initial checkout to be executed in phases. This phasing will be planned and scheduled in a coordination meeting of the CA, GC, Mechanical, electrical, TAB and controls contactors. Results will be added to the master and commissioning schedule.

3.6. FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING

This sub-section applies to all commissioning functional testing for all divisions.

The general list of equipment to be commissioned is found in Paragraph 1.7. The specific equipment and modes to be tested are found in Sections 23 08 00 and 26 08 04.

The parties responsible to execute each test are listed with each test in Sections 23 08 00 and 26 08 04.

3.6.1. Objectives and Scope. The objective of functional performance testing is to

demonstrate that each system is operating according to the documented design intent and Contract Documents. Functional testing facilitates bringing the systems from a state of substantial completion to full dynamic operation. Additionally, during the testing process, areas of deficient performance are identified and corrected, improving the operation and functioning of the systems.

In general, each system should be operated through all modes of operation (seasonal, occupied, unoccupied, warm-up, cool-down, part- and full-load) where there is a specified system response. Verifying each sequence in the sequences of operation is required. Proper responses to such modes and conditions as power failure, freeze condition, low pressure, no flow, equipment failure, etc. shall also be tested. Specific modes required in this project are given in Sections 23 08 00 and 26 08 04.

3.6.2. . Development of Test Procedures. Before test procedures are written, the CA

shall obtain all requested documentation and a current list of change orders affecting equipment or systems, including an updated points list, program code, control sequences and parameters. Using the testing parameters and requirements in Sections 23 08 00 and 26 08 04 the CA shall develop specific test procedures and forms to verify and document proper operation of each piece of equipment and system. Each Sub or vendor responsible to execute a test, shall provide limited assistance to the CA in developing the procedures review (answering questions about equipment, operation, sequences, etc.). Prior to execution, the CA shall provide a copy of the test procedures to the



Sub(s) who shall review the tests for feasibility, safety, equipment and warranty protection. The CA may submit the tests to the A/E for review, if requested.

The CA shall review owner-contracted, factory testing or required owner acceptance tests which the CA is not responsible to oversee, including documentation format, and shall determine what further testing or format changes may be required to comply with the Specifications. Redundancy of testing shall be minimized.

I.The purpose of any given specific test is to verify and document

compliance with the stated criteria of acceptance given on the test form.

3.6.3. . Test Methods.

Functional performance testing and verification may be achieved by manual testing (persons manipulate the equipment and observe performance) or by monitoring the performance and analyzing the results using the control system’s trend log capabilities or by stand-alone dataloggers. Sections 23 08 00 and 26 08 04 specify which methods shall be used for each test. The CA may substitute specified methods or require an additional method to be executed, other than what was specified, with the approval of the GC. This may require a change order and adjustment in charge to the Owner. The CA will determine which method is most appropriate for tests that do not have a method specified. Simulated Conditions. Simulating conditions (not by an overwritten value) shall be allowed, though timing the testing to experience actual conditions is encouraged wherever practical. Overwritten Values. Overwriting sensor values to simulate a condition, such as overwriting the outside air temperature reading in a control system to be something other than it really is, shall be allowed, but shall be used with caution and avoided when possible. Such testing methods often can only test a part of a system, as the interactions and responses of other systems will be erroneous or not applicable. Simulating a condition is preferable. e.g., for the above case, by heating the outside air sensor with a hair blower rather than overwriting the: 1. Value or by altering the appropriate set point to see the desired response.

Before simulating conditions or overwriting values, sensors, transducers and devices shall have been calibrated.



2. Simulated Signals. Using a signal generator which creates a simulated signal to test and calibrate transducers and DDC constants is generally recommended over using the sensor to act as the signal generator via simulated conditions or overwritten values.

3. Altering Setpoints. Rather than overwriting sensor values, and when

simulating conditions is difficult, altering setpoints to test a sequence is acceptable. For example, to see the AC compressor lockout work at an outside air temperature below 55F, when the outside air temperature is above 55F, temporarily change the lockout setpoint to be 2F above the current outside air temperature.

4. Indirect Indicators. Relying on indirect indicators for responses or

performance shall be allowed only after visually and directly verifying and documenting, over the range of the tested parameters, that the indirect readings through the control system represent actual conditions and responses. Much of this verification is completed during prefunctional testing

5. Setup. Each function and test shall be performed under conditions that

simulate actual conditions as close as is practically possible. The Sub executing the test shall provide all necessary materials, system modifications, etc. to produce the necessary flows, pressures, temperatures, etc. necessary to execute the test according to the specified conditions. At completion of the test, the Sub shall return all affected building equipment and systems, due to these temporary modifications, to their pre-test condition

6. Sampling. Multiple identical pieces of non-life-safety or otherwise non-

critical equipment may be functionally tested using a sampling strategy. Significant application differences and significant sequence of operation differences in otherwise identical equipment invalidates their common identity. A small size or capacity difference, alone, does not constitute a difference. It is noted that no sampling by Subs is allowed in prefunctional checklist execution

A common sampling strategy referenced in the Specifications as the “xx% Sampling—yy% Failure Rule” is defined by the following example.

1. xx = the percent of the group of identical equipment to be included in

each sample. 2. yy = the percent of the sample that if failing, will require another

sample to be tested.



The example below describes a 20% Sampling—10% Failure Rule.

1. Randomly test at least 20% (xx) of each group of identical equipment. In no case test less than three units in each group. This 20%, or three, constitute the “first sample.”

2. If 10% (yy) of the units in the first sample fail the functional performance tests, test another 20% of the group (the second sample)

3. If 10% of the units in the second sample fail, test all remaining units in the whole group.

4. If at any point, frequent failures are occurring and testing is becoming more troubleshooting than verification, the CA may stop the testing and require the responsible Sub to perform and document a checkout of the remaining units, prior to continuing with functionally testing the remaining units

3.6.4. Coordination and Scheduling. The Subs shall provide sufficient notice to the

CA regarding their completion schedule for the prefunctional checklists and startup of all equipment and systems. The CA will schedule functional tests through the GC and affected Subs. The CA shall direct, witness and document the functional testing of all equipment and systems. The Subs shall execute the tests.

In general, functional testing is conducted after prefunctional testing and startup has been satisfactorily completed. The control system is sufficiently tested and approved by the CA before it is used for TAB or to verify performance of other components or systems. The air balancing and water balancing is completed and debugged before functional testing of air-related or water-related equipment or systems. Testing proceeds from components to subsystems to systems. When the proper performance of all interacting individual systems has been achieved, the interface or coordinated responses between systems is checked.

3.6.5. Problem Solving. The CA will recommend solutions to problems found,

however the burden of responsibility to solve, correct and retest problems is with the contractors, Subs and A/E



3.7. DOCUMENTATION, NON-CONFORMANCE AND APPROVAL OF TESTS

3.7.1. Documentation. The CA shall witness and document the results of all functional performance tests using the specific procedural forms developed for that purpose. Prior to testing, these forms are provided to the GC for review and approval and to the Subs for review. The CA will include the filled out forms in the O&M manuals

3.7.2. Non-Conformance

3.7.2.1 The CA will record the results of the functional test on the procedure

or test form. All deficiencies or non-conformance issues shall be noted and reported to the GC on a standard non-compliance form.

3.7.2.2 Corrections of minor deficiencies identified may be made during the

tests at the discretion of the CA. In such cases the deficiency and resolution will be documented on the procedure form.

3.7.2.3 Every effort will be made to expedite the testing process and

minimize unnecessary delays, while not compromising the integrity of the procedures. However, the CA will not be pressured into overlooking deficient work or loosening acceptance criteria to satisfy scheduling or cost issues, unless there is an overriding reason to do so at the request of the GC.

3.7.2.4 As tests progress and a deficiency is identified, the CA discusses the

issue with the executing contractor.

3.7.2.5 When there is no dispute on the deficiency and the Sub accepts responsibility to correct it:

3.7.2.5.1. The CA documents the deficiency and the Sub’s

response and intentions and they go on to another test or sequence. After the day’s work, the CA submits the non-compliance reports to the GC for signature, if required. A copy is provided to the Sub and CA. The Sub corrects the deficiency, signs the statement of correction at the bottom of the non-compliance form certifying that the equipment is ready to be retested and sends it back to the CA.

3.7.2.5.2. The CA reschedules the test and the test is repeated



3.7.2.6 If there is a dispute about a deficiency, regarding whether it is a

deficiency or who is responsible

3.7.2.6.1. The deficiency shall be documented on the non-compliance form with the Sub’s response and a copy given to the GC and to the Sub representative assumed to be responsible

3.7.2.6.2. Resolutions are made at the lowest management level possible. Other parties are brought into the discussions as needed. Final interpretive authority is with the A/E. Final acceptance authority is with the Project Manager.

3.7.2.6.3. The CA documents the resolution process.

3.7.2.6.4. Once the interpretation and resolution have been

decided, the appropriate party corrects the deficiency, signs the statement of correction on the non-compliance form and provides it to the CA. The CA reschedules the test and the test is repeated until satisfactory performance is achieved

3.7.2.7 Cost of Retesting

3.7.2.7.1. The cost for the Sub to retest a prefunctional or functional test, if they are responsible for the deficiency, shall be theirs. If they are not responsible, any cost recovery for retesting costs shall be negotiated with the GC.

3.7.2.8 For a deficiency identified, not related to any prefunctional checklist

or start-up fault, the following shall apply:

3.7.2.8.1. The CA and GC will direct the retesting of the equipment once at no “charge” to the contractors for their time. However, the CA’s time for a second retest will be charged to the contractors, who may choose to recover costs from the responsible Sub.

3.7.2.8.2. The time for the CA and GC to direct any retesting

required because a specific prefunctional checklist or start-up test item, reported to have been successfully completed, but determined during functional testing to



be faulty, will be backcharged to the contractor, who may choose to recover costs from the party responsible for executing the faulty prefunctional test.

3.7.2.8.3. Refer to the sampling section paragraph 3.6.3.6 for

requirements for testing and retesting identical equipment.

3.7.2.9 The Contractor shall respond in writing to the CA and GC at least as

often as commissioning meetings are being scheduled concerning the status of each apparent outstanding discrepancy identified during commissioning. Discussion shall cover explanations of any disagreements and proposals for their resolution

3.7.2.10 The CA retains the original non-conformance forms until the end of

the project 3.7.2.11 Any required retesting by any contractor shall not be considered a

justified reason for a claim of delay or for a time extension by the prime contractor.

3.7.3. Failure Due to Manufacturer Defect. If 10%, or three, whichever is greater, of

identical pieces (size alone does not constitute a difference) of equipment fail to perform to the Contract Documents (mechanically or substantively) due to manufacturing defect, not allowing it to meet its submitted performance spec, all identical units may be considered unacceptable by the GC or PM. In such case, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with the following:

3.7.3.1 Within one week of notification from the GC or PM, the Contractor or

manufacturer’s representative shall examine all other identical units making a record of the findings. The findings shall be provided to the GC or PM within two weeks of the original notice.

3.7.3.2 Within two weeks of the original notification, the Contractor or

manufacturer shall provide a signed and dated, written explanation of the problem, cause of failures, etc. and all proposed solutions which shall include full equipment submittals. The proposed solutions shall not significantly exceed the specification requirements of the original installation.

3.7.3.3 The GC or PM will determine whether a replacement of all identical

units or a repair is acceptable.

3.7.3.4 Two examples of the proposed solution will be installed by the Contractor and the GC will be allowed to test the installations for up



to one week, upon which the GC or PM will decide whether to accept the solution.

3.7.3.5 Upon acceptance, the Contractor and/or manufacturer shall replace

or repair all identical items, at their expense and extend the warranty accordingly, if the original equipment warranty had begun. The replacement/repair work shall proceed with reasonable speed beginning within one week from when parts can be obtained.

3.7.4. Approval. The CA notes each satisfactorily demonstrated function on the test

form. Formal approval of the functional test is made later after review by the CA and by the GC, if necessary. The CA recommends acceptance of each test to the GC using a standard form. The GC gives final approval on each test using the same form, providing a signed copy to the CA and the Contractor.

3.8. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

3.8.1. Standard O&M Manuals.

3.8.1.1. The specific content and format requirements for the standard O&M manuals are detailed in Sections 01 00 10, 23 05 00 and 26 05 00. Special requirements for the controls contractor and TAB contractor are found Section 23 08 00.

3.8.1.2. CA Review and Approval. Prior to substantial completion, the CA shall review

the O&M manuals to verify compliance with the Specifications. The CA will communicate deficiencies in the manuals to the GC, PM or A/E, as requested. Upon a successful review of the corrections, the CA recommends approval and acceptance of these sections of the O&M manuals to the GC, PM or A/E. The CA also reviews each equipment warranty and verifies that all requirements to keep the warranty valid are clearly stated. This work does not supersede the A/E’s review of the O&M manuals according to the A/E’s contract.

3.8.2. Commissioning Record in O&M Manuals.

3.8.2.1. The CA is responsible to compile, organize and index the following commissioning data by equipment into labeled, indexed and tabbed, three-ring binders and deliver it to the GC, to be included with the O&M manuals. Three copies of the manuals will be provided. The format of the manuals shall be:

Tab I-1 Commissioning Plan Tab I-2 Final Commissioning Report (see (B.2) below) Tab 01 System Type 1 (chiller system, packaged unit, boiler system, etc.)



Sub-Tab A Design narrative and criteria, sequences, approvals for Equipment 1

Sub-Tab B Startup plan and report, approvals, corrections, blank prefunctional checklists

Colored Separator Sheets—for each equipment type (fans, pumps, chiller, etc.)

Sub-Tab C Functional tests (completed), trending and analysis, approvals and corrections, training plan, record and approvals, blank functional test forms and a recommended re-commissioning schedule.

Tab 02 System Type 2......repeat as per System 1

3.8.3. Final Report Details. The final commissioning report shall include an executive summary, list of participants and roles, brief building description, overview of commissioning and testing scope and a general description of testing and verification methods. For each piece of commissioned equipment, the report should contain the disposition of the commissioning authority regarding the adequacy of the equipment, documentation and training meeting the contract documents in the following areas: 1) Equipment meeting the equipment specifications, 2) Equipment installation, 3) Functional performance and efficiency, 4) Equipment documentation and design intent, and 5) Operator training. All outstanding non-compliance items shall be specifically listed. Recommendations for improvement to equipment or operations, future actions, commissioning process changes, etc. shall also be listed. Each non-compliance issue shall be referenced to the specific functional test, inspection, trend log, etc. where the deficiency is documented. The functional performance and efficiency section for each piece of equipment shall include a brief description of the verification method used (manual testing, BAS trend logs, data loggers, etc.) and include observations and conclusions from the testing.

3.8.4. Other documentation will be retained by the CA.



3.9. TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL

3.9.1. General

Detail information regarding contents, duration and instructors for any particular building system is included in Specification section 01 91 15 – Commissioning –Training.

3.9.2. Development

The Training Plans are produced conjointly by the Designer and the Commissioning Authority to meet project-specific requirements and they include details provided by the Facility Property Manager relating to numbers and prerequisite qualifications and skills of trainees, type of training (i.e. observation, hands-on, classroom), etc The CA coordinates and schedules, with the GC, the overall training for the commissioned systems. The CA develops criteria for determining that the training was satisfactorily completed, including attending some of the training, etc. The CA recommends approval of the training to the owner using a standard form. The GC also signs the approval form.

The Training Plans are included in Specification section 01 19 15 – Commissioning –Training and Commissioning Plan 01 19 14.

3.10. DEFERRED TESTING

Unforeseen Deferred Tests. If any check or test cannot be completed due to the building structure, required occupancy condition or other deficiency, execution of checklists and functional testing may be delayed upon approval of the PM. These tests will be conducted in the same manner as the seasonal tests as soon as possible. Services of necessary parties will be negotiated.

Seasonal Testing. During the warranty period, seasonal testing (tests delayed until weather conditions are closer to the system’s design) specified in Section 23 08 00 shall be completed as part of this contract. The CA shall coordinate this activity. Tests will be executed, documented and deficiencies corrected by the appropriate Subs, with facilities staff and the CA witnessing. Any final adjustments to the O&M manuals and as-builds due to the testing will be made.



3.11. WRITTEN WORK PRODUCTS

The commissioning process generates a number of written work products described in various parts of the Specifications. The following lists all the formal written work products and describes who is responsible to create them. In summary, the written products are:

Product Developed By 1. Final commissioning plan CA 2. Meeting minutes CA 3. Commissioning schedules CA with GC 4. Equipment documentation submittals Subs 5. Sequence clarifications Subs and A/E as needed 5. Prefunctional checklists CA (already in Specs) 6. Startup and initial checkout plan Subs and CA 7. Startup and initial checkout forms filled out Subs 8. Final TAB report TAB 9. Issues log (deficiencies) CA 10. Commissioning Progress Record CA 11. Deficiency reports CA 12. Functional test forms CA

Product Developed By 13. Filled out functional tests CA 14. O&M manuals Subs 15. Commissioning record book CA 16. Overall training plan CA and GC 17. Final commissioning report CA

Queensborough Community Centre Section 01 91 14 New Westminster, BC Page 1 of 26 COMMISSIONING - PLAN September 08 2011


Table of Contents

1.0 GENERAL 1.1 Objective of Commissioning 1.2 The importance of the Commissioning Plan 1.3 Production of the Commissioning Plan 1.4 Revisions to the Commissioning Plan 2.0 ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES 3.0 SYSTEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED 3.1 Mechanical 3.2 Electrical

4.0 LEED 2009 COMMISSIONING RELATED CREDITS 5.0 O&M DOCUMENTATION 5.1 General requirements: 5.2 Building O&M Manuals 5.3 Warranties 5.4 As-built" Drawings and Specifications 6.0 TRAINING AND DEMONSTRATION 6.1 General 6.2 Development 6.3 Commissioning schedule 6.4 Duration of training 6.5 Responsibilities 6.6 Instructors 6.7 Trainees 6.8 Prerequisite Skills and Qualifications 6.9 Details of Training 6.10 Training Materials 6.11 Completion of training 6.12 Videotaping 6.13 Standard of training 6.14 Limitations 6.15 Demonstrations



7.0 COMMISSIONING TESTING REQUIREMENTS 7.1 Pre-functional Checklist, Tests and Start up 7.2 Start-up Plan 7.3 Execution of Checklist and Start Up 7.4 Deficiencies and Non-Conformance 7.5 Phased Commissioning 7.6 Envelope Commissioning 7.7 TAB 7.8 Controls Checkout Plan 7.9 Development of Functional and Verification Procedures 7.10 Execution of Functional Testing Procedures 7.11 Activities During the Warranty Period 8.0. COMMISSIONING DOCUMENTATION 8.1 Commissioning activities and related documentation 8.2 Commissioning of integrated systems and related documentation 8.3 Commissioning Specifications 8.4 Installation checklists (ICL) 8.5 Performance Verification (PV) Report Forms 8.6 Commissioning Reports

9.0. COMMISSIONING SCHEDULE 9.1 General 9.2 Commissioning Schedule for building envelope systems 9.3 Commissioning Schedule for mechanical systems 9.4 Commissioning Schedule for electrical systems 9.5 Commissioning Schedule for integrated systems 9.6 Commissioning Reports 9.7 Training and Demonstration 9.8 Indoor Air Quality – Two Weeks Air flushing Period



1.0 GENERAL 1.1 Objective of commissioning

The following are the objectives of the commissioning process:- .1 to provide fully functional facility whose systems, equipment and components have been

proven to meet all User's functional requirements before the date of acceptance, and which operate consistently at peak efficiencies and within specified energy budgets under all normal loads

.2 to fully train the Owner O&M personnel in all aspects of all installed systems .3 to optimize life cycle costs .4 to complete documentation relating to all installed equipment and systems

1.2 Importance and purpose of the Commissioning Plan

The Commissioning Plan is the master planning tool relating to commissioning, setting out scope, standards, roles and responsibilities, expectations, deliverables, etc. It provides an overview of commissioning, a general description of all elements that make up the Commissioning Plan, and sets out the process and the methodology for successful commissioning of the above-mentioned project. The Commissioning Plan functions as a management tool, setting out the scope standards of commissioning, roles and responsibilities of each member of the Commissioning Team and deliverables. The Commissioning Plan also functions as a communications tool, addressed to all members of the Commissioning Team and informing each member of the Commissioning Team, in general terms, of their own roles and responsibilities and those of the other members of the Commissioning Team.

1.3. Production of the Commissioning Plan

This Commissioning plan was assembled by the project Commissioning Authority using input from the Commissioning Team members.

1.4. Revisions to the Commissioning Plan

The Commissioning Plan will be reviewed, revised, refined and updated, if required, every [6] months during construction. Each time it is revised, the revision number and date will also be revised.



2.0. ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Commissioning Team. The members of the commissioning team consist of the Commissioning authority (CA), the Project Manager (PM), the designated representative of the owner’s firm (OW), the architect and design engineers, the the Construction Management Company (GC), the Mechanical Contractor (MC), the Electrical Contractor (EC), the TAB representative, the Controls Contractor (CC), any other installing subcontractors or suppliers of equipment. The future Owner’s building or plant operator/engineer is also a member of the commissioning team. The commissioning team for this project includes the following members

.1 Client – (CoNW) City of New Westminster

.2 Project Manager – (PM) Wayne Werbovetski

.3 Commissioning Authority – (CA) - CES

.4 Architect – (UAA) Urban Arts Architecture

.5 Mechanical Consultant – (MMM) – MMM Group

.6 Electrical Consultant – (AE) – Acumen Engineering

.7. General Contractor – (GC)

.8 Mechanical Contractor (MC)

.9 Sheet Metal Contractor (SMC)

.10 Fire Protection Contractor (FPC)

.11 Building Automation Contractor (CC)

.12 Testing and balancing Agency (TAB)

.13 Division 21, 22, 23 and 25 Specialty Equipment Vendor Specialists

.14 Electrical Contractor. (EC)

.15 Division 26, 27 and 28 Specialty Equipment Vendor Specialists (Lighting Control, Fire Alarm)

For detail description about roles and responsibilities of the commissioning team members refer to Section 01 09 14, Paragraph 1.5 – Commissioning Requirements.



3.0. SYSTEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED 3.1 Architectural and Structural

• Electrified hardware related to access control and fire alarm (life safety)

3.2 Mechanical

HVAC systems • Heat Pumps and Ground Source Loop System • Boiler Plant • Hot Water Heat Exchangers • Hot Water Circulation Pumps • Radiant Slab System • Local Heating Equipment • Air Handling Units • Exhaust Fans • Heat Recovery Systems • Building management system • Energy Management Systems • Noise and vibration control systems • Seismic restraint measures

Plumbing Systems • Domestic cold water system • Domestic hot water system • Sanitary Drainage System • Storm Drainage System and Rainwater Collection System

Fire Protection • Wet fire sprinkler system • Dry sprinkler system

3.3 Electrical

• Motor Control Operation • Low Voltage Lighting Controls • Fire Alarm System • Automated Lighting Controls



4.0 LEED 2009 COMMISSIONING RELATED CREDITS

The following energy related LEED 2009 credit rating points are impacted by the commissioning process.

SS Credit 8 Light pollution Reduction

WE Credit 1.1 Water efficient landscaping

WE Credit 3.1 Water use reduction 20% reduction

EA Credit 1.1 Optimize Energy Performance

IEQ Prereq1 Minimum IAQ Performance

IEQ Credit 1 Outdoor Air Delivery Monitoring

IEQ Credit 5 Indoor Chemical & Pollutant Source Control

IEQ Credit 6 Controllability of Systems

IEQ Credit 7 Thermal comfort

5.0. O&M DOCUMENTATION 5.1 General requirements:

Manuals shall be compiled in English. Documents shall be prepared in duplicate discs and four (4) hard copies. All documentation shall be transferred to the Facility Management Group in a computer-compatible format that can be readily inputted for data management.

5.2 O&M Manuals

For specific information regarding these manuals refer to specification sections Architectural Section 01 00 10, Mechanical Section 23 05 00 and, Electrical section 26 05 00. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be prepared for all building systems included in Division 1 to Division 28. A separate manual documents will be generated by responsible contractors for the following systems:- • Division 1 to Division 14 – Maintenance manuals shall be prepared for all building systems

included in these divisions. General Contractor or agency hired by the General Contractor shall be responsible for the preparation of this manual document.



• Division 21 to 25 (HVAC, plumbing, fire protection, DDC controls). Operation and maintenance manuals shall be prepared for all building systems included in these divisions. Mechanical contractor or agency hired by the mechanical contractor shall be responsible for the preparation of this manual document.

• Division 26 to 28. Maintenance manuals shall be prepared for all building systems included in these divisions. Electrical contractor or agency hired by the electrical contractor shall be responsible for the preparation of this manual document.

5.3 Warranties

A complete inventory will be provided by the Contractor to the Designer who will review same before submission to the Commissioning Manager who, in turn, recommends acceptance by the Project Manager.

5.4 "As-built" Drawings and Specifications

These will be produced by the Designer from the project record documents maintained on the site and kept up-to-date with all changes as they occur and marked thereon by the Contractor. Accuracy will be verified by the Designer before preparation of the "As-builts" and by the Commissioning Authority after submission by the Designer. They shall be completed in time to be used during pre-start-up inspections. They will be refined and revised as required during commissioning.

6.0. TRAINING AND DEMONSTRATION 6.1 General

For detail information regarding contents, duration and instructors for any particular building system refer to Specification section 01 91 15 – Commissioning –Training. The Training Plans are produced conjointly by the Designer and the Commissioning Authority to meet project-specific requirements and they include details provided by the Facility Property Manager relating to numbers and prerequisite qualifications and skills of trainees, type of training (i.e. observation, hands-on, classroom), etc

6.2 Development

The Training Plans are included in Specification section 01 91 15 – Commissioning –Training. 6.3 Commissioning schedule

Commissioning schedule prepared by the Contractor shall indicate in detail how training will be implemented, the duration of each training session, the trainers, trainees, etc.



6.4 Duration of training

Duration of training for each system, instruction aids, etc. depends on systems complexity. The minimum number of hours for training sessions is identified in the commissioning specifications – 01 91 51 – Commissioning –Training -

6.5 Responsibilities

Training will be under the direction of the Commissioning Authority and monitored by the Designer.

6.6 Instructors

Instructors and trainers will include the Commissioning Authority, Designer, Contractor, specialist subcontractors, equipment manufacturers, suppliers and installers, factory-trained and certified equipment suppliers and manufacturers, factory-trained and certified maintenance specialist personnel and the service contractors holding service contracts for the following: • Emergency Generator and Automatic Transfer Switch • Lighting controls • Heat Pump Units

and any other service contracts that may be implemented during this project.

6.7 Trainees –

These will include the Facility (Property) Manager, building operators, maintenance staff, security staff, technical specialists as necessary and facility occupants as necessary. The Commissioning Authority will co-ordinate their attendance at agreed-upon times.

6.8 Prerequisite Skills and Qualifications

Trainees will meet all identified qualification requirements of installed equipment and systems. 6.9 Details of Training

6.9.1 Implementation of training:

The Contractor will be responsible for implementation of training activities, quality of instruction and training materials and for co-ordination among the instructors.



Training will include:

.1 All aspects of operation under all normal, emergency and "what-if" modes, over the full range of operating ranges.

2. Detailed maintenance, troubleshooting, regular, preventive and emergency maintenance.

Training will consist of the following elements, to be completed, with demonstration of completeness, before date of acceptance:

Random on-site familiarization and observations during construction, installation, layout of equipment, systems and components, start-up and testing of the work, access to approved shop drawings, equipment operating and maintenance data. On- site observations will include still-photo records as deemed necessary by the O&M personnel – particularly of concealed elements.

Hands-on instruction relating to start-up; shut-down; emergency procedures; features of controls; monitoring; servicing; maintenance; performance verification and commissioning; reasons for, results of and implications on associated systems of adjustment of setpoints of control, limit and safety devices; interaction among systems during integrated operation; and troubleshooting diagnostics. Other elements will include system operating sequences, step-by-step directions for operation of valves, dampers, switches, adjustment of control settings and other specialized training relating to installed systems.

Formal classroom sessions relating to functional and operational requirements, system philosophy, limitations of each system, and operation and use of Operating and Maintenance Manuals. Duration of these sessions will be as specified in the commissioning specifications, using space to be identified.

6.10 Training Materials

Training materials will be in a form permitting future training procedures to be in the same degree of detail and will include at least the following:

1. "As-built" contract documents 2. TAB and Commissioning Reports 3. Transparencies for overhead projectors and 35 mm slides 4. Manufacturers' training videos (after prior screening for suitability) 5. Equipment models



6.11 Completion of training

All training will be completed prior to issuance of the Interim Certificate.

6.12 Videotaping

The owner reserves the rights to videotape hands-on and classroom sessions for future reference and retraining.

6.13 Standard of training

Training will be in sufficient detail and of sufficient duration to ensure: .1 Safe, reliable, cost-effective, energy-efficient operation of all systems in normal

and emergency modes and under all conditions .2 Effective ongoing inspection, measurements of system performance .3 Proper preventive maintenance diagnosis, troubleshooting .4 Ability to update documentation .5 Ability to operate equipment and systems under emergency conditions until

appropriate qualified assistance arrives. 6.14 Limitations

Long-term ongoing training will not be included. However, the training courses and training materials including video-taping will permit further ongoing training as well as training of new personnel.

6.15 Demonstrations

Training will include demonstrations by the trained personnel to show their confidence in, and depth of understanding of, all installed systems and equipment and to demonstrate completeness of their training.



7.0 COMMISSIONING TESTING REQUIREMENTS

7.1 Pre-functional Checklists, Tests and Startup

Pre-functional checklists (PC) are important to ensure that the equipment and systems are hooked up and operational and that functional performance testing may proceed without unnecessary delays. Each piece of equipment receives full pre-functional checkout by the Contractor. No sampling strategies are used. In general, the pre-functional testing for a given system, must be successfully completed prior to formal functional performance testing of equipment or subsystems of the given system.

Pre-functional checklists are primarily static inspections and procedures to prepare the equipment or system for initial operation (e.g., oil levels OK, fan belt tension, labels affixed, gages in place, sensor calibration, etc.). However, some pre-functional checklist items entail simple testing of the function of a component, a piece of equipment or system (such as measuring the voltage imbalance on a three phase pump motor of a chiller system). The word pre-functional refers to before functional testing. Pre-functional checklists augment and are combined with the manufacturer’s start-up checklist.

Contractors typically already perform some, if not many, of the pre-functional checklist items the commissioning authority will recommend. However, few contractors document in writing the execution of these checklist items. This project requires that the procedures be documented in writing by the installing technician. The CA does not witness much of the pre-functional check-listing, except for testing of larger or more critical pieces of equipment and some spot-checking.

7.2 Start-up Plan

The CA assists the commissioning team members responsible for startup in developing detailed start-up plans for all equipment.

The following procedures will be used for this project: 1. The CA adapts and enhances, if necessary, the representative pre-functional checklists (PC)

and procedures and develops original lists, as necessary.

2. The CA obtains manufacturer installation, startup and checkout data, including actual field checkout sheets used by the field technicians from the contractor (through an RFI).

3. The CA copies all pages with important instructional data and procedures from the startup and checkout manuals not covered in manufacturer field checkout sheets and adds a signature line in the column by each procedure.

4. The copied pages from (2), along with the pre-functional checklist provided by the CA and the manufacturer field checkout sheets become the “Startup and Checkout Plan.”

5. For systems that may not have adequate manufacturer startup and checkout procedures, particularly for components being integrated with other equipment, the Sub should provide



the added necessary detail and documenting format to the CA for approval, prior to execution.

6. The CA transmits the full Startup Plan to the GC, who designates which trade or contractor is responsible to fill out each line item (mark in the “Contr” column) on the Prefunctional Checklist from the CA. The GC then transmits the full start-up plan to the Subs for their review and use. (This usually means that the Prefunctional Checklist, alone, will go to more than one Sub, while the full plan will go to the primary installing contractor.)

7.3 Execution of Checklists and Startup

Four weeks prior to startup, the Subs and vendors schedule startup and initial checkout with the GC and CA. The startup and initial checkout are directed and executed by the Sub or vendor. The CA, and GC if necessary, observe, at minimum, the procedures for each piece of primary equipment, unless there are multiple units, when a sampling strategy is used. For components of equipment, (e.g., VAV boxes), the CA observes a sampling of the pre-functional and start-up procedures. To document the process of startup and checkout, the site technician perfoming the line item task initials and dates each paragraph of procedures in the “Startup Plan” and checks off items on the prefunctional and manufacturer field checkout sheets, as they are completed. Only individuals having direct knowledge of a line item being completed shall check or initial the forms. The Subs and vendors execute the checklists and tests and submit a signed copy of the completed start-up and pre-functional tests and checklists to the CA. The CA may review pre-functional checklists in progress, as necessary.

7.4 Deficiencies and Non-Conformance

The Subs clearly list any outstanding items of the initial start-up and prefunctional procedures that were not completed successfully at the bottom of the procedures form or on an attached sheet. The procedures form and deficiencies are provided to the CA within two days of test completion. The CA works with the Subs and vendors to correct and retest deficiencies or uncompleted items, involving the GC and others as necessary. The installing Subs or vendors correct all areas that are deficient or incomplete according to the checklists and tests. The CA recommends approval of the startup and initial checkout of each system to the GC.

7.5 Phased Commissioning

This project will require, startup and initial checkout to be executed in phases. Additional resolution of these phases can be found in the detailed commissioning schedule.



7.6 TAB

The TAB contractor submits the outline of the TAB plan and approach to the CA and the controls contractor eight weeks prior to starting the TAB. Included in the approach, is an explanation of the intended use of the building control system. The CA reviews the plan and approach for understanding and coordination issues and may comment, but does not “approve.” The controls contractor reviews the feasibility of using the building control system for assistance in the TAB work. The TAB submits weekly written reports of discrepancies, contract interpretation requests and lists of completed tests to the CA and GC. This facilitates quicker resolution of problems and will result in a more complete TAB before functional testing begins. TAB work will not begin until the control system has been pre-functionally tested and selective functional tests have been performed and approved by the CA.

7.7 Controls Checkout Plan

The controls contractor (owners forces) develops and submits a written step-by-step plan to the CA which describes the process they intend to follow in checking out the control system and the forms on which they will document the process. The controls contractor will also meet with the TAB contractor prior to the start of TAB and review the TAB plan to determine the capabilities of the control system for use in TAB. The controls contractor will provide the TAB with any necessary unique instruments for setting terminal unit boxes and instruct TAB in their use (handheld control system interface for use around the building during TAB, etc.). The controls contractor shall also provide a technician qualified to operate the controls to assist the TAB contractor in performing TAB. Additional details are found in Specifications Section 25 01 12. All CA-required controls pre-functional checklists, calibrations, start-up and selected functional tests of the system shall be completed and approved by the CA prior to TAB. The controls contractor shall execute the tests and trend logs assigned to them in Section 25 01 11 and 23 08 00 and remain on site for assistance for mechanical system functional tests as specified in the same sections.

7.8 Development of Functional Test and Verification Procedures

7.8.1 Overview

Functional testing is the dynamic testing of systems (rather than just components) under full operation (e.g., the chiller pump is tested interactively with the chiller functions to see if the pump ramps up and down to maintain the differential pressure setpoint). Systems are tested under various modes, such as during low cooling or heating loads, high loads, component failures, unoccupied, varying outside air temperatures, fire alarm, power failure, etc. The systems are run through all of the control system’s sequences of operation and components are verified to be responding as the sequences state. The commissioning authority develops the functional test



procedures in a sequential written form, coordinates, oversees and documents the actual testing, which is usually performed by the installing contractor or vendor. 7.8.2 Scope of Testing

The specification Sections 25 08 00 and 26 08 04 provide specific functional testing scope for each piece of commissioned equipment. A detailed description of the functional and pre-functional testing procedures and process is found in the Specifications, 01 91 13 Part 3. If specific testing requirements were not included in the bid documents and original specifications, they should be developed for this project for each piece of commissioned equipment. The following is the summary of Architectural, mechanical and electrical system testing:

7.8.2.2 Mechanical

Phase I – Pre-Start Static Checks a) Electrical connections complete to all devices and equipment. b) All plumbing fixtures installed and all trim complete c) All plumbing related equipment is in place and connected to the system d) Plumbing inspections completed by the local plumbing inspector e) Direction of rotation of all fans and pumps and motors correct f) Adequate valves, unions, drains and flexible pipe and electrical connections

installed for equipment removal g) Cleanliness of systems and building for equipment operation h) Adequate clearances provided for equipment servicing and maintenance i) Adequate grease and lubricants installed and accessible for maintenance j) Seismic Restraint completeness k) Any Objectionable noise levels l) Filtration systems installed, chemical treatment complete m) Any fluid leaks n) Review locations of all DDC control panels, control valves, relays,

transformers, remote sensors with respect to service access, tagging and identification

o) Review adequate placement of data dots on ceilings for service valve and control equipment.

p) Review adequate placement and size of all access doors for plumbing cleanouts and other mechanical devices

q) Review location of all room sensors with respect to accuracy of room temperature control

r) Proper alignment of pump and fan drives and belts s) All safeties and disconnects installed and operational



Phase 2 – System Readiness The following Items are to be confirmed as being complete and the commissioning authority is to perform spot checks on the items.

a) Position of all balance dampers in ductwork set and tagged, spot check and confirm air volumes.

b) Position all balance valves in piping systems set and tagged

c) Spot check air pressures and flow rates in air and water systems

d) Review the set up air patterns of diffusers, registers and grilles

e) Spot check of control system end to end checks

f) Review set up all automatic control valves/dampers and automatic temperature control devices and confirm they are fully operational.

g) Review all sequences of operation in both heating and cooling modes

h) Review tuning of all control loops through trend log analysis

i) Set up constant volume and variable volume fans.

j) Adjust vibration isolators and earthquake restraints as necessary for completion.

.1 DDC Control System Operational Checks:

Calibration of sensors and equipment and verify that sensors are reporting accurately to the DDC System. a) Temperature Sensors b) CO2 senso rs c) Freeze protect ion. d) Flow switches, status switches, etc. e) Temperature and pressure gauges. f) Control damper tightness when closed. g) A la rm con tac ts , .2 Operate each of the air handling units,

Verify and correct if required: a) Start/stop from the terminal. b) Correct start up/stop procedures with valves, dampers, etc. c) Verify stable operation of controls under normal conditions and with

changes in air/water on/off conditions. d) Simulate operation at other seasonal conditions, e) Run trend logs to indicate operation.



f) Piping, sensor, and unit installation. g) Check f i l ters for bypass. h) All interfaces with DDC control system.

.3 Operate and verify each of the entry, stair, fan room etc, heating

units.

.4 Operate and verify all systems

a) Start/stop from terminal or local device. b ) Damper opera t ion . c) Weather protection if appropriate. d) All interfaces with DDC system. .5 Verify proper operation of the heating water system.

a) Full check-out by manufacturers start-up service representative. b) Start/stop from DDC system. c) All interfaces with DDC control system. d) Pump start-up and interlocks. e ) Re l ie f va lves . f) Verify that sensors are reporting accurately to the DDC panels and terminal, g) Verify stable operation of the controls. h) Expansion tank operation – check system procedures. .6 Verify proper operation of the domestic hot water system.

a) Full check out by Manufacturers representative. b) DDC control system interface. c) Re l ie f va lve . d) Verify condition and systems pipe cleaning and chemical treatment

for all systems. .7 Fine Tuning

a) Setting up automatic controls for accurate response and precise sequencing. b) Correction of problems revealed by balancing agency and change of fan

speed, sheaves and pump impellers,



.8 Reporting

.9 Submit a detailed report of all the system spot checks performed.

.10 At least 20% of the systems are to be spot checked.

Phase 3 Verification of Commissioning Verification of commissioning by the Commissioning Authority shall not commence until the commissioning process Phase 2, has been totally completed. The verification process will include the demonstration of the following:

.1 Operation of all automatic control dampers and automatic temperature

control devices. .2 Operation of all equipment and systems, under each mode of operation,

including but not limited to the following:

a ) DDC cont ro l fea tu res b) Automatic controls including air compressors c) Exhaust/make-up air systems d) Heat exchangers e ) P u m p s f ) Un i t hea te rs g ) F a n s h) Coils i) Tanks – expansion

7.8.2.3 Electrical

Commission and report on all material, installation, systems and equipment including, but not limited to the following: a) Fire alarm system including sprinkler components, annunciator operation,

testing and verification. b) Emergency Generator and Transfer Switch c) Door Control System d) DDC System Connections e) Emergency lighting systems. f) Lighting control including occupancy sensors and scheduling of time

sequences g) Motor Control Installation and interlock requirements h) Grounding system installation and test results, i) Installation and operational testing of all wiring devices j) Review of, and coordination of equipment labeling with other Divisions.



k) Compile fixture cut sheets and photometric data for LEED 2009 documentation

l) Seismic Consultants visit and report submissions

Prior to final reviews and demonstrations submit detailed reports with supporting documentation on the following: a. Test and/or verification reports for all distribution systems including, but

not limited to the metering, fire alarm, and off-site monitoring capabilities. b. Test report on the installation and commissioning of all lighting systems and

their intended controls. c. Measurements and results of testing for all feeder and current connection

points including voltage drop calculations for each panel board. d. Confirmation of phase rotation of all mechanical motor components’,

witness “bumping” of each motor prior to start up, e. Provide written confirmation all data components for systems remote

monitoring have been provided, installed, and made operational. f. Review the installation of open wiring within ceiling spaces and ensure all

cables are properly supported, grouped, and identified as described within the tender documentation,

g. Coordinate commissioning of specialized distribution systems by the Manufacturers Representative prior to energization of power supplies.

h. Provide written confirmation all systems �abeling has been correctly installed on all devices and outlets as described within the tender documentation.

i. Final verification, testing and demonstrations are to be scheduled upon completion of the above and will include, but not be limited to, the following work.

j. Attend and document the final demonstration and witnessing of life safety system operation with the Building Departments.

7.8.3. Development Process

Before test procedures are written, the CA obtains all requested documentation and a current list of change orders affecting equipment or systems, including an updated points list, control sequences and setpoints. The CA develops specific test procedures to verify proper operation of each piece of equipment and system, using the testing requirements in the Specifications, Sections 01 91 13 and Sections 23 08 00 and 26 08 04 and other sources. The CA obtains clarification, as needed, from contractors and the A/E regarding sequences and operation to develop these tests. Prior to execution, the CA provides a copy of the primary equipment tests to the installing Sub (via the GC) who reviews the tests for feasibility, safety, warranty and equipment protection. Blank copies of the procedures are input into the O&M manuals for later use by operations staff.



Functional testing and verification may be achieved by manual testing (persons manipulate the equipment and observe performance) or by monitoring the performance and analyzing the results using the control system’s trend log capabilities or by stand-alone dataloggers. The CA follows the Specifications when given and uses judgement where needed to determine which method is most appropriate. According to the Specifications, not all pieces of identical equipment receive in-depth testing. The CA reviews owner-contracted, factory or required owner acceptance tests and determines what further testing may be required to comply with the Specifications. Redundancy is minimized.

7.9 Execution of Functional Testing Procedures

7.9.1 Overview and Process

The CA schedules functional tests through the GC and affected Subs. For any given system, prior to performing functional testing, the CA waits until the pre-functional checklist has been submitted with the necessary signatures, confirming that the system is ready for functional testing. The CA oversees, witnesses and documents the functional testing of all equipment and systems according to the Specifications and the Cx Plan. The Subs execute the tests. The control system is tested before it is used to verify performance of other components or systems. The air balancing and water balancing is completed and debugged before functional testing of air-related or water-related equipment or systems. Testing proceeds from components to subsystems to systems and finally to interlocks and connections between systems. Refer to specification section 01 91 13 Part 3 for additional process details. 7.9.2 Deficiencies and Retesting

The CA documents the results of the test. Corrections of minor deficiencies identified are made during the tests at the discretion of the CA. The CA records the results of the test on the procedure or test form. Deficiencies or non-conformance issues are noted and reported to the GC. Subs correct deficiencies and notify the CA. The CA schedules retesting through the GC. Decisions regarding deficiencies and corrections are made at as low a level as possible, preferably between CA or GC and the Sub. For areas in dispute, final authority, besides the Owner’s, resides with the A/E. The CA recommends acceptance of each test to the GC. The GC gives final approval on each test. Refer to Specifications Section 01 91 13 Part 3.7 for further details. 7.9.3 Facility Staff Participation

The Owner’s facilities operating staff are encouraged to attend and participate in the testing process. The CA will notify the GC and PM, who will then notify the facility staff when the commissioning events will occur.



7.9.4 Sampling

Multiple identical pieces of non-life-safety or otherwise non-critical equipment may be functionally tested using a sampling strategy. The Specifications specify the sampling strategies that are used on this project. Refer to Specifications Section 01 91 13 Part 3.7 for further details.

8.0. COMMISSIONING DOCUMENTATION

8.1 Commissioning activities and related documentation

.1 Commissioning will be performed by the specified Commissioning Agencies using procedures identified in the specification documents.

.2 Commissioning activities will be witnessed by, and results certified by, the Commissioning Authority and/or Designer.

.3 Reported results will be witnessed and certified using approved testing forms.

.4 Upon satisfactory completion, the Commissioning Agency performing the tests will prepare the required Commissioning Report which will be certified by the Commissioning Authority and/or Designer

8.2 Commissioning of integrated systems and related documentation

Commissioning will be performed by the specified Commissioning Agencies, using procedures developed by the Designer and approved by the Commissioning Authority. Procedures will be witnessed by, and results certified by, the Designer and documented on approved Report Forms. Upon satisfactory completion, the Commissioning Agency will prepare a Commissioning Report which will be certified by the Designer and submitted to the Commissioning Authority for review. The Commissioning Authority reserves the right to verify a percentage of reported results at no charge to the contract. The schedule of integrated systems will be prepared conjointly by the Designer and the Commissioning Authority and will identify integrated systems to be commissioned over and above those listed herein:

• HVAC and associated systems forming part of integrated HVAC systems • Indoor air quality • DDC Systems • Fire Protection Systems • Emergency Generator and Transfer Switch • Low voltage lighting control systems



• Fire alarm systems • Emergency lighting systems

8.3 Commissioning Specifications –

Commissioning specifications are included in Section 01 91 13, 01 91 14 and 01 91 15. All commissioning sections under this division refer to the general commissioning practices in an integrated approach for all building systems. All building trades contractors shall refer to these sections for understanding about standards, level of inspections and scope of work with respect to commissioning activities for this project. Commissioning requirements for particular building systems are specified in related systems division.

8.4 Installation checklists (ICL) –

Installation checklists shall be used to validate per-start-up and start-up inspection of the building systems. Contractors will be responsible to complete these sheets during testing procedures. These sheets will be used by the Design team and the Commissioning Authority to follow up progress of equipment start up process and to authorize next phase of systems inspection (performance verification). After review and verification by the Commissioning Authority, these report forms will be included in the relevant Commissioning Reports.

8.5 Performance Verification (PV) Report Forms –

Performance verification shall be used to validate equipment and systems functionality in line with the design intend. Contractors may use these sheets as an indication about extend of the system inspection with regard to the functional performance and to allow sufficient labor hours for full participation in these testing, The inspection and testing are performed at the system level (Hot water boilers and associated pump systems) rather then the individual equipment. The consultants and/or Commissioning Authority will witness and verify all sequences identified in these check sheets. Contractors will be responsible for presentation of specified systems operation to Consultants and/or Commissioning Authority. After review and verification by the Commissioning Authority, these report forms will be included in the relevant Commissioning Reports.



8.6 Commissioning Reports -

This following reports shall be generated to validate commissioning process:-

Product Developed By 1. Final commissioning plan CA 2. Meeting minutes CA 3. Commissioning schedules CA with GC 4. Equipment documentation submittals Subs 5. Sequence clarifications Subs and A/E as needed 5. Prefunctional checklists CA (already in Specs) 6. Startup and initial checkout plan Subs and CA 7. Startup and initial checkout forms filled out Subs 8. Final TAB report TAB 9. Issues log (deficiencies) CA 10. Commissioning Progress Record CA 11. Deficiency reports CA 12. Functional test forms CA

Product Developed By 13. Filled out functional tests CA 14. O&M manuals Subs 15. Commissioning record book CA 16. Overall training plan CA and GC 17. Final commissioning report CA

9.0 COMMISSIONING SCHEDULE 9.1 General

A detailed (critical path) commissioning schedule will be prepared by the Contractor’s Commissioning Coordinator and submitted to the Commissioning Authority and Project Manager for review and approval at the same time as the Construction and Completion Schedule. It shall include all necessary time-points and milestones, testing, documentation, training and commissioning activities. After approval, this schedule will be incorporated into the Contractor's Construction and Completion Schedule.

The Designer, the Contractor and the Commissioning Authority will monitor progress of commissioning against this schedule. A separate detailed schedule in day-by-day format will be provided by the Contractor for commissioning of all components, equipment, subsystems, systems and integrated systems. This schedule shall include a detailed training schedule so as to



demonstrate that there will be no conflicts with testing. The commissioning schedule will include the following milestones (as appropriate): The schedule of commissioning activities will be produced in a bar chart format to a scale that will ensure legibility. This bar chart will show sequences of testing equipment and systems, interrelationship between tests, duration of tests and training periods. The commissioning schedule will include the following milestones (as appropriate): 1. Introductory commissioning meeting chaired by the Commissioning Authority and the

Consultants group – 45 days after general contractor award of contract. 2. Commissioning procedures review – contractors comments if different from specs

documents.- 120 days after general contractor award of contract 3. Commissioning report format : 3 months before start-up of inspection and testing

9.2 Commissioning Schedule for Mechanical Systems

Static Testing & Inspection During Building Construction:- 1. Ductwork pressure testing. 2. New incoming water main commissioning (as soon as temporary heat is available) 3. Hydronic piping pressure testing

Pre-start-up and start-up inspection (Phase I and Phase II):-

1. Sprinkler Systems: These will be tested in accordance with requirements of NFPA 13.

2. Ventilation Systems:

Ventilation systems will be initially started up, "bumped" in a stand-alone mode (i.e. without controls, fire alarms or smoke detectors) and pre-start-up inspections completed. Ventilation systems shall be started only after all dust-producing construction procedures have been completed and all areas are dust-free.

a. Building clean and ready for air circulation b. AHU units startup inspection c. Local exhaust and Supply fans

3. Ground Source Heat Pump Loop System

a. Piping system flushing b. Piping system filling c. Circulation pumps start-up d. Hot water boilers start-up



e. Heat Pump Unit start up f. Chemical cleaning

4. Hot Water Heating Systems

a. Hot water heating flushing b. Hot water heating filling c. Hot water pumps start-up d. Hot water chemical cleaning

5. Plumbing Systems

a. Domestic Cold Water pressure regulating assembly. b. Backflow preventor’s testing for various plumbing systems. c. Domestic hot water generation and re-circulation systems testing

6. EMCS Systems

a. Control panels termination completed b. AHU’s end-to-end inspection c. Local exhaust and supply fans end-to-end inspection d. Ground Source Heat Pump Loop end-to-end inspections e. Hot Water Boilers end-to-end inspections f. Zone heating systems end-to-end inspections g. Control systems network communication inspection h. Central terminal station installed and commissioned i. Control software installed and commissioned j. Control graphics installed and commissioned k. Point trendlogs activated and commissioned

7. TAB

a. Notification of intention to start TAB: at least 15 days before start of TAB. b. Start up of TAB: after successful start-up, correction of deficiencies and verification of

normal and safe operation for the HVAC systems. c. TAB air systems d. TAB hydronic systems e. TAB report preparation f. TAB report submission for approval g. TAB report review



Performance Verification (Phase III)

1. TAB Verification

20% verification of the TAB results by consultant, commissioning authority and TAB agency.

2. HVAC systems performance verification

Demonstration of operation of all systems under all operating conditions and over the full operating range will take place during functional inspection period and will be witnessed by the Designer and Commissioning Authority. This will include simulated opposite-season tests. EMCS programming and operation will be verified only after HVAC systems TAB have been verified.

The inspection will focus on the following systems: • AHU’s sequences of operation • Heat Exchangers • Local exhaust fans control • Ground Source Heat Pump loop and Hot Water boilers control • Zone heating systems control • Control systems network communication verification • Control software verification • Control graphics verification • Point trendlogs review

9.3 Commissioning Schedule for Electrical Systems

Pre-start-up and start-up inspection (Phase I and Phase II):-

1. Power Systems

Main Distribution System: Testing and commissioning as defined in the construction specifications. The Contractor will conduct "megger" tests of feeders. a. Distribution panel board testing b. Moulded Case Circuit Breaker testing c. Motor control centers testing d. Motors surveys and inspections e. Disconnect switches testing f. Receptacles start-up report

2. Low Voltage Systems



a. Low Voltage Lighting Devices Testing b. Low voltage relay cabinet start-up report c. Interior lighting start-up report

3. Emergency Power Systems

Power availability will be verified at all equipment requiring emergency power.

4. Fire Alarm Systems These systems will be verified only after all aspects of the life safety and security systems are complete. Testing by the Contractor will be monitored by the Designer and include complete verification in accordance with ULC/CAN S537-M90. After receipt by the Commissioning Manager of the Commissioning Report, the Commissioning Agency will demonstrate all devices and zones to the Commissioning Authority, Project Manager and Property Manager.

9.4 Commissioning Schedule for Integrated Systems

Integrated Fire Protection Systems: .1. Upon completion of individual system tests, tests of the integrated systems shall be

performed to verify that all components work together.

9.5 Commissioning Reports

The commissioning coordinator shall indicate at the commissioning schedule as a milestone dates the submission of the commissioning reports.

9.6 Training and Demonstration

The dedicated time frame shall be allowed for training and demonstration of building systems operation and maintenance to the building owner facility personnel. The commissioning schedule and time frame allowed shall reflect instructions and training tables indicated in Section 01 91 15– Commissioning – Training.

9.7 Indoor air quality – Air Flushing Period

The commissioning schedule shall indicate flush period just before owner move-in date in order to satisfy IAQ and LEED 2009 EQ3.2 Credit point.

END OF COMMISSIONING PLAN

Queensborough Community Centre Section 01 91 15 New Westminster, BC Page 1 of 10 COMMISSIONING – TRAINING September 08 2011


PART 1 TRAINING

.1 The building systems training for Owners Operating Personnel shall be coordinated by the Commissioning Coordinator. The training shall include all components as identified in tables below.

.2 Training Objectives: .1 Training shall be in sufficient detail and of sufficient duration to meet the following

objectives: .1 Safe, reliable and energy-efficient operation of all systems in all normal and

all emergency modes and under all conditions. .2 Effective ongoing inspection and measurement of system performance. .3 Proper preventive maintenance, diagnosis and troubleshooting. .4 Service and repair of all systems, equipment and components. .5 Ability to update documentation and input on future building modifications. .6 Ability to operate equipment and systems under emergency conditions

without assistance or until appropriate qualified assistance arrives. .2 For training of O & M personnel to be effective, it is to be implemented during the

later stages of construction, to allow for familiarization with the facility and the installed systems.

.3 Long Term Ongoing Training .1 “Long-term” ongoing training is not included in commissioning activities. However,

training courses and training materials must be designed to permit long term ongoing training well into the future.

.4 Co-ordination and Monitoring .1 The Commissioning Authority shall co-ordinate all participants for training and shall

monitor all training. .2 The Contractor shall co-ordinate and implements all training.

.5 Responsibilities .1 The Commissioning Authority shall:

.1 In conjunction with the Owner ensure all designated O & M personnel will be available for training during later stages of construction for purposes of familiarization with the facility and all installed systems,

.2 Review the quality of the Contractor’s training and training materials meets all requirements of the project



.2 The Contractor shall have overall responsibility to provide, coordinate, document, record all training including videotaping and shall provide all training materials, training and classroom times, Contractor’s personnel, professional trainers, manufacturer’s resources for training purposes and be responsible for: .1 Direct all training .2 Implementation of all training activities .3 Coordination among instructors .4 Quality of training and training materials.

.6 Trainees .1 Shall include O & M personnel selected for operating and maintaining the project, the

Facility Manager, building operators, maintenance staff, security staff, technical specialists (as applicable).

.7 Instructors .1 Instructors shall include:

.1 Consultant and/or Commissioning Authority: To provide instruction on the Design Philosophy, Design Criteria, Design Intents, and description of all systems.

.2 Contractor: To provide instruction on the operation of specific systems, equipment or components, including start up, operation, shut down, features of controls, such as reasons for, results of, implications on associated systems of, adjustment of set points of control and limit safety devices.

.3 Factory trained and certified manufacturer’s maintenance specialist personnel: to provide instruction on start up, operation, care, maintenance, shut down of equipment for which they have certified installation, started up and carried out PV tests.

.4 Professional trainers: Where the Contractor is not deemed to be able to deliver the quality or level or training required.

.8 Training Requirements

.1 Organization: Training of O & M personnel shall consist of three main parts:

.1 Familiarization sessions organized for all systems during construction and installation stage and equipment commissioning.

.2 Hands on training: shall be provided on all systems, components and equipment and explanations of all commissioning procedures shall be given during the commissioning phase.

.3 Classroom sessions: shall be provided during Phase 4 – Commissioning, with instruction regarding functional requirements, system philosophy, system operation and use of the Building Management Manual and all other commissioning documentation.

.2 Content

.1 Training requirements for building systems are included in table format in this appendix and in the relevant commissioning specifications of various divisions.



.2 Training shall include:

.1 Review of the facility

.2 Functional requirements

.3 System philosophy – Design Criteria, design Intents, why the system was designed in this way, why certain settings are important and should not be changed without proper authority, limitations of each system, including emergency procedures

.4 Review of system layout and equipment, components and controls

.5 System operating sequences, including interaction between systems forming part of integrated systems, step by step directions for starting up and shutting down all systems, closing and opening valves, dampers and switches, adjusting control settings, turning motors on and off, emergency procedures

.6 Maintenance and servicing of systems, equipment and components

.7 Troubleshooting diagnosis – symptoms, signs, causes and corrective measures. For some equipment, this need only be a general knowledge, but should be enough to allow the operator to describe the problem adequately and to take emergency measures until qualified help arrives.

.8 Review of O & M documentation

.3 Instructional Materials .1 General: All instructional material shall be produced in a digital electronic

form that will permit future training for replacement O & M personnel to the same degree of detail and depth as supplied by initial training.

.2 Training materials shall include at least the following: .1 “As Built” Contract Documents .2 Building Management Manual – containing the Operating Manual

and Maintenance Manual. Copies of the Building Management Manual shall be made available to O & M personnel prior to the familiarization sessions for retention throughout the training period for purposes of self study.

.3 TAB, PV Reports .3 Instructional material shall be supplemented as necessary by:

.1 Transparencies for overhead projectors

.2 35 mm slide presentations

.3 Manufacturers training videos. These should be screened by the Commissioning Agency and reviewed by the Consultant at least six months prior to pre start up inspections before being included as part of the training material.

.4 Equipment models .4 Instructors shall be responsible for the content and quality of training

materials for all training sessions under their jurisdiction.



.4 Training Plan

.1 A training Plan developed by the Contractor for each discipline based upon project requirements shall be provided within 12 weeks of award of General Contract.

.2 Submit the training Plan to the Commissioning Authority for review and comment at least 12 weeks prior to the proposed training dates. Update and resubmit as required.

.3 Include an agenda and a course outline summarizing the content and duration of training.

.4 Co-ordinate the date(s) of the training session (s) with the Commissioning Authority. Commissioning Authority to organize the location and provide the lists of participants.

.5 Prepare a summary of the training sessions. Indicate dates, subject matter, and all personnel present for training. After training, submit the training summary to the Commissioning Authority.

.6 Record the time, date and subject matter of training sessions as they occur. Indicate all those who are present at each training session.

.5 Delivery of Training .1 Training shall normally be provided during regular working hours prior to take

over of the project. .2 Adequate time for training is to be included in Construction and Completion

Schedule. .3 Each training session should not be longer than three hours and provided

between the hours of 0830 – 1130 and 1300 – 1600. .4 Training is to be hands on, classroom, oral, written and audio/visual. .5 Training is to be completed prior to acceptance of facility. .6 Training should include demonstrations by the trained O & M personnel so as

to show confidence in, and depth of understanding of, all systems and equipment, and to demonstrate completeness of training.

.7 Upon completion of these demonstrations, the Contractors responsible for all training shall provide a written report signed by Instructors and witnessed by Consultant and/or Commissioning Authority. This report shall be deposited with the Commissioning Authority.

.9 Training Activities: .1 See the following attached building systems activities Training Plan. This is a broad

scope outline summary for the Contractors information and incorporation into the project training plan.

Ecole Au Coeur De L’ile Section 01 91 15 Comox, BC Page 5 of 10 COMMISSIONING – TRAINING May 2010


TRAINING ACTIVITIES - MECHANICAL

MECHANICAL (THIS IS BROAD OUTLINE ONLY) This Training Plan forms Part of Section 01820

Systems and Goals Instructor Content (approximately 30% Theory, 70%

practical) Duration Instruction Materials

and Tools Design Philosophy 1. General overview of design concepts 2. Awareness of interaction of mechanical

systems

Engineer and/or Commissioning Authority (CA)

1. Explanation of mechanical and related electrical systems, their interaction

2. Site visit in early stages of project 3. Classroom sessions during commissioning

stage

2 hours

1. Schematic of layouts & controls

2. Installed system, equipment

3. Design Criteria, Design Intents

HVAC System AHU Units Heat Pump Units Heat Exchangers Supply, Exhaust Fans Radiant Slab System 1. To learn details of all systems installed 2. To develop in depth knowledge of the

operation of each system

Installing Contractor, Equipment Manufacturer, CA

1. Explanation of operational concepts of systems and components including heat pumps and circulation pumps.

2. Equipment operation and adjustment 3. Review of O & M Manuals 4. Equipment troubleshooting 5. Observation during construction 6. Site visits, classroom sessions

2 hours 1. “ As built” HVAC drawings

2. Systems Operations Manual

3. Maintenance Manual 4. Installed systems,

equipment 5. Controls Schematics

and Reports 6. Demonstrations







and Tools BAS, EMCS Control systems for mechanical systems. Building control components. System programming. Project specific controls: (e.g. diversified controls: “smart panels” for central and local HVAC systems Debugging software

System Installing Contractor, EMCS Trade, CA

1. Explanation of operational concepts of the building systems and components

2. Use of various cycles and controls 3. Equipment and operation and adjustment 4. Review of O & M Manuals 5. Equipment and system troubleshooting 6. Observation during construction 7. Site visits, classroom sessions

2 hours

1. “As built” HVAC and control drawings

2. Systems Operations Manual

3. Maintenance Manual 4. Installed systems,

equipment 5. Controls Schematics

and Reports 6. Demonstrations

Water Analysis and Treatment 1. Training in O & M of water

treatment equipment 2. To learn how to maintain

specified water quality

Installing Contractor, Water Treatment Manufacturer, CA

1. Description of equipment, systems, chemicals, justification of specified standards, sampling collection and testing techniques, analysis of raw water, treated water

2. Review of O & M Manuals 3. Equipment troubleshooting 4. Observation during construction 5. Classroom sessions

1 Hour 1. Demonstrations 2. Laboratory facilities 3. Chemical and

bacteriological analysis

4. Water treatment O & M Manuals







and Tools Fire Protection and Suppression Systems Sprinkler systems. Local application systems 1. Training in start up, shut down,

emergency requirements 2. Training in interconnection with

HVAC, smoke control systems, Fire Dept

Contractor, local Fire Dept., CA

1. Periodic testing 2. Annual maintenance 3. Review of O & M Manuals 4. Equipment, system troubleshooting 5. Observation during installation 6. Classroom sessions

1 Hour

1. Demonstrations 2. “As built” piping

drawings 3. Systems Operation

Manual 4. Equipment O & M

Manual 5. Controls Schematics &

Reports 6. Commissioning

Reports

Plumbing Systems Domestic Cold Water System Domestic Hot Water System Sanitary System 1. To learn details of all systems installed 2. To develop in depth knowledge of the


Installing Contractor, Equipment Manufacturer, CA

1. Annual maintenance 2. Review of O & M Manuals 3. Equipment, system troubleshooting 4. Observation during installation 5. Classroom sessions

1 Hour 1. Demonstrations 2. ‘As built” piping

drawings 3. Systems Operation

Manual 4. Equipment Mtce.

Manual 5. TAB/PV Reports 6. Controls, Schematics,

Reports



TRAINING ACTIVITIES – ELECTRICAL

ELECTRICAL (THIS IS BROAD OUTLINE ONLY) This Training Plan forms Part of Section 01820



and Tools Design Philosophy 1. General overview of design

concepts 2. Awareness of interaction of

mechanical systems

Engineer, CA 1. Explanation of electrical and related mechanical systems, their interaction

2. Site visit in early stages of project 3. Classroom sessions during commissioning

stage

2 hours 1. Schematic of layouts & controls



Secondary Distribution System Power Distribution Panels Emergency Circuits Motor Control Centers

Installing Contractor, Equipment Manufacturer, Servicing Contractor

1. Start up, testing of O & M of required conditions, controls (operating, limit, safety). Annual maintenance, restart after emergency shut down.

2. Review of O & M Manuals 3. Equipment troubleshooting 4. Observation during installation 5. Classroom sessions

1 Hour




4. Record drawings and site Conditions

5. TAB & PV Reports 6. Maintenance Manual 7. Schematics and

Reports 8. Demonstrations



TRAINING ACTIVITIES – ELECTRICAL




and Tools Emergency Generator and ATS 1. To learn details of all systems

installed 2. To develop in depth knowledge of the


Installing Contractor, Equipment Manufacturer, Servicing Contractor



1 Hour







Fire Alarm System Installing Contractor, Equipment Manufacturer, Servicing Contractor, CA



1 hour









TRAINING ACTIVITIES - ELECTRICAL




and Tools Lighting and Low Voltage Lighting Systems

Installing Contractor, Equipment Manufacturer, Servicing Contractor, EMS Contractor, CA



1 hour





5. Maintenance Manual 6. Schematics and


Access and Security Systems Installing Contractor, Equipment Manufacturer, Servicing Contractor, CA



2 hours








_____________________________________________________________________________________ URBAN ARTS ARCHITECTURE401 – 134 Abbott St, Vancouver, BC V6B 2K4 (604) 683 5060

02 EXISTING CONDITIONS SECTION 02 40 00 DEMOLITION OF EXISTING STRUCTURE

page 1 of 10

1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Work Included:

.1 Labour, materials, equipment and services necessary for the following:

.1 Removal and disposal of existing building materials as indicated

.2 Removal, identification and storage of existing building materials as indicated.

.2 Prepare and execute Indoor Air Quality Management (IAQ) Plan as per CaGBC LEED NC 2009 requirements listed in Indoor Air Quality (IEQ) Credit 3.1: Construction IAQ Management Plan: During Construction.

.3 Coordinate work with Asbestos Abatement contractor to remove the following:

.1 Drywall mud as indicated

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Municipal Building By-laws

.2 WorkSafe BC Regulations

.3 Environmental Management Act and Hazardous Waste Regulation

.4 CSA S350 Code of Practise for Safety in Demolition of Structures.

.5 CAN/CSA-S269.2 Access Scaffolding for Construction Purposes


.1 Section 01 81 13 Sustainable Design Requirements

.2 Section 01 74 19 Construction Waste Management and Disposal

.3 Section 02 08 00 Hazardous Material Abatement


.1 Meet or exceed the 5 recommended control measures of the Sheet Metal + Air Conditioning Contractor’s National Association (SMACNA) IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction, 2nd Edition 2007, ANSI/SMACNA 008-2008 (Chapter 3).

.2 Conform to requirements of CaGBC LEED 2009 NC Credit MR 2: Construction Waste Management, to achieve 2 points.

.3 Conform to requirements of CaGBC LEED 2009 NC Credit 3.1: Construction IAQ Management Plan: During Construction.

1.5 DEMOLITION DRAWINGS

.1 Where required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit for approval drawings, diagrams or details showing sequence of disassembly work and supporting structures.

.2 Submissions to bear stamp of qualified professional engineer registered in Province of British Columbia.




page 2 of 10

1.6 SUBMITTALS

.1 Deconstruction Plan, including Pre-Demolition Audit.

.2 Indoor Air Quality Management Plan: Within 10 calendar days after receipt of Notice of Award of Contract, or prior to any work being done, whichever occurs sooner, the Contractor shall submit to the Consultant an Indoor Air Quality Management Plan conforming to the requirements of CaGBC’s LEED 2009 NC IEQ Credit 3.1: Construction IAQ Management Plan: During Construction.

.3 Submit a minimum of 6 photos per week, to the Consultant, documenting each of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors Association’s (SMACNA) recommended IAQ control measures.

1.7 PROTECTION

.1 Do not close or obstruct safety exits, adjacent sidewalks, hydrants, parking or storage areas without prior approval of Owner.

.2 Prevent movement, settlement or damage of adjacent parts of existing building to remain. Provide bracing, shoring as required. Make good damage caused by demolition.

.3 Take precautions to support affected structures and, if safety of building being demolished or adjacent structures or services appears to be endangered, cease operations and notify Consultant.

.4 Prevent debris from blocking surface drainage system, elevators, mechanical and electrical systems which must remain in operation.

.5 Protect all adjacent surfaces and glazing.

1.8 QUALIFICATIONS

.1 Salvage or Demolition Firm: Company(ies) experienced and specializing in performing the Work of this Section with documented experience in similar types of deconstruction work.

.2 Qualifications of Workers: Provide a Supervisor who shall be present at all times during the deconstruction work and who shall be thoroughly familiar with the work required and who shall direct all work. Provide one (1) person on site who is responsible for maintaining the safety barriers and protection of the workers and the public.

.3 Licensed facilities: Only those brokerage, storage, transfer and disposal facilities which comply with the requirements of the “Greater Vancouver Sewerage and Drainage District Municipal Solid Waste and Recyclable Material Regulatory Bylaw No. 181, 1996 as amended by Bylaw 183, 1996” and those licensed by other jurisdictions shall be used by the Contractor for the recycling and disposal of waste materials generated at deconstruction and renovation projects.

1.9 EXISTING CONDITIONS

.1 Take over structures to be demolished based on their condition on tender date that is accepted.




page 3 of 10

.2 The Contractor shall accept the site as it exists and will be responsible for all deconstruction work as required.

.3 The Contractor shall visit the site at his own expense prior to the submission of tenders and must take whatever time is required to ascertain existing site conditions and surrounding features related to the proposed deconstruction, and ensure himself that conditions are suitable for execution of the work.

.4 Where non-visible (ie. concealed by other materials) conditions upon exposure, are revealed to be other than those indicated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall immediately inform the Consultant, should such variance of conditions result in a contemplated change to the cost of the work. Should an alternate method of deconstruction or change of materials be appropriate, the Consultant shall immediately give his decision before the Work proceeds.

.5 If during the course of deconstruction Work, the Contractor observes or suspects the existence of hazardous materials in areas of the structure or components of the buildings not previously noted, the Contractor shall immediately stop Work in the immediate area and notify the Owner. See Section 02 08 00 Hazardous Material Abatement.

.6 Prior to start of work arrange for a site visit together with Consultant and Owner, to examine existing exterior and interior site conditions adjacent to deconstruction and new construction work. The Contractor shall be responsible for taking pictures of any existing damage and record same in writing to avoid any disputes at a later date.

1.10 DECONSTRUCTION PLANNING

.1 Pre-Demolition Audit

.1 Contractor to provide Owner with an inventory of materials to be salvaged, recycled or disposed of. Materials shall be quantified by metric weight or volume.

.2 The primary objective of a pre-demolition audit is to determine the quantities of reusable and recyclable building materials and quantities of materials to be disposed of.

.2 Contractor to provide owner with a Deconstruction Plan which shall include:

.1 Pre-demolition audit, complete with:

.1 Quantities of materials (in metric weight or volume) to be salvaged for reuse, recycled and/or sent for disposal.

.2 Destination of materials listed above.

.3 Deconstruction schedule, including methodology and sequencing.

.4 Indicate interruption of utility services.

.5 Indicate coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.

.6 Location, security and protection of storage areas (if materials are to be stored on site).




page 4 of 10

.7 Details on materials handling and removal procedures on project sites with space constraints.

.3 Contractor to develop and implement a LEED NC 2009 compliant Indoor Air Quality Plan as per the requirements of this Section.

1.11 COORDINATION AND COOPERATION

.1 The contractor shall take every common and reasonable precaution to avoid damage and minimize interruption to adjacent property and services. All costs associated with making good any damage and/or providing temporary service or protection shall be borne by the contractor.

.2 Cooperate and coordinate with the work of other related trades on which the work of this section depends, in order that the work may proceed in an orderly and timely basis in accordance with the contractor's schedule and to avoid duplication of costs and work.

.3 Obtain written permission from Owner when deconstruction equipment will traverse, infringe upon, or limit access to other areas of the facility.

2 EXECUTION

2.1 PREPARATION

.1 Mark location of all utilities available in the Lower Mainland – Contact “BC ONE CALL” at 1-800-474-6886 (this service will initiate information to select utilities, depending on the municipality in which the project is located). Contact other utility providers in area, including gas, cable, phone, water, sewer, etc.).

.2 Fill out and submit City of New Westminster’s Underground Utility Locate Process Checklist prior to start of Work.

.3 Shut-off, disconnect, cap-off and seal all affected plumbing, mechanical, and electrical services, in accordance with the requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction, and the requirements of the IAQ Management Plan before starting deconstruction.

.4 Clearly mark location of all salvaged material’s storage areas as indicated on the Deconstruction Plan and provide and erect barriers and security devices as required.

.5 Label and identify locations, orientation and layout of assemblies identified for reinstallation.

2.2 INSPECTION

.1 Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching.

.2 After uncovering, inspect conditions affecting performance of work.

.3 Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.




page 5 of 10

2.3 PROTECTION

.1 Create and implement Indoor Air Quality Management Plan for the construction and pre-occupancy phases of the building that minimizes dusting, airborne fungi, and other debris, and includes implementation of the following 5 SMACNA recommended control measures:

.1 HVAC PROTECTION: Mitigate contamination of both HVAC equipment and occupied spaces using, at a minimum, the following measures:

.1 Protect all HVAC equipment from dust and odours and seal all duct and equipment openings with plastic

.2 If the system is operational during construction, protect the return/negative pressure side of the system and/or install and maintain temporary filters over grilles and openings.

.3 All filtration media to be MERV 8 or better.

.2 SOURCE CONTROL: Specify control measures for materials containing VOC’s:

.1 Recover, isolate and ventilate containers housing toxic materials

.2 Exhaust fumes from idling vehicles and gasoline-fuelled tools to the exterior of the building through the use of funnels or temporary piping.

.3 PATHWAY INTERRUPTION: isolate areas of work to prevent contamination of clean or occupied spaces:

.1 Ventilate using 100% outside air to exhaust contaminated air directly to the outside during installation of VOC-emitting materials.

.4 HOUSEKEEPING: Institute cleaning activities designed to control contaminants in building spaces during construction and before occupancy:

.1 Protect all porous building materials from exposure to moisture and install them in a clean area before installation.

.2 Use vacuum cleaners with high-efficiency particulate filters, increase cleaning frequency and use wetting agents for dust.

.5 SCHEDULING: Coordinate construction activities to minimize or eliminate disruption of operations in the occupied portions of the building:

.1 If necessary, conduct activities with high-pollution potential during off-hours.

.2 Replace all filtration media at the end of Work of this contract.




page 6 of 10

.6 Conduct operations with minimum interference to public or private accesses. Maintain protected egress and access at all times. Do not close or obstruct safety exits, adjacent sidewalks, hydrants, parking or storage areas without prior approval of Owner.

.7 Cease operations immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger. Notify Owner. Do not resume operations until directed by Owner.

.8 Provide and maintain all legal and necessary guards, railings and warning signs during the execution of the work to fully protect all persons and Owner from loss, damage, death or injury through the neglect, carelessness or incompetence of the Contractor or his employees or the condition or handling of equipment.

.9 It is the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that the methods and equipment used to deconstruct the various areas do not exceed the safe loading capacity of the structure or cause unnecessary damage to sections of the structure which will form part of the finished work. Engage the services of a Professional Engineer registered in the Province of British Columbia as necessary to ensure the safe deconstruction of the work.

.10 The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the design and adequacy of any temporary shoring and/or bracing required during deconstruction. Include all necessary signs, barricades and screens as required for the safety of the structure, third parties and workmen.

.11 Protect site improvements such as sidewalks, curbs, existing landscaped and asphalt areas, and all interior finishes that lie along the path of removal.

.12 Prevent debris from blocking items including, but not limited to, surface drainage inlets and systems, elevators, mechanical and electrical systems which must remain in operation. Conform to Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan.

.13 If permanently installed air handlers are used during construction, filtration media with a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) of 8 must be used at each return air grille as determined by Ashrae 52.2-1999.

.14 Prevent overloading of any part of the building. Do not cut, drill or otherwise sleeve any structural member, slab or demising wall, without written approval of the Consultant.

.15 Provide temporary connections for emergency lighting, lighting, sprinklers and fire alarms as work proceeds.

.16 Protect existing fixtures and services during the work. Any fixtures that need to be removed to complete the work shall be removed carefully and stored by the Contractor. The Contractor shall clean and have items reinstalled as noted, required or as directed.




page 7 of 10

.17 Where applicable the Contractor shall separate the work being done in existing buildings from the remainder of the building by using solid hoardings and dustproof screens.

2.4 DISMANTLING AND SALVAGE REQUIREMENTS

.1 Perform work in a safe manner at all times in accordance with WorkSafe BC, project, and reference standard safety requirements and protocols.

.2 Remove existing equipment, services, and obstacles where required for refinishing or making good of existing surfaces, and replace as work progresses.

.3 Materials that cannot be salvaged for reuse shall be source separated for recycling including wood, metal, concrete and asphalt. Refer to the Project Waste Management Plan and Section 01 74 00: Cleaning and Waste Management.

.4 Do not sell, burn or bury materials on site.

.5 Ensure that before and during deconstruction the structure is protected from damage until that part of the structure is ready to be deconstructed.

.6 Deconstruct parts of existing building as shown on drawings and in accordance with submitted Deconstruction Plan. Include removal, or removal and relocation, of equipment, fixtures, and services as indicated.

.7 Where existing materials are to be re-used in the work, use special care in removal, handling, storage and re-installation to assure proper function in the completed Work. Reinstallation shall be performed by trades people skilled in that particular type of work.

.8 Wherever and whenever the Contractor removes more material than required, directed or intended to be removed as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Consultant, the replacement of that amount of material will be at the Contractor's expense. Unnecessary damage to parts of the structure forming part of the completed work shall be repaired by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense.

.9 Where applicable, at locations where reinforcing bars have been cut during deconstruction, mark ends with flag tape and then paint ends of bars with a highly visible colour zinc-rich paint, Galvicon or pre-approved alternate.

.10 Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required, as indicated to allow future tie-ins.

.11 Cut rigid materials using power saw or core drill. Pneumatic or impact tools not allowed.

.12 Wood stud, joist, rafter, truss, and column substrates and wood brackets are to be protected. Do not over cut.

.13 Concrete substrates are to be protected. Do not over cut.

.14 Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.




page 8 of 10

.15 Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

.16 Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.

2.5 STORAGE OF SALVAGED MATERIALS

.1 Salvaged materials shall be stored in the same manner as for similar new materials. Conform to Project’s IAQ Management Plan.

.2 Provide security and protective measures to protect the salvaged material from mishandling, theft, vandalism and fire.

2.6 PATCHING AND REPAIRS

.1 General:

.1 Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by selective demolition operations.

.2 Fit work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.

.3 At penetration of fire-rated wall, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire-rated material, full thickness of construction element to satisfy applicable standards.

.4 Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes; for continuous surfaces refinish to nearest intersection; for an assembly, refinish entire unit.

.2 Repairs:

.1 Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new materials in accordance with Contract Documents.

.2 Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining construction in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing.

.3 Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are demolished extend from one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

.4 Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.




page 9 of 10

2.7 CLEANUP

.1 At the end of each day's work, leave work in clean and safe condition so that no part is in danger of toppling of falling. Protect interiors of parts, and adjacent elements not be demolished from exterior demolition at all times.

3 SCHEDULES

3.1 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SCHEDULE

.1 Expansion and Renovation Work:

.1 Remove existing partitions, walls, and roofs as noted.

.2 Remove selected finishes on interior surfaces, including existing base and flooring, and ceiling finishes as indicated.

.3 Remove existing trim, millwork, equipment and fixtures as indicated.

.4 Remove existing steel awning support structure, beams and miscellaneous steel as noted.

.5 Remove existing ceiling fixtures, suspension grid, and lights as indicated.

.6 Remove existing electrical and mechanical equipment, and plumbing fixtures, as indicated.

.2 Envelope Remediation Work

.1 Exterior wall cladding (at areas indicated) including wood sidings and trims, flashings, supports and sheathing paper.

.2 Roof cladding (at areas indicated) including cedar shakes, metal roof panels, low-slope roof membranes, gutter membranes, insulation, vapour retarder, flashings, supports and associated accessories.

.3 Exterior beam cladding, including wood sidings, flashing, and associated accessories.

.4 Plywood and OSB sheathing.

.5 Insulations.

.6 Swing doors and windows.

.7 Curtain wall assemblies and associated accessories.

.8 T-bar skylights at location indicated.

.9 Gutters and rainwater leaders.

.10 Roof fascias and barge boards.

.11 Wood soffits and associated accessories.




page 10 of 10

3.2 SELECTIVE SALVAGE SCHEDULE

.1 Remove and store, as directed by Consultant, selected building elements including but not limited to:

.2 Expansion And Renovation Work:

.1 Glu-laminated beams

.3 Envelope Remediation Work:

.1 Electrical light fixtures.

.2 Electrical outlets plates.


City of New Westminster Section 02 82 13Queensborough Community Centre HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ABATEMENT ACL Project 10695New Westminster, BC Page 1 of 22

Astech Consultants Ltd., #101-Bldg.C-17802-66 Avenue, Cloverdale, BC, V3S 7X1 Telephone 604-575-1122 Fax.604-575-1152th

Section 02 82 13 11.09.02

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ABATEMENT

Article Heading

1.0 GENERAL1.1 DOCUMENTS

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

1.4 RELATED WORK

1.5 TERMINOLOGY (Definitions)

1.6 APPLICABLE REGULATIONS AND GUIDELINES

1.7 SUBMITTALS AND NOTICES

1.8 SITE SECURITY

1.9 EMERGENCY PLANNING

1.10 PERSONNEL PROTECTION

2.0 PRODUCTS2.1 MATERIALS

2.2 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

3.0 EXECUTION3.1 HIGH RISK EXECUTION

3.1.1 Not Applicable

3.2 MODERATE RISK EXECUTION

3.2.1 Moderate Risk Work Area Preparation

3.2.2 Isolation of the Work Area for Modified Moderate Risk Work

3.2.3 Asbestos Abatement

3.2.4 Pipe Insulation Removal Using Glove Bag Method

3.2.5 Entry and Exit Procedures

3.2.6 Asbestos Enclosure Procedures

3.2.7 Clean Up

3.2.8 Air Monitoring

3.3 DISPOSAL

3.4 RE-ESTABLISHMENT OF WORK AREA SYSTEMS AND OBJECTS



1.0 GENERAL

1.1 DOCUMENTS

1.1.1 This Section of the specification forms part of the Contract Documents and is to be read, interpreted,

and coordinated with all other parts.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

1.2.1 Work under this Contract covers all work activities including but not limited to the removal, disposal,

encapsulation, enclosure, handling of, or work activities in close proximity to building materials that contain

asbestos or are likely to be contaminated with asbestos, PCB’s, mercury, lead construction materials, stored

chemicals, and other hazardous materials.

1.2.2 During the time of hazardous material handling (work at risk of disturbing hazardous building

materials), the Abatement Contractor shall coordinate work, and take full responsibility for the health and safety

of all personnel working in the contracted areas.

1.2.3 Workers must wear appropriate respiratory protection while performing work activities that are at risk

of disturbing asbestos containing materials or other hazardous materials . Consequently, workers within the work

area will be required to wear respiratory protection acceptable to the Workers' Compensation Board of British

Columbia and Astech Consultants Ltd.

1.2.4 All scaffolding systems, used on this project, shall be designed by a professional engineer, registered

in the province of British Columbia. Once the scaffolding has been erected, and prior to use by other trades, the

scaffolding engineer shall inspect the scaffolding and issue a signed and sealed letter to Astech Consultants Ltd.,

stating that the scaffolding has been erected in accordance with his design, is structurally sound, and in

accordance with the Workers' Compensation Board of British Columbia requirements.

1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

The Work under this Contract shall be performed as described in the Technical Specifications and Contract

Documents. The Work shall include but not necessarily be limited to the following:

1.3.1 Supply all labour, materials, services, and equipment, necessary to safely remove and dispose of all

hazardous materials, and materials that are likely to be contaminated with hazardous materials from the designated

areas of the buildings as described below, and associated activities. The Contractor and his sub-trades shall work

multiple shifts and weekends, if necessary to ensure completion on schedule. Cost of multiple shifts and

weekends shall be included within the tendered price.

Client: CITY OF NEW WESTMINSTER

Project: HAZMAT ABATEMENT PROJECT for the

ADDITION/RENOVATION PROJECT at

Location: QUEENSBOROUGH COMMUNITY CENTRE

920 EWEN AVENUE

NEW WESTMINSTER, BC

1.3.2 BASE BID

1.3.2.1 General Notes

a) It is the intent of this specification to remove all hazardous materials and materials that are

contaminated with hazardous materials from the Contracted Areas, some of which are concealed and

multi-layered. The Contractor shall be responsible for determining the quantities of concealed and/or

multi-layered materials prior to submission of their Tender. This Section of the Specification must

be read in conjunction with all other parts of the Contract Documents.



b) The Abatement Contractor shall carry at least five (5) million dollars of Environmental Pollution and

Contamination Insurance with asbestos inclusion, and General Liability Insurance in the amount of five

(5) million dollars, unless there is a more stringent requirement in the Tender Documents. Evidence

of such insurance in such form as may be required by the Owner shall be lodged with the Owner prior

to the commencement of any work.

c) Destructive testing was not performed during the asbestos materials survey. If potential asbestos

containing materials are exposed during demolition activities, potential asbestos containing materials

shall be considered to be asbestos containing until laboratory analysis or further investigation

determines otherwise.

If the Contractor, during work activities, should discover hazardous materials, asbestos containing

materials, or potential asbestos containing materials not included in the Description of Work for this

project, he shall immediately cease all work in that area and contact Astech Consultants Ltd., who

will initiate immediate appropriate action.

d) Air sampling in accordance with the Workers' Compensation Board of British Columbia requirements

during asbestos abatement activities will be performed by the Owner’s Consultant.

e) The Owner shall provide the Contractor with access to an existing electrical panel (non GFI) for the

Abatement Contractor's use during the project. The Contractor shall only utilize the provided breaker

for his electrical requirements during the project. (see article 3.1.1.3 & 3.2.1.4)

f) The Contractor may use public sanitary facilities for abatement personnel at the building, and maintain

them in a clean and sanitary condition throughout the project.

g) The Owner shall provide potable cold water for construction purposes. The Contractor shall connect

to Owner's existing water system. Connection location must be agreeable by Owner.

1.3.2.2 Ground Floor - Exercise Gym,

Ground Floor - Northeast Entrance Foyer, and

Ground Floor - Administration Office Area (3 Offices, Storage Room, and Closet)

a) Remove and dispose of as asbestos waste, all filling compounds from the gypsum board/wood

wall/ceiling systems (some concealed), as indicated on the Architectural Drawings. Decontaminate

affected window and door units of all filling compounds for later removal by others.

Gypsum board filling compounds shall be disposed of as asbestos waste. Gypsum board materials

shall be thoroughly decontaminated of asbestos and disposed of or recycled in a manner applicable

to gypsum board waste and acceptable to the BC Ministry of Environment. Alternatively, gypsum

board materials, complete with asbestos containing materials may be transported to an approved

landfill site that will accept mixed asbestos and gypsum waste for disposal as asbestos waste. Prior

to shipping from site, the Contractor must provide documentation of acceptance of waste at landfill

site. At the conclusion of removal, apply a liberal coat of encapsulating sealer (Bakor 120-19 or

equivalent) to the edges of the gypsum board that were exposed during removal (where Northeast

Entrance Foyer abuts Main Lobby).

b) Dust and debris on the floor and other surfaces are to be vacuumed up with HEPA filtered vacuum

equipment, or removed by damp wiping, and disposed of as asbestos waste (some concealed).

1.3.2.3 Ground Floor - Administration Office Area (3 Offices, Storage Room, and Closet), and

Ground Floor - Wall Cavities at Administration Office Area (where walls are to be removed)

a) Remove and dispose of as asbestos waste, all paper backed sheet floorings and paper residue

(concealed beneath carpet and beneath some wall systems to be removed for this project), as

indicated on the Architectural Drawings.





1.3.2.4 Ground Floor - Royal Room Storage Room

a) Remove and dispose of as asbestos waste, all filling compounds from the gypsum board ceiling

system (some concealed), as indicated on the Architectural Drawings.








equivalent) to the edges of the gypsum board that were exposed during removal.



1.3.2.5 Ground Floor - Port Room Storage Room

a) Remove and dispose of as asbestos waste, the filling compounds from up to half of the gypsum board

ceiling system (some concealed), as required to access the rain water drain piping and as indicated

on the Architectural Drawings.











1.3.2.6 Ground Floor - Royal Room,

Ground Floor - Port Room,

Ground Floor - Wreck Room (Northwest Corner Preschool Room),

Ground Floor - Samson Room, and

Ground Floor - Gymnasium

a) Remove and dispose of as asbestos waste, the filling compounds from the gypsum board/wood wall

systems (some concealed) 3 inches around window and door units to be removed, as indicated on

the Architectural Drawings. Decontaminate affected window and door units of all filling compounds

for later removal by others. Affected window and door units include 3 interior windows in the Royal

Room, all exterior window/door units in the Royal, Port, and Wreck Rooms, the exterior window in

the Samson Room, and the pass-through counter opening and 2 exterior door units at the east side

(currently closed off with plywood) in the Gymnasium.













1.3.2.7 Ground Floor - Main Lobby


systems (some concealed) at the east wall and north wall around the existing Administration Office

Area, as required to suit renovation activities and as indicated on the Architectural Drawings.









1.3.2.8 Ground Floor - Gymnasium


systems (some concealed), as required for installation of new door units as indicated on the

Architectural Drawings.











1.3.2.9 Ground Floor - Janitor Room,

Ground Floor - Electrical Room,

Ground Floor - Mechanical Room,

Ground Floor - West Entrance Lobby, and

Ground Floor - Southwest Corridor

a) Remove and dispose of as asbestos waste, the filling compounds from the gypsum board wall

systems by way of hole cuts to allow for installation of new electrical and plumbing lines, as indicated

on the Contract Drawings. Electrical and plumbing trades shall mark hole locations and sizes to be

cut by the Abatement Contractor.













1.3.2.10 Rooftop - Mechanical Room

a) Remove and dispose of as asbestos waste, the two pieces of gypsum board with filling compound

on the floor near the entrance door.








equivalent) to the edges of the gypsum board south wall that were exposed from previous removal.

b) Remove and dispose of as asbestos waste, the mastic on joints of ductwork to be removed for tie-in

and redirection, as indicated on the Contract Drawings. Mechanical trade shall mark where ductwork

is to be cut out by the Abatement Contractor.

c) Localized dust and debris on the floor and other surfaces are to be vacuumed up with HEPA filtered

vacuum equipment, or removed by damp wiping, and disposed of as asbestos waste (some

concealed).

1.3.3 SEPARATE PRICES

1.3.3.1 Separate Price #1 - Ground Floor - Main Lobby and Northwest Corridor

a) Where ceramic tile cove base is affected by the Separate Price re-flooring option, remove and dispose

of as asbestos waste, the ceramic tile cove base complete with filling compound and gypsum board.









b) Remove and dispose of as asbestos waste, the filling compounds from the gypsum board/wood wall

systems (some concealed) 3 inches around window and door units to be removed. Decontaminate

affected window and door units of all filling compounds for later removal by others. Affected window

and door units include between the Main Foyer and Southwest Corridor.









c) Dust and debris on the floor and other surfaces are to be vacuumed up with HEPA filtered vacuum




d) Once abatement is complete, the General Contractor shall fill in the openings with an appropriate

thickness of plywood to be flush with adjoining surface for installation of new cove base.

1.3.3.2 Separate Price #2 - Ground Floor - Royal Room Entrance Foyer, Southwest Corridor, West Vestibule,

and Men’s and Women’s Washrooms

a) Where ceramic tile cove base is affected by the Separate Price re-flooring option, remove and dispose

of as asbestos waste, the ceramic tile cove base complete with filling compound and gypsum board.









b) Where rubber cove base is affected by the Separate Price re-flooring option, carefully remove the

rubber cove base and adhesive so that gypsum board wall damage is kept to a minimum.

Decontaminate the rubber cove base of gypsum board filling compound and dispose of as non-

asbestos waste, or dispose of as asbestos waste. At the conclusion of removal, apply a liberal coat

of encapsulating sealer (Bakor 120-19 or equivalent) to surfaces of the gypsum board that were

exposed during removal.

c) Remove and dispose of as asbestos waste, the filling compounds from the gypsum board wall

systems (some concealed) 3 inches around window and door units to be removed. Decontaminate

affected window and door units of all filling compounds for later removal by others. Affected window

and door units include both sides of the Royal Room Entrance Foyer and south end of the Southwest

Corridor.









d) Remove and decontaminate of all filling compounds, the counters, partitions, and other fixtures

attached to the gypsum board wall systems from the Men’s and Women’s Washrooms.

e) Where ceramic tiles are adhered to wall surfaces in the Men’s and Women’s Washrooms, remove and

dispose of as asbestos waste, the ceramic tiles complete with filling compound and gypsum board.









f) Dust and debris on the floor and other surfaces are to be vacuumed up with HEPA filtered vacuum




g) Once abatement of ceramic tile cove base and gypsum board is complete, the General Contractor

shall fill in the openings as applicable with an appropriate thickness of plywood to be flush with

adjoining surface for installation of new cove base.

1.4 RELATED WORK

1.4.1 Not Applicable.

1.5 TERMINOLOGY (Definitions)

1.5.1 Air Monitoring - The process of measuring the fibre content of a known volume of air collected

during a specific period of time, in accordance with the Workers' Compensation Board of British Columbia

Occupational Health and Safety Regulation.

1.5.2 Airlock - A system for permitting ingress or egress without permitting air movement between a

contaminated area and an non-contaminated area, typically consisting of two curtained doorways at least six (6)

feet (1.83 metres) apart. Proper use of an airlock dictates that one passes through the first doorway into the

airlock, allowing the doorway sheeting to overlap and close off the opening before proceeding through the second

doorway, thereby preventing flow-through contamination.

1.5.3 Asbestos - A term used to identify a group of fibrous silicates. The most common types of asbestos

are, Chrysotile, Amosite, and Crocidolite. Other types of asbestos are Actinolite, Anthophyllite, and Tremolite.

1.5.4 Asbestos Banner Tape - A pre-manufactured three (3) inch wide white polyethylene banner tape

imprinted (red and black) with "DANGER - ASBESTOS - Cancer and Lung Disease Hazard - Authorized Personnel

Only - HEPA Respirators And Protective Clothing Are Required In This Area"

1.5.5 Asbestos Containing Materials - A manufactured material containing one percent (1%) or more

asbestos by weight at time of manufacture, or other materials that contain one percent (1%) or more asbestos

as determined by X-ray diffraction or optical polarizing analytical techniques.

1.5.6 Asbestos Warning Sign - A sign, readable from twenty-five feet, stating: WARNING ASBESTOS,

Cancer and Lung Disease Hazard, Authorized Personnel Only, HEPA Filtered Respirators and Protective Clothing

are Required in This Area.

1.5.7 Amended Water - Water with a non-ionic surfactant added for the purpose of reducing surface

tension to allow thorough wetting of asbestos containing materials.

1.5.8 Authorized Visitor - The Owner, the Owner's authorized representative, or a representative of any

regulatory or other agency having jurisdiction over the project.

1.5.9 Clean Room - A non-contaminated area or room which is part of the worker decontamination

enclosure facility, with provisions for storage of workers' street clothes and clean protective equipment.

1.5.10 Consultant (Asbestos Abatement Consultant and/or Hazardous Materials Consultant) - Astech

Consultants Ltd.

1.5.11 Containment - An isolation system designed to effectively contain asbestos fibres within a

designated work area where asbestos-containing materials are handled, removed, encapsulated, or enclosed.

1.5.12 Crated - Plywood self supporting structure built over equipment or materials of sufficient strength

to protect such equipment or materials from damage or contamination for the duration the project.

1.5.13 CSA - Canadian Standards Association.

1.5.14 Curtained Doorway - A device to allow ingress or egress from one room to another while permitting

minimal air movement between the rooms, typically constructed by placing two overlapping sheets of polyethylene

sheeting over an existing or temporarily framed doorway, securing each along the top of the doorway, securing



the vertical edge of one sheet along one vertical side of the doorway, and securing the vertical edge of the other

sheet along the opposite vertical side of the doorway. Two curtained doorways spaced a minimum of six (6) feet

(two metres) apart form an airlock.

1.5.15 DOP Test - Dioctyl Phthalate aerosol challenge of a HEPA filter. A DOP test is used to establish the

integrity and effectiveness of a HEPA filter to collect particles greater than or equal to 0.3 microns in diameter with

99.97% efficiency.

1.5.16 Decontamination Enclosure Facility - A series of connected rooms, separated from the work area

and from each other by airlocks, for the decontamination of workers, materials, and equipment.

1.5.17 Disposal Bag - A minimum 6 mil (0.15 mm) thick polyethylene bag that is labelled with the following

information: hazardous materials; health hazards; and respirator and/or clothing protection required.

1.5.18 Dispose Of - As defined by the latest edition of the British Columbia Environmental Management

Act, Hazardous Waste Regulation, and the latest edition of Transport Canada's - Transportation of Dangerous

Goods Regulations.

1.5.19 Duct Tape - Minimum two (2) inch wide cloth reinforced duct tape.

1.5.20 Encapsulant (Sealant) - A liquid material which can be applied to asbestos containing material which

controls the possible release of asbestos fibres from the material either by creating a membrane over the surface

(bridging encapsulant) or by penetrating into the material and binding its components together (penetrating

encapsulant).

1.5.21 Encapsulation - The application of an encapsulant to asbestos containing materials to control the

release of asbestos fibres into the air.

1.5.22 Enclosure - The construction of an airtight, impermeable, permanent barrier around asbestos

containing materials to control the release of asbestos fibres into the air.

1.5.23 Equipment Decontamination Enclosure System - That portion of a decontamination enclosure facility

designed for controlled transfer of materials and equipment into or out of the work area, typically consisting of

a washroom, holding area, and non-contaminated area.

1.5.24 Equipment Room - An area or room which is part of the worker decontamination enclosure facility,

with provisions for storage of contaminated clothing and equipment.

1.5.25 Fibre Concentration - The number of fibres per volume (ml) of air collected.

1.5.26 Fibre Density - The number of fibres per area (mm ) of filter.2

1.5.27 Fixed Object - A unit of equipment or furniture in the work area which cannot be removed.

1.5.28 Friable Material - A material, when dry, that can easily be crumbled or powered by hand pressure.

1.5.29 Glove Bag Technique - A method with limited applications for removing small amounts of asbestos

containing material from HVAC ducts, pipe runs, valves, joints, elbows, and other non-planar surfaces in a

non-contained (isolated) work area. The glove bag assembly is a manufactured device consisting of glove bag

(typically constructed of six (6) mil transparent polyethylene or polyvinyl chloride plastic), two (2) inward

projecting long sleeves, and internal tool pouch, and an attached labelled receptacle for asbestos waste. The glove

bag is constructed and installed in such a manner that it surrounds the object or material to be removed and

contains all asbestos fibres released during the process. All workers who are permitted to use the glove bag

technique must be highly trained, experienced, and skilled in this method.

1.5.30 Ground Fault Interrupt Electrical Panel (GFI) - An Electrical panel, outside the work area, equipped

exclusively with "Class A" ground fault circuit interrupter breakers of sufficient capacity to provide for lighting and

equipment used during work.



1.5.31 HEPA (High Efficiency Particulate Air) Filter - A throw-away extended-media dry-type filter in a rigid

frame, having minimum particle-collection efficiency of 99.97% for 0.3 micrometer (micron) thermally-generated

dioctyl phthalate (DOP) particles or specified alternate aerosol, and a maximum clean-filter pressure drop of 1.0"

WG when tested at rated air flow capacity.

1.5.32 HEPA Vacuum Equipment - A vacuum system equipped with HEPA filtration.

1.5.33 High Risk Work Procedures - As defined by the latest edition of the Workers' Compensation Board

of British Columbia Occupational Health & Safety Regulation.

1.5.34 Holding Area - A chamber between the washroom and an non-contaminated area in the equipment

decontamination enclosure system. The holding area comprises an airlock.

1.5.35 HVAC System - Heating Ventilation & Air Conditioning system.

1.5.36 Moderate Risk Work Procedures - As defined by the latest edition of the Workers' Compensation

Board of British Columbia Occupational Health & Safety Regulation.

1.5.37 Movable Object - A unit of equipment or furniture in the work area which can be removed from the

work area.

1.5.38 Negative Pressure Ventilation Unit - A portable exhaust system equipped with HEPA filtration

capable of maintaining a constant low velocity air flow into contaminated areas from adjacent non-contaminated

areas. The minimum acceptable negative air pressure differential between the work area and adjacent

non-contaminated areas is 0.02 inches of water column.

1.5.39 NIOSH - National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (U.S.).

1.5.40 Owner - The Owner, building Owner, or his authorized representative.

1.5.41 Permissible Concentration (for Asbestos) - The time-weighted eight hour maximum level of exposure

that is considered to be a safe level for unprotected personnel.

1.5.42 Removal - All herein specified procedures necessary to strip all asbestos containing materials from

the designated areas and to dispose of these materials in an acceptable manner.

1.5.43 Respirator - A device worn by a person which prevents that person from inhaling harmful airborne

substances.

1.5.44 Risk of Exposure to Asbestos Fibres - The likelihood of being exposed to airborne asbestos fibres

when asbestos containing materials are used or handled.

1.5.45 Scaffold - A temporary elevated or suspended work unit and its supporting structure used for

supporting worker(s) or materials, or both.

1.5.46 Shower Room - A room between the clean room and the equipment room in the workers

decontamination enclosure facility, with hot and cold running water controlled and regulated at the shower head,

and suitably arranged for complete showering during the decontamination sequence.

1.5.47 Surfactant - A chemical wetting agent added to water to improve penetration, thus reducing the

quantity of water required for a given operation or area.

1.5.48 Tape - Minimum two (2) inch wide cloth reinforced duct tape.

1.5.49 Trades Person - A worker who has received proper and adequate training in his or her particular

field, is fully qualified, and of which 80% of the work force has a minimum of one year experience.

1.5.50 WCB - Workers' Compensation Board of British Columbia (WorkSafeBC).



1.5.51 Waste Transfer Airlock - A decontamination system utilized for transferring containerized waste from

the inside to the outside of the work area.

1.5.52 Wet Cleaning - The process of eliminating asbestos contamination from building surfaces and objects

by using cloths, mops, or other cleaning utensils which have been dampened with water and afterwards

thoroughly decontaminated or disposed of as asbestos contaminated waste.

1.5.53 Work Area - Designated rooms, spaces or areas of the project in which asbestos abatement

procedures are to be undertaken or which may become contaminated as a result of such abatement procedures.

A "High Risk Work Area" is a work area which has been sealed, isolated with polyethylene and equipped with a

worker decontamination facility. A "Moderate Risk Work Area" is a controlled access work area which has not

been isolated or equipped with a worker decontamination facility.

1.5.54 Worker Decontamination Facility - A decontamination enclosure facility for workers, typically

consisting of a connected clean room, shower room, and equipment room, separated by airlocks.

1.6 APPLICABLE REGULATIONS AND GUIDELINES

1.6.1 All work under this contract shall be done in strict accordance with all applicable Federal, Provincial,

Local regulations, and other standards and codes governing asbestos abatement and any other trade work done

in conjunction with the abatement.

1.6.2 The most recent edition of any relevant regulation, standard, document or code shall be in effect.

Where conflict between the requirements and these specifications exists, the most stringent requirements shall

apply.

1.6.3 Codes and Standards:

a) Canadian Standards Association (CSA)

b) Underwriters Laboratories, Canada (ULC)

c) American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

d) National Building Code

e) British Columbia Building Code

f) Canadian Electrical Code

g) Requirements for High Voltage Installation

h) Workers' Compensation Board of British Columbia "Occupational Health & Safety Regulation"

i) British Columbia Environmental Management Act, Hazardous Waste Regulation

j) Transport Canada - Transportation of Dangerous Goods Regulations

1.7 SUBMITTALS AND NOTICES

Prior to Commencement of Work the Contractor shall:

1.7.1 Send written notification of proposed work activities involving asbestos, to the applicable

Occupational Hygiene Officer at the Workers' Compensation Board of British Columbia (standard "Notice of Project

for Employment Involving Asbestos" forms are available for this purpose) including site specific work procedures

and an exposure control plan, not fewer than three (3) normal working days prior to the commencement of any

on site work activity. Provide Astech Consultants Ltd. with a copy of this notice, at the same time that it is sent

to the Workers' Compensation Board of British Columbia.

1.7.2 When applicable, send written notification of proposed work activities involving asbestos, to the

regional office of Labour Canada, not fewer than five (5) working days prior to the commencement of any on site

work activity. Provide Astech Consultants Ltd. with a copy of this notice.

1.7.3 Submit proof satisfactory to the Owner and Astech Consultants Ltd. that all required permits, site

location, and arrangements for transport and disposal of asbestos contaminated materials, PCB's, and Mercury,

have been obtained.



1.7.4 Submit to Astech Consultants Ltd., a copy of the carriers "Licence to Transport Hazardous Waste"

(a copy of this licence must be kept in each transport vehicle/trailer).

1.7.5 Submit a Critical Path Work Schedule to Astech Consultants Ltd. prior to delivering equipment or

materials to the site.

1.7.6 Submit to Astech Consultants Ltd., shop drawings for layout and construction of the worker

decontamination facilities and barriers for isolation of the work areas in compliance with these specifications and

applicable regulations.

1.7.7 Submit to Astech Consultants Ltd., shop drawings for scaffolding and/or exterior hoarding or

hoarding/enclosures, if required for this project, in compliance with these specifications and applicable regulations.

1.7.8 Submit to Astech Consultants Ltd., a copy of the "DOP" (Dioctyl Phthalate) test results for all HEPA

filtered equipment on site.

"DOP" testing of negative air units used for High Risk work must be conducted after installation on site but prior

to use on this project.

"DOP" testing of negative air units used for Dust Control for non-asbestos related demolition work must be

conducted after installation on site but prior to use on this project.

"DOP" testing of negative air units used for Moderate Risk work must be conducted within sixty (60) calender

days prior to use on this project.

"DOP" testing of HEPA filtered vacuum systems designed to convey bulk materials (eg. Vec-Loader) used for High

Risk, Modified Moderate Risk, or Moderate Risk work, must be conducted on site prior to use on this project.

Other HEPA equipment must be "DOP" tested within sixty (60) calendar days prior to use on this project.

Additional DOP testing of all HEPA filtered equipment shall be conducted and documented every ninety (90)

calendar days from the last test date, for the duration of the project or when HEPA filters are replaced.

1.7.9 Submit to Astech Consultants Ltd., and post on site, a list containing the names and telephone

numbers of the Contractor's key personnel.

1.7.10 Submit to Astech Consultants Ltd., and post on site, a list containing the names, addresses, and

telephone numbers, of emergency response personnel. The list shall include, but not be limited to, ambulance,

hospital, fire department, police department, and building security.

1.7.11 Submit documentation to Astech Consultants Ltd., that the Contractor's employees, including

foreman, supervisors, and any other personnel or agents who may be exposed to airborne asbestos fibres, have

received adequate training in the safe handling of asbestos containing materials.

1.7.12 Submit documentation of NIOSH approvals for all respiratory protective equipment utilized on site,

include manufacturers certification of HEPA filtration capabilities for all cartridges and filters.

1.7.13 Submit copies of all "Hazardous Waste Manifest" forms for the transportation and disposal of all

contaminated waste materials removed from the work area during the abatement process. Registered "Waste

Generator Number" will be provided by the Owner and must be listed on each manifest prior to transport of waste.

1.7.14 Submit documentation of respirator fit-testing for all Contractor employees and agents who must enter

the work area. This fit-testing shall be in accordance with CSA Standard Z94.4 1982.

1.7.15 Submit manufacturer's specification data sheets and material safety data sheets, for all products and

materials prior to use on this project.



1.7.16 Submit manufacturer's certification that vacuums, portable ventilation equipment, and other

equipment required to contain airborne fibres are equipped with HEPA filtering systems as specified.

1.7.17 Submit documentation to Astech Consultants Ltd., signed by a certified electrician, stating that all

electrical power within the work area has been isolated or identified, the Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) electrical

panel has been installed properly and is in good working order, and that all temporary power cables and electrical

lighting cables have an operational ground wire and are in good working condition, in accordance with article

3.1.1.3 and article 3.2.1.4 of this Section.

1.7.18 When rental equipment is to be used in asbestos abatement areas or to transport asbestos

contaminated waste, a written notification concerning intended use of the rental equipment must be provided to

the rental agency with a copy issued to Astech Consultants Ltd.

1.7.19 With the Owner, inspect the premises wherein all abatement and abatement related activities will

occur and submit a statement signed by both, agreeing on building and fixture condition prior to the

commencement of work. If this document is not submitted to Astech Consultants Ltd., it is assumed that the

Contractor is reporting no damage to the buildings prior to the start of work.

1.7.20 If required, submit to Astech Consultants Ltd., a copy of the Contractor’s Confined Space Entry

procedures, in accordance with the Workers’ Compensation Board of BC “Occupational Health & Safety

Regulations” for Confined Spaces.

1.8 SITE SECURITY

1.8.1 Work area access shall be restricted to authorized, trained, and protected personnel. Authorized

personnel are limited to the Contractor's employees, employees of Subcontractors, the Owner and his

representatives, representatives of Astech Consultants Ltd., and representatives of Federal and Provincial

regulatory agencies having jurisdiction over the project. A list of authorized personnel shall be established prior

to project start and posted in a conspicuous location near the entrance to the work area.

1.8.2 Entry into the work area by unauthorized individuals shall be reported immediately to the Owner and

Astech Consultants Ltd.

1.8.3 Access to "High Risk" work areas shall be through a single worker decontamination enclosure system.

All other means of access (doors, windows, hallways, corridors, etc.) shall be blocked or locked so as to prevent

entry to or exit from the work area. The only exceptions for this rule are the waste pass-out airlock which shall

be sealed except during the removal of containerized asbestos waste from the work area, and emergency exits

in case of fire or accident. Emergency exits shall not be locked from the inside, however, they shall be sealed with

polyethylene and tape until needed.

1.8.4 The Contractor shall be responsible for site security for the duration of the project.

1.9 EMERGENCY PLANNING

1.9.1 Emergency procedures shall be in written form and prominently posted in a conspicuous location at

the entrance to the work area. Everyone prior to entering the work area must read and sign these procedures to

acknowledge receipt and understanding of work site layout, location of emergency exits and emergency

procedures.

1.9.2 Emergency planning shall include considerations of fire, explosion, toxic atmospheres, electrical

hazards, heat stress, confined spaces, and general injury situations.

1.9.3 Fire extinguishers shall be placed strategically throughout the work area enclosure at the rate of; two

ten pound (10 lb.) ABC dry chemical fire extinguishers for the first one thousand (1000) square feet of floor area,

or portion thereof; and one ten pound (10 lb.) ABC dry chemical fire extinguisher per every additional two

thousand (2000) square feet of floor area, or portion thereof. In addition to the fire extinguishers inside the work

area enclosure, a minimum of two ten pound (10 lb.) ABC dry chemical fire extinguishers shall be placed outside

the work area enclosure, preferably in the Clean Room.



1.9.4 Employees shall be trained in evacuation procedures in the event of workplace emergencies.

1.9.5 For non life threatening situations, employees injured or otherwise incapacitated, shall decontaminate

following normal procedures, with assistance from fellow workers if necessary, before exiting the work area to

obtain medical treatment.

1.9.6 Where a life threatening medical emergency arises in an asbestos work area, usual protective

measures should be temporarily ignored if they would otherwise cause an immediate threat to the workers' life

or recovery, e.g. removal of respirators for mouth to mouth resuscitation, or leaving worker fully clothed if spinal

injury is suspected. Where protective equipment and clothing can be left in place without interfering with the

emergency management of the injured worker in a contaminated work area, it should not be removed until a non-

contaminated area has been reached. On site decontamination procedures should only be carried out if they do

not interfere with medical emergency procedures. When first aid, ambulance, or other emergency personnel are

required to enter a contaminated work area, they shall be informed of the hazards, provided with and instructed

in the use of respirators and protective clothing, and instructed in entry and exit procedures. If it is not possible

to decontaminate the injured worker, he shall be covered in such a way to minimize contaminating clean areas.

The cover should not hinder access to the patient by first aid or ambulance personnel. If the injured worker is

contaminated with asbestos on arrival at hospital, the hospital staff must be informed and advised of the hazards

related to asbestos, the appropriate disposal of contaminated clothing, and decontamination procedures.

1.9.7 Telephone numbers of all emergency response personnel, and Contractor's key personnel shall be

prominently posted at the entrance to the work area, along with the location of the nearest telephone.

1.9.8 The Contractor shall provide and maintain first-aid services, equipment, and supplies according to the

requirements of Part 33 of the Occupational Health and Safety Regulation. For the purpose of determining the

level of first aid required, the number of workers on site shall include the Owner's representatives and employees

of the Consultant.

1.10 PERSONNEL PROTECTION

1.10.1 Prior to commencement of asbestos abatement activities, all personnel MUST have received adequate

training in the handling of asbestos containing materials, and MUST be able to read and fully understand the

written (and posted) Site Specific Work Procedures and Emergency Procedures for the project. Astech Consultants

Ltd. reserves the right at any time to test all personnel to ensure adequacy of asbestos training.

1.10.2 Workers shall be provided with personally issued, individually identified (marked with waterproof

designations) respirators.

1.10.3 Respirators shall be suitable for the asbestos exposure level in the work area in accordance with this

specification and the requirements of the Workers' Compensation Board of British Columbia. Where respirators

with disposable filters are employed, provide sufficient filters for replacement as recommended by the

manufacturer, and applicable regulations.

1.10.4 Provide authorized visitors with suitable protective clothing, applicable safety equipment and

footwear, and respiratory protection complete with new filters or cartridges, as described within this specification,

so as they may safely access the work area whenever required.

1.10.5 Workers and authorized visitors must be trained in the maintenance, use and limitations of their

respirators. Workers and authorized visitors must also be fit tested on personally issued and individually marked

respirators, using a protocol acceptable to the Workers' Compensation Board of British Columbia and Astech

Consultants Ltd. Fit testing is to be conducted and documented prior to the start of asbestos related work

activities and on a weekly basis for the duration of the project.

1.10.6 Workers and authorized visitors must perform positive and negative air pressure fit tests each time

a respirator is worn. Powered air purifying respirators shall be tested for adequate flow in accordance with the

manufacturers' written instructions.



1.10.7 No supervisors, authorized visitors, or workers shall wear facial hair that could interfere with the

respirator to face seal.

1.10.8 Workers and authorized visitors shall be provided clean dry socks, or clean dry disposable Tyvek

booties, for each entry into the work area.

1.10.9 Provide workers with sufficient suits of protective full body clothing. Such clothing shall consist of

full body coveralls and headgear, that fits snugly at the neck, wrists and ankles. Provide eye protection and hard

hats as required by applicable safety regulations. Non disposable type protective clothing and footwear shall be

left in the "Work Area" or "Equipment Room", until the end of the asbestos abatement work shift, at which time

such items shall be disposed of as asbestos waste, or shall be thoroughly cleaned of all asbestos or asbestos

containing material. Disposable type protective clothing, headgear, and footwear may be provided.

1.10.10 Provide and post, at the entrance to the "Work Area", the site specific entry, exit, and work

procedures to be followed by workers, as described within this specification.

1.10.11 The Abatement Contractor's designated Site Superintendent must remain on site at all times while

asbestos abatement activities are being performed. Since there may be a requirement for two work crews, it is

therefore required that the Contractor state in the Tender Documents, the names of the site superintendents that

the Contractor is proposing to use on this project.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

2.1.1 Deliver all materials in the original packages, containers, or bundles bearing the name of the

manufacturer and the brand name.

2.1.2 Store all materials subject to damage off the ground, away from wet or damp surfaces, and under

cover sufficient to prevent damage or contamination. Replacement materials shall be stored outside the work area

until asbestos abatement is completed.

2.1.3 Damaged, deteriorating or previously used materials shall not be used and shall be removed from the

premises. Material that becomes contaminated with asbestos shall be disposed of in accordance with the

applicable regulations.

2.1.4 Polyethylene sheeting for walls and stationary objects shall be a minimum of 6 mil (0.15 mm) thick.

Floors and all other applications shall incorporate sheeting of at least 12 mil (0.30 mm) and 10 mil (0.25 mm)

thickness, as specified, in widths selected to minimize the frequency of joints.

2.1.5 Method of attaching polyethylene sheeting shall be agreed upon in advance by the Contractor and

Astech Consultants Ltd., and selected to minimize damage to equipment and surfaces. Method of attachment may

include any combination of cloth reinforced duct tape, furring strips, spray glue, staples, nails, screws or other

effective procedures capable of sealing adjacent sheets of polyethylene and capable of sealing polyethylene to

dissimilar finished or unfinished surfaces under both wet and dry conditions (including the use of amended water).

2.1.6 Polyethylene sheeting utilized for worker decontamination facility shall be black, or other non

transparent colour.

2.1.7 Asbestos waste receptor: each waste receptor shall consist of two separate impermeable containers.

The first (inner) container shall consist of a 6 mil (0.15 mm) minimum thickness polyethylene bag. If the waste

being placed into the first container is abrasive or has sharp edges that may cut the first container, the debris shall

be placed into a cardboard box or burlap sack (or similar device) prior to being placed within the first (inner)

container. The second (outer) container shall consist of a 6 mil (0.15 mm) polyethylene bag. The second (outer)

container shall be such to prevent any perforating rips, or tears in the container during transport or disposal. The

outer container must bear a pre-printed label and otherwise be acceptable to the disposal site, BC Ministry of



Environment - Environmental Management Act - Hazardous Waste Regulation, and the Workers' Compensation

Board of British Columbia.

2.1.8 Asbestos Warning signs shall be displayed at all conceivable locations where access to the work area

is possible. Such signs shall be conspicuously located and shall read:

W A R N I N G ! A S B E S T O S

Cancer and Lung Disease Hazard

Authorized Personnel Only

HEPA Filtered Respirators and

Protective Clothing Required in this Area

2.1.9 Surfactant [wetting agent] shall be mixed with water in a concentration to provide complete

penetration and saturation of asbestos containing material.

2.1.10 Slow drying sealer: glue or sealer which remains tacky on surface for minimum of 8 hours under ideal

conditions for purpose of trapping residual airborne fibre during settling period. Sealer applied to substrate

surfaces scheduled for re-insulation to be compatible with the latter product.

2.1.11 Spray or Trowel Applied Fire Resistant Materials: ULC labelled and listed, asbestos free mineral fibre

or cementitious material to provide the degree of fire protection required by the applicable building codes. Fire

resistant materials shall be evaluated and approved by Astech Consultants Ltd., prior to the materials being

delivered to the project site.

2.1.12 Spray or trowel applied thermal insulation or acoustical material shall be asbestos free and shall

provide performance characteristics equivalent to or better than the original material. Thermal and acoustical

materials shall be evaluated and approved by Astech Consultants Ltd. prior to the materials being delivered to the

project site.

2.1.13 Encapsulation materials shall comply with CGSB 1-GP-205M requirements, and be approved by the

Owner prior to the materials being delivered to the project site.

2.1.14 Enclosure systems shall be constructed of materials so that when the enclosure is completed there

is limited potential for impact damage to the barrier, and no potential for fibre release. Enclosure materials shall

be evaluated and approved by Astech Consultants Ltd. prior to the materials being delivered to the project site.

2.1.15 Provide all other materials, such as lumber, nails and hardware, which may be required to construct

and dismantle the decontamination area and the barriers that isolate the work area.


2.2.1 A sufficient quantity of negative air pressure ventilation units equipped with HEPA filtration shall be

utilized so as to provide a minimum of one (1) workplace air change every fifteen (15) minutes. Negative air

pressure units shall be exhausted outside the building, in such a manner so as not to allow exhaust air to migrate

back into the building or near occupied areas.

2.2.2 Provide local exhaust ventilation with exhaust air discharged through a HEPA filter for all dust

producing operations outside a containment where asbestos or asbestos containing dust is handled or used.

2.2.3 Respiratory protection during all stages of the project must be in compliance with the latest edition

of the Workers' Compensation Board of British Columbia Occupational Health & Safety Regulation.

2.2.4 Full bodied impermeable disposable coveralls complete with attached head covering, designed to fit

snugly at the neck, wrists, and ankles. Standard of acceptance - Dupont Tyvek or equivalent. Disposable

coveralls shall be provided to all workers and authorized visitors in sizes adequate to accommodate movement

without tearing.



2.2.5 Non skid laceless rubber boots that are to remain in the work area until the completion of the asbestos

abatement phase of the project, at which time they shall be disposed of as contaminated waste, or be thoroughly

decontaminated with soap and water.

2.2.6 Additional safety equipment (e.g. hard hats, eye protection, safety shoes, gloves etc.), as necessary,

shall be provided to all workers and authorized visitors.

2.2.7 A sufficient supply of scaffolds, ladders, lifts, and hand tools (e.g. scrapers, wire cutters, brushes,

utility knives, wire saws, mops, rags, and sponges, etc.) shall be provided as required.

2.2.8 Suitable spray equipment shall be provided for the application of amended water, and sealer as

required.

2.2.9 A sufficient supply of HEPA filtered vacuum systems shall be available during all stages of the project.

2.2.10 Encapsulant shall be sprayed using airless spray equipment. Airless equipment and tip size shall be

in accordance with the encapsulant manufacturer's recommendations.

2.2.11 All water hoses used by the Contractor shall be 250 psi industrial grade rubber water hose with

factory installed fittings. The water supply shall be turned off at the tie-in to the Owner's water source, when

the water is not in use, or at the end of each work shift. The water hose lines shall not be under pressure when

the Abatement Contractor is not on site. The water hose lines shall be secured and made safe if they pass through

an occupied area of the building.

2.2.12 A two stage water filtration pumping system designed to filter contaminates from decontamination

shower water shall be utilized in conjunction with the worker decontamination shower units. The water filtration

system shall be capable of pumping sufficient quantities of water to insure that the worker decontamination

shower units do not overflow. The first stage water filter of the water filtration system shall be capable of

removing particles 100 microns or larger, and the second stage filter shall be capable of removing particles 5

microns or larger.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 HIGH RISK EXECUTION

3.1.1 Not Applicable.

3.2 MODERATE RISK EXECUTION

3.2.1 Moderate Risk Work Area Preparation

3.2.1.1 Clearly mark the boundary of the Work Area by placing Barrier Tape or fences around the Work Area.

3.2.1.2 Post Asbestos Warning signs at all conceivable approaches to work areas and other location where

airborne concentrations of asbestos may exceed ambient background levels. Signs shall be posted at a distance

sufficiently far enough away from the work area to permit all personnel to read the sign and take the necessary

protective measures to avoid exposure.

3.2.1.3 Shut down, isolate, and lock out all heating, cooling and air conditioning system (HVAC) components

that are in, supply, or pass through the work area. Seal all intake and exhaust vents in the work area with tape

and polyethylene. Also seal any seams in system components that pass through the work area.

If the mechanical system cannot be shut down and isolated, obtain approval from the Owner to cut the ducts at

the perimeter of the work area enclosure and cap the ends of the ducts with sheet metal and seal with tape. Seal

all ends of ducts and/or vents in the work area with tape and polyethylene. Also seal seams in system

components that pass through the work area.



3.2.1.4 Shut down and physically lock out all existing electric power and equipment within the work area

enclosure and other areas wherever and whenever there is a danger of electrical shock. Coordinate this activity

with the local engineering supervisor. Provide temporary power and lighting sources with "Class A" Ground Fault

Circuit Interrupters (GFI). All temporary power cables and electrical light cables shall have ground wires. Ensure

safe lock out of existing electrical power and installation (including ground faulting) of temporary power sources

and equipment in compliance with all applicable electrical code, and regulatory board requirements. Prior to Astech

Consultants pre-contamination inspection, the Contractor shall have his electrical Subcontractor provide written

documentation on company letterhead, to Astech Consultants Ltd., stating that all electrical power within the work

area has been isolated, the Contractor's GFI panel has been installed properly and is in good working order, and

that all temporary power cables and electrical lighting cables have an operational ground wire (two wire brewery

cables will not be allowed in the work area). See article 1.7.17 of this Section.

3.2.1.5 Establish a decontamination area at one or more entrances to the Moderate Risk Work Area. The

decontamination area (also called washout facility) shall contain a polyethylene drop sheet, polyethylene disposal

bag, bucket of warm water and sponge, and/or a HEPA filtered vacuum cleaner.

3.2.1.6 Commencement of work at risk of disturbing asbestos shall not occur until:

a) All pre-abatement submissions, notifications, posting and permits have been provided and are

satisfactory to Astech Consultants Ltd..

b) Approved Asbestos Warning signs are displayed at all conceivable entrances to the work area.

c) An adequate supply of equipment and materials for abatement, clean-up, and disposal are on hand.

d) All worker training, and respirator fit testing is completed, documented and copies have been

submitted to Astech Consultants Ltd..

e) Contractor receives written permission from Astech Consultants Ltd. to proceed with abatement

activities.

f) If and as required, local exhaust systems are functioning adequately.

3.2.2 Isolation of the Work Area for Modified Moderate Risk Work

3.2.2.1 The work area shall be separated from non-contaminated, or occupied areas of the building by the

construction of air tight barriers.

3.2.2.2 During asbestos abatement activities all polyethylene barriers enclosing the work area shall be

inspected at least twice daily by the Contractor; prior to the start of each day's abatement activities and following

the completion of the day's abatement activities. The Contractor shall record these inspections in his site log

book.

3.2.2.3 Damage and defects in the isolation barrier enclosure system are to be repaired immediately upon

discovery.

3.2.2.4 Use smoke tubes to test the effectiveness of the barrier system daily, or when directed by Astech

Consultants Ltd.

3.2.2.5 If at any time during abatement activities air monitoring or visual inspection indicates that areas

outside the work area enclosures are contaminated with asbestos, or if damage occurs to the work area barriers,

work shall immediately stop, and the cause of the problem shall be rectified. Clean up of surfaces outside of the

work area using HEPA vacuums or wet cleaning techniques may be necessary.

3.2.2.6 Install and initiate the operation of negative pressure ventilation equipment as needed to provide a

minimum of one (1) air change in the work area every fifteen (15) minutes. Minimum acceptable negative air

pressure differential is 0.02 inches of water column. Openings made in the isolation barrier system to

accommodate negative air units shall be made airtight with tape and/or caulking as required. Ensure that adequate



power supply is available at all times to satisfy the requirements of the negative air pressure ventilating units.

Exhaust ducts of negative air pressure ventilation units shall be sealed and mechanically fastened to the exhaust

port of the unit(s). Negative pressure ventilation units shall be exhausted to the outside of the building, in such

a manner so as not to allow exhausted air to migrate back into the building or near occupied areas. Negative

pressure ventilation equipment shall be DOP tested in accordance with Article 1.7.8.

The exhaust ducts from the negative air pressure ventilation units to the exterior of the building, shall be

aluminized mylar flexible spiral duct with a 6 mil polyethylene tube insert on the inside the spiral duct. The

exhaust ducts, when passing through areas of the building occupied by the public or building staff, shall be

enclosed by a solid barrier of 3/8" plywood, painted off-white. The wood enclosure shall be constructed and

located to suit current National Building Code requirements regarding headroom and means of egress.

To facilitate the exhausting of air from the negative air pressure ventilation exhaust ducts to the exterior of the

building, glazing units may be removed from windows. The glazing units shall be replaced with a plywood infill

panel, cut to suit the window and exhaust duct, and of sufficient thickness to provide complete security to the

building. The thickness of the plywood infill panel (depending upon location and security requirements), and the

location of the glazing units that are to be removed, shall be pre-approved by the Owner. The Contractor shall

be responsible for building security for the duration of the project, especially during the time that the glazing units

are removed. The windows shall be replaced by the Contractor, utilizing qualified glazing trades persons.

3.2.2.7 Once constructed, sealed, and reinforced as necessary, the work area enclosure may be smoke tested

for leakage by Astech Consultants Ltd. prior to the commencement of abatement activities. Required repairs or

reconstruction shall be initiated to ensure absolute isolation of the work area.

3.2.2.8 Commencement of work at risk of disturbing asbestos shall not occur until; enclosure systems have

been constructed, tested and approved by Astech Consultants Ltd.; negative pressure ventilation systems are

functioning adequately, and specified negative air pressure differential has been established; and approved

Asbestos Warning signs are displayed at all conceivable entrances to the work area.

3.2.3 Asbestos Abatement

3.2.3.1 Before beginning work, remove visible dust from surfaces in the work area where dust is likely to be

disturbed during the course of the work. Use HEPA vacuum, or damp cloths where damp cleaning does not create

a hazard and is otherwise appropriate. Do not use compressed air to clean up or remove dust from any surface.

3.2.3.2 Prevent the spread of dust from the work area using measures appropriate to the work to be done.

Use polyethylene drop sheets over flooring and objects that are to remain in the work area.

3.2.3.3 Other than loose material which shall be removed by HEPA vacuum, friable material containing

asbestos to be removed or disturbed shall be thoroughly wetted before and during work. Use garden reservoir

type low velocity fine mist sprayer. Perform work in a manner to reduce dust creation to lowest levels practicable.

3.2.3.4 For the abatement of gypsum board filling compounds or other types of materials that will generate

high fibre levels, a full height 6 mil polyethylene curtain shall be installed at the perimeter of the work area, and

the work area subjected to a negative air pressure differential with the use of a HEPA filtered negative air unit,

in order to control the non asbestos (gypsum board fibres) fibres from migrating outside the work area,

contaminating ambient air samples and the adjacent areas. HEPA filtered Powered Air Purifying Respirators (PAPR)

shall be utilized by personnel performing gypsum board demolition. A Worker Decontamination Enclosure with

shower may be required.

3.2.3.5 Asbestos containing floor tiles, asbestos cement board, or other asbestos containing materials that

may cut or puncture the polyethylene disposal bag, shall be placed in cardboard boxes or burlap sacks prior to

being double bagged.

3.2.3.6 Place waste containing asbestos in sealed impermeable disposal bags. Drop sheets and disposable

protective clothing shall be treated as asbestos waste and shall be wetted and folded to contain dust, then placed

in disposal bags.



3.2.3.7 Large components removed intact may be wrapped in two separately sealed layers of polyethylene

sheeting, sealed and secured with duct tape, and labelled prior to transport to the landfill site.

3.2.4 Pipe Insulation Removal Using Glove Bag Method

3.2.4.1 Not Applicable.

3.2.5 Entry and Exit Procedures

3.2.5.1 All workers and authorized visitors, before entering the work area, shall be trained in and familiar with

all regulations, personal protection requirements (including workplace entry and exit procedures) and emergency

procedures.

3.2.5.2 Workers and authorized visitors shall be fully protected with respirators and protective clothing

immediately prior to the first disturbance of asbestos containing or contaminated materials and until final clean

up is completed.

3.2.5.3 All workers and authorized visitors shall, prior to entering the work area, put on appropriate respiratory

protection (as deemed adequate for the project conditions), clean disposable coveralls, head covering and foot

covering. Hard hats, eye protection, and gloves shall also be utilized if required. Clean respirators and protective

clothing shall be provided and utilized by each person for each separate entry into the work area.

3.2.5.4 Eating, drinking, chewing, and smoking, are not permitted in the work area or decontamination facility.

Smoking on the Owner's property will only be allowed in designated areas if approved by the Owner.

3.2.5.5 Before leaving the work area workers shall decontaminate their protective clothing using a HEPA

vacuum or by damp wiping. Store clean protective clothing in clean plastic bag for reuse, or, if protective clothing

is not to be reused, dispose of as contaminated waste.

3.2.5.6 Workers shall wash hands and face immediately upon leaving the work area.

3.2.6 Asbestos Enclosure Procedures

3.2.6.1 Clean, prepare and isolate the work area in accordance with these specifications.

3.2.6.2 Spray areas that will be disturbed during the installation of hangers or other support/framing materials

for the enclosure with water. Keep these areas damp to reduce airborne fibre concentrations.

3.2.6.3 Remove loose or hanging asbestos containing materials in accordance with these specifications.

3.2.6.4 After installation of hangers and other fixing devices and before installation of enclosure barrier, repair

damaged areas of fireproofing/thermal insulation materials as required using a non-asbestos containing replacement

material. Prepare surfaces and apply replacement material in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

3.2.6.5 Use hand tools equipped with HEPA filtered local exhaust ventilation, to drill, cut into, or otherwise

disturb asbestos containing materials during the installation of support systems for the enclosures. (Alternatively,

these areas of material could be removed prior to installation of supports.)

3.2.6.6 Enclosure barrier materials shall be impact resistant and provide an air-tight barrier once construction

is complete.

3.2.6.7 Lower utilities as necessary and reinstall using qualified trades persons, in a manner which permits

proper utilization and does not disturb the integrity of the enclosure barrier. Utility maintenance shall not require

the enclosure to be opened or disturbed.

3.2.6.8 Enclosed asbestos containing materials shall be designated appropriately with Asbestos Warning signs

in order to warn building maintenance personnel and general occupants of the potential asbestos hazard in the



event that they are required to disturb the enclosure. One Asbestos Warning sign shall be installed for every

twenty (20) lineal feet (6 metres) of enclosure surface or portion thereof.

3.2.7 Clean Up

3.2.7.1 Frequently during the work and immediately after completion of the work clean up dust and waste

containing asbestos using a HEPA vacuum or by damp mopping.

3.2.7.2 Place asbestos containing waste in sealed disposal bags. Drop sheets and disposable protective

clothing shall be treated as asbestos waste and shall be wetted and folded to contain dust and then placed in

disposal bags.

3.2.7.3 Immediately before their removal from the work area, and disposal, clean each filled disposal bag

using damp cloths or HEPA vacuum and place in second clean disposal bag.

3.2.7.4 Seal and remove double-bagged waste from site. Dispose of waste asbestos in accordance with

requirements of Provincial and Federal authority having jurisdiction.

3.2.7.5 Place polyethylene, tape, cleaning materials, and other contaminated debris in disposal bags for

transport to the landfill site.

3.2.7.6 When removing polyethylene sheeting, the material shall be carefully rolled away from the walls to

the centre of the work area. As polyethylene is removed from the work area, all surfaces shall be HEPA vacuumed

or wet cleaned.

3.2.7.7 Perform final thorough clean up of work areas and adjacent areas affected by the work using HEPA

vacuum.

3.2.7.8 At the completion of the clean up operation, the Contractor and Astech Consultants Ltd. shall inspect

the work area to ascertain that no dust or debris remains on surfaces as a result of dismantling or clean up

operations.

3.2.8 Air Monitoring

3.2.8.1 From commencement of work until completion of the clean up operation, Astech Consultants Ltd. will

be conducting air monitoring both inside and outside the work area.

3.2.8.2 Air sampling collection and analysis shall be conducted in accordance with the Workers'

Compensation Board of British Columbia Occupational Health and Safety Regulation.

3.2.8.3 The fibre level in areas outside the Moderate Risk work areas, where there has been no disturbance

of asbestos containing materials, shall not be permitted to exceed the following action level:

Asbestos (all forms) . . . . 0.05 fibres/ml (based on a Permissible Concentration of 0.1 fibre/ml)

3.2.8.4 With the exception of gypsum board removal (where a polyethylene enclosure, negative air unit, &

PAPR are utilized) the fibre level in the Moderate Risk work area shall not be permitted to exceed the following

action level:

Asbestos (all forms) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.50 fibres/ml

3.2.8.5 Respirators shall be selected in accordance with the following maximum airborne fibre level

concentrations:

Half Facepiece . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 fibres/ml

Full Facepiece .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 fibres/ml

Powered Air Purifying (negative pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 fibres/ml

Powered Air Purifying (positive pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5 fibres/ml



3.2.8.6 Notify Astech Consultants Ltd. that the work area is ready for post abatement air monitoring.

3.2.8.7 If required, post abatement ambient monitoring will be conducted by Astech Consultants Ltd. If air

sampling determines that asbestos levels in the work area are equal to or less than the level listed below, and as

stipulated by the Workers' Compensation Board of British Columbia, the Contractor may proceed with the final

clean up:

Asbestos (all forms) . . . . 0.05 fibres/ml (based on a Permissible Concentration of 0.1 fibre/ml)

3.2.8.8 If air monitoring or visual inspection determines that areas outside the work area are contaminated,

these areas shall be maintained and cleaned, in the same manner as that applicable to the work area.

3.3 DISPOSAL

3.3.1 Asbestos containing waste, contaminated building materials or equipment, and water used in the

Work Area, shall be sealed and labelled in double 6 mil polyethylene bags, for transport to the landfill site.

3.3.2 As the work progresses, to prevent exceeding available storage capacity on site, sealed and labelled

containers of asbestos containing waste shall be removed and transported to the pre-arranged disposal location.

3.3.3 Copies of all transportation manifests or other documentation of disposal shall be delivered to the

Owner for his records. Copy 2 (green) of the waste manifest shall be provided to Astech Consultants Ltd. The

waste manifest form shall be signed by the Contractor and the Disposal Site Operator, as the responsibility for the

material changes hands. If a separate carrier is employed, his name, address, telephone number and signature

shall also appear on the waste manifest form.

3.3.4 Personnel loading or off loading asbestos containing waste shall be protected by disposable clothing

including head and body protection, and a minimum of a half facepiece, air-purifying, dual cartridge respirators

equipped with HEPA filters.

3.3.5 Any debris or residue observed on containers or surfaces outside of the work area resulting from

clean-up or disposal activities shall be immediately cleaned up using HEPA filtered vacuum equipment and/or wet

methods as appropriate.

3.3.6 If large metal dumpsters are used for asbestos waste disposal, they shall be equipped with doors and

tops that can be closed and locked to prevent vandalism and provide security during transportation. Unbagged

material, or non asbestos waste, shall not be placed in these containers. Bags shall be placed, not thrown, into

these containers to avoid splitting. Disposal bins shall not be filled more than one foot (305 mm) from the top of

the bin. Disposal bins (doors) shall be sealed in order to prevent water leakage.

3.3.7 Following the removal of all containerized waste, the cargo area shall be decontaminated using HEPA

vacuums and/or wet cleaning methods.

3.4 RE-ESTABLISHMENT OF WORK AREA SYSTEMS AND OBJECTS

3.4.1 Repair all areas of damage that occurred as a result of abatement activities.

3.4.2 Where applicable, a qualified sub-trade shall re-install all safety equipment such as fire alarm systems,

heat and/or smoke detectors, fire-fighting equipment, emergency lighting, and exit lighting.

END OF SECTION

2011-05-19 Section 03 11 00 City of New Westminster CONCRETE FORMING & ACCESSORIES Queensborough Community Centre Page 1 of 4 Project No. 5410 Rev: 00

Bush, Bohlman & Partners

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 DOCUMENTS

.1 This section of the Specifications forms part of the Contract Documents and is to be read

interpreted, and coordinated with all other parts.

1.2 RELATED WORK

.1 Concrete Reinforcement: Section 03 20 00

.2 Cast-in-Place Concrete: Section 03 30 00

.3 Concrete Finishing Section 03 35 00

.4 Metal Fabrications: Section 05 50 00

.5 Construction Waste Management: Section 01 74 19

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 Do concrete formwork in accordance with CAN/CSA-A23.1-04 and CAN/CSA-086-01,

except where specified otherwise.

.2 Do falsework in accordance with CSA S269.1, except where specified otherwise.

1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submit formwork and falsework drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00 –

Submittal procedures.

.2 Formwork drawings to show all proposed joint locations, tie-hole locations, reveals, and

details to meet the design intent.

.3 Comply with CSA S269.1 and the Worksafe BC regulations for falsework drawings.

.4 Each shop drawing submitted to bear the stamp and signature of a qualified Professional

Engineer registered in the Province of British Columbia.

.5 A copy of the falsework and formwork drawings shall be kept at the job site while the

temporary supporting structure is under construction or use.

.6 Provide fully dimensioned shop drawings for all exposed concrete walls showing form tie

locations, embedded plates, reglets, and reveals.

.7 The general contractor shall be responsible for design of all formwork and keeping

formwork in place until it can be safely removed.

1.5 SITE MOCK-UPS

.1 Erect formwork for exposed concrete walls and circular concrete column full-size mock-

ups as directed at permanent locations designated by the Consultant within the building

for examination and acceptance of appearance of surface finish, form tie locations,

details, jointing, assembly, and alignment.

.2 The mock-ups required shall include the following:



.1 A cold joint between two pours using standard fibreglass column forms.

.2 A sample wall representing Class 1 Architectural Concrete finish of size

designated by the Consultant.

.3 A sample wall representing Class 2 Smooth Form finish of a size designated by

the Consultant.

.3 Adjust formwork for mock-up installations at no extra cost to the Owner as required to

meet requirements indicated on the drawings. Accepted mock-ups shall become part of

permanent work and shall be minimum standards to which balance of concrete shall

match, subject to passing of tests.

2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Formwork lumber: plywood and wood formwork materials to CAN3-086.01 (including S01-

05) and CAN/CSA-A23.1-04.

.2 Falsework materials: to CSA S269.1.

.3 Class 1 - Architectural Concrete Finish: all exposed exterior concrete surfaces - high

density overlay plywood similar to Simpson's Multipour HDO plywood, or steel forms, for

Architectural Concrete finish in accordance with CAN/CSA A23.1, Section 27. Item 27.4,

Minimum thickness of plywood 20mm. Forms shall not have patches, broken edges, or

joint widths greater than 2mm.

.4 Class 2 - Smooth Form Finish: all exposed interior concrete surfaces - plywood with non-

absorptive liner such as urethane coating or medium density overlay plywood for Smooth

Form finish in accordance with CAN/CSA A23.1, Section 24, Item 24.3.6. Forms shall not

have patches, broken edges, or joint widths greater than 2mm.

.5 Class 3 - Rough Form Finish: all concealed concrete surfaces including elevator shafts,

pits and trenches - plywood or shiplap, for Rough Form finish in accordance with

CAN/CSA A23.1, Section 24, Item 24.3.5.

.6 Circular Forms: Use one only of the following types to produce a smooth surface without

fins, of uniform texture and appearance.

.1 Full-height (one piece) fibreglass circular forms with one vertical joint.

.2 Full-height steel circular forms in two (2) sections with welded steel flanges for

bolting together.

.3 Full-height SonaTube with a continuous liner that leaves the surface smooth and

seamless.

Use same type of circular forms throughout the project.

Position joint(s) in circular forms as directed by the Consultant.

.7 Form ties: removable or snap-off metal ties, fixed or adjustable length, free of devices

leaving holes larger than 25mm diameter in concrete surface. The portion remaining in

the concrete shall not be less than 25mm from the surface of the concrete. Recessed

plastic cone-type placed symmetrically about any section, in a uniform and consistent

pattern to be used in Class 1 architectural concrete.

.8 Form release agent: chemically active release agents containing compounds that react



with free lime present in concrete to provide water insoluble soaps, preventing concrete

from sticking to forms.

.9 Form stripping agent: colourless mineral oil, free of kerosene.

3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 ERECTION .1 Verify lines, levels and column centres before proceeding with formwork and ensure

dimensions agree with drawings.

.2 Obtain Consultant's approval for use of earth forms.

.3 Hand trim sides and bottoms and remove loose earth from earth forms before placing

concrete.

.4 Construct falsework in accordance with CSA S269.1.

.5 Prior to constructing formwork for architectural concrete (formed surfaces prominently

exposed to view), submit shop drawings for review showing all details of formwork

including panel sizes, joint locations, tie spacing and location, joint sealing, and other

formwork details with the Architect and obtain written approval to proceed. This clause

applies to Class 1 Architectural Concrete only

.6 Construct forms to produce finished concrete conforming to shape, dimensions, locations,

and levels indicated within the following tolerances. Tolerances shall not be cumulative.

.1 Deviation from vertical line - 6mm in 3000mm, 10mm in 6000mm, and 20mm in

12000mm or more.

.2 Deviation from flat surface, for walls and floors - 5mm in 3000mm.

.3 Deviation from horizontal - 6mm in 3000mm.

.4 Deviation of linear building lines from established position in plans and related

position of columns, walls, and partitions plus or minus 6mm.

.5 Deviation in cross sectional dimensions of columns or beams, or in thickness of

slabs and wall plus or minus 6mm.

.7 Obtain Consultant's permission before framing openings not indicated in concrete beams

or columns. Obtain Consultant's permission before framing openings in walls greater

than 300mm x 300mm.

.8 Align form joints and make watertight using tape or other approved methods to maintain

leak-free seal during concrete placement. Keep form joints to minimum. This clause

applies to Architectural Concrete only. However, this does not relieve the Contractor from

providing good workmanship and making efforts to minimize joint leakage for all concrete

work.

.9 Form chases, slots, openings, drips, recesses, expansion and control joints as indicated.

.10 Clean formwork in accordance with CAN/CSA-A23.1-M94 before placing concrete.

.11 Leave formwork in place for following minimum periods of time after placing concrete.

.1 1 day for walls and sides of beams.

.2 1 day for columns.

.3 28 days for beam soffits, slabs, decks and other structural members, or 3 days



when replaced immediately with adequate shoring to standard specified for

falsework.

.4 1 day for footings and abutments.

.12 Wall, column and beam side forms shall not be removed until concrete has achieved 10

MPa minimum strength and form removal will not damage concrete.

.13 Beam and suspended slab soffit formwork shall not be removed until concrete has

achieved 75% of the 28 day strength specified. Re-shore as per Clause 3.2.

.14 Re-use of formwork and falsework subject to the requirements of CAN/CSA-A23.1.

3.2 RE-SHORING .1 Arrange forms to allow stripping without removal of the principal shores, where these are

required to remain in place.

.2 Re-shore in two directions so that no large areas of new construction are permitted to

support their own weight. Install re-shores at mid-span of members and at locations

specified by the formwork design professional, but in no case more than 3000mm centre

to centre. Tighten re-shores to carry the weight of new construction and any other loads

imposed thereon. Do not over-stress new construction by over-tightening.

.3 Forms not directly supporting the weight of concrete may be removed as soon as the

stripping operation will not damage the concrete.

.4 Re-shores to remain in position for a minimum period of 28 days after concrete

placement.

3.3 ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE FINISH .1 In addition to the requirements specified herein and in Section 27 of CAN/CSA A23.1.

formwork for architectural concrete shall also comply with the following:

.1 Ensure that formwork is constructed so that finished concrete surfaces will be

free from any imperfections as a result of, but not limited to, misalignment or

warping of forms, misalignment or warping of plywood or steel elements,

inadequate tightness of forms, mortar leakage and any texture imported by

formwork.

.2 Establish pattern for form ties and reveals in accordance with pattern for form ties

and reveals indicated on the drawings.

.3 Back all edges of forms and brace to assure that mortar leakage is eliminated.

Carefully inspect forms prior to erecting to ensure debris has not entered

formwork voids.

.2 Maintain true right-angled corners for all exposed edges of concrete, unless otherwise

indicated.

.3 Joint widths shall be no greater than 2mm.


2011-05-19 Section 03 20 00 City of New Westminster CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT Queensborough Community Centre Page 1 of 3 Project No. 5410 Rev: 00


1.0 GENERAL

1.1 DOCUMENTS .1 This section of the Specifications forms part of the Contract Documents and is to be read,


1.2 RELATED WORK

.1 Concrete Forming and Accessories: Section 03 10 00

.2 Cast-in-Place Concrete: Section 03 30 00

.3 Concrete Unit Masonry Structures: Section 04 22 00

.4 Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Section 01 74 19

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 Do reinforcing work in accordance with CAN/CSA-A23.1-04.

.2 Do welding of reinforcement in accordance with CSA-W186-M 1990 (R2002), except

where specified otherwise.

1.4 SOURCE QUALITY

.1 Upon request, provide Consultant with certified copy of mill test reports of reinforcing

steel, showing physical and chemical analysis, minimum 5 weeks prior to commencing

reinforcing work.

.2 If requested by the VSB Construction Project Coordinator, copies of all reports should be

submitted to the VSB.

.3 Inform Consultant of proposed source of material to be supplied.

.4 Testing of the reinforcement will be at the discretion of the Consultant.

1.5 SUBSTITUTES

.1 Substitution of different size bars permitted only upon the written approval of the

Consultant.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Reinforcing steel: billet steel, Grade 400, deformed bars to CSA G30.18-M92 (R2002),

unless indicated otherwise.

.2 Welded steel wire fabric: to CSA G30.5. Provide in flat sheets only.

.3 Chairs, bolsters, bar supports, spacers: to CAN/CSA-A23.1 (non-metallic).

.4 Mechanical splices: subject to the approval of the Consultant.

.5 Weldable rebar dowels as noted on the drawings. Field welding by others.



2.2 FABRICATION .1 Fabricate reinforcing in accordance with CAN/CSA-A23.1 and ACI 318M-02/318RM-02,

Manual of Engineering and Placing Drawings for Reinforced Concrete Structures.

.2 Obtain Consultant's approval for locations of reinforcement splices other than shown on

drawings. Stagger splices in adjacent bars.

.3 Horizontal reinforcement to be made continuous around corners by use of corner bars of

same size and strength as horizontal bars and as indicated on the drawings.

.4 Bars noted as continuous to be spliced in accordance with structural drawings, staggered

where possible.

.5 Provide standard hook length for all bars noted "H1E", unless noted otherwise.

.6 Ship bundles of bar reinforcement clearly identified in accordance with bar bending

details and list.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 FIELD BENDING

.1 Do not field bend reinforcement except where indicated or authorized by Consultant.

.2 When field bending is authorized, bend without heat, applying a slow and steady

pressure. Use appropriate bending devices that provide code prescribed min. bending

radii.

.3 Replace bars which develop cracks or splits.

3.2 PLACING

.1 Place reinforcing steel as indicated on drawings and in accordance with CAN/CSA-A23.1.

.2 Reinforcement shall be protected by the minimum thickness of concrete indicated on

drawings and as specified in CAN/CSA-A23.1.

.3 Clean reinforcing steel of excess rust, dirt, mud and previously deposited concrete prior

to placing concrete. Concrete reinforcement with oil spills shall be sandblasted before

use. Clean reinforcement of all ice prior to placing concrete.

.4 Use non-metallic chairs and bolsters to support all reinforcement. Reinforcement shall be

accurately placed and secured against displacement. Chairs in exposed concrete beam,

slab band, and slab soffits shall be placed in a regular pattern. Randomly placed strips of

„caterpillar‟ chairs shall be avoided.

.5 Anchor bolts, dowels, and steel embedments shall be set before concrete placement and

shall not be inserted into placed concrete.

.6 The Consultant shall be notified when the reinforcing steel is in place and in sufficient

time to permit an inspection of same prior to concrete placement. Minimum 48 hours‟

notice.

.7 Cooperate with trades placing in-slab electrical services and radiant heating piping. Do

not damage or displace items placed by other trades. Observe placing limits for conduit

shown on drawings, and as specified by CAN/CSA A23.1.

.8 Drilled dowels to existing concrete shall be anchored with Hilti RE500 or Hilti HY150

maximum (where specified on the drawings) to the embedment shown on the drawings.



Where no embedment is shown on the drawings, the “standard” embedment specified by

Hilti shall be used. Installation of dowels using Hilti adhesive shall be by trained

personnel only.

.9 Reinforcement shall be spliced only in locations shown on the drawings or as approved in

writing by the Consultant.

.10 Where reinforcing bars are interrupted by formwork, provide threaded couplers that

develop the full capacity of the bar being spliced or dowels with lap lengths specified on

the drawings.


2011-05-19 Section 03 30 00 City of New Westminster CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Queensborough Community Centre Page 6 of 7 Project No. 5410 Rev: 00


.1 Plastic Concrete Surfaces:

.1 Working of the concrete surface shall take place while it is sufficiently

plastic to achieve the desired shape, plane, and texture.

Screeding shall be followed by one or more of the operations of

darbying, floating, trowelling, and tooling of edges and joints, in that

order, to provide the surface finish specified in the drawings or by

the Consultant.

.2 Initial finishing shall be accomplished by screeding, darbying, or bull

floating and shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of

CAN/CSA3-A23.1, Clause 22.3.

.3 Initial finishing operations shall be completed before any bleed or free

water appears on the concrete surface. Overworking, which can bring

excessive fines to the concrete surface, shall not be permitted.

.4 Final finishing shall be accomplished by mechanical floating, mechanical

trowelling, creation of the specified surface finish, and tooling or edges

and joints, in that order. Exposed edges and corners shall be as

detailed. Surfaces at tooled edges shall be trowelled and sand-

blasted to remove tool edge marks. Hand floating and trowelling

shall only be permitted in small areas of restricted access. All final

finishing procedures shall conform to the requirements of

CAN/CSA3-A23.1, Clause 22.4.

.5 Final finishing shall commence after bleed water has disappeared from

the surface and when the concrete has stiffened sufficiently to

prevent the working of excess water to the surface. No additional dry

cement or water shall be used to facilitate finishing.

.6 The final finish to be provided shall be as specified on the drawings and

in accordance with Section 03345 Concrete Finishes.

3.8 WATERSTOPS

.1 Install waterstops at all joints in all foundation walls surrounding below-grade occupied

spaces, including elevator pits, to provide continuous water seal. Do not distort or pierce

waterstop to hamper performance. Do not displace reinforcement when installing

waterstops. Use equipment to manufacturer's requirements to field splice waterstops. Tie

waterstops rigidly in place.

.2 Use only straight heat sealed butt joints in field. Use factory welded corners and

intersections.

3.9 JOINT FILLERS

.1 Furnish filler for each joint in single piece for depth and width required for joint, unless

otherwise authorized by the Consultant. When more than one piece is required for a

joint, fasten abutting ends and hold securely to shape by stapling or other positive

fastening.

.2 Locate and form isolation joints as indicated. Install joint filler.



1.0 GENERAL

1.1 DOCUMENTS .1 This section of the Specifications forms part of the Contract Documents and is to be read,


1.2 RELATED WORK

.1 Concrete Forming Structures: Section 03 10 00

.2 Concrete Reinforcing Structures: Section 03 20 00

.3 Concrete Finishes: Section 03 35 00

.4 Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Section 01 74 19

.5 Self-Adhering Steel Waterproofing Section 07 13 26

1.3 REFERENCES .1 Do work in accordance with CAN/CSA-A23.1-04 and CAN/CSA A23.2-04, except where

specified otherwise.

1.4 CERTIFICATES

.1 Provide certification that plant, equipment and materials to be used in concrete comply

with the requirements of CAN/CSA-A23.1.

.2 Provide certification that mix proportions selected will produce concrete of specified

quality and yield, and that strength will comply with CAN/CSA-A23.1.

1.5 QUALITY CONTROL .1 Submit proposed quality control procedures for Consultant's review.

1.6 SAMPLES AND PROTOTYPES .1 Material samples: submit the following samples of materials for approval to the

Consultant. Approved samples shall be used as the acceptable standard for all materials

used on the project.

.1 Forming materials, including Class 1 Architectural Concrete finish materials.

.2 Gaskets, sealing materials, and form jointing system (as applicable).

.3 Ties, cones, and recessed precast concrete plugs, where specified.

.4 Rustication strips, reveals, and reglet forming material.

.5 Form release agent.

.6 Expansion and isolation joints.

.2 Sample panels:

.1 At least fourteen (14) days before beginning work, construct on-site samples of

proposed Class 1 Architectural Concrete finishes, each sample being at least



2000mm x 2000mm or as specified by the Architect. Construct additional

samples as necessary until a sample is approved by the Consultant.

.2 Samples shall be reviewed and approved by the Consultant prior to commencing

concrete work. Any concrete placed prior to sample approvals may be rejected.

.3 The samples may become part of the unexposed concrete, subject to approval of

the consultant.

.4 All finishes shall be compared to the approved samples on site for compliance.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Portland cement: Type GU or Type HS, as required to CAN/CSA-A5.

.2 Blended hydraulic cement: to CSA-A362.

.3 Supplementary cementing materials: to CAN/CSA-A23.5.

.4 Cementitious hydraulic slag: to CAN/CSA-A363.

.5 Water: to CAN/CSA-A23.1-04.

.6 Aggregates: to CAN/CSA-A23.1-04. Coarse aggregates to be normal density.

.7 Air entraining admixture: to CAN3-A266.1.

.8 Chemical admixtures: to CAN3-A266.2 and CAN/CSA S413-94. Consultant to approve

accelerating or set retarding admixtures during cold and hot weather placing.

.9 Super-plasticizer: to CAN3-A266.5 "Guidelines for the use of Super-plasticizing

Admixtures in Concrete".

.10 Shrinkage compensating grout: premixed compound consisting of non-metallic

aggregate, Portland cement, water reducing and plasticising agents of pouring

consistency, capable of developing a compressive strength of 50 MPa at 28 days.

.11 Concrete curing and sealing compound: Where slabs are to receive resilient flooring or

carpeting, use curing compounds compatible with flooring adhesive. Do not use where

bond required for additional concrete or surface coating. Acceptable products are as

specified in Section 033500.

.12 Bonding agent: formulated for bonding new concrete to cured concrete. Acceptable

products are as specified in Section 033500.

.13 Waterstops: extruded PVC with factory welded corner and intersecting pieces.

.14 Pre-moulded joint fillers, expansion and isolation joints: Bituminous impregnated fibre

board: to ASTM D1751.

.15 Dovetail Anchor slots: minimum 0.6 mm thick galvanized steel with insulation filled slots.

.16 Control joints: All areas of slab-on-grade concrete require saw-cut joints. See Structural

and Architectural drawings for layout pattern and depth of cut. Joint pattern to match

architectural finish patterns. Depth of cut to be 30 mm unless noted otherwise. Cuts to

be done within 24 hours of pour but after such time that cutting will not damage the slab

edges at the cuts.

.17 Waterproofing admixture: to elevator walls below grade as manufactured by Kryton

International Inc. or approved equal, in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s written

instructions.



.18 Waterstop slurry: to elevator walls below grade Kim Waterstop Slurry as manufactured by

Krypton International Inc., or approved equal, in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s

written instructions for Krystol Specifications No. 3, Krystol Waterstop Concrete Joint

Design.

.19 Waterstop grout: to elevator walls below grade Kim Waterstop Slurry as manufactured by

Krypton International Inc., or approved equal, in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s

written instructions for Krystol Specifications No. 3, Krystol Waterstop Concrete Joint

Design.

2.2 CONCRETE MIXES

.1 Design concrete mixes in accordance with CAN/CSA-A23.1 alternate 1, to give the

properties shown in tabular form on structural drawings.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

.1 Do cast-in-place concrete work in accordance with CAN/CSA-A23.1.

3.2 WORKMANSHIP

.1 Obtain Consultant's approval before placing concrete. Provide 24 hours notice,

minimum, prior to placing concrete.

.2 Pumping of concrete is permitted only after approval of equipment and mix design.

.3 Ensure reinforcement and inserts are not disturbed during concrete placement.

.4 Prior to placing of concrete obtain Consultant's approval of proposed method for

protection of concrete during placing and curing. Provide minimum of 7 day moist curing

for all slabs.

.5 Maintain accurate records of poured concrete items to indicate date, location of pour,

quality, air temperature and test samples taken.

.6 Concrete shall be deposited continuously, or in layers of such thickness that no concrete

will be deposited on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of

seams or plains of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, construction

joints shall be located as permitted by the Consultant. All pour and construction joints

shall be formed with a straight-edge fixed to formwork. Placing shall be carried out at

such a rate that concrete which is being integrated with fresh concrete is still plastic.

.7 Compact concrete with high-frequency vibrators applied directly to concrete by

experienced personnel. Do not over-vibrate.

.8 In locations where new concrete is dowelled to existing work, drill holes in existing

concrete. Attach steel dowels of deformed steel reinforcing bars with Hilti RE 500 epoxy

adhesive to the depths shown on the drawings or specified by the manufacturer.

.9 Take every precaution to protect finished surfaces from stains and abrasions. Surfaces

and edges likely to be damaged during the construction period shall be especially

protected.



.10 Do not place load upon new concrete until authorized by Consultant.

3.3 INSERTS

.1 Set sleeves, ties, pipe hangers, brace bay base hardware, and other inserts and

openings as indicated or specified elsewhere. NOTE: brace bay hardware to be set

accurately, especially in alignment and plumbness to allow successful installation of

brace bays members. Sleeves and openings greater than 300mm x 300mm not

indicated on structural drawings must be approved by the Consultant.

.2 NO sleeves, ducts, pipes or other openings shall pass through joists, beams, slab bands,

column capitals or columns, except where expressly detailed on structural drawings or

approved by the Consultant.

.3 Electrical conduit shall not be larger in outside diameter than one-third the thickness of

the slab or wall in which they are embedded nor spaced closer than three diameters on

centre.

.4 Do not eliminate or displace reinforcement to accommodate hardware. If inserts cannot

be located as specified, obtain approval of all modifications from the Consultant before

placing of concrete.

.5 Check locations and sizes of sleeves and openings shown on structural drawings with

architectural, mechanical and electrical drawings.

.6 Set special inserts for strength testing as indicated and as required by Non-Destructive

Method of Testing Concrete.

.7 Anchor bolts: Set anchor bolts to templates under supervision of appropriate trade prior

to placing concrete.

.8 Dovetail anchor slots: Install continuous vertical anchor slots to forms where masonry

abuts concrete wall or columns.

3.4 PLACING GROUT .1 Grout underside of steel column and beam bearing plates fully with non-shrinking grout to

manufacturer's instructions. Place grout to cover steel shims left in place.

3.5 TOLERANCES .1 Concrete tolerances to be in accordance with CAN/CSA-A23.1, or as noted in

Sub-section 3.1.6 of Section 031100, Concrete Forming & Accessories.

3.6 PATCHING

.1 General:

.1 Areas to be repaired shall be determined by the Consultant and shall not exceed

0.2 m² for each 100 m² of surface area, and shall be widely dispersed. Repairs

shall match the surrounding area. Architectural concrete requiring repair in

excess of above standard is subject to rejection by the Consultant and shall be

removed and replaced. Patching of slabs and concrete paving will not be



accepted. Removal and replacement of work shall be at no additional cost.

.2 Before commencing any repair work, the Contractor shall confirm repair

procedures with the Consultant and establish the formula required by trial mix.

The Contractor shall demonstrate his repair techniques on a prototype sample

panel.

.3 The following are key steps to making a repair to architectural concrete:

.1 Prepare the area to be repaired. This should include achieving the

desired finish in the surrounding area. Remove loose particles and chip

out part of the sound concrete to avoid feather edge repairs.

.2 Proportion the repair mix by weight according to the same proportions as

used in the concrete mix but substituting a portion of white cement

for grey cement. This should be based on tests to determine what is

required to match the finished surface.

.3 Apply a coat of bonding material to the root of the areas to be repaired,

being careful to avoid dripping on any surface to be exposed.

.4 Fill in the area to be repaired with mortar of the stiffest consistency that

will permit placing. Consolidate in place and strike off so as to leave the

repaired area slightly higher than the surrounding surface to permit initial

shrinkage. The repair shall be left undisturbed for at least one hour before

being textured.

1 .5 Cure the repaired area by keeping continuously damp for 7 days.

i) .6 Clean the repaired area to remove laitance and match the surrounding.

.2 Repair of cracks in concrete slabs and slabs-on-grade shall be the sole responsibility of

the Contractor at no expense to the Owner to satisfy the installation and performance

requirements of the floor finishes.

3.7 FINISHING

.1 Formed surface: The finishes to be provided for the various formed surfaces shall be:

.1 Unexposed Finish:

2 .1 This finish shall apply to formed surfaces which are not exposed to view

and where roughness is not objectionable.

3 .2 The surface, in general, shall not require any treatment after form

removal, other than repair of defective concrete, snap-tie holes, and the

removal of ridges and surface irregularities.

.2 Class 1 Architectural Concrete Finish:

4 .1 This finish shall apply to formed exterior architectural concrete surfaces

which are exposed to view, in accordance with Section 03345 - Concrete

Finishing.

.3 Class 2 Smooth Form Finish:

.1 This finish shall apply to formed exposed interior Class 2 concrete

surfaces in accordance with Sectionn 03345 - Concrete Finishes.

.2 Unformed surface: The finish to be provided for the various unformed surfaces shall be:



.3 Use joint filler to separate slabs on grade from vertical surfaces and extend joint filler

from bottom of slab to within 12mm of finished slab surface unless indicated otherwise.

3.10 CONTROL JOINTS

.1 Provide control joints in foundation walls in accordance with the details on the drawings

at maximum 6.0 m on centre. Align joints to suit architectural features.

.2 Provide saw-cut joints in all slabs-on-grade in accordance with the details on the

drawings and to suit architectural finishes. Review locations with the consultant.

3.11 HOUSEKEEPING AND EQUIPMENT PADS

.1 Provide concrete pads and curbs under equipment where indicated on drawings and as

specified in Division 15 and Division 16 and to approved shop drawings. Prepare base

concrete with a rough scratch finish and use an approved bonding agent to bond

concrete pad to base course. Dowel pads and curbs to base slab in accordance with

details on the drawings.

3.12 EXTERIOR SLABS-ON-GRADE AND PAVING .1 Exterior slab-son-grade used for pedestrian access shall be a minimum 100 mm thick

reinforced with 10M at 350 mm each way. Slabs-on-grade and paving for vehicle access

shall be minimum 175 mm thick reinforced with 15M at 300 mm each way. Thicken edges

to 300 mm.

.2 Provide minimum 100 mm thick layer of 20 mm minus clean gravel base under exterior

slabs.

.3 Provide control joints at 3000 mm on centre each way unless noted otherwise.

3.13 QUALITY CONTROL .1 Inspection and testing of concrete and concrete materials will be carried out by a Testing

Laboratory pre-approved by the Owner in accordance with CAN/CSA-A23.1.

Non-destructive Methods for Testing Concrete shall be in accordance with

CAN/CSA-A23.2.

.2 Owner will pay for costs of tests.

.3 Testing Laboratory will take additional test cylinders during cold weather concreting.

Cure cylinders on job site under the same conditions as concrete which they represent.

.4 If results of tests show concrete to be less than specified in quality or strength, the

Consultant shall have the right to have the mix designs altered for the remainder of the

work at no cost. Further testing and remedial measures required by CAN/CSA-A23.1

shall be done, the costs of this work paid for by the Contractor.

.5 Inspection or testing will not augment or replace Contractor quality control nor relieve him

of his contractual responsibilities.


QUEENSBOROUGH COMMUNITY CENTRE EXPANSION AND RENOVATION

Issued for Tender – September 8, 2011


3 CONCRETE SECTION 03 35 00 CONCRETE FINISHING page 1 of 3 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED .1 Furnish all labour, material, equipment, and services necessary for completion of special

concrete finishes for all concrete exposed in the final work, as indicated and as herein specified.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS .1 Section 03 20 00: Reinforcing Steel. .2 Section 03 30 00: Cast-In-Place Concrete. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS .1 Conform to the requirements of the National Building Code and CAN3-A23.1 Concrete

Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction, where applicable unless otherwise required by this specification.

1.4 LEED REQUIREMENTS .1 Conform to the requirements of CaGBC LEED 2009 Indoor Environmental Quality (IEQ)

Credit 4.1 – Low Emitting Materials: Adhesives and Sealants. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) limits of adhesives and sealants used on the interior (inboard side of the air barrier within the wall and roof assemblies) of the building to comply with the following criteria:

a. South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule #1168.

.2 Conform to the requirements of CaGBC LEED 2009 IEQ Credit 4.2 – Low Emitting

Materials: Paints and Coatings. Paints and coatings applied on site, and used on the interior (inboard side of the air barrier within the wall and roof assemblies) of the building must comply with the following criteria:

a. Clear finishes, stains, primers, and shellacs must not exceed the VOC content

limits established in SCAQMD Rule 1113, Architectural Coatings, rules in effect on January 1, 2004.

1.5 SUBMITTALS .1 LEED Product Summary Sheet: Furnish the Architect with a completed form for each

construction material used. See Appendix 1 for Sample Product Summary Sheet. .2 MSDS Sheets: Provide the Architect with MSDS information for each adhesive, sealant,

paint, primer, coating and stain, including relevant VOC information. 1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Submit shop drawings of all concrete floors with exposed finish indicating control joint

layout.




3 CONCRETE SECTION 03 35 00 CONCRETE FINISHING page 2 of 3 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Formwork Materials: Refer to Structural Drawings .2 Concrete Materials: Refer to Structural Drawings. .3 Pre-moulded Joint Fillers: .1 Bituminous Impregnated Fibre Board: To ASTM D1751-73. .2 Sponge Rubber: To ASTM D1752-67, Type II. .4 Joint Sealant: Shall be self-leveling two part polyurethane type, conforming to CGSB 19-

GP-24M Type 1, or Federal Specification TT-S-00227E, Type 1. Approved Type: Iso-Flex 880 GB (Self-leveling) Sealant as manufactured by Harry S

Peterson Co. Inc.; Sternson’s RC-25L Sealant; Vulkem 245; or other pre-approved sealant.

Colour: as selected by the Consultant from standard range. .5 Primers and Bond Breakers: As required to install the perimeter joint sealant system

shall be provided in strict accordance with sealant manufacturer’s recommendations. 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FINISHING OF FORMED SURFACES .1 Finishing of formed surfaces shall conform to CAN3-A23.1-M90, Section 24 – Finishing

of Formed Surfaces, item 24.3.2 Rough-Form Finish for concealed concrete surfaces and item 24.3.3 Smooth-Form Finish for exposed concrete surfaces as classified under clause 3.1.2. Patching under items 24.3.2 and 24.3.3 to be done in accordance with 24.2 Patching.

.2 Surface finishing of formed surfaces shall be classified as follows: .1 Concealed Concrete Surfaces: Rough Form Finish. .2 Exposed Concrete Surfaces: Smooth Form Finish. 3.2 FLOOR & SLAB FINISHING .1 Finishing of concrete floor slabs shall conform to CAN3-A23.1-M90, Section 22 –

Treatment of Unformed Surfaces, item 22.1.2, with classification of “Moderately Flat” i.e. the gap at any point between a 3 metre long straight edge and the concrete surface shall not exceed 8 mm.




3 CONCRETE SECTION 03 35 00 CONCRETE FINISHING page 3 of 3 .2 Steel Trowel Finish: Finish concrete floor slabs in accordance with CAN3-A23.1 section

22 and as follows. Thoroughly float surface with disc power floating machine until compacted. Continue floating operation until sufficient mortar is brought to the surface to fill all voids. When the floor has hardened sufficiently so that excess fines will not be brought to the surface, trowel floor with a steel trowel to a smooth surface free from pin holes and other imperfections. An approved rotary mechanical trowel with steel blades may be used for this operation providing that the disc lines are removed and a smooth hard burnish results.

.3 Tool all crack control joints and construction joints as indicated on the structural

drawings. Tooling shall be coordinated with concrete finishing. If necessary retool joints at completion of finishing to give full size joint with clean and sound substrate ready for sealant.

3.3 CURING .1 Cure and protect the surface of slabs in accordance with CAN3-A23.1-M90 and as

specified herein. .2 See Structural Drawings for general curing and protection requirements including cold

weather requirements. 3.4 JOINT FILLERS AND SEALERS .1 Provide joint fillers and sealers at interior slabs on grade and at exterior concrete paving

at the location and to the details shown on the drawings. .2 Particular care shall be taken to construct clean joints free from any foreign material

which will impair the proper function of the joint. .3 Joint filler material shall be anchored to the previously poured concrete surface. .4 Unless otherwise shown, joint filler shall extend for full depth of the joint and shall

terminate 12 mm below the top of the joint. The 12 mm space shall be filled with joint sealer as specified.

3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED SURFACES .1 Keep traffic which would affect or disturb the curing procedures off the finished surfaces

for a period of seven (7) days minimum. .2 Protect exposed concrete finishes and floors against damage until the building is

accepted by the Owner. .3 Protect floors against contamination by oil, paint or other deleterious materials.

END OF SECTION 03 35 00 .

2011-05-19 Section 05 12 00 City of New Westminster STRUCTURAL STEEL Queensborough Community Centre Page 1 of 4 Project No. 5410 Rev: 00


1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DOCUMENTS .1 This section of the Specifications forms part of the Contract Documents and is to be read,

interpreted, and coordinated with all other parts. 1.2 RELATED WORK .1 Steel Deck: Section 05 31 10 .2 Metal Fabrications: Section 05 50 00 .3 Painting: Section 09 90 00 .4 Cast-in-Place Concrete: Section 03 30 00

.5 Environmental Procedures: Section 01 35 43 1.3 REFERENCES .1 ASTM A307-00, Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi tensile

strength. .2 ASTM A325-02, Specification for High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints. .3 CISC/CPMA 1-73a or 2-75, Primer Structural Steel, Oil Alkyd Type. .4 CAN/CSA-G40.20-04, General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality

Steel. .5 CAN/CSA-G40.21-04, Structural Quality Steel. .6 CAN/CSA S16-01, Steel Structures for Buildings, (Limit States Design). .7 CSA W47.1-1983, Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel Structures. 1.4 QUALITY CONTROL .1 Prior to commencement of work, submit 2 certified copies of mill reports covering

chemical and physical properties of steel used in this work. 1.5 DESIGN OF DETAILS AND CONNECTIONS .1 Design details and connections in accordance with requirements of CAN/CSA S16-01. .2 High strength bolt connections to conform to ASTM A325, Bearing Type. Bolts in bracing

connections to be torqued. .3 For standard steel connections, select details from CISC Handbook of Steel Construction

to ensure structural adequacy. .4 Connections for beams are to be designed for: .1 A shear at each end of the beam equal to 50% of the total uniformly distributed

factored loads for a laterally supported beam of the span shown, OR .2 A shear at each end of the beam equal to 35% of the total uniformly distributed

factored load for a laterally supported beam of the span shown acting simultaneously with the axial force shown on the brace bay drawings. The axial force for a W-section beam should be assumed to be tension or compression.

.5 Bracing connections to be designed for the Factored loads noted on structural drawings. 1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Submit shop detail and erection drawings in accordance with Section 01 30 00 -

Submittals.



.2 Shop drawings of non-standard connections designed by the steel fabricator to be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in the Province of British Columbia.

.3 On erection drawings, indicate member size, base plate elevation, anchor bolt size and location and other information necessary for assembly.

.4 Submit description of methods, sequence of erection and type of equipment to be used in erecting structural steel, if requested.

.5 Indicate welds by welding symbols defined in CSA W59. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Structural steel: to CANCSA G40.21, Grade 300W, except wide flange sections to be

Grade 350W. .2 Hollow structural sections: to CSA G40.21, Grade 350W, Class C. .3 Anchor bolts: to ASTM A307, except Dywidag Threadbar to be Grade 400 to ASTM

A615. .4 High strength bolts, nuts and washers: to ASTM A325. .5 Ordinary bolts, nuts and washers: to ASTM A307 .6 Welding materials: to CSA W59 and certified by Canadian Welding Bureau. .7 Shop paint primer: to CISC/CPMA 1-73a. .8 Hot dip galvanizing: galvanize steel, where indicated, to CSA G164, minimum zinc

coating of 600 g/m2. .9 Shear stud connectors: to CSA W59, Appendix H. 2.2 FABRICATION .1 Fabricate structural steel, as indicated, in accordance with CAN/CSA S16-01 and in

accordance with reviewed shop drawings. .2 Install shear studs in accordance with CSA W59. .3 Continuously seal HSS members with cap plates and by continuous welds. Grind

smooth. .4 Reinforce openings to maintain required design strength. .5 Shop weld weldable rebar dowels to steel embed plates. Weldable rebar supplied by this

section. .6 Unless noted otherwise, hot-dip galvanize all exterior exposed steel, except exterior steel

that is exposed to view which shall receive an epoxy paint finish in accordance with Section 09900.

.7 All exposed welds to be continuous, ground smooth, and formed to match profile of the adjacent steel members.

.8 All exterior member welds to be continuous. Welds to fully seal joints between components.

2.3 SHOP PAINTING .1 Clean, prepare surfaces and shop prime structural steel in accordance with CAN/CSA

S16-01 except where members to be encased in concrete, spray fire-proofed, or galvanized.

.2 Structural steel to receive primer paint only to have SP-2 surface preparation. .3 All exposed structural steel to receive a finish coat shall have SP-6 surface preparation

(commercial sandblast). 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL



.1 Do welding in accordance with CSA W59 and as noted on the drawings. .2 Fabrication and erection companies to be certified under Division 1 or 2.1 of CSA W47.1

for fusion welding of steel structures and/or CSA W55.3 for resistance welding of structural components.

3.2 CONNECTION TO EXISTING WORK .1 Verify dimensions of existing work before commencing preparation of shop drawings and

fabrication and report any discrepancy and potential problem areas to Consultant and await instructions.

3.3 MARKING .1 Mark materials in accordance with CAN/CSA G40.20. Do not use die stamping. If steel

is to be left in unpainted condition, place marking at locations not visible from exterior after erection.

3.4 ERECTION .1 Erect structural steel as indicated in accordance with CAN/CSA S16-01 and in

accordance with reviewed erection drawings. .2 Obtain written permission of Consultant prior to field cutting or altering of structural

members not shown on shop drawings. .3 Clean with mechanical brush and touch up shop primer to bolts, rivets, welds and burned

or scratched surfaces at completion of erection. Touch-up galvanizing with "Galvacon" or equivalent to manufacturer's recommendations.

.4 Temporarily brace and shore structural steel as required for erection stability. Member sizes and design forces are for final erected conditions with steel decking attached and may not be adequate for the erection operation.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .1 Inspection and testing of materials and workmanship will be carried out by an

independent Testing Agency designated by the Contractor and approved by the Consultant in accordance with CAN/CSA S16-01.

.2 The Owner shall pay for the Testing Agency services. .3 The testing and inspection program shall include, but not be limited to: .1 Shop fabrication: .1 Review of mill certificates, weld procedures, and welder qualifications. .2 Review of workmanship on steel fabrication for conformance with project

specifications. .3 Visual examination of all welds. .4 Magnetic particle testing of approximately 5% of all welds. .5 Complete ultra-sonic examination of all full-strength, full-penetration

welds. .6 Random check of structural steel member sizes. .2 Field inspection: .1 Review weld procedures and welder qualifications. .2 Visual examination of all field welds including steel decking attachment

to structural steel. .3 Magnetic particle or other non-destructive testing of approximately 5% of

field welds. .4 Complete ultra-sonic examination of all full-strength, full-penetration field



welds. .4 The above testing shall not be considered as a substitute for the fabricator's and erector's

quality control programs.

End of Section 05 12 00



5 METALS SECTION 05 41 00 METAL STUD FRAMING page 1 of 2 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED .1 Refer to Wall Types Schedule on Drawings. The scope of work includes but is not

limited to: • All new interior walls • All suspended ceilings • All new exterior partition walls 1.2 RELATED WORK .1 Section 05410: Structural Metal Stud Systems. .2 Section 09250: Gypsum Wallboard. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 NON-LOAD BEARING STUDS .1 Steel channel studs: (screw-on type), roll formed 0.531mm (25 gauge) thickness,

electro-galvanized, with cut-outs for service holes approximately 450mm (18") on centre. Floor and ceiling runners to match studs. Sizes as indicated on Drawings.

.2 Approved: Synkloid Metal Products: Domtar Construction Materials Ltd.; Western

Gypsum Ltd. 2.2 GIRTING CHANNELS (BRACING) .1 20 x 10 x 1.214mm (3/4" x 3/8" x 18 gauge) nominal. 2.3 ACCESSORIES .1 Tie wire: 1.519mm (16 gauge) annealed galvanized. .2 Hangers: 3.795mm (9 gauge) galvanized carbon steel. 2.4 PLYWOOD .1 To CSA. 0121-M1978. Good one side for sheathings or backings, thicknesses as

indicated. 2.5 BLOCKING Provide solid blocking as per Code. Allowance should be made for blocking of other subtrades.



5 METALS SECTION 05 41 00 METAL STUD FRAMING page 2 of 2 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITION .1 Examine all surfaces and conditions affecting proper installation of studs. Start of work implies acceptance of conditions and surfaces. 3.2 INSTALLATION .1 Accurately install all top and bottom track, align studs and lay out as shown, in strict

accordance with manufacturer's instructions, plumb level and secure. .2 Space studs 406mm (16") o.c. generally, except where otherwise shown. Spacing

and lengths must not exceed manufacturer's recommendations. .3 Screw studs to top and bottom track, both sides of each stud, to provide a completely

rigid framework to support finishes shown. .4 Provide horizontal bracing as required and tie securely to studs. .5 Cut-out flanges and turn up webs at ends of runners and screw to studs. .6 Provide all necessary studs, framing channels, or other reinforcing as required for

attachment of wall hung fixtures, washroom accessories, mirrors, millwork, or other items shown, specified, or anticipated.

.7 Space studs faced with "wonderboard" 12" o.c. maximum. Suspend horizontal metal

stud ceiling joists at 24" o.c.





SECTION 05 50 00 5 METALS METAL FABRICATIONS page 1 of 5 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED .1 The following list of items are to be included, but is not necessary all-inclusive. It is the

responsibility of this Section to examine the drawings and specifications to ascertain what additional items, if any, may be required to complete the work.

• Sheet steel cladding w/ specialty finish • Stainless steel handrails @ Exit Stairs + Fitness ramp • Shop finished brackets and connectors

.2 Provide all necessary inserts, clips, brackets, angles, anchors, bolts, nuts and screws to

assemble work of this Section and secure it to the building. .3 Provide all miscellaneous angles, clips, anchors, plates, channels etc. required to

support or fix items of work installed by other sections, save where specifically excepted. 1.2 RELATED WORK .1 Section 01 81 13 Environmental Requirements .2 Section 06 20 00: Finish Carpentry .3 Section 06 40 00: Architectural Woodwork .4 Section 08 12 00: Pressed Steel Door Frames .5 Section 09 90 00: Painting 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS & STANDARDS .1 Welding work to conform to CSA Standard W59 and shall only be performed by

organizations and operators qualified under CSA Welding Qualifications Code, CSA W47. Electrodes to conform to CSA Standard W48.

.2 Design, fabrication and workmanship shall conform to CAN3-S16.1-M. Handrails and

guards when installed shall be designed to withstand all loads in accordance with the requirements of the National Building Code – latest edition.

1.4 LEED REQUIREMENTS .1 Conform to the requirements of CaGBC LEED 2009 Materials and Resources Credit 4 –

Recycled Content to achieve a minimum of 50% post-consumer recycled content in all steel products.

.2 Conform to the requirements of CaGBC LEED 2009 Credit 4.2 – Low Emitting Materials:

Paints and Coatings. Paints and coatings applied on-site, and used on the interior of the building (inboard side of the air barrier within the wall and roof assemblies) must comply with the following criteria: 1 Clear finishes, stains, primers, and shellacs must not exceed the VOC content limits

established in SCAQMD Rule 1113, Architectural Coatings, rules in effect on January 1, 2004.




SECTION 05 50 00 5 METALS METAL FABRICATIONS page 2 of 5

1.5 SUBMITTALS .1 LEED Product Summary Sheet: Furnish the Architect with a completed form for each

construction material used in the Expansion and Renovation Work. See Appendix 1 for Sample Product Summary Sheet.

1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Submit shop drawings of all metal fabrications and miscellaneous metalwork for review to

the Consultant. Completely detail items, clearly indicating materials, thickness & dimensions, finishes, connections, joints, and methods of fixing. Confirm all dimensions on site.

.2 Shop drawings for railings, guards, and sheet steel panels, including all connection

detailing, shall be sealed by a professional engineer registered in British Columbia, and submitted along with a signed and sealed letter of assurance.

.3 All shop drawings showing steel to steel connections not designed by the Structural

Engineer, shall be sealed by a professional engineer registered in British Columbia, and submitted along with a signed and sealed letter of assurance.

.4 The Engineer who sealed the shop drawings, or his designated representative, shall

provide field review of the installation. The Engineer shall provide a signed and sealed Letter of Assurance to the Consultant stating he provided field review and that the installation substantially complies with the design and shop drawings sealed by him and with any field modifications he authorized.

1.5 CO-OPERATION .1 Notify other trades of preparations required for proper attachment of work of this Section. .2 Supply items required to be built-in by other trades, including sleeves bolts and anchors. 1.6 DELIVERY .1 All miscellaneous metal items delivered to the site shall be tagged and supplied with

sufficient information for identification and fixing. .2 Arrange delivery in such sequence and manner to permit the most efficient and

economical performance of the section of work. 1.7 PROTECTION .1 The Metal Erector is responsible for the protection of any installed work, particularly

during on site welding. Any work damaged will be replaced at the Sub-contractors expense.




SECTION 05 50 00 5 METALS METAL FABRICATIONS page 3 of 5 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 All materials to be new and free from defects which may impair strength, durability, and

appearance. All fastenings to be compatible with material being fastened. .2 Steel: Shall be one of the following types as designated on the drawings or specified

herein. Sizes as indicated. .1 Structural steel, miscellaneous steel shapes, conforming to CAN3-G40.21, Grade

300W. .2 Seamless hollow structural sections, conforming to CAN3-G40.21, Grade 50W, Type

H. .3 Pipe, standard weight, conforming to ASTM Specification A53, Grade B, unless

otherwise required by loading as per Code. Include galvanized sleeves for setting verticals where required.

.4 Sheet steel, cold rolled .3 Bolts, Nuts, & Washers: In accordance with material and size requirements of CAN3-

S16.1-M. .4 Galvanizing: Hot dipped galvanizing with zinc coating 610 g/sq.m. to CSA G164-M1981. .5 Galvanized Metal Primer: Shall conform to CGSB. 1-GP-198M. If applied on-site, shall

not exceed VOC limits per SCAQMD Rule 1113. .6 Non-Galvanized Metal Primer: Shall conform to CGSB. 1-GP-40M or 1-GP-132M. If

applied on-site, shall not exceed VOC limits per SCAQMD Rule 1113. .7 Grout: For fill at pipe sleeves and other locations, non-shrink, non-metallic, flowable,

24h, Mpa.15, pull-out strength 7.9 Mpa for setting metal posts; Quick-Rok expansion cement; or other pre-approved type.

.8 Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type galvanized ferrous castings, either malleable

iron ASTM A47, or cast steel ASTM A27. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as required, hot-dip galvanized as specified.




SECTION 05 50 00 5 METALS METAL FABRICATIONS page 4 of 5 2.2 FABRICATION .1 Verify all dimensions on site prior to proceeding with shop fabrication. Fabricate all work

in accordance with details shown on drawings and reviewed shop drawings. .2 Build work square, true, straight and accurate to size, with joints closely fitted and

properly secured, reinforced as necessary. Grind smooth sharp edges, angles, and corners.

.3 Welding shall conform to CSA W59-M1984. .4 Exposed welds to be continuous for length of each joint. Grind exposed welds flush and

smooth. Touch up field welds with zinc rich paint. .5 Where possible, fit and shop assemble work, ready for erection. .6 Drill or punch holes required for the attachment of work of other trades and bolted

connections. .7 All exposed steel handrails, balustrades, brackets, gates etc., to be primed and shop

painted to colours selected by Architect. 2.3 SHOP PREPARATION & PRIMING .1 Apply one shop coat of primer to all miscellaneous metal items, except items specified to

be factory finished and concrete encased items. .2 Prepare all metal items for priming by SSPC #1 Solvent cleaning, followed by SSPC #6

commercial blast cleaning. .3 Apply primer in accordance with manufacturer’s directions. .4 Use primer unadulterated. Paint on dry surfaces, free from rust, scale, grease. Do not

paint when temperature is lower than 7˚C. .5 Clean surfaces to be field welded. Do not paint. .6 All exterior ferrous metal to be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication




SECTION 05 50 00 5 METALS METAL FABRICATIONS page 5 of 5 3 EXECUTION 3.1 ERECTION .1 Ensure that substrate is adequate to support work of this Section before Erection. Erect

at locations shown, square, plumb, level and in proper alignment with adjoining work. .2 Provide suitable means of anchorage acceptable to Consultant, and meeting the

requirements of the BC Building Code where applicable, including dowels, anchors, clips, bar anchors, expansion bolts and shields, and toggles.

.3 Make field connections with bolts to CAN3-S16.1-M84, or weld. .4 Hand over items for casting into concrete or building into masonry to appropriate trades

together with setting templates. .5 Touch up rivets, field welds, bolts and burnt or scratched metal surfaces after completion

or erection with primer. Touch up galvanized surfaces with zinc primer where burned by field welding. Any other work damaged on site shall be promptly replaced at the Metal Erector’s expense.

.6 Isolate dissimilar metals from contact with each other. Provide neoprene, lead or other

approved materials. .7 Provide concealed fastenings where possible, sizes and spacing as indicated on the

drawings, to conform to best trade practices to give permanent stability and good appearance; avoid stain, scratches, damage and distortion of materials.

4 SCHEDULE

4.1 SHEET STEEL CLADDING .1 1/4” thick sheet steel wall panels w/ powder-coated finish. Wall panels to be pre-drilled

for counter sunk flush screw installation. Panel layout and installation details to be reviewed by Architect prior to fabrication.

4.2 RAILINGS .1 1 ½” diameter stainless steel tube railing on wall mounted stainless steel brackets.





SECTION 05 55 00 5 METALS METAL LADDERS page 1 of 5

1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

.1 Aluminum access ladders.


.1 Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications: Fasteners and installation requirements used to attach ladders to structure.

.2 Section 14200 – Elevators: For pit ladders.

.3 Section 15050 – Basic Electrical Materials and Methods: For electrical grounding of ladders.

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 AA – Aluminum Association.

.2 ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.

.3 ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.

.4 OSHA 1910.27 – Fixed Ladders.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

.2 LEED Product Summary Sheet: Furnish the Architect with a completed form for each construction material used in the Expansion and Renovation Work. See Appendix 1 for Sample Product Summary Sheet.

.3 Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product.

.4 Shop Drawings:

.1 Detail fabrication and erection of each ladder indicated. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections.

.2 Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.

.3 Provide reaction loads for each hanger and bracket.

.5 Qualification Data:

.1 Refer to Quality Assurance provisions for submittal requirements evidencing experience, certifications and resources.

.2 Selection Samples: For each finish specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors.





.3 Verification Samples: For each finish specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches (150 mm) square, represent actual product color.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing aluminum metal ladders similar to those indicated for this Project.

.1 Record of successful in-service performance.

.2 Sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

.3 Professional engineering competent in design and structural analysis to fabricate ladders in compliance with industry standards and local codes.

.2 Installer Qualifications: Competent and experienced firm capable of selecting fasteners and installing ladders to attain designed operational and structural performance.

.3 Product Qualification: Product design shall comply with OSHA 1910.27 minimum standards for ladders.

.4 Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship.

.1 Install ladder in area designated by Architect.

.2 Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship and installation are approved by Architect.

.3 Rework mock-up as required to produce acceptable work.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

.1 Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

.1 Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurement before fabrication.

.2 Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, indicate established dimensions on shop drawing submittal and proceed with fabrication.

1.8 WARRANTY

.1 Manufacturer has responsibility for an extended Corrective Period for work of this Section for a period of 5 years from date of Substantial Completion against all the conditions indicated below, and when notified in writing from Owner, manufacturer shall promptly and without inconvenience and cost to Owner correct said deficiencies.

.1 Defects in materials and workmanship.





.2 Deterioration of material and surface performance below minimum OSHA standards as certified by independent third party testing laboratory. Ordinary wear and tear, unusual abuse or neglect excepted.

.3 Within the warranty period, the manufacturer shall, at its option, repair, replace, or refund the purchase price of defective ladder.

.2 Manufacturer shall be notified immediately of defective products, and be given a reasonable opportunity to inspect the goods prior to return. Manufacturer will not assume responsibility, or compensation, for unauthorized repairs or labor. Manufacturer makes no other warranty, expressed or implied, to the merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, design, sale, installation, or use, of the ladder; and shall not be liable for incidental or consequential damages, losses of or expenses, resulting from the use of ladder products.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

.1 Furnish touchup kit for each type and color of paint finish provided.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

.1 Acceptable Manufacturer: O’Keeffe’s, Inc.; 325 Newhall St. San Francisco, CA 94124. ASD. Toll Free Tel: (888) 653-3333. Tel: (415) 824-4900. Fax: (415) 824-5900. Email: [email protected]. Web: http://www.okeeffes.com.

.2 Approved alternate.

2.2 APPLICATIONS/SCOPE

.1 Fixed and Cage Ladder Design:

.1 Safety cages are required on ladders over 24 feet (7315 mm)

.2 Safety cages are required on all ladders in high or hazardous areas.

.3 Landing platforms are required at 50 feet (15,240 mm) above the bottom of the ladder.

.4 Rail and harness fall arrest system as alternate to safety cage and landing platforms shall be a permissible manufacturer’s option.

.1 Fixed Ladder Bottom Bracket:

.2 Bottom floor supported bracket.

.5 Bottom wall supported bracket.

.6 Bracket as drawn.

.2 Fixed Access Ladder:





.1 Tubular Rail Low Parapet Access Ladder with Platform and Return.

.1 Model 503 as manufactured by O’Keeffe’s Inc.

.2 Approved alternate

2.3 FINISHES

.1 Mill finish. As extruded.

.2 Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M10C22A41 Mechanical finish as fabricated. Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker.

2.4 MATERIALS

.1 Aluminum Sheet: Alloy 5005-H34 to comply with ASTM B209.

.2 Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy 6063-T6 to comply with ASTM B221.

2.5 FABRICATION

.1 Rungs: Not less than 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) in section and 18–3/8 inches (467mm) long, formed from tubular aluminum extrusions. Squared and deeply serrated on all sides.

.2 Rungs shall withstand a 1,500 pound (454 kg) load without deformation or failure.

.3 Channel Side Rails: Not less than 1/8 inch (3 mm) wall thickness by 3 inches (76 mm) wide.

.4 Heavy Duty Tubular Side Rails: Assembled from two interlocking aluminum extrusions no less than 1/8 inch (3 mm) wall thickness by 3 inches (76 mm) wide. Construction shall be self-locking stainless steel fasteners, full penetration TIG welds and clean, smooth and burr-free surfaces.

.5 Walk-Through Rail and Roof Rail Extension: Not less than 3 feet 6 inches (1067 mm) above the landing and shall be fitted with deeply serrated, square, tubular grab rails.

.6 Landing Platform: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) or greater diameter, tubular aluminum guardrails and decks of serrated aluminum treads.

.7 Security Doors: Formed 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick aluminum sheet. Security panels shall extend on both sides, perpendicular to the door face, to within 2 inches (51 mm) of the wall. Security door shall be furnished with continuous aluminum piano hinge and heavy duty forged steel locking hasps.

.8 Ladder Safety Post: Retractable hand hold and tie off.

.9 Rail and Harness Fall Arrest System: Supplied where specified as alternate to safety cage and landing platforms, in accordance with OSHA regulation 1910.27; permanently mounted to ladder rungs and complete with necessary components.

3 EXECUTION





3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Coordinate anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and anchorage structural loads for fastener resistance.

.2 Do not begin installation until supporting structure is complete and ladder installation will not interfere with supporting structure work.

.3 If supporting structure is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory supporting work before proceeding.

3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and in proper relationship with adjacent construction.

3.3 PROTECTION

.1 Protect installed products until completion of project.

.2 Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.





6 WOOD, PLASTIC & COMPOSITES SECTION 06 05 73 WOOD TREATMENT page 1 of 4

1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Work includes labour, materials, equipment and services necessary for:

.1 Treatment of new lumber and plywood.

.2 Treatment of existing lumber, plywood and OSB sheathing.

1.2 REFERENCES


.2 CAN/CSA 080 Series-08 Wood Preservation.

.3 American Wood Protection Association (AWPA) Standards.


.1 Inspection of products treated with preservative by vacuum-pressure impregnation will be carried out by an accredited inspection agency of the Canadian Wood Preservers Bureau (CWPB).

.2 All treated lumber and plywood shall bear an identifying stamp in accordance with the CWPB requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

.1 For products treated with preservative by vacuum-pressure impregnation submit following information certified by authorized signing officer of treatment plant:

.1 Information listed in AWPA.M2 and revisions specified in CAN/CSA-O80 Series, Supplementary Requirement to AWPA Standard M2 applicable to specified treatment.

.2 Moisture content after drying following treatment with water-borne preservative.

.3 Acceptable types of paint, stain, and clear finishes that may be used over treated materials to be finished after treatment.


1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL AND SAFETY

.1 Comply with requirements of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) regarding use, handling, storage, and disposal of hazardous materials; and regarding labelling and provision of material safety data sheets acceptable to WCB. Ensure that building occupants, as well as adjacent materials including landscaping are thoroughly protected.





2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 In general all lumber and plywood is to be pressure treated. Exceptions to below include:

.1 Plywood below PVC membranes.

.2 Tongue and groove plywood below roof/deck membranes.

.3 Partition wall framing in Expansion and Renovation Work.

.4 Finish Carpentry

.5 Architectural Woodwork

.2 All lumber must be pressure treated after final cutting and fabrication whenever possible.

.3 All wood products to be dried to below 19% moisture content after treatment by kiln drying. Wood products that require air drying instead of kiln dried are subject to the approval of to the Consultant. If treated wood becomes wet after treatment and kiln drying it will need to be air dried to below 19% moisture content before installation.

.4 For the purpose of this specification, the use of borate treated wood products is limited to areas where the wood will not be subject to continual or direct water runoff.

.5 Preservative treatment for new lumber exposed to direct moisture is to be as follows:

.1 Kiln Dried After Treatment (KDAT) with installed moisture content of 19% or less, Alkaline Copper Quat (ACQ-C) to AWPA – P5 “Waterborne Preservatives”.

.2 This would include components such as, exterior beam or column framing in assemblies that allow water to directly reach these members. It also includes wood duck boards and exterior stairs that are exposed to water.

.6 Preservative treatment for new plywood exposed to direct moisture is to be as follows:

.1 Kiln Dried After Treatment (KDAT) with installed moisture content of 19% or less, Copper Chromium Arsenate (CCA) to CAN/CSA-080.2 “Incised Preservative treatment of lumber, timber, bridge ties and mine ties by pressure processes”.

.2 This would include components such as, plywood cladding, exterior beam or column framing in assemblies that do not prevent water from reaching these members.

.7 Preservative treatment for new lumber not exposed to direct moisture is to be as follows:

.1 Kiln Dried After Treatment (KDAT), Disodium octaborate tetrahydrate (DOT) to CAN/CSA-080.34-97 “Pressure preservative treatment of lumber and timber with borate for use out of ground contact and continuously protected from liquid water.

.2 This would include; strapping (solid sawn) in rainscreen assemblies, wood framing under decks or balconies with membranes, wood framing in exterior walls behind the wall cladding, wood framing in unheated exterior columns, walls or dividers.





.8 Preservative treatment for new plywood not exposed to direct moisture can be treated to one of the following treatment processes as follows:

.1 Kiln Dried After Treatment (KDAT), Disodium octaborate tetrahydrate (DOT) to CAN/CSA-080.34-97 “Pressure preservative treatment of lumber and timber with borate for use out of ground contact and continuously protected from liquid water”.

.2 This would include cavity wall strapping, sleepers, liners for doors and windows, wall or column sheathing, balcony sheathing below urethane membranes.

.9 Preservative field treatment for ACQ or CCA treated lumber or plywood is to be with an organic solvent such as Copper Napthenate.

.10 Preservative field treatment borate treated lumber or plywood is to be inorganic borate based insecticide / fungicide.

.1 Preservative field treatment to be dyed to allow easy identification of field treated wood areas. Dye additive to be:

.1 Sansin P-320.

.2 Dye Tablets.

.3 Food Colouring.

.4 Approved alternative.

.2 Acceptable products:

.1 Boracol 20-2 BD Inorganic Boron Wood Preservative.

.2 Pre-Ser-Vor 25-3 Inorganice Boron Wood Preservative.

.3 Shellguard Insecticide and Fungicide Concentrate For Wood.


3 EXECUTION

3.1 FACTORY APPLICATIONS OF PRESERVATIVES

.1 All new lumber and plywood treated with ACQ or CCA shall be incised and factory treated (plywood sheathing is not to be incised) to obtain an average net retention of 4.0 kg/m3 of preservative for above ground or 6.4 kg/m3 of preservative for ground contact by assay.

.1 CCA preservative to CAN/CSA-080.2 “Preservative treatment of lumber, timber, bridge ties and mine ties by pressure processes”.

.2 ACQ-C preservative to AWPA – P5 “Waterborne Preservatives”

.3 Minimum depth of penetration is 10mm.

.2 All new lumber and plywood treated with disodium octaborate tetrahydrate (DOT) preservative to obtain an average net retention of 4.0 kg/m3 DOT (2.7 kg/m3 B2O3) by assay. Lumber and plywood need not be incised.





.1 CAN/CSA-080.34 “Pressure preservative treatment of lumber and timber with borate for use out of ground contact and continuously protected from liquid water”.

.2 New plywood sheathing shall be vacuum-pressure impregnated with Disodium octaborate tetrahydrate (DOT) preservative in accordance with the requirements of AWPA Standard C9-96 Plywood - preservative treatment by pressure processes.

.3 Minimum depth of penetration of preservative is 10mm.

.3 Composite boards must not be pressure treated with a waterborne preservative. OSB incorporating zinc borate during the manufacturing process may be available if required as directed by Consultant. Glulam beams or columns are not considered to be composite wood material.

.4 Following water-borne preservative treatment, dry all dimension lumber and plywood sheathing to maximum moisture content of 19%.

3.2 FIELD APPLICATION OF PRESERVATIVES

.1 Field treat the following areas with the appropriate product:

.1 All cut ends of treated wood products.

.2 All bolt holes, chamfers, cuts, notches, etc to be thoroughly coated by submersing into preservative or other means acceptable to Consultant if submersion is not practical.

.3 Existing dimension lumber and plywood that is not removed and replaced, but exposed during the course of the retrofit may require treatment as directed by Consultant. Existing treated plywood or lumber, which is in good condition and not affected by mould will generally not require field treatment. Retained wood can be treated with either copper napthenate or borate based preservative at the direction of the Consultant. Retained wood that is field treated with copper napthenate is to be dried prior to treatment. Retained wood that is field treated with borate-based preservative can be damp prior to treatment. Before covering up, retained wood must be below 15% moisture content.

.4 The underside of untreated plywood sheathing below PVC membranes are to be coated with borate based preservative.

.2 Field Application of wood preservatives to be applied by qualified personnel, in accordance with the manufacturers’ instructions but not less than:

.1 Two coats applied by brush or roller. Underside of plywood decks can be done by spraying in two coats.

.2 Minimum 3 minute immersion of wood in preservative





6 WOOD, PLASTIC & COMPOSITES SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH FRAMING page 1 of 8

1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Work included: Labour, materials, equipment and services necessary to provide rough carpentry for, but not limited to, new framing, wall and roof renewal work, roof overhangs, reframing, sheathing, balcony and deck upgrading, strapping, parapet caps, fascias, trims, and structural backing as required for all architectural woodwork, mirrors, and accessories.


.1 Section 06 05 73: Wood Treatment

.2 Section 06 18 00: Glu-laminated structural units

.3 Section 06 20 00: Finish Carpentry

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 Applicable municipal by law and building code.


.1 CSA B111 Wire Nails, Spikes and Staples.

.2 CAN/CSA-G164 Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles.

.3 CAN/CSA 086.1 Engineering Design in Wood

.4 CSA O121 Douglas Fir Plywood.

.5 CSA-O141 Softwood Lumber.

.6 CSA O151 Canadian Softwood Plywood.

.3 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)

.1 CAN/CGSB-71.26 Adhesive for Field-Gluing Plywood to Lumber Framing for Floor System.

.4 National Lumber Grades Authority (NLGA) Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber.

.5 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

.1 ASME B18.6.4 Thread Forming and Thread Cutting Tapping Screws and Metallic Drive Screws.

.2 ASTM A153 / A153M - 09 Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware

.1 ASTM A653 / A653M - 10 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process

.2 ASTM B117 - 09 Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus






.1 Lumber identification: by grade stamp of an agency certified by Canadian Lumber Standards Accreditation Board.

.2 Plywood identification: by grade mark in accordance with applicable CSA standards.


.1 All rough framing wood, used in the Expansion and Renovation Work, to be locally-sourced, as per requirements of CaGBC LEED 2009 Materials and Resources Credit 5: Regional Materials. Wood is to be harvested within 800 km of the site of manufacture. The site of manufacture is to be located within 800 km of the Project Site.

.2 All composite wood and agrifiber products shall contain no added urea-formaldehyde resins as per requirements of CaGBC LEED 2009 Indoor Air Quality Credit 4.4 – Low-Emitting Materials: Composite Wood and Agrifiber Producs.

.3 All wood products, except for cedar siding and concrete formwork, used in the Expansion and Renovation Work, to be certified by the Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) and to be supplied with chain-of-custody documentation as per requirements of CaGBC LEED 2009 Materials and Resources Credit 7: Certified Wood.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

.1 LEED Product Summary Sheet: Furnish the Consultant with a completed form for each construction material used in the Expansion and Renovation Work. See Appendix 1 for Sample Product Summary Sheet.

.2 FSC Documentation: Provide the Architect with the following:

.1 List of all FSC certified wood purchases and associated COC documentation

.2 Copies of vendor invoices for each FSC certified wood product

.3 For all products containing partial amounts of wood products, maintain a list that identifies the percentage of certified wood in each purchase.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMBER MATERIAL

.1 Shall be in accordance with BCBC Part 9 Requirements as a minimum.

.2 All wood used in the Envelope Remediation Work, except cedar, to be pressure treated in accordance with Specification 06 05 73 Wood Treatment. See note on treatment of plywood sheathing in following section.

.3 Framing lumber: to match existing size and grade, unless noted on the drawings or as directed by the Consultant.





.1 Report any discrepancies in grading of existing lumber to Consultant.

.4 Lumber: unless specified otherwise, softwood, S4S, moisture content 19% or less in accordance with following standards:

.1 CAN/CSA-O141.

.2 NLGA Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber.

.5 Furring, blocking, nailing strips, cants, curbs, fascia backing, and sleepers:

.1 Board sizes: No. 2 or better grade, Hem Fir.

.2 Dimension sizes: No. 2 or better grade, Hem Fir.

.3 Post and timbers sizes: No. 2 or better grade, Hem Fir.

.4 All lumber, including posts, studs, joists, and blocking specified on Structural Drawings to be D.Fir #2 or better.

2.2 PANEL MATERIALS

.1 Material requirements to meet BCBC Part 9 Requirements as a minimum unless specified otherwise.

.1 All plywood except plywood below PVC membranes, and plywood used in interior applications, is to be pressure treated in accordance with Specification 06 05 73 Wood Treatment. Plywood below PVC membranes is to have the underside of the installed sheet field treated with preservative.

.2 Douglas fir plywood (DFP):

.1 Use only Douglas Fir plywood below PVC membranes.

.2 To CSA O121

.1 Sheathing grade for walls, roofs and decks.

.2 Select grade for balconies with PVC membranes.

.3 Canadian softwood plywood (CSP):

.1 To CSA O151, sheathing grade for walls, roofs and decks.

.4 Typical edge requirement and minimum thicknesses of plywood are as follows unless noted otherwise in the drawings:

.1 Wall sheathing: 1/2” (12.5 mm) thickness for stud spacing less than or equal to 24” (610 mm) on centre unless noted otherwise. Square edges.

.2 Roof sheathing:

.1 For existing metal roofs 5/8” with square edges can be used for rafter spacing up to 16” and for rafter spacing of up to 24” if the unsupported edges have H-clips or the sheathing has tongue and groove edges. Alternatively, square edge sheathing with 2x4 blocking can be used in lieu of H-clips.

.2 For replacing damaged sheathing at existing cedar shake roofs (ER)R2a and (ER)R2b: Match existing sheathing.





.3 Parapet cap liner flashing support: 5/8” (15.5 mm).

.5 Strapping and blocking in rainscreen cavity

.1 3/4” thick SPF plywood strips, width as noted, treated after cutting and kiln dried after treatment.

.6 Backing for architectural woodwork, accessories and mirrors:

.1 ¾” plywood, installed flush with face of framing

2.3 ACCESSORIES

.1 Corrosion resistant coatings on connectors and fasteners is as follows:

.1 For non-ACQ treated wood and interior of the exterior sheathing plane, all connectors to be a minimum of G90 hot dipped galvanizing and fasteners to be hot dipped galvanized. Applies to insulated exterior wall cavities.

.2 For non-ACQ treated wood and in covered unheated areas not subject to direct moisture, all connectors to be a minimum of G185 hot dipped galvanizing and fasteners to be hot dipped galvanized. Applies to balcony soffits, parapets, roof attics and decks. Treated wood must be below 15% moisture content at the time of installation.

.3 For ACQ treated wood in all locations all connectors and fasteners to be stainless steel.

.4 Hot dipped galvanizing to meet CAN/CSA-G164 and ASTM A653. Nails, spikes and lag screws when hot dipped galvanized are to meet ASTM A153 Class D at 1.0 oz of zinc per sq ft of surface area of the fastener. Bolts, washers and nuts are to meet ASTM A153 Class D at 1.25 oz of zinc per sq ft of surface area of the fastener.

.5 Stainless steel components to meet the following requirements.

.1 Nails and spikes are to be, 300 Series, Type 18-8, purpose made for replacement of conventional nails.

.2 Screws to be 300 Series, Type 18-8.

.3 Bolts to be 300 Series, Type 18-8.

.4 Connectors (hangers, framing anchors) to be Type 316L.

.2 Nails and spikes:

.1 Fabricate to CSA B111.

.2 Minimum nail length to be 2.5” (64 mm). Refer to Part 9 for other minimum fastener requirements. Refer to the drawings for specific requirements.

.3 Staples:

.1 Fabricate to CSA B111.

.2 16 ga. stainless steel staples compatible with material, sheathing, framing or other substrate being fastened. Length to be 2” (51 mm). Zinc coated staples will not be accepted.





.4 Screws:

.1 Fabricate to ANSI B18.6.4.

.2 Corrosion resistant coatings:

.1 For non-exposed conditions inside of the moisture barrier and air barrier:

.1 Zinc plated with a yellow chromate conversion coating.

.2 Coating to meet 50 hours of salt spray test to ASTM B117.

.3 #8 x 2-1/2” wood screws with Robertson flat head.

.2 For exposed conditions exterior of the moisture barrier or subject to exterior humidity (not including ACQ wood applications)

.1 Zinc rich base coat with conversion coating and a baked on protective barrier coating.

.2 Coating to meet 500 hours of salt spray test to ASTM B117.


.1 Grabbergard Exterior All-Weather Screws by Grabber Construction Products.


.3 For non-ACQ applications, screws coated with Climacoat by ITW Buildex are acceptable.

.4 Use DT1700 coated screws in contact with ACQ wood.

.5 For fastening plywood strapping through nineral-wool insulation, air barrier, sheathing, and into the existing wood studs:

.1 For wall locations with 2” mineral wool insulation, acceptable products:

.1 Enlarged head, case hardened steel screws

.2 Zinc and polymer coated (Climatek) screws suitable for contact with pressure treated wood.

.3 RSS 5/16” diameter x 5-1/8” long series screws by GRK fasteners.


.2 For wall locations with 6” mineral wool insulation, acceptable products:

.1 Enlarged head, case hardened steel screws

.2 Zinc and polymer coated (Climatek) screws suitable for contact with pressure treated wood.

.3 RSS LPS 1/4” diameter x 9” long series screws by GRK fasteners.






.5 Bolts:

.1 Size to be 1/2” (12.5 mm) minimum diameter unless indicated otherwise, complete with nuts and washers

.1 Stainless steel bolts to be 300 Series, Type 18-8.

.6 Proprietary fasteners: toggle bolts, expansion shields and lag bolts, screws, explosive actuated fastening devices, recommended for purpose by manufacturer and as approved by the Consultant.

.7 Deck/balcony sheathing waterproof adhesive to CGSB 71-GP-26M, cartridge loaded.


.1 PL400 by PL Adhesives and Sealants


.8 Sill gasket: Polyfoam by Foampak or approved alternative. See detail drawings for extent. Gaskets to isolate wood from all concrete surfaces.

.9 Reinforcing straps and joist hangers (connectors):

.1 Metal strap anchor or hanger, sizes as noted, as manufactured by Simpson Strong Tie Company Inc. or approved alternative.

.2 For custom made connectors from welded steel flat bar and angle, minimum requirement in all cases is hot dipped galvanized.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 WOOD STUD FRAMING

.1 General

.1 Comply with requirements of BCBC Part 9 minimum, supplemented by the following paragraphs and contract drawings.

.2 Countersink bolts where necessary to provide clearance for other work.

.3 Frame, anchor, fasten, tie and brace members to provide necessary strength and rigidity.

.2 Replacement of damaged framing

.1 Where directed by the Consultant, replace existing damaged lumber framing with new lumber to match size and grade of existing element, unless otherwise shown on the drawings or as directed by the Consultant.

.2 Replace entire length of damaged member. No splicing or scabbing to existing elements allowed without prior approval of the Consultant.

.3 Provide temporary support and shoring in accordance with WCB for the structure while working on structural members. Notify the Consultant of any conditions which appear to be unsafe.





.4 Level and re-align building structure and framing to original grades, levels and elevations true, plumb and square as required to correct shifting due to deterioration of structural elements.

3.2 WALL SHEATHING

.1 General:

.1 Install plywood sheathing so that vertical joints are staggered.

.2 Provide an edge gap of 3/32” (2 mm) between sheets of plywood unless wood is exposed to moisture in which case increase edge gaps to 1/8” (3 mm). Maximum gap is 1/4” (6 mm).

.3 Fasten plywood sheathing to stud wall at 6” (150 mm) on centre along the perimeter of the sheet and at 12” (300 mm) on centre along intermediate supports. Specific fastening for plywood shear walls to be as noted on Structural Drawings.

.4 Soffit and overhang locations: Fasten plywood sheathing to framing at 6” (150 mm) on centre along the edges of the sheet and at 12” (300 mm) on centre along intermediate supports with a minimum #10 – 64 mm screws.

.2 New Construction Sheathing:

.1 Install new plywood sheathing over exterior stud walls. Thickness of new plywood to be 5/8” unless noted otherwise. The following minimum requirements apply to all walls which are not noted as being structural shearwalls on the drawings. For structural shearwalls, install the sheathing as noted on the drawings with blocking when required. In no case is the sheathing to be installed less than the minimum requirements.

.2 Install new plywood backing where required to support architectural woodwork and accessories.

.3 Replacement Sheathing:

.1 Install new plywood sheathing over exterior stud walls. Thickness of new plywood to match existing unless noted otherwise. The following minimum requirements apply to all walls which are not noted as being structural shearwalls on the drawings. For structural shearwalls, install the sheathing as noted on the drawings with blocking when required. In no case is the sheathing to be installed less than the minimum requirements.

3.3 BALCONY/DECK/ ROOF SHEATHING

.1 GENERAL

.1 Install sheathing with surface grain at right angles to rafters/trusses.

.2 Install sheathing so that end joints parallel to rafters/trusses are staggered.

.3 Provide an edge gap of 3/32” (2 mm) between sheets of plywood unless wood is exposed to moisture in which case increase edge gaps to 1/8” (3 mm). For tongue and groove joints provide 1/16” (1 mm) gap.




6 WOOD, PLASTIC & COMPOSITES SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH FRAMING

page 8 of 8

.4 Fasten plywood sheathing to roof trusses/rafters as noted on Structural Drawings.

.2 REPLACEMENT AND RE-SLOPING

.1 For roofs where partial sheathing replacement is required for decayed material, reconstruct damaged framing areas including structural members to provide full support of the sheathing as instructed by the Consultant. Match existing sheathing thickness unless noted otherwise. Slope new sheathing to match existing slopes. No sheathing replacement is to be done until the Consultant has approved the repairs.

.2 For roofs where full sheathing replacement is required, reconstruct damaged framing areas including structural members to provide full support of the sheathing as instructed by the Consultant. Install new sheathing over rafters/trusses after foam insulation (air barrier) is installed in the framing cavity.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF STRAPPING, FURRING AND BLOCKING

.1 Install strapping as required to space-out and support exterior cladding as shown, spaced at 8” (200 mm) on centre. Strapping to be at framing locations where possible. The minimum gap between strapping is to be 1/2” (12mm).

.2 Fasten strapping to sheathing and support framing (where possible) at 8” (200 mm) on centre horizontally and vertically.

.3 Soffit and overhang locations: Fasten strapping to sheathing and support framing (where possible) at 6” (150 mm) on centre at ends and corners, and 12” (300 mm) on centre along intermediate supports with a minimum #10 – 2.5” (64 mm) screws.

.4 Install furring and blocking as required to space-out and support wall and ceiling finishes, facings, fascia, soffit, and other work as required.

.5 Align and plumb faces of furring and blocking to tolerance of 1:600.

.6 Install rough bucks, nailers and linings to rough openings as required to provide backing for frames and other work.

.7 Install sleepers, wood cants, fascia backing, nailers, curbs and other wood supports as required.

.8 Where rim joists are removed, install new rim joists to match. Ensure new rim joist is installed tight between top of wall plate and the underside of floor sheathing.


2011-09-08 Section 06 81 00 City of New Westminster GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION Queensborough Community Centre Page 1 of 2 Project No. 5410 Rev: 00


1.0 GENERAL

1.1 DOCUMENTS

.1 This section of the Specifications forms part of the Contract Documents and is to be read, interpreted, and coordinated with all other parts.

1.2 RELATED WORK

.1 Metal Fabrications Section 05 50 00

.2 Rough Carpentry: Section 06 10 00

.3 Painting: Section 09 90 00 1.3 REFERENCES

.1 CAN/CSA-0122-M89, Structural Glued-Laminated Timber.

.2 CAN/CSA-0177-M89, Qualification Code for Manufacturers of Structural Glued-Laminated Timber.


.1 All wood in this Section to be locally-sourced, as per requirements of CaGBC LEED 2009 Materials and Resources Credit 5: Regional Materials. Wood is to be harvested within 800 km of the site of manufacture. The site of manufacture is to be located within 800 km of the Project Site.

.2 All composite wood and agrifiber products shall contain no added urea-formaldehyde resins as per requirements of CaGBC LEED 2009 Indoor Air Quality Credit 4.4 – Low-Emitting Materials: Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products.

.3 All wood products, except for cedar siding, to be certified by the Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) and to be supplied with chain-of-custody documentation as per requirements of CaGBC LEED 2009 Materials and Resources Credit 7: Certified Wood.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS AND MANUFACTURER

.1 Manufacture structural glued-laminated members in plant certified by CSA as meeting requirements of CAN/CSA-0177, class X

.2 Submit certificate in accordance with CAN/CSA-0177, Appendix B at completion of fabrication.

.3 Fabricator for welded steel connections to be certified in accordance with CSA W47.1. 1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submit shop detail and erection drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00.

.2 Shop drawings for members to indicate stress grade, service grade and appearance grades, shop applied finishes, camber, ledges, holes and connection details.

1.6 DELIVERY AND HANDLING

.1 Apply protective sealer to glued-laminated units before shipping unless specified

otherwise. .2 Wrap quality grade members prior to leaving plant with a moisture resistant wrapping. .3 Use padded, non-marring slings for handling glued-laminated members.

.4 Protect Corners with wood blocking. .5 Slit underside of membrane covering during storage at site. Do not deface member.

.6 Store glued-laminated units, blocked off ground and separated with stripping, so air may

2011-09-08 Section 06 81 00 City of New Westminster GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION Queensborough Community Centre Page 2 of 2 Project No. 5410 Rev: 00


circulate around all faces of members. .7 Cover glued-laminated units with opaque moisture resistant membrane if stored outside. .8 Maintain protection of glued-laminated units until deck cover is installed, then remove

protective wrap completely.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Laminating stock: Douglas Fir-Lach, to CAN/CSA-0122.

.2 Adhesive: to CSA 0122 Series, waterproof in accordance with CAN/CSA-0122.

.3 Sealer for glued-laminated mebers: clear type, penetrating, non-yellowing, wood sealer, Siliconized-Alkyd type.

.4 All bolts, nuts and washers to be hot-dipped galvanized. 2.2 FABRICATION

.1 Fabricate members following classifications: .a Stress grade: to CAN3-086, and CAN/CSA-086.1, 24f-EX bending grade. .b Appearance grade: “Quality Appearance Grade”, wire brush finish.

.2 Mark laminated members for identification during erection. Marks must be concealed in final assembly.

.3 Apply two (2) coast of clear sealer.

.4 Unless specifically detailed, design connections to CAN3-086, CAN/CSA-086.1, and CAN/CSA-S16.1, to resist shears, moments and forces indicated, fabricated in accordance with CAN/CSA-S16.1.

.5 Camber members for dead load deflection or as indicated on the drawings. 3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 ERECTION

.1 Ensure protective sealer is not damaged before erection. If damaged, touch up on site before erection.

.2 Temporarily brace and anchor members until permanently secured by structure and roof deck and plywood diaphragms are complete.

.3 Make adequate provisions for erection stresses. .4 Do not field cut or alter members without Consultant’s approval. If approved, preservative

treat all cut ends. .5 Coat all exterior glulam connection hidden surfaces with two coats of sealer prior to

erection.





6 WOOD & PLASTIC SECTION 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY page 1 of 4

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

.1 Furnish all labour, material, tools, and equipment necessary for the supply and installation of all finish carpentry, including the following:

a. Installation of pressed steel frames and wood doors.

b. Installation of Finish Hardware.

c. Installation of washroom accessories and grab bars.

d. Installation of Architectural Woodwork.

e. Supply and installation of miscellaneous interior trim, casings and paneling.

1.2 RELATED WORK

1. Section 01 81 13: Sustainability Requirements

.2 Section 06 40 00: Architectural Woodwork

.3 Section 08 12 00: Pressed Steel Frames

.4 Section 08 71 00: Door Hardware

.5 Section 08 80 00: Glazing and Mirrors

.6 Section 10 28 00: Washroom Accessories


.1 All finish materials, grading rules, machining and workmanship to conform to the standards of Architectural Woodwork Manufacture’s Association of Canada, for Custom Grade, and this specification where it exceeds.

.2 Lumber grading shall conform to NLGA National Lumber Grade Authority latest issue.

.3 Plywood, particleboard, and hardboard shall be graded in accordance with CSA standards. Douglas fir plywood grades to conform to requirements of CSA 0121-M1978 G1S for opaque finish


.1 All finish carpentry wood used in the Expansion and Renovation Work, to be locally-sourced, as per requirements of CaGBC LEED 2009 Materials and Resources Credit 5: Regional Materials. Wood is to be harvested within 800 km of the site of manufacture. The site of manufacture is to be located within 800 km of the Project Site.






.3 All wood products used in the Expansion and Renovation Work, except for cedar siding, to be certified by the Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) and to be supplied with chain-of-custody documentation as per requirements of CaGBC LEED 2009 Materials and Resources Credit 7: Certified Wood.

1.5 SUBMITTALS






1.4 SAMPLES

.1 Submit duplicate samples of all profiles for Architect’s review.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING

.1 Store, handle, and protect materials to prevent marring of surfaces. Cover in an approved manner to protect from damage. Any disfigured or twisted fabrications will be rejected.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS GENERALLY:

.1 All materials used in this contract shall be of the highest quality as manufactured by nationally recognized manufacturers and of the type indicated on the drawings and in these specifications. All materials are S4S unless otherwise noted. Refer to Drawings for sizes.

.2 INTERIOR FINISHING:

See Architectural Woodwork for sills and wall paneling.





.3 EXTERIOR FINISHING:

Item Material Description

Wall Cladding #1 Cedar T+G horizontal siding for stain finish

Kiln dried to uniform moisture content 6-12%.

Wall Cladding #2 Cement board Cementitous wall panel board

Window Trim Fir Clear kiln dried for stain finish.

Kiln dried to uniform moisture content 6-12%

2.3 MATERIALS – ACCESSORIES

.1 Fasteners: All fasteners shall be adequately sized to fasten architectural woodwork and carry imposed loads. Refer to details and confirm types and sizes of all typical fastener types on Shop Drawings.

.2 Insect Screen: Perforated aluminum, mill finish.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

.1 Install all millwork items as specified herein and in Section 06 40 00, in locations indicated, with necessary grounds, blocks, furring, bearings, and other devices, all secured and adequately supported.

.2 Set all items securely, plumb, level, square and true to lines in accordance with drawings and details.

.3 Conceal all fixings by setting and filling with plastic wood over nails by pelleting over exposed screws, by back-fixing where possible, and by other approved means.

.4 Carefully fit items requiring cutting and fitting, to provide flush hairline joints with all fastenings concealed or set below surface to permit concealment.

.5 Prepare exposed and semi-exposed surfaces ready for varnishing or painting

.6 Where electrical outlets or telephones are to be located, proved all required access holes.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF PRESSED STEEL FRAMES AND WOOD DOORS

.1 Set frames plumb, square, level, and correct elevation, prior to construction and enclosing of walls and ceilings.

.2 Secure anchorages and connections to adjacent construction. Brace frames rigidly in position while building in.

.3 Fit doors accurately in their respective frames with clearances specified in Canada in Door and Frame Manufacturers Association Standards, plumb, free swinging, smooth operating, and with even margins.





.4 Hang all doors at correct locations on scheduled hardware, in accordance with manufacture’s directions.

.5 Test, ease and adjust to operate freely without binding.

.6 Check doors on completion of contract, re-adjust and correct where required to maintain free operation.

.7 Fire labeled doors and frames shall be installed in accordance with ANSI/NFPA-80.

.8 Make allowance for deflection to ensure structural loads are not transmitted to the frame.

3.3 FINISH HARDWARE INSTALLATION

.1 Install hardware in accordance with hardware templates and manufacturer’s instruction. Adjust operable parts for correct clearances and function.

3.4 WASHROOM ACCESSORIES & GRAB BARS

.1 Install all accessories and grab bars to be supplied by Section 10 28 00.

.2 Install in accordance with manufacturer’s hardware and instructions

.3 Locate products to eliminate interference with door swings or use of fixtures in compliance with ADA regulations.

.4 Install all grab-bars and accessories in accordance with Section 3.8 of the National Building Code.

3.5 EXTERIOR CLADDING INSTALLATION

.1 Refer to Section 07 46 23 Wood Siding for installation requirements.

.2 Refer to Section 07 46 46 Fibre Cement Cladding for installation requirements.





6 WOOD & PLASTIC SECTION 06 40 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK page 1 of 15

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

.1 Furnish all labour, materials equipment and services necessary for and incidental to the completion of all architectural woodwork, as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein.

.2 The work of this section shall include but shall not necessarily be limited to the complete fabrication, supply, factory finishing, and delivery to the job site of architectural woodwork items and accessories as shown on the drawings and outlined in the Schedule

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

.1 Section 06 10 00: Rough Carpentry

.2 Section 06 20 00: Finish Carpentry: Architectural woodwork installation.

.3 Section 08 33 00: Coiling Fire and Smoke-Rated Doors

.4 Section 09 72 00: Presentation Wall Coverings

.5 Division 22: Plumbing: Installation of sinks and fittings in counters.

.6 Division 26: Electrical: Installation of electrical fixtures and fittings in cabinetry.


.1 All finish materials, grading rules, machining and workmanship to conform to the “Quality Standards” of Architectural Woodwork Manufacturer’s Association of Canada for Custom Grade, and this specification where it exceeds. A copy of AWMAC Quality Standards shall be made readily available for reference purposes.

.2 Contractor Qualifications:

.1 Minimum 5 years experience in manufacturing Architectural Woodwork.

.2 Provide list of major projects your organization has in progress. Give name of project, owner, architect, general contractor, contract amount, percent complete, and schedule completion date.

.3 Provide list of projects completed in the past 5 years. Give name of project, architect, general contractor, contract amount and date completed.

.3 It is the intention of the drawings to indicate appearance of the architectural woodwork. The Millworker is to ensure that all cabinetry is built with adequate support and stability.

.4 All materials and installation shall be in imperial measurements.


.1 All wood in this Section to be locally-sourced, as per requirements of CaGBC LEED 2009 Materials and Resources Credit 5: Regional Materials:





.1 Wood is to be harvested within 800 km of the site of manufacture.

.2 The site of manufacture is to be located within 800 km of the Project Site.

.2 All composite wood and agrifiber products shall contain no added urea-formaldehyde resins as per requirements of CaGBC LEED 2009 Indoor Air Quality Credit 4.4 – Low-Emitting Materials: Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products.

.3 All wood products, except for cedar siding, to be certified by the Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) and to be supplied with chain-of-custody documentation as per requirements of CaGBC LEED 2009 Materials and Resources Credit 7: Certified Wood.

.4 Conform to the requirements of CaGBC LEED 2009 Indoor Environmental Quality (IEQ) Credit 4.1 – Low Emitting Materials: Adhesives and Sealants:

.1 Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) limits of adhesives and sealants used on the interior (inboard side of the air barrier within the wall and roof assemblies) of the building to comply with the following criteria:

.1 South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule #1168.

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Shop Drawings for Architectural Woodwork shall be prepared and submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 Submittal Requirements.

.2 Provide Shop Drawings of all millwork items for Architects review prior to fabrication. Shop drawings shall show construction details of all architectural woodwork, general arrangements, locations of all service outlets, etc; typical and special installation conditions; materials being supplied and all connections, attachments, anchorages and location of exposed fastenings, as applicable. Shop drawings shall incorporate plans, sections, elevations and details for all Architectural Woodwork. The details shall show and specify all thicknesses, types and finishes, and all cabinet hardware.

.3 No work shall be fabricated until the shop drawings have been reviewed and all other related submittals and samples as required by the specifications have been approved by the Consultant.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

.1 LEED Product Summary Sheet: Furnish the Consultant with a completed form for each construction material used. See Appendix 1 for Sample Product Summary Sheet.

.2 MSDS Sheets: Provide the Consultant with MSDS information for each adhesive, sealant, paint, primer, coating and stain applied on site, with relevant VOC information highlighted.









1.7 SAMPLES

.1 Submit duplicate, 8” x 10”, samples of each wood species which is to receive finish to the Consultant for review.

.2 Submit duplicate, 8” x 10”, samples of each plastic laminate to the Consultant for review.

.3 Submit duplicate, 8” x 10”, samples of each finish to be shop applied to the Consultant for review.

.4 Submit duplicate samples of all cabinet hardware to the Consultant for review.

.5 Approved samples shall become the standard for the work.

1.8 GUARANTEE

.1 Provide the Owner on completion of the work with a standard two (2) year AWMAC Guarantee Certificate, or an equivalent security bond to the full value of the architectural woodwork subcontract, that the millwork supplied will be in accordance with the standards incorporated in the AWMAC manual (Latest Edition).

.2 Guarantee to cover replacement and refinishing of all defects in Millwork due to faulty workmanship or defective materials, which occur within two (2) years following substantial performance.

1.9 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE

.1 The Architectural Woodwork Manufacturer and the Contractor shall be jointly responsible to make certain that architectural woodwork are not delivered until the building and storage areas are sufficiently dry so that the architectural woodwork will not be damaged by excessive changes in moisture content.

.2 Architectural woodwork delivery, storage, and handling shall be in accordance with Section 703 of the Manual.

.3 Delivered materials which are damaged in any way or do not comply with these specifications will be rejected by the Consultant and shall be removed from the job site and replaced with acceptable materials.

1.10 INSPECTION

.1 Architectural woodwork shall be manufactured and/or installed to the specified AWMAC Quality Standards and shall be subject to an inspection at the plant and/or site by an appointed inspector, approved by the MMABC (the BC Chapter of AWMAC). Such inspection costs shall be included in the tender price for this project. Shop drawings will be submitted to inspector for review before any work is commenced

.2 Any work which does not meet AWMAC Quality Standard as specified shall be replaced by this Trade Contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner and to the satisfaction of the Consultant and the inspector.





2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

.1 Use clean stock only and comply with AWMAC Quality Standards for following custom grade unless noted otherwise.

.2 Adhesives: use best quality glues to comply with LEED requirements and AWMAC standards, and as recommended by materials manufacturers.

.3 Plywood to be veneer core. No MDF or particleboard is permitted in the work where plywood is indicated.

.4 Unless otherwise noted, all interior of cabinet cases, cabinetry drawers and shelves to be white plastic laminate with taped and finished edges for wear resistant finish. Melamine interiors are not allowed.

.5 All plywood to conform to the following:

.1 CSA 01211-M1978.

.2 Good one side (G1S) or good two sides (G2S) where both sides exposed.

.3 No added urea-formaldehyde, as per LEED 2009 requirements.

.4 FSC Certified, complete with COC documentation.

.6 All MDF to conform to the following:

.1 No added urea-formaldehyde, as per LEED 2009 requirements.

.2 FSC Certified, complete with COC documentation.

.7 Include all top, bottom and corner filler panels.

2.2 PLASTIC LAMINATE CABINETRY

.1 For all exposed and semi-exposed parts:

.1 All cabinet faces, doors, drawer fronts and exposed gable ends to be plastic laminate on 5/8" M.D.F. All edges to be taped and finished.

.2 Plastic Laminate to have 1/16" minimum thickness. Backing sheet by same manufacturer as face sheets, 0.020" minimum thickness.

.3 Flush overlay construction

.4 All plastic laminate panels and counters noted to have exposed plywood edge, to have square profile with exposed plywood edge sealed and finished. Edge to be comprised of 2 layers ¾” apple ply for a total thickness of 1.5”.

.5 All plastic laminate countertops with full square wrap front edge to have 3/4" plywood or waterproof MDF ("Medex") substrate. Preformed backsplash where shown on drawings.

.6 Colours: Refer to Architectural Woodwork Schedule below for colour locations.





ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK SCHEDULE

LABEL MANUFACTR COLOUR # COLOUR NAME

P. Lam 1 Nevamar S306OT Indigo

P. Lam 2 Nevamar S704OT Spa White

P. Lam 3 Nevamar 5-5-54T Sea Moss

P.Lam 4 Formica 1998-MC Oxygen

P Lam 5 Formica 3698-58 Beluga Beige

2.3 WOOD CABINETRY + PANELLING

.1 Where indicated, all cabinet faces, doors and drawer fronts to be all clear Maple veneer plywood on MDF with 3/4" solid wood edges to doors and drawer fronts. Clear satin finish as per AWMAC.

.2 Semi Exposed: MDF, with maple veneer, clear satin finish as per AWMAC. Drawers to be 17 mm apple ply with clear satin finish.

.3 All work to be flush overlay construction.

.4 Maple veneer ply with exposed plywood edge to be apple ply, thickness as noted.

.5 All wood ceiling and wall paneling finishes to be 150 flame minimum spread rating. Clear Polyurethane Finish (Single Component) in AWMAC Satin Finish compliant with requirements.

2.4 HARDWARE

.1 Pulls: Stainless steel 'D' pull in satin finish.

.2 Hinges: Fully concealed 110 degree Blum or equivalent

.3 Drawer Glides: Blum or equal; heavy duty, full extension; to be sized to accommodate full weight of drawer.

.4 Door and Drawer Locks: Corbin 0738 and 0737 pin tumbler x 26D with matching #75 strike.

.5 Closet Rods: 1 1/4" diameter chrome plated closet rods complete with end flanges and centre supports as required.

.6 Cable Grommets: Purpose made metal grommets at all work counters, 50mm diameter in Satin Chrome.

.7 Keyboard Supports: As per 3M™ Adjustable Keyboard Tray AKT200, or approved equal.





.6 Gate Hardware: to be brushed stainless, heavy duty quality, satin finish Blum, or approved equal.

.8 Counter Supports: IKEA Legs: Vika Kaj, article #601.053.01, or approved alternate. Finish to be brushed stainless or similar.

.9 Door-Mounted Waste Bins: Blum Tandembox Pull-out, door-mounted waste bin, or approved alternate. To be installed with touch latch Blum hardware (or approved equal).

.10 Pull-Out Rolling Shelves: To be plastic laminate millwork drawers, complete with Blumotion sliding hardware, or approved equal.

.11 Touch Latch Hardware: Blum Tip-on for doors, or approved equal.

.12 Hooks: IKEA Vippa, article #066.837.84, or approved alternate. Finish to be aluminum.

.13 Adjustable Shelf Hardware: Flush mounted Hafele standard, 20mm x 8mm, aluminum, silver colour anodized (item 283.13.900), or approved equal. Shelf supports to be Hafele 34mm x 15mm aluminum, silver-colour anodized (item 283.64.918), or approved equal.

2.5 SOLID SURFACE COUNTERS

.1 TYPE 1: Quartz Sheet countertop:

.1 Composition: Quartz aggregate, resin, and color pigments formed into flat slabs

.2 Anti-microbial protection: Microban by Microban International, Inc., integral to sheet.

.3 Color: Blanco Maple 4001

.4 Approved Product:

.1 Silestone “Blanco Maple” 4001

.2 Approved Alternate

.2 TYPE 2: 100 percent recycled glass solid surface countertop in a cement matrix.

.1 Colour: to be selected from Manufacturer’s standard colour range

.2 Finish: Honed

.3 Edge detail: Mitered

.4 Approved product:

.1 IceStone LLC

.3 Sealer: As recommended by manufacturer.

.4 Wax: As recommended by manufacturer.

.5 Adhesive: Type recommended by countertop manufacturer.

.6 Joint Sealer:

.1 As recommended by countertop manufacturer.





2.6 RECLAIMED GLU-LAM BENCHES

.1 Re-size reclaimed glu-lam beams as outlined in architectural drawings.

.2 Clean and sand beams to achieve AWMAC Custom finish.

.3 Finish to be Conversion Varnish, satin finish, as outlined in AWMAC and approved by Master Painter’s Institute.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Verify all dimensions on site prior to fabrication or installation.

.2 Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

3.2 PREPARATION

.1 Contractor to provide blocking in wall as required for all millwork and accessories. Millwork contractor is responsible for ensuring that blocking has been installed as required and for providing a means of fastening millwork to structure if blocking has been omitted. Coordinate with Section 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry.

.2 Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

3.3 FABRICATION

.1 Factory finish all items included in this section.

.2 Exposed plywood and solid wood surfaces of work required under this section shall be dressed and sanded in an approved manner free from machine and tool mark, abrasions, raised grain or other defects which would in any manner affect the subsequent finishing operations.

.3 Casework shall conform to AWMAC Manual as applicable.

.4 Cabinets shelves noted adjustable are on metal pin rests in bored holes.

.5 Toe kicks: Refer to drawings for dimensions.

.6 Shelving dimensions: as indicated.

.7 Install solid surface counters as per manufacturer’s instructions.

3.4 FINISHES

.1 Finishes shall be applied in accordance with the AWMAC Manual.

.2 Field Touch-Up:

.1 Field touch-up shall be the responsibility of the installing contractor or the Architectural Woodwork Manufacturer providing he or she is responsible for the factory finishing.




6 WOOD & PLASTIC SECTION 06 40 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

page 8 of 15

.2 Field touch-up shall include the filling and touch-up of exposed job-made nail and screw holes, refinishing of raw surface resulting from job fitting, repair of job-inflicted scratches and mars, and final cleaning up of the finished surfaces.

3.5 PROTECTION


.2 Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion, as directed by Architect.

3.6 DELIVERY

.1 Deliver all case goods to the site in wrappings adequate to protect the cabinets from damage and clearly identified with markings coordinated with the Shop Drawings for ease of installation by others under Section 06 20 00: Finish Carpentry.




6 WOOD & PLASTIC SECTION 06 40 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK page 9 of 15 4 SCHEDULE

Item # Cabinetry Description Room Name M103.1 Atrium Kitchenette 103 Atrium Counter: Plastic laminate with integral square wrapped edge Backsplash + Wall Panel: Plastic laminate Cabinet Face: Plastic laminate Shelves: Plastic Laminate, adjustable Cabinet Interiors: Plastic laminate Hardware: 100 mm D-pulls, Locks as noted on drawings M103.2 Atrium Bench 103 Atrium Re-used glulam beam, clear satin varnish finish M103.3 Atrium Bench 103 Atrium Re-used glulam beam, clear satin varnish finish M105.1 Work Counter + Cabinet 105 Janitor Counters: Plastic laminate, square wrap edge with integral Back splash Cabinet Face: Plastic laminate Shelves: Plastic Laminate, adjustable Hardware: Cabinet to be on lockable castors. M107.1 Vanity Counter + Valence 107 Women’s WC Counter: Plastic laminate with integral square wrapped edge Under-counter Skirt: Plastic laminate Valence: Maple Veneer Plywood with exposed plywood edge M107.2 Valence over Toilets 107 Women’s WC Valence: Maple Veneer Plywood with exposed plywood edge M108.1 Vanity + Valence 108 Men’s WC Counters: Plastic laminate with integral square wrapped edge Under-counter Skirt: Plastic laminate Valence: Maple Veneer Plywood with exposed plywood edge




6 WOOD & PLASTIC SECTION 06 40 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK page 10 of 15 M111.1 Servery Upper and Lower Cabinets 111 Gym Servery Counters: Plastic laminate with integral square wrap edge Back splash: Plastic laminate Cabinet Face: Plastic laminate Shelves: Plastic Laminate, adjustable Cabinet Interiors: Plastic laminate Hardware: 100 mm D-pulls, Locks as noted on drawings M200.1 Info Desk 200 Library Checkout + Lower Work Counter: Solid Surface #1 – Ice Stone Upper Counter: Plastic laminate with exposed plywood edge Cabinet Faces: Plastic Laminate Shelves: Plastic Laminate, adjustable Cabinet Interiors: Plastic Laminate Hardware: Grommets (2) Accessories Key-board Trays (2) Book Return Slots (2) Valence: Maple Veneer Plywood M200.2 Study Counter 200 Library Counter: Plastic laminate with exposed plywood edge Under-counter Skirt: Plastic Laminate Counter Support: IKEA Legs x 5 M201.1 Counter 201 Library Storage Counters: Plastic laminate with exposed plywood edge Cabinet Faces: Plastic Laminate Exposed Shelves: Maple Veneer Plywood with exposed plywood edge Cabinet Interiors: Plastic Laminate Hardware: 100 mm D-pulls, Locks as noted on drawings M300.1 Reception Desk Reception 300 Administration Lower Counters: Solid Surface #2 - Silestone Upper Counter Plastic Laminate with exposed plywood edge Cabinet Faces: Plastic Laminate Shelves: Plastic Laminate, adjustable Cabinet Interiors: Plastic Laminate Hardware: 100 mm D-pulls, Grommets, Drawer Glides, Locks Accessories Key-board Tray (3) Cash Drawers (2 Owner supplied) Valence: Maple Veneer Plywood with exposed plywood edge




6 WOOD & PLASTIC SECTION 06 40 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK page 11 of 15 M304.1 Work Counter Upper and Lower Cabinets 304 Admin. Corridor Counter: Plastic Laminate with integral square wrapped edge Backsplash: Tackable Surface Lower Cabinet Faces: Plastic Laminate Upper Cabinet Faces: Maple Veneer Plywood Shelves: Plastic Laminate, adjustable Cabinet Interiors: Plastic laminate Hardware: 100 mm D-pulls, Locks as noted on drawings M305.1 Full Height Cabinet 305 Program Office Cabinet Faces: Maple Veneer Plywood Shelves: Maple Veneer Plywood M308.1 Work Counter 308 Flex Office Counter: Plastic Laminate with integral square wrapped edge M309.1 Vanity Cabinet + Valence 309 Staff WC Counter: Plastic Laminate with integral square wrap edge Cabinet Face: Plastic Laminate Valence: Maple Veneer Plywood with exposed plywood edge

M310.1 Kitchenette Upper and Lower Cabinets 310 Staff Room Counters: Plastic Laminate square wrap edge w/ tile backsplash. Cabinet Faces: Plastic Laminate Cabinet Interiors: Plastic Laminate Hardware: 100 mm D-pulls, Drawer Glides Accessories: Automatic opening trash can under sink Under-sink rack (1) for cleaning products Cutlery tray M310.2 Coat Closet 310 Staff Rm Counter: Plastic laminate with exposed plywood edge Hardware: Counter support Grommets M311.1 Work Counter 311 Flex Office Cabinet Faces: Maple veneer Cabinet Interior Plastic Laminate Hardware: D Pulls Coat Rail: 1” St.St. rod.




6 WOOD & PLASTIC SECTION 06 40 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK page 12 of 15 M311.2 File Counter + Upper Cabinets 311 Flex Office Counter: Plastic Laminate with integral square wrapped edge Cabinet Faces: Maple Veneer Plywood Shelves: Maple Veneer Plywood, adjustable Cabinet Interiors: Maple Veneer Plywood Hardware: 100 mm D-pulls, Locks as noted on drawings, IKEA Leg Counter support, Grommets M312.1 Upper + Lower Cabinets 312 Meeting Counter: Plastic Laminate with integral square wrapped edge Lower Cabinet Faces: Plastic Laminate Upper Cabinet Faces: Maple Veneer Plywood Shelves: Plastic Laminate, adjustable Cabinet Interiors: Plastic laminate Hardware: 100 mm D-pulls, Locks as noted on drawings M312.2 TV Component Storage Cabinet 312 Meeting Cabinet Faces: Maple Veneer Plywood Cabinet Interiors: Plastic laminate Hardware: Touch latch M400.2 Bench/Sill 400 Multi-purpose 1 Exposed Faces: Maple Veneer Plywood M401.1 Kitchen Upper and Lower Cabinets 401 Community Kitchen Counters: Stainless steel with integral square wrapped edge Cabinet Faces: Plastic Laminate Shelves: Plastic Laminate, pull-out rolling shelves Cabinet Interiors: Plastic laminate Hardware: 100 mm D-pulls, Drawer Glides Accessories: Automatic opening trash can under sink Under-sink rack (1) for cleaning products Cutlery tray M401.2 Kitchen Island + Gates 401 Community Kitchen Counters: Solid Surface #1: Ice Stone Cabinet Faces: Plastic Laminate Gates: Plastic Laminte with exposed plywood edge Shelves: Plastic Laminate, pull-out rolling shelves Cabinet Interiors: Plastic Laminate Hardware: 100 mm D-pulls, Drawer Glides, Locks as noted on

drawings




6 WOOD & PLASTIC SECTION 06 40 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK page 13 of 15 M401.3 Kitchen Pantry 401 Community Kitchen Shelves: Plastic Laminate, adjustable Cabinet Faces: Plastic Laminate Cabinet Interiors: Plastic Laminate Hardware: 100 mm D-pulls, Drawer Glides, Locks as noted on

drawings M402.1 Window Sill 402 Multi-purpose 2 Exposed Faces: Maple Veneer Plywood M402.2 Window Sill 402 Multi-purpose 2 Exposed Faces: Maple Veneer Plywood M500.1 Sign-In Counter and Gate 500 Child Care Entry Counter: Plastic Laminate with integral square wrapped edge Cabinet Faces + Gate: Plastic Laminate Shelves: Plastic Laminate, adjustable Cabinet Interiors: Plastic Laminate Hardware: 100 mm D-pulls M502.1 Cubbies 502 Cubbies Cubbie Frames: Plastic Laminate with integral square wrapped edge Shelves: Plastic Laminate, adjustable Cabinet Faces: Plastic Laminate Hardware: 100 mm D-pulls, hooks, Locks as noted on drawings M502.2 Cubbies 502 Cubbies Cubbie Frames: Plastic Laminate with integral square wrapped edge Shelves: Plastic Laminate, adjustable Cabinet Faces: Plastic laminate Hardware: 100 mm D-pulls, hooks, Locks as noted on drawings M503.1 Art Storage Uppers and Lowers 503 Activity Room Counters: Plastic Laminate with integral square wrap edge Backsplash: Plastic Laminate on wall Cabinet Faces: Plastic laminate Shelves: Plastic Laminate, adjustable Cabinet Interiors: Plastic laminate Hardware: 100 mm D-pulls, Locks as noted on drawings M503.2 Wainscoting 503 Activity Room Wall Panel 30” high: Plastic Laminate with exposed plywood edge




6 WOOD & PLASTIC SECTION 06 40 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK page 14 of 15 M503.3 Bench/Sill 503 Activity Room Exposed Faces: Maple Veneer Plywood M504.1 Vanity Counter + Valence 504 Child WC Counter: Plastic laminate with integral square wrap edge Under-counter Skirt: Plastic laminate Valence: Maple Veneer Plywood with exposed plywood edge M505.1 Vanity Cabinet + Valence 505 Adult WC Counter: Plastic laminate with integral square wrap edge Cabinet Face: Plastic laminate Valence: Maple Veneer Plywood with exposed plywood edge M506.1 Servery Island + Gates 506 Child Care Servery Counters: Plastic Laminate with integral square wrap edge Cabinet Faces: Plastic Laminate Gates: Plastic Laminate with exposed plywood edge Shelves: Plastic Laminate, adjustable Cabinet Interiors: Plastic Laminate

Hardware: 100 mm D-pulls, Drawer Glides Gates: Plastic Laminate with exposed plywood edge M506.2 Servery Upper and Lower Cabinets 506 Child Care Servery Counters: Plastic Laminate with integral square wrap edge Backsplash: Plastic Laminate on wall Cabinet Faces: Plastic Laminate Shelves: Plastic Laminate, adjustable Cabinet Interiors: Plastic laminate

Hardware: 100 mm D-pulls, Drawer Glides, Locks as noted Accessories: Automatic opening trash can under sink Under-sink rack (1) for cleaning products M600.1 Equipment Storage Cabinet 600 Fitness Cabinet Faces: Maple Veneer Plywood with integral square wrapped edge Shelves: Plastic Laminate, adjustable, with exposed plywood edge Cabinet Interiors: Plastic Laminate

Hardware: 100 mm D-pulls, Locks as noted on drawings M600.2 Cubbies @ Entry 600 Fitness All Faces: Maple Veneer Plywood with integral square wrapped edge M600.3 Cubbies @ Weights 600 Fitness All Faces: Maple Veneer Plywood with integral square wrapped edge




6 WOOD & PLASTIC SECTION 06 40 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK page 15 of 15 M600.4 Wall Panels 600 Fitness Wall Panels: Maple Veneer Plywood M600.5 Window Sill 600 Fitness Exposed Faces: Maple Veneer Plywood M602.1 Shelving 602 Janitor Cabinet Case: Plastic laminate Shelves: Plastic Laminate, adjustable M604.1 Lighting Valence Fitness WC 1 Valence: Maple Veneer Plywood with exposed plywood edge M605.1 Lighting Valence Fitness WC 2 Valence: Maple Veneer Plywood with exposed plywood edge



Issued for Tender – 08 September 2011


THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07 11 13 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING page 1 of 2

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

.1 Damp-proof all exterior surfaces of concrete walls below final grade.

1.2 RELATED WORK

.1 Section 03 30 00: Concrete foundations and see Structural Drawings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


.2 Product cut sheets. Supply product cut sheets to accompany LEED Summary Sheet.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ASPHALT EMULSION

.1 Non-fibrated mineral colloid asphalt to CGSB. 37-GP-2M. Flintguard 700-01; Protectocoat 160; Braco C13 HPC or approved alternative.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS

.1 Surface must be free from loose particles, grease, oil and other contaminates, also holes, cracks, fins and honeycombs. Conform to manufacturer's requirements for minimum application temperatures and humidity.

3.2 PREPARATION

.1 Rake out holes and honeycombs in concrete and fill with stiff mortar, leave smooth and flush.

.2 Dampen dry surfaces with water just prior to application.

3.3 APPLICATION

.1 Coat all exterior surfaces of concrete walls below final grade, from bottom of footings to finished grade, with two coats Asphalt Emulsion, including outer face of concrete walls at brick veneer faced walls.




THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07 11 13 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING page 2 of 2

.2 Prime surface with emulsion diluted 20% with clean water. Coverage approximately 0.407 litres/m sq. (0.01 gal/ft. sq.) undiluted at 1.22 litres/m sq. (0.03 gal/ft. sq.). Allow to dry thoroughly before back-filling.

3.4 CLEAN-UP

.1 Clean off all excess asphalt emulsion, splash marks and drips exposed to view.





7 THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07 13 00 CONCRETE WATERPROOFING page 1 of 4 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED

.1 Furnish all labour materials equipment and services necessary for the supply and installation of all elements required for waterproofing concrete at the Elevator Pit as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein.

1.2 RELATED WORK

.1 03 30 00 Cast-in-place Concrete 1.3 SUBMITTALS


1.4 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS

.1 The contractor shall be, during the bidding period as well as during installation, officially recognised as an approved contractor by the waterproofing materials manufacturer.

.2 Waterproofing work shall be performed only by skilled applicators, employed by an

installation contractor operating all adequate and necessary equipment to execute such work in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and recognised standards.

1.5 MATERIALS STORAGE

.1 All materials shall be delivered and stored in their original packaging, displaying the manufacturer's name, quality, weight, standards references and all other indications or references considered as standard.

.2 Materials shall be adequately protected and stored at all times in a dry space, properly

ventilated and protected from the elements.

.3 Store membrane rolls on end, one pallet high, selvage edge up; do not store in a leaning position.




7 THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07 13 00 CONCRETE WATERPROOFING page 2 of 4

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ASPHALT PRIMER:


.1 Soprema ELASTOCOL


2.2 MEMBRANE

.1 Description: Self-adhesive waterproofing membrane composed of bitumen modified with thermoplastic polymers and a cross-laminated high density polyethylene film (HDPE). The self-adhesive side is covered by a silicone release sheet.

.2 Approved Products:

.1 Soprema Colphene 5000


2.3 DRAIN MAT

.1 Delta drain mat or approved equal

3 EXECUTION

3.4 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION OF SURFACES

.1 Commencement of work shall imply acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

.2 Before commencing work, all surfaces must be smooth, dry, free of dust, water, ice or any other substance which may hinder adhesion. No salt or calcium shall be used to remove ice or snow.

.3 Check if the work of other trades has been properly completed.

.4 Do not install materials in conditions of rain, snow or fog.

.5 Verify the compatibility of all membrane components with curing compounds, coatings or other materials which are already installed on the surfaces to be treated.

3.5 METHOD OF EXECUTION

.1 Install elements on clean and dry surfaces according to the manufacturer's recommendations.

.2 Work shall be performed on a continuous basis as surface and weather conditions allow.

.3 Adjoining surfaces shall be protected against any damage that could result from the waterproofing installation.




4 7 THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07 13 00 CONCRETE WATERPROOFING page 3 of 4 3.3 INSTALLATION

.1 Before commencing work, inspect all surfaces to be treated to ensure they are suitable for membrane application. Signal any substrate deficiencies to the proper authority and have them corrected before applying the membrane.

.2 Consistent, uniform slopes to drain of at least 1% must be incorporated into any surface

to receive membrane.

.3 Verify the compatibility of all membrane components with curing compounds, coatings or other materials which are already installed on the surfaces to be treated.

.4 Ensure all membrane details are adequate and in conformance with the manufacturers

recommendations.

.5 Concrete must be cured a minimum of seven (7) days and an adhesion test is recommended before membrane application.

.6 For membrane applications at temperatures below -10º C contact your local product

representative.

.7 Prime all surfaces at an approximate coverage rate of 0.25 L/m2. Primer can be spray, roller or brush applied. Allow approximately one hour for the primer to dry. Primed surfaces must be fully dry prior to the application of sheet membrane. Primed surfaces, which have been left exposed for a period greater than 24 hours, should be re-primed.

.8 Liquid membrane shall be a two-component polyurethane.

.9 All vertical inside corners must be pre-stripped with a 6 in. width of membrane. This

membrane must be installed in direct contact with the substrate not leaving any voids under the membrane strip.

.10 Any crack greater than 1/8" wide should be reported. If deemed acceptable by the

proper authority, fill the joint with liquid membrane and allow the sealant to cure 12 hours. Apply 6 in. wide strip of membrane on the crack before field membrane application.

.11 Pre-strip construction joints or static cracks less than 1/8" wide, with a 6 in. wide strip of

membrane.

.12 All outside corners must be pre-treated with a 6 in. wide strip of membrane centred on the corner.

.13 All horizontal inside corners should be pre-treated with a fillet of liquid membrane.

.14 All small penetrations (pipes, etc.) through the waterproofing place, should be pre-treated

with an application of liquid membrane.




7 THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07 13 00 CONCRETE WATERPROOFING page 4 of 4

.15 Liquid membrane should be applied to drain bowl and the ring before membrane application. Field membrane sheet should be mechanically attached to drain using clamping ring. Liquid membrane should be allowed to fully cure overnight prior to the application of the sheet membrane.

.16 The membrane is not an expansion joint material. At expansion joints the membrane

should be terminated at each side of the joint and tied into the expansion joint material.

.17 For horizontal applications, application must start at the low point of the surfaces to be waterproofed. Draw a chalk line to align the first sheet of membrane, normally the membrane is installed perpendicular to the slope.

.18 Align membrane and remove 24 in. of release paper. Apply to surface keeping the roll in line. Adhere the rest of the membrane roll be removing the silicone paper as the membrane is unrolled onto the surface. As the membrane is unrolled, pass a broom over the surface to remove air entrapped under the membrane.

.19 Subsequent rolls must be installed in the same way and should be aligned with the

preceding roll with a side lap of at least 2.5 in.. End laps must overlap at least 6 in..

.20 Pass a water-filled lawn roller or a linoleum roller over the membrane to improve initial adhesion to the substrate.

.21 For vertical applications, align the first strip of membrane to a previously drawn chalk

line. At the top edge of the strip remove approximately 6 in. of the silicone release paper and adhere the membrane to the surface.

.22 Subsequent rolls are installed in the same way respecting the same overlaps as

indicated for horizontal applications.

.23 Seal all membrane terminations with a generous quantity of Sopramastic. Perform work on a daily basis.

.24 Protect membrane to avoid damage from other trades, construction materials or back

filling operations. Protect membrane with insulation or other acceptable protection materials.

.25 Ensure applications of Sopramastic, Sopraseal Retrofit, and liquid membrane are cured

for at least 24 hours before backfilling or exposing the waterproofed surface to traffic.

.26 Apply drain mat to exterior face of concrete extending from the underside of slab to bottom of elevator pit.





7 THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION page 1 of 7

1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Work described in section includes but is not limited to:

.1 Exterior wall insulations including insulations at interior and exterior of sheathing plane.

.2 Roof insulations including low-slope roof assemblies and sloped roof assemblies.

.3 Mineral fibre insulation to fill space at penetrations.

.4 Spray foam insulation at selected locations.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA):

.1 CSA A101 Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fibre, for Buildings.

.2 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB):

.1 CAN/CGSB-51.20 Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and Pipe Covering.

.2 CAN/CGSB-51.38 Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation.

.3 CGSB 71-GP-24M Adhesive, Flexible, for Bonding Cellular Polystyrene Insulation.

.3 Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC):

.1 CAN/ULC-S705.1 Standard for Thermal Insulation − Spray-Applied Rigid Polyurethane Form, Medium Density – Material.

.2 CAN/ULC-S705.2 Standard for Thermal Insulation − Spray-Applied Rigid Polyurethane Form, Medium Density – Application.

.4 Canadian Urethane Foam Contractors Association:

.1 Spray Applied Rigid Insulation Handbook.

.5 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

.1 ASTM E96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.


.1 Conform to the requirements of CaGBC LEED 2009 Materials and Resources Credit 4 – Recycled Content to achieve a minimum of 40% (combined pre and post-consumer) recycled content in all mineral fibre insulation.

1.4 SUBMITTALS






1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1 Deliver materials to the job site in manufacturer’s original packaging, containers and bundles with manufacturer’s brand name and identification intact and legible.

.2 Store level and handle materials to protect against contact with damp and wet surfaces, exposure to weather, breakage and damage to edges. Provide air circulation under covering and around stacks of materials.

1.6 MOCK-UP

.1 Construct mock-ups consist of a minimum 10 m2 of insulations per typical condition, including insulation retaining strapping and associated accessories as required. Locations include but not limited one inside corner, one outside corner, one wall to roof interface, and one window perimeter interface as requested by the Consultant. Mock-up may be part of the finished work.

1.7 WARRANTIES

.1 Provide product warranty to include insulation material to be free of any defects affecting performance and adjacent elements.


.1 The Contractor is to be aware that the design intent is to provide Z-girt support for the new roof cladding at a maximum spacing of 24” (600 mm).

.2 The Contract is expected to consider the need for cutting and fitting of the rigid insulation.

2 PRODUCTS

2.9 INSULATION

.1 Type and thickness of insulation required is as specified in the drawings and wall schedules. Minimum insulation thickness if not specified is 2 inches.

.2 Insulation Types:

.1 Semi-rigid Batt Insulation at wall stud cavity:

.1 To meet CAN/ULC S702 Type 1.

.2 Thickness and R-Value:

.1 5 1/2" at 2x6 wall framing. R-Value: R20.


.3 Surface burning characteristics to meet CAN/ULC S102 for vertical applications






.1 ComfortBatt by Roxul.


.2 Mineral Fibre Insulation:

.1 Non-combustible as tested to CAN4-S114 and ASTM E-136.

.2 Thickness:

.1 2” at exterior of wall sheathing plane. R-Value: R7.4.

.2 3” at low-slope roof assemblies. R-Value: R10.5.

.3 Density: to meet ASTM C612.

.4 Water adsorption less than 0.1% when test in accordance with ASTM C209.

.5 Surface burning characteristics when tested to ASTM E84.

.1 Flame Spread none.

.2 Smoke developed none.


.1 Wall assemblies:

.1 TopRock DD by Roxul.

.2 Approved alternative. .2 Roof assemblies:

.1 TopRock DD Plus by Roxul.

.2 Approved alternative. .3 Tapered Roof Insulation: Closed cell polyisocyanurate foam core with fiber-

reinforced facers.

.1 To ASTM C1289, Type 2, Class 1.

.2 Thermal resistance in conformance with Can/ULC-S770.


.1 Paratherm Polyisocyanurate by Siplast

.2 Approved alternative:

.4 Rigid Insulation:

.1 Extruded polystyrene: to CAN/CGSB-51.20, Type 3.

.2 Minimum 5 year aged R value of 5.8 per inch at 4 degrees C.






.1 3” at metal roof assemblies. R-Value: R15.


.1 Styrofoam Roofmate Ultra by The Dow Chemical Company.


.5 Spray Applied Polyurethane Insulation:

.1 To CAN-UC-S705.1, thickness as required to meet R value.

.2 Minimum 28 day oven aged R value of 5.9 per inch.

.3 Acceptable materials:

.1 BASF Walltite.


.6 Mineral Fibre Insulation for miscellaneous wall insulation infill:


.2 Non-combustible as tested to CAN4-S114 and ASTM E-136.

.3 Minimum R value: 4.0 per inch.

.4 Density of 2.0 lbs/cu ft as per ASTM C 303.

.5 Water adsorption less than 0.1% when test in accordance with ASTM C553, Section 14.

.6 Surface burning characteristics when tested to CAN4-S102.

.1 Flame Spread = 0

.2 Smoke developed none.


.1 Roxul ComfortBatt by Roxul.


.7 Batt Insulation (Interior Partitions And Ceilings):




.2 8 1/2" at Ceilings. R-Value: R28.

.3 Surface burning characteristics to meet CAN/ULC S102 for vertical applications

.4 Minimum Recycled Content 40%.






.1 Roxul “Safe ‘n’ Sound”


1.1 ATTACHMENT ACCESSORIES

.1 Z-Girt:

.1 Rolled formed, 20 ga minimum Z-girt section.

.2 Minimum AZM150 (AZ50).

.2 Insulation Clip:

.1 Corrosion protection shall be AZM150 or better to ASTM A653 or plastic to provide adequate support.

.3 Self drilling self tapping screws, corrosion resistant capable of salt spray testing per ASTM B117 providing 2000 hours red rust and 30 cycles Kesternich SO2.


.1 Leland Industries Inc DT2000 Long Life Coated Plating System.

.2 Pancake Quad Teks

.3 Alternate screws will be reviewed if samples submitted with mechanical information and corrosion protection test data.

.4 Insulation Adhesive: Para-stik by Siplast.

.5 Insulation retaining pins with rigid metal or plastic clip angles as required for rigid insulation. Pins to be hot dipped galvanized steel, welded aluminium or stainless steel with stainless steel attachment screws.

2 EXECUTION

2.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

.1 Prepare all surfaces in strict accordance with manufacturers written instructions.

.2 Surface to receive insulation shall be smooth, level, dry, clean, free from dust, dirt and other detrimental materials.

.3 Examine substrates and immediately inform Consultant in writing of defects.

2.3 INSTALLATION

.1 Semi-rigid Batt Insulation:

.1 Install insulation in strict accordance with manufacturers written instructions.

.2 Cut and trim insulation neatly to fit spaces and provide a continuous thermal barrier. Use largest possible dimensions to reduce number of joints. Fit insulation neatly around all penetrations.

.3 Provide temporary restraint of batt insulation with sheet product fastened in place.





.4 Keep insulation minimum 3” (75 mm) from heat emitting devices such as recessed light fixtures. Fit mineral fibre insulation around these locations.

.2 Rigid Insulation:

.1 Install polystyrene insulation boards over self-adhesive vapour retarder of roof assemblies as indicated with insulation retaining clips attached to the Z-girts as shown. Other types of retaining clips may be required at cavities that do not have Z-girts or have unusual shapes.

.2 Cut and fit insulation tight around roof vents, pipes, and other penetrations.

.3 Keep rigid insulation minimum 3” (75 mm) from heat emitting devices such as recessed light fixtures. Use mineral fiber insulation at these locations.

.4 Cut and trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Butt joints tightly, offset vertical joints. Use only insulation boards free from chipped or broken edges. Use largest possible dimensions to reduce number of joints.

.1 Rabbet insulation edges as required to accommodate shimmed Z-girts.

.2 Rigid boards that are not tight fitting will not be accepted and Consultant will identify non-tight fitting insulation for replacement.

.5 Offset both vertical and horizontal joints in multiple layer applications.

.3 Tapered Polyiso Insulation:

.1 Coat cleaned substrate surface with adhesive. Minimum 6” ribbon at 6” on center.

.2 Install tapered insulations slope to drains.

.1 Insulation board to be 4’ x 4’ maximum.

.2 Cut and fit insulation tight around drains, plumbing pipes and ducts.

.3 Stagger insulation panel joints from membrane joints below.

.4 Mineral Fiber Insulation:

.1 Wall assemblies:

.1 Install insulation boards on outer surface of air barrier of assemblies as indicated with plywood strapping as shown.

.2 No gaps in the insulation is permitted that exceed 1/8” and should generally be snug fitting at seams.

.3 Cut and fit insulation tight at corners as required to suit compression caused by strapping installation.

.4 Cut and fit insulation tight around electrical boxes, plumbing and heating pipes and ducts, around exterior doors and windows and other protrusions.

.1 Cut and trim insulation neatly to fit spaces.

.5 Offset both vertical and horizontal joints in multiple layer applications.




.6 Provide fibre insulation in the narrow slots adjacent to the window and door assemblies.


.2 Roof assemblies:

.1 Coat cleaned substrate surface with adhesive. Minimum 6” ribbon at 6” on center.

.2 Adhere mineral fibre roof insulation over substrate.


.2 Cut and fit insulation tight around drains, plumbing pipes and ducts.

.3 Stagger insulation panel joints from joints below.

.5 Spray Applied Polyurethane Insulation:

.1 Install in conformance with CAN/ULC-S705.2 with qualified installers. Coat outer Z-girt flanges with oil to prevent bonding.

.2 Review and prepare substrates including membranes and galvanized steel supports to provide continuous bond of insulation.

.3 Remove excess insulation to ensure minimum cavity depth of 3/8”.

.4 Ensure no spray applied insulation is in contact with window or door assembly. Provide semi-rigid fibre insulation in the narrow slots adjacent to the window and door assemblies prior to applying spray insulation.

.6 Do not enclose insulation until it has been reviewed and approved by Consultant.

2.4 CLEAN-UP

.1 Upon completion of the work of this section clean-up all insulation and debris associated with work.





7 THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07 27 13 SHEATHING PAPER/AIR BARRIER page 1 of 3

1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Work included: labour, materials, equipment and services necessary for installation of exterior sheathing paper.

1.1 REFERENCES .1 NRC Institute for Research in Construction

.1 Canadian Construction Materials Centre (CCMC) Technical Guide. .1 Air Barrier Systems for Exterior Walls for Low-Rise Buildings: Performance

and Assessment. .2 American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists(AATCC)

.1 Test Method 127-2008 Water Resistance: Hydrostatic Pressure Test. .3 Technical Association of the Pulp and Paper Industry (TAPPI)

.1 Test Method T-460 Air Resistance of Paper (Gurley Method). .4 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

.1 ASTM E1424-91 Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure and Temperature Differences Across the Specimen.

.2 ASTM E96/E96M-05 Standard Test methods for Water Vapour Transmission of Materials.

.3 ASTM D1117-Methods of Testing Non-woven Fabrics.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

.1 LEED Product Summary Sheet: furnish the Architect with a completed form for each construction material used. See Appendix 1 for sample product summary sheet.

.2 Product Data: Provide data on material characteristics, performance criteria and limitations.

.3 Manufacturer’s installation instructions: Indicate preparation and installation requirements and techniques, product storage and handling criteria.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET MATERIAL .1 A non-perforated, nonwoven, non-absorbing, breathable fabric barrier that resists air

flow, bulk water and wind driven rain. .1 Physical properties:

.1 Spunbonded polyolefin fabric barrier.





.2 Performance Characteristics: .2 Air penetration: Maximum of 0.001 cfm/sq ft at 75Pa when tested in accordance

with ASTM E2178, Type 1 per ASTM 1677. .3 Water Vapour Transmission: Minimum 28 Perms (Imperial) when tested in

accordance with ASTM E96, Method B. .4 Tear Resistance: 12/10 lbs when tested in accordance with ASTM D1117. .5 Water Penetration Resistance: Minimum 280 cm (110 inches) when tested in

accordance with AATCC Test Method 127. .6 Acceptable materials:

.1 TYVEK Commercial Wrap as manufactured by Dupont.

2.2 ACCESSORIES .1 Tape:

.1 Red Tuck Tape; CCMC #11955 or approved alternative. .2 Sealant:

.1 To be as indicated in 7900 sealants.

.2 Approved sealant to be used unless indicated otherwise. .3 Termination strips (termination of sheathing paper and membrane):

.1 24 Ga..

.2 Galvalume AZ150 galvanized steel.

.3 3” (75mm) wide. .4 Termination bars (securing of sheathing paper and membrane at terminations):

.1 Minimum 18 Ga.

.2 AZ150 galvanized steel.

.3 3/4" (20mm) wide. .5 Self adhesive membrane:

.1 To be as indicated in 07275 Self Adhesive Membrane.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION .1 Verify surfaces and conditions are ready to accept work of this Section in accordance

with the manufacturer’s recommendations. .2 Remove all sharp objects or obstructions prior to applying sheathing paper.

3.2 INSTALLATION .1 Install materials in accordance with manufacturer’s written guidelines and

recommendations. In case of conflict with the requirements specified herein and the manufacturer’s recommendations, the more stringent of the two will apply.

.2 Tape and seal all joints to provide a continuous air / moisture barrier.





3.3 WALL SURFACE .1 For base of wall details where there is no lower waterproof membrane:

.1 Install the lowest layer of sheathing paper horizontally in successive strips beginning a minimum of 2 inches (50mm) below the lowest point of the wood framing and progressing upwards with each succeeding sheet.

.2 Install sealant at foundation wall overlap to complete air barrier seal to foundation wall.

.2 For base of wall details with a waterproof membrane: .1 Install the lowest layer of sheathing paper horizontally in successive strips

beginning a minimum of 2 inches (50mm) below the upper edge of the waterproof membrane and progressing upwards with each succeeding sheet.

.2 Follow the specific requirements for lapping and integration with flashings described in the details.

.3 Horizontal laps should be a minimum of 6 inches (150mm) and arranged to shed water away from the wood surface, ie. upper sheet overlapping the lower sheet.

.4 Vertical laps shall be made where required and have a minimum 6 inch (150mm) overlap except at corners where a minimum 12 inches (300mm) overlap is required.

.5 At all staple fastener locations, apply tape over the staple penetration area.

.6 If the sheathing paper has been damaged resulting in perforation, cover damaged area with new material ensuring that lapping rules have been followed. For small tears or perforations apply a small dab of sealant or tape to the damaged area and then cover with a small piece of the sheathing paper.

.7 Ensure that lapping rules have been followed at intersections with membrane and sheet metal flashings as per the details. Install sealant as required to complete air barrier.

.8 Fully form all inside corners to prevent tenting.

.9 Tape all joints to provide continuous barrier.

3.4 PENETRATIONS .1 Install sheathing paper, membrane, sealants and tape around penetrations as per the

details. Lapping requirements at penetrations will vary, refer to details. Apply self adhesive membrane as indicated on the details and Section 07 27 5 Self Adhesive Membrane.

.3 Apply sealants as indicated on the details and Section 07 92 00 Sealants.

3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK .2 Exterior building envelope finish shall be installed within a two (2) month time period





7 THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07 27 19 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE page 1 of 4

1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Work described in this section includes but is not limited to the following:

.1 All labour, materials, equipment and services necessary for the application of self adhesive membrane.

1.2 REFERENCES


.1 ASTM D412 Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension.


.1 CGSB 37-GP-9MA Primer, Asphalt, Unfilled, for Asphalt Roofing, Dampproofing and Waterproofing.

.2 CGSB 37-GP-15 Application of Asphalt Primer for Asphalt Roofing, Damproofing and Waterproofing.

.3 CGSB 37.29 Rubber-Asphalt Sealing Compound.

.4 CGSB 37-GP-56 Membrane, Modified, Bituminous, Prefabricated, and Reinforced for Roofing.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1.4 STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1 Provide and maintain dry, off-ground weatherproof storage.

.2 Store rolls of membrane in upright position.

.3 Remove only in quantities for same day use.

1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

.1 Do not install membrane system when ambient temperatures are at or below 5°C for 24 hours before application, and only during dry conditions.

.1 Use cold weather products where required by manufacturers guidelines.

.2 Minimum temperature for installation of primer is 5°C.

.1 Use cold weather products where required by manufacturer’s guidelines.





.3 Install membrane on dry substrates, free of snow and ice, use only dry materials and apply only during weather that will not introduce moisture into membrane system.

.4 If water penetrates through the membrane assembly due to inadequate protection including from interior sources, Contractor to cut and inspect damages, remove and replace all materials at his own cost, to eliminate all trace of water in the assembly.

.5 Do not allow membrane to remain exposed longer than 6 weeks.


.1 Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum two years documented experience. Provide list of previous projects and references upon request by the Consultant.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MEMBRANE

.1 Rubberized asphalt self adhesive membrane to meet the following minimum criteria:

.1 Reinforced with a cross laminated polyethylene sheet 4 mils thick.

.2 Membrane is to be 40 mils thick (excluding release film) and must have a release film to protect the adhesive surface.

.3 The membrane system must not show any signs of softening, flow or deterioration at temperatures 80 °C or below.


.1 Sopraseal Stick 1100 T, manufactured by Soprema.

.2 Blueskin SA, manufactured by Henry|Bakor.


2.2 FOIL FACED MEMBRANE

.1 Foil faced rubberized asphalt self adhesive membrane for use at scaffolding tie-in points, stucco tie-in points and other waterproofing details as required to meet the following minimum criteria:

.1 Membrane is to be 40 mils thick (including release film) and must have a release film to protect the adhesive surface.



.1 Soprasolin HD, manufactured by Soprema.






2.3 MEMBRANE BELOW ROOFS AND FLASHINGS

.1 SBS modified bitumen self adhesive membrane to meet the following minimum criteria:

.1 Membrane is to be 40 mils thick (including release film) and must have a release film to protect the adhesive surface.



.1 Lastobond Shield HT, by Soprema

.2 Blueskin PE 200 HT, by Henry|Bakor


2.4 ACCESSORIES

.1 Primer: High tack SBS rubber based primer: to CGSB 37-GP-9Ma as recommended by manufacturer.

.2 Mastic sealant: As recommended by the manufacturer.

.3 Termination strips:

.1 Minimum 18 Ga.for steel, 1/16” for aluminum.

.2 G200 galvanized steel or aluminum.

.3 1.5” (38 mm) wide x continuous lengths where possible.

.4 Gum lip as required.

.4 Fasteners: ITW Buildex Tapcons with Climaseal coating or approved alternative.

.5 Metal termination flashings: Refer to 07 62 00 Metal Flashings and Trim.

.6 Sealant: Refer to 07 92 00 Sealants.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION OF SURFACES

.1 Examine surfaces to have membrane installed and immediately inform Consultant in writing of defects.

3.2 PREPARATION

.1 Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive membrane.

.2 Clean and prepare surfaces to receive membrane in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Surfaces are to be clean, dry and free of foreign matter.





.3 Ensure substrate is continuous. Provide solid backing as required. Unsupported membrane of 8 mm (5/16”) or greater is unacceptable. Fill voids as required or reinstall sheathing to meet maximum gap requirement.

.4 All sharp metal edges to be rounded or smoothed off to prevent puncture of membrane.

3.3 INSTALLATION

.1 Install membrane in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Observe temperature and humidity limitations for application.

.2 Prime areas to receive membrane in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Primer must be dry prior to application of membrane. Primer is typically required on all surfaces including underlying layers of membrane. Membrane must be applied to primed area that same day.

.3 Roll out sheets. Discard wrinkled or bubbled membrane.

.4 Remove release paper layer. Roll out on substrate with a mechanical roller to encourage full contact bond. Use heat gun as required to achieve adequate continuous bond.

.5 Lap sides and ends in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and with the project details. All laps to be a minimum of 50 mm (2”).

.6 Install mastic sealant at all exposed laps except shingle laps.

.7 Prestrip membrane (and sheathing paper) as required to ensure shingle fashion laps at tie-ins.

.8 Patch deficient areas with membrane extending 150 mm (6”) minimum in all direction from affected area. Seal top and sides of patch with mastic.

.9 Extend membrane onto items protruding to or penetrating assembly and seal termination with mastic.

.10 Ensure no membrane or membrane accessories extend to future exterior sealant locations or on finished surfaces. Clean any affected areas as required.

.11 Install termination strips (if required) onto membrane to continuously secure as indicated and directed by Consultant. Fasten as required to provide continuous support of membrane and to eliminate bowing of termination strip (minimum 6” on centre).

.12 Seal leading edge with mastic at the end of each day’s work.

3.4 CLEAN UP AND PROTECTION

.1 Clean off drips and smears of bituminous material and primers off adjacent materials immediately.

.2 At end of each day’s work, provide protection for completed work and materials out of storage.





7 THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07 46 23 WOOD SIDING page 1 of 3 1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

.1 Furnish all labour materials equipment and services necessary for the supply and installation of all wood siding and accessories in a rainscreen application, as indicated on the drawings, as scheduled, and as specified herein.

.2 Supply and install wood siding on the interior as specified on the drawings and in the Finish Schedule.

.3 Supply and install wood soffit – interior and exterior.


.1 Section 06 10 00: Rough Carpentry: Plywood sheathing

.2 Section 06 20 00: Finish Carpentry - installation

.3 Section 07 21 00: Insulation.

.4 Section 07 46 42: Fiber Cement Siding

.5 Section 07 62 00: Metal flashing

.6 Section 07 92 00: Caulking.

.7 Section 09 90 00: Painting.

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 National Lumber Grades Authority Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber. (NLGA)

.2 Western Red Cedar Lumber Association.

.3 Forest Stewardship Council (FSC)

.4 Canada Green Building Council (CaGBC) LEED 2009 for New Construction (NC)


.1 All wood siding used in the Expansion and Renovation Work to be locally-sourced, as per requirements of CaGBC LEED 2009 Materials and Resources Credit 5: Regional Materials. Wood is to be harvested within 800 km of the site of manufacture. The site of manufacture is to be located within 800 km of the Project Site.


.3 All wood products used in the Expansion and Renovation Work, except for cedar siding, to be certified by the Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) and to be supplied with chain-of-custody documentation as per requirements of CaGBC LEED 2009 Materials and Resources Credit 7: Certified Wood.




7 THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07 46 23 WOOD SIDING page 2 of 3

1.5 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit duplicate samples 300 mm long x full width of each profile, including finish for use in work.

.2 LEED Product Summary Sheet: Furnish the Consultant with a completed form for each construction material used. See Appendix 1 for Sample Product Summary Sheet.

.3 FSC Documentation: Provide the Consultant with the following:




2 PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD SIDING: Western Red Cedar:

.1 Horizontal Channel Siding, 1x5, kiln-dried, T & G, Grade: Clear - A and Better to NLGA 200b, for clear stain finish. Finish to be factory applied in two coats.

.1 Approved Product: SG5 as supplied by Cedarland, or approved alternate.

.2 Trim, fascia: kiln dried, smooth sawn, Grade: Clear – C and better to NLGA 202b, species to match siding, refer to drawings for sizes.

2.2 WOOD SOFFIT: Western Red Cedar:

.1 T+ G Soffit, 1x5, kiln-dried, T & G, Grade: C and Better Clear to NLGA 202b, for clear stain finish.

2.3 WOOD STRAPPING:

.1 SPF in accordance with Section 06 10 00.

2.5 FASCIA: Dimensions as per Drawings, kiln-dried, T & G, Grade: C and Better Clear to NLGA 202b, for clear stain finish.

2.6 BARGE BOARD: Dimensions as per Drawings, kiln-dried, T & G, Grade: C and Better Clear to NLGA 202b, for clear stain finish.

2.5 INSECT SCREEN: Perforated aluminum.




7 THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07 46 23 WOOD SIDING page 3 of 3

3 EXECUTION

3.1 COORDINATION;

.1 Coordinate with painting trade for priming and 1st coat of all stain surfaces of items prior to installation.

3.2 EXAMINATION

.1 Examine areas that are to receive the work of this section. Commencement of work implies acceptance of conditions as they exist and no extra will be allowed for failure to ensure satisfactory substrate conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 FLASHING:

a) Install metal flashings.

b) Coordinate installation with rigid insulation and building paper to shed moisture down paper faces and across flashings to exterior face of construction.

.2 SIDING and TRIM:

a) Fasten siding in straight, aligned lengths through strapping.

b) Use longest practical lengths to minimize butt joints. Where butt joints cannot be avoided scarf cut joints at 22.5 degrees. Seal cut ends using project stain finish.

c) Stagger butt joints across wall planes.

d) Exterior corners to be mitred.





7 THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07 46 46 FIBRE CEMENT CLADDING page 1 of 3

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

.1 Furnish all labour materials equipment and services necessary for the supply and installation of all fibre cement siding and accessories, as indicated on the drawings, as scheduled, and as specified herein.

.2 Work of this section shall include but shall not necessarily be limited to the supply and installation of the following:

.1 Fibre Cement Cladding

.2 All accessories and fasteners required for complete installation.


.1 Section 06 10 00: Rough Carpentry: Plywood sheathing

.2 Section 06 20 00: Finish Carpentry

.3 Section 07 21 00: Insulation.

.4 Section 07 46 23: Wood Siding.

.5 Section 07 62 00: Metal flashing

.6 Section 07 92 00: Caulking.


.1 Panel manufacturer shall have a minimum of ten (10) years experience.

.2 Field measurements shall be taken and verified prior to completion of fabrication and assembly.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

.1 LEED Product Summary Sheet: Furnish the Architect with a completed form for each construction material used. See Appendix 1 for Sample Product Summary Sheet.

.2 Submit shop drawings indicating thickness and dimensions of all parts; fastening and anchoring methods; detail and location of joints; including joints necessary to accommodate thermal movement.

.3 Submit manufacturers data sheets covering care and recommended maintenance procedures of siding for incorporation into maintenance manual.

.4 Submit copies of manufacturers warrantees.

.5 .Submit two (2) samples of each type of panel assembly 300 mm x 400 mm and finish for Consultant's review.





1.5 DELIVERY,HANDLING, & STORAGE

.1 Protect edges and finishes and store panels in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

.2 Stack panels on a smooth, level surface and store under cover and keep dry prior to installation.

,3 Protect edges from chipping

1.6 WARRANTY

.1 Provide manufacturer’s transferable fifty (50) warranty covering defects in materials.

.2 Provide manufacturer’s five (5) year limited warranty for pre-primed material when on-site coats are applied by others under Section 09 90 00.

2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FIBRE CEMENT PANELS:

.1 Material: Portland Cement, ground sand, cellulose fiber, selective additives and water formulated without asbestos, fiberglass or formaldehyde, confirming to ASTM CI 186, Grade 11, Type A.

.2 Size: Refer to drawings for layout, with maximum 1220 x 3050 panels.

.3 Thickness 7.94 mm

.4 Finish: Factory Finished, Colour selected from manufacturer’s standard range.

.5 Surface: Smooth

.6 Fastenings: No 8-18, 25 mm long stainless steel bugle head screws.

.7 Recycled Content Minimum: 50% (can be achieved via fly ash content)


.1 “Hardie Panel”, by James Hardie Building Products. - Prefinished

.2 Certainteed Colormax Prefinished Smooth Vertical Panel


2.2 ACCESSORIES

.1 Aluminum components designed specifically for use with HardiePanel available from Fry Reglet Inc or approved alternative:

.1 Horizontal Joint: FCP Z Flashing

.2 Vertical Joint: FCP Vertical

.3 Inside Corner: FCP Inside Cnr





.4 External Corner: FCP Outside Cnr

.5 Wall/Glazing Abutment: Custom “L” shape as per Architectural Drawings

.2 Insect Screen: aluminum mesh, minimum 74% open.

2.2 SEALANT

.1 “Extend HD Multi-Polymer” sealant as manufactured by Ohio Sealants or approved alternate.

.2 Colour to match panel.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Examine areas which are to receive the work of this section. Commencement of work implies acceptance of conditions as they exist and no extra will be allowed for failure to ensure satisfactory substrate conditions.

.2 Verify site dimensions prior to starting work.

3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Erect panels plumb, level, and true.

.2 Anchor panels securely in place in accordance with installer's approved shop drawings.

.3 Conform to manufacturer's instructions for installation attachment systems.

.4 Surfaces to receive panels shall be even, smooth, sound, clean, dry, and free from defects detrimental to panel installation.

.5 Install with joints over middle of wall framing. Leave a 1.5 mm gap between panels. Seal gap with sealant as specified.

.6 Ensure all fasteners are aligned vertically and horizontally. Install fasteners to fit snug, but not to penetrate surface. Do not drive fasteners at an angle.

.7 Keep fasteners a uniform 50 mm away from edge of panel.

.8 Where panels fit into accessories, leave 6 mm for expansion.

.9 Finish installation shall be properly secured, free of rattles, distortions, waviness, protrusions, damaged or chipped components.

.10 Weather seal all joints as required using methods and material as specified above.





7 THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07 52 16 ROOF MEMBRANE page 1 of 17

1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Work includes labour, materials, equipment and services necessary to provide roof / deck waterproofing membrane assemblies.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Applicable municipal by-law and building code.

.2 Canadian Standards Association (CSA):

.1 CSA A123.3 Asphalt Saturated Organic Roofing Felt.

.2 CSA A123.4 Asphalt for Constructing Built-Up Roof Coverings and Waterproofing Systems.

.3 Roofing Contractors Association of BC (RCABC):

.1 Roofing Practices Manual.

.4 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB):

.1 CGSB 37.50-M89 Hot Applied, Rubberized Asphalt for Roofing and Waterproofing.

.2 CGSB 37-GP-9Ma Primer, Asphalt, Unfilled, for Asphalt Roofing, Dampproofing and Waterproofing.

.3 CGSB 37-GP-15M Application of Asphalt Primer for Asphalt Roofing, Dampproofing and Waterproofing.

.4 CGSB 37-GP-19M Cement, Plastic, Cutback Tar.

.5 CGSB 37.29-M89 Rubber-Asphalt Sealing Compound.

.6 CGSB 37-GP-56M Membrane, Modified, Bituminous, Prefabricated, and Reinforced for Roofing.

.5 Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC):

.1 CAN/ULC S701 Standard for Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and Pipe Covering.

.6 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

.1 ASTM D412 Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers – Tension.

.7 Siplast (or approved alternate system)

.1 Guide Specification for Parapro Roof Membrane System (or approved alternate manufacturer’s literature)





1.3 WARRANTY

.1 Two-ply SBS Base and Cap Sheets

.1 Provide the Owner with an RCABC warranty stating the roof/deck waterproof system shall remain watertight and free from material and workmanship defects for a total of ten (10) years after the final completion date. The warranty shall be a term type, without deductibles or limitations on coverage amount, and shall be issued at no additional cost to the Owner. This warranty shall not exclude random areas of ponding from coverage.

.2 Prior to shipment of materials to site the Contractor shall make application for warranty to the membrane manufacturer.

1.4 LABORATORY TESTING

.1 If required by Consultant, manufacturers of Elastomeric Asphalt materials to provide, at no cost, the results of tests and chemical analysis on the Elastomeric Asphalt materials supplied.

.2 Tests are conducted to verify conformance to CGSB 37-GP-56M.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

.1 Roof/deck waterproof membrane Contractor is required to submit evidence that the contractor has successfully completed similar work over a period of not less than 5 years.

.2 The Contractor must be officially recognized as an authorized installer by the waterproofing materials’ manufacturer.

1.6 MOCK-UP

.1 Fabricate, install and pay for mock-ups, including but not limited vapour retarder and primer, insulations, and SBS membrane system. Mock-ups will be typically used to confirm details and may remain as part of the finished product if deemed acceptable by the Consultant.


.1 Installer Qualifications: Only competent, qualified tradesmen experienced with membranes shall execute the work of this section.





.2 A crew of qualified tradesmen is defined as follows:

.1 The foreman shall hold a three-year Apprenticeship Certificate; at least one other man shall hold a three year Apprenticeship Certificate; the balance of the crew should have completed some portion of the Apprenticeship program, but shall at least have submitted application for the certification as “Roofer”. A Journeyman Certificate is acceptable in lieu of an Apprenticeship Certificate.

.2 The foreman and one other member of the crew must have attended an Application Seminar provided by the membrane manufacturer.

.3 Confirm that surfaces to which modified membrane is to be applied are in a condition suitable for this application. Notify the Consultant in writing if substrate is unacceptable.

.4 Unless otherwise specified, comply with manufacturer’s latest printed instructions for materials and installation methods.

.5 Notify Consultant in writing of any conflict between these specifications and manufacturers instructions. Consultant will designate which document is to be followed.

1.8 SUBMITTALS/SHOP DRAWINGS


.2 Provide bills of lading to the Consultant, as requested.

.3 As required, submit sloped insulation shop drawings with roof/deck plan indicating slope directions, cricket types and locations.

.4 Letter from the proposed primary roof/deck membrane manufacturer confirming that the roof/deck membrane contractor is authorized to install the proposed system.

.5 Letter from the primary roof/deck membrane manufacturer stating that the proposed application will comply with the manufacturer's requirements in order to qualify the project for the specified warranty.

.6 Upon completion of the waterproofing work submit executed warranty to Consultant.

1.9 STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1 Deliver and store all materials in their original packaging, bearing the manufacturer's name, related standards and any other specifications or reference standards.

.2 Store materials out of direct exposure to the elements.

.3 Store materials delivered in rolls carefully on end, with selvage edges up.

.4 Store roll goods on a clean, flat and dry surface. All material stored on the roof/deck shall be stored on pallets.





.5 As required, materials stored on the roof/deck shall be weighted to prevent “blow off” due to wind.

.6 Store materials on the roof/deck in a manner so as to preclude overloading of roof/deck and building structure.

.7 Maintain storage location at minimum +5°C.

.8 Store all materials such as solvents, membranes, adhesives and asphalt cutback products away from open flames, sparks or excessive heat.

.9 Protect and permanently store all materials in a dry, well-ventilated and weatherproof location. Remove from this location only materials to be used the same day. Cover all material using a breathable cover such as a canvas. Polyethylene or other non-breathable plastic coverings are not acceptable.

.10 Prevent water-based materials from freezing.

.11 Place plywood runways or similar over completed work to prevent damage to roof/deck membrane during the course of the work.

1.10 ENVIROMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

.1 Install roof/deck membrane on dry substrate, free of water, snow and ice, use only dry materials and apply only during weather that will not introduce moisture into roof/deck waterproofing system.

.2 Before commencing work, Contractor to ensure that forecasted meteorological conditions shall permit work to be carried out without interruption during the course of the day.

.3 Do not install roof/deck membrane when temperature remains below +1°C for torch, or an equivalent temperature allowing for wind-chill factor.

.4 Minimum temperature for solvent-based adhesive is -5°C.

.5 All exposed areas of the work shall be protected at the end of each working day or during any interruption of work.

.6 If water penetrates through the assembly due to inadequate protection, Contractor to cut and inspect damages, remove, replace and re-install all materials to eliminate all traces of water in the assembly. All costs to be borne by the Contractor.

.7 Membrane system must be watertight at end of each shift.

1.11 PROTECTION

.1 Protect all adjacent surfaces from any damage that may result from the work of this section. This includes the installation of fireguard protection, as required and/or as directed by the Consultant. The roof/deck membrane contractor shall make good any damage resulting from the work.





.2 When working with Torch Applied Materials:

.1 Fire Extinguishers: maintain one cartridge operated type with shut-off nozzle, ULC labeled for A, B and C class protection. Size 2.25 kg on roof/deck per torch applicator, within 10m of torch applicator.

.2 A fire watch shall be maintained in conformance with roof/deck membrane contractor’s insurance provider after each day’s roof/deck waterproofing operations cease or as required to satisfy the requirements for all insurance providers involved with the building and/or the work.

.3 Provide a written roof/deck fall protection plan in conformance with WorkSafe BC and OH&S Regulations. A copy of the fall protection plan must be available at the workplace before work with a risk of falling begins. The plan shall include but is not limited to the following:

.1 A roof/deck plan sketch indicating the fall hazards expected in each work area.

.2 The fall protection system or systems to be used in each area.

.3 The procedures to assemble, maintain, inspect, use and disassemble the fall protection system or systems.

.4 The procedures for rescue of a worker who has fallen and is suspended by a personal fall protection system or safety net, but is unable to effect self rescue.

.5 Location of nearest medical facility, complete with shortest route directions.

1.12 MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE

.1 Manufacturer Requirements:

.1 The primary roof/deck waterproofing materials’ manufacturer shall provide direct trained company personnel to attend necessary job meetings, perform base sheet and cap sheet inspections and conduct a final inspection upon successful completion of the project.

.2 Manufacturer’s representative to provide a written copy of the report to the Consultant after each visit to the site.

.2 Contractor to permit and facilitate access to site and roofs/decks, at all times, by above mentioned manufacturer's representative.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MEMBRANE SYSTEM DESIGNATIONS

.1 Two-Ply SBS Modified Bitumen Exposed System:

.1 Acceptable systems:

.1 By Siplast:





.1 Base sheet: Paradiene 20 TG F

.2 Base sheet flashing: Paradiene 20 HTTG F

.3 Fireguard base sheet: Paradiene 20 SA

.4 Cap sheet: Parafor 30 TG

.5 Parapro 123 flashing membrane

.2 Approved alternative system:

.1 Request for alternative system must be submitted to the Consultant in writing and must include product data sheets, warranty provisions and cost implications.

2.2 SBS MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE MATERIALS

.1 Base sheet conforming to CGSB 37-GP-56M, Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene (SBS) elastomeric polymer, prefabricated sheet, random fibrous glass mat reinforcement. The membrane must also meet the following minimum criteria:

.1 Type 2

.2 Class C

.3 Grade 1

.4 Thermofusible elastomeric asphalt: Mix of selected modified bitumen and SBS thermoplastic polymer. Minimum 12% polymer content.

.5 Topside to be protected with perforated polyolefin film.

.6 Bottom surfaces shall be protected by a thermofusible polyolefin film.

.7 Average thickness:

.1 2.9 mm

.8 Tear strength to ASTM D 5147

.1 40lbf (0.18kN)

.9 Ultimate elongation (average) at 23°C:

.1 50%

.10 Low temperature flexibility:

.1 No cracking at -30°C

.11 Acceptable product:

.1 Paradiene 20 TG F as manufactured by Siplast.


.1 Requests for alternative must be submitted to the Consultant in writing and must include product data sheet.





.2 Base sheet flashing conforming to CGSB 37-GP-56M, Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene (SBS) elastomeric polymer, prefabricated sheet, fibreglass scrim/fibreglass mat composite reinforcement. The membrane must also meet the following minimum criteria:

.1 Type 2 (fully adhered, torch applied)

.2 Class C

.3 Grade 2


.5 Topside to be protected with perforated polyolefin film.



.1 2.9 mm

.8 Tensile strength or Peak Load at 23°C:

.1 935 N/5 cm

.9 Ultimate elongation (average) at 23°C:

.1 100%




.1 Paradiene HTTG F as manufactured by Siplast.



.3 (Upon approval by Consultant) Alternative base sheet flashing for fire sensitive substrates conforming to CGSB 37-GP-56M, Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene (SBS) elastomeric polymer, prefabricated sheet, fibreglass scrim/fibreglass mat composite reinforcement. The membrane must also meet the following minimum criteria:

.1 Type 2 (fully adhered, self adhesive)

.2 Class C

.3 Grade 2

.4 Topside to be protected with silica parting agent.

.5 Bottom surfaces shall be protected by a polyolefin release film.







.1 3.0 mm


.1 935 N/5 cm

.9 Ultimate elongation at 23°C:

.1 100%



.11 Acceptable material:

.1 Paradiene 20 EGSA as manufactured by Siplast



.4 Cap sheet and cap sheet flashing conforming to CGSB 37-GP-56M, Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene (SBS) elastomeric polymer, prefabricated sheet, fibreglass scrim/polyester mat reinforcement. The membrane must meet the following minimum criteria:

.1 Type 1

.2 Class A

.3 Grade 2

.4 Top side to be protected with No. 11 ceramic coloured granules from manufacturers standard color range.


.6 Thermofusible elastomeric asphalt: Mix of selected bitumen and SBS thermoplastic polymer. Minimum 12% polymer content.

.7 Average thickness at selvedge:

.1 3.0 mm


.1 785 N/5 cm

.9 Ultimate elongation at Peak Load at 23°C:

.1 60%




.1 Parafor 30 TG as manufactured by Siplast.






.1 Cap sheet: Paradiene 30 CR FR TG.

.2 Cap sheet flashing: Paradiene 40 CR FR TG.


.5 Catalyzed Resin Flashing System (Parapro): Fluid-applied reinforced membrane, conforming to ASTM C 836. Materials shall also conform to the following requirements.

.1 Solvent: A clear solvent used to clean and reactivate transition areas of in-place catalyzed resin flashing membranes at tie-ins, repairs, and between staged coats of resin. The solvent shall also be used to prepare metal and plastic surfaces prior to application of catalyzed resin flashing membranes.


.1 Pro Prep by Siplast

.2 Paste: A multi-component, fast curing resin paste used for remediation of depressions in substrate surfaces or other irregularities.


.1 Pro Paste Resin by Siplast

.3 Primers: A two component, fast curing acrylic primer for use over concrete, concrete repair materials, masonry substrates, wood/plastic substrates, and asphaltic materials.


.1 Pro Primer R, T or W by Siplast

.4 Resin: A multi-component, flexible acrylic resin for use in combination with fleece fabric to form a monolithic, reinforced flashing membrane used in conjunction with a granule surfaced modified bitumen flashing system.


.1 Parapro 123 Membrane Resin by Siplast

.5 Fleece: A non-woven, 360° needle punched polyester fabric used as reinforcement in catalyzed resin flashing membranes.


.1 Pro Fleece by Siplast

.6 Catalyst: A reactive agent used to induce curing of acrylic resins.


.1 Pro Catalyst by Siplast







.6 Roof/Deck Membrane Accessories:

.1 Membrane adhesive: Non asbestos fiber, asphalt cutback.

.1 PA-311M by Siplast

.2 Primer: Asphalt solvent blend.

.1 PA-1125 by Siplast

.3 Flashing Cement for setting metal flanges and drains:


.4 Flashing Cement for high slope and vertical applications:


.5 Protective Walk Pads:

.1 Paratread by Siplast



2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

.1 Insulations: Refer to Section 07 21 00 Insulation.

.1 Tapered Polyiso insulation.

.2 Mineral fibre insulation.

.3 Insulation Adhesive.

.2 Vapour Retarder: Self adhesive membrane.


.1 IREX 40 by Siplast.


.2 Primer: As approved by manufacturer.

.3 Plumbing Vent Flashing (stack):


.1 Spun aluminum vent stacks as manufactured by Menzies with vandal proof aluminum caps. Caps to be riveted to stack to prevent removal.







.4 Roof/Deck Drains:

.1 Spun copper drain with cast aluminum grate and membrane clamping ring, come with blue seal.

.2 New drain body pipe to sleeve into existing drain pipe whenever possible. Install blue seal or connect to existing drain pipe with a mechanical coupler (MJ or Fernco) to prevent back flow leakage.

.3 All drains are to be set into a sump to ensure positive flow to drain assembly. For uninsulated roof/deck assemblies over a plywood substrate, substitute self adhesive base sheet flashing ply (Paradiene 20 SA) for overlay board at drain locations to reduce finished membrane height and facilitate positive flow to the drain assembly.

.4 All work to be in accordance to the British Columbia Plumbing Code.


.1 Spun copper Clamp-Tite by Menzies Metals.



.5 Scupper Drains:

.1 Install new scupper drain with minimum 2% slope.

.2 All work to be in accordance to the British Columbia Plumbing Code.


.1 “Hot Welded” copper Clamp-Tite scupper drain by Menzies Metals.



.6 Overflow Drains:


.1 “Hot Welded” overflow drain by Menzies Metals.







.7 Sealant: For sealing SBS membrane leading edges at penetrations.


.1 Flexible Seal by Epmar.



.8 Fireguard Tape: To be used at all overlay board joints and other fire sensitive joints and interfaces. Torch application to wood substrate is not permitted.

.1 Fireguard Tape by IKO.



.9 Ceramic Granules:

.1 No. 11 grade specification ceramic granules of colour scheme matching the granule surfacing of the finish ply.

2.4 ALTERNATIVE SYSTEM

.1 Alternate systems will be considered. Complete product data , including materials samples, of proposed alternate must be submitted to the consultant.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 WORKMANSHIP .1 Install roof/deck waterproof membrane in accordance with applicable standard in

RCABC Roofing Practices Manual, the membrane manufacturer’s requirements, or this specification; whichever is more stringent.

.2 Install primer for asphalt waterproof membrane in accordance with CGSB 37-GP-15M.

.3 Install waterproofing elements on clean dry substrate in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions (attached). Where there is a discrepancy between the manufacturers’ recommendations and the specifications, the more stringent will govern.

.4 Waterproofing work shall be scheduled and performed in a sequence such that no component of the assembly is left unprotected when operations are interrupted.

3.2 PROTECTION

.1 Cover walls and adjacent work where materials are hoisted or used.

.2 Use warning signs and barriers. Maintain in good order until completion of work.

.3 Clean off drips and smears of bituminous material immediately.





.4 Ensure installed membrane is protected during the course of the work. Place plywood runways, or similar, over completed work as required to ensure the movement of materials and other traffic does not damage completed work. Comply with precautions deemed necessary by Consultant.

.5 At end of each day’s work or when stoppage occurs due to inclement weather, provide protection for work areas and materials out of storage. Maintain area in a watertight condition at all times.

.6 The substrate and wall assemblies are sensitive to heat. Use extra caution and extensive fireguard protection, which is not limited to but includes heat shield or deflectors, mineral wool insulation and fireguard tape. The contractor shall make good any damage resulting from his work in progress.

3.3 EXAMINATION OF ELEMENTS

.1 Examine work areas and immediately inform Consultant in writing of any defects.

.2 Prior to commencement of work ensure:

.1 Substrates are firm, straight, smooth, dry, free of snow, ice or frost, and clean of dust and debris.

.2 Sweep or vacuum all surfaces, removing all loose aggregate and foreign substances prior to commencement of the roof/deck membrane work.

.3 Ensure plywood substrate is adequately sloped to all drain locations to minimize the potential for ponding water.

.3 Contractor shall inspect and approve substrate condition prior to commencement of work. Commencement of work implies acceptance of the surface condition.

3.4 ROUGH CARPENTRY

.1 Prepare wood surfaces down, as required, to set drains flush to surrounding plywood. Exact location of drains and scuppers to be confirmed on site by Consultant. No cutting of structural members is permitted unless approved by the Consultant.

3.5 SELF ADHESIVE VAPOUR RETARDER

.1 Install membrane in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Observe temperature and humidity limitations for application.

.2 Prime areas to receive membrane in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Primer must be dry prior to application of membrane. Primer is typically required on all surfaces including underlying layers of membrane. Membrane must be applied to primed area that same day.

.3 Roll out sheets. Discard wrinkled or bubbled membrane.





.4 Remove release paper layer. Roll out on substrate with a mechanical roller to encourage full contact bond. Use heat gun as required to achieve adequate continuous bond.

.5 Lap sides and ends in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and with the project details. All laps to be a minimum of 50 mm (2”).

.6 Prestrip membrane as required to ensure shingle fashion laps at tie-ins.

.7 Patch deficient areas with membrane extending 150 mm (6”) minimum in all direction from affected area.

.8 Extend membrane onto items protruding to or penetrating assembly.

.9 Ensure no membrane or membrane accessories extend to future exterior sealant locations or on finished surfaces. Clean any affected areas as required.

3.6 INSULATIONS

.1 Install tapered insulations slope to drains. Adhere tapered insulation panels over vapour retarder.

.1 Minimum 6” ribbon at 6” on center.


.3 Stagger insulation panel joints from vapour retarder membrane joints below.

.2 Adhere mineral fibre roof insulation over tapered polyiso insulation.

.1 Minimum 6” ribbon at 6” on center.


.3 Stagger mineral fibre insulation board joints from tapered insulation joints below.

3.7 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE SYSTEMS

.1 Details of waterproof membrane are for schematic purposes. Membrane systems to be installed in accordance with intent of details, along with manufacturer’s recommendations and RCABC guidelines. The most stringent shall apply.

.2 Use materials in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

.3 Prime all metal to receive direct membrane application. All metal surfaces to receive membrane must be buffed or etched prior to asphalt primer application.

.4 Remove only as much of the existing roof/deck membrane as can be stripped in with base stripping ply in the same day. At the conclusion of each day’s work provide water tight “night seals” that facilitate the continuation of the roof/deck membrane work the next day.

.5 Installation of base ply sheet:

.1 Install drains, scuppers, and other accessories as required.





.2 Starting at low point of roof/deck, perpendicular to slope, unroll base sheet dry on deck, align, and reroll from both ends. Care must be taken to ensure good alignment of the first roll.

.3 Install the base sheet by heating the backside of the membrane roll so that there is a free flowing puddle of asphalt in front of the roll at all times. Apply extra heat as necessary to ensure a full and continuous bond to asphalt recovery board. Ensure a minimum bleed out of 3 mm at all seams.

.4 Provide minimum 75 mm side laps and 150 mm end laps.

.5 Cut a dog ear angle at the end laps on overlapping selvage edges.

.6 Seal T-laps immediately following sheet application by applying pressure with a round nosed trowel.

.7 End laps to be staggered a minimum of 900mm.

.8 Cover strips at tie-in or night seal locations to be a minimum of 12” wide.

.9 Application shall provide a smooth surface without air pockets, wrinkles, fishmouths or tears.

.10 After installation of the base sheet, check all lap seams on the base sheet.

.6 Installation of base sheet stripping:

.1 Upon the completion of the base sheet field membrane, but before application of the cap sheet, provide base sheet flashings at the intersection of the membrane at walls, curbs, and where a vertical member passes through the roof/deck.

.2 Ensure that substrates are dry, smooth, even and adequately covered with fireguard protection.

.3 Base sheet flashing to be applied by torch. Ensure laps are fully welded.

.4 Install a 900 mm by 900 mm base sheet flashing ply at all vents, and other protrusions through roof/deck assembly. Drains, scuppers, and other accessories to be set into a bed of continuous mastic and mechanically attached to the substrate.

.5 All stack and drain and scupper flanges to be set into a bed of mastic, 25mm wide minimum, and then mechanically attached.

.6 At perimeters, install base sheet flashing ply up vertical surfaces a minimum of 200 mm and extend onto the horizontal surface of the roof/deck a minimum of 100 mm.

.7 Provide gussets over the base sheet at all inside and outside corners. Gusset size to be 100 mm wide x 150 mm long facilitating a 50 mm return on either side of the corner. Extend gusset 50 mm on to horizontal surface.

.8 Lap side joints 75 mm. Stagger laps joints a minimum of 300mm from base sheet field laps.

.9 Exert pressure on the flashing sheet during application with a wet sponge, or similar, to ensure complete contact with the wall/roof surfaces to ensure no sags, blisters, fishmouths or wrinkles exist.





.10 Membrane manufacturer to review and approve base sheet and base sheet flashing ply installation prior to cap sheet installation.

.7 Installation of Parapro 123 Flashing Resin:

.1 Install Parapro 123 flashing resin in conformance with manufacturers’ recommendations.

.2 Mock-up must be performed prior to the commencement of the work. Upon acceptance the mock-up may remain as part of the finished work.

.8 Installation of cap sheet:

.1 Once the base sheet has been applied, reviewed and approved, the cap sheet can then be laid.

.2 Cap sheet shall be unrolled starting from the low point on the roof/deck. Cap sheet shall be rerolled from both ends prior to torching. Care must be taken to ensure alignment of the first roll.

.3 Cap sheet shall be torch welded in accordance with the recommendations of the membrane manufacturer, to the base sheet membrane. During this application, both surfaces shall be simultaneously melted, forming an asphalt bead that shall be pushed out in front of the cap sheet.

.4 Care must be taken not to burn the membranes, and their respective reinforcements.

.5 Base and cap sheet seams shall be staggered a minimum of 300 mm.

.6 Cap sheet shall have side laps of 75 mm and end laps of 150 mm. Surface granules on end laps shall be embedded prior to installation of following sheet. Touch up seams with loose granules.

.7 Ensure cap sheet is properly welded, without air pockets, wrinkles, fishmouths or tears.

.8 After installation of the cap sheet, check all lap seams on the cap sheet.

.9 During installation, ensure a minimum of 2mm bleed out at all seams.

.9 Installation of cap sheet flashing:

.1 Cap sheet flashing shall be laid in strips one metre wide. Side laps shall be 90 mm, and shall be staggered a minimum of 300 mm from cap sheet field laps.

.2 Extend cap sheet flashing 150 mm onto horizontal surface. Use a chalk line to ensure straight and true cap sheet.

.3 Cap sheet flashing to be torch welded.

.4 Using a torch and round-nosed roofing trowel, embed the surface granules into the heated and soft bitumen, from the chalk line to edge of the cap sheet.

.5 Exert pressure on the flashing sheet during application with a wet sponge, or similar, to ensure complete contact with the wall/roof/deck surfaces to ensure no sags, blisters, fishmouths or wrinkles exist.

.6 Ensure membrane application free of air pockets, wrinkles, fishmouths or tears.





.7 Cut off excess fireguard membrane.

.8 The vertical roof/deck membrane assembly terminations are to be back nailed with hot dip galvanized roofing nails with 1” dia. hot dip galvanized washers at 200 mm on centre or secured with 14ga aluminum termination bars with 200 mm fastener spacing. Fasteners to be hot dip galvanized or stainless steel.

.9 Install a bead of Flexible Seal sealant along the top edge of the cap sheet flashing ply.

.10 Membrane manufacturer to review and approve the cap sheet installation.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

.1 The contractor is responsible to notify the Consultant and membrane manufacturer 48 hours prior to the commencement of the work.

.2 The membrane manufacturer will provide periodic review during the waterproofing applications and submit field reports to the Consultant after each visit.

.3 The membrane manufacturer is to be notified upon the completion of the waterproofing work.

.4 All deficiencies are to be corrected.

.5 Submit executed warranty upon completion of waterproofing work.

3.9 CLEANING

.1 At completion of work, all debris and remaining materials resulting from the work of this Section are to be removed from site in a timely manner.

.2 Clean all adjacent surfaces affected during the course of work.





7 THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07 61 13 METAL ROOFING page 1 of 7

1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Work included: labour, materials, equipment and services necessary to remove existing shake and metal roofs and install new metal roofs complete with Z-girts, penetration flashings and accessories as required.

.2 Work includes all roof perimeter flashings which extend from the roof surface onto adjoining surfaces.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Applicable municipal by-law or building code.

.2 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): .1 ASTM A525M Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-

Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process Metric. .2 ASTM A526M Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-

Dip Process, Commercial Quality. .3 ASTM A792 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-

Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. .4 ASTM D523 Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss.

.3 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB): .1 CAN/CGSB-37.5-M89 Cutback Asphalt Plastic Cement. .2 CAN/CGSB-37.29-M89, Rubber-Asphalt Sealing Compound.

.4 Aluminum Association: .1 Specifications for Aluminum Sheet Metal Work in Building Construction.

.5 Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA): .1 Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

1.3 DESIGN CRITERIA

.1 Provisions for Thermal Movement: New metal roofing and cladding systems shall be fabricated and installed so that they provide for expansion and contraction of the component materials without oil canning, buckling, hole elongation, fastener failure or excess stress loading situations developing at any time during the temperature cycle. Allowance shall be set for the temperature occurring at the time of installation of the metal roofing. The range of surface temperatures the system should be designed for is -15 degrees Celsius to a high of 70 degrees Celsius. Clips shall be designed and installed to resist rotation and to avoid shear stress when roofing material expands and contracts.





.2 Water Infiltration: The metal roof system is to be designed and installed to not allow any infiltration of water into the building interior. All laps of metal flashing and connections of roof panels shall be installed to allow moisture to run over and off the material. Where possible, install continuous sheets of metal roofing with no laps.

.3 Sheet metal roofing and supporting girts shall be designed to resist positive and negative wind loads in accordance with the City of New Westminster Building By-law and BCBC Climactic Information, local wind pressures 1 in 30 years without failure or permanent set.

.4 Provisions for Ice Damming: Details at the eaves and valleys shall be designed to accommodate the build-up of ice without back-up of moisture into the seams or under roofing.

.5 Maintain the following tolerances: .1 Maximum variation from plane: 10mm/10m of length. .2 Maximum offset from true alignment between two adjacent members abutting end

to end, in line: 0.75mm.

.6 Design roof openings, flute and batten closures, thermal clips and other flashings and accessories in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit 12” x 12” (300 x 300 mm) samples of each sheet metal material and colour including a typical finished seam.

.2 Submit samples of fasteners and anchoring assemblies for the new metal roof.

.3 Submit Shop Drawings for review by Consultant indicating: .1 Plans and details of typical assembly, profiles, fastening, and perimeter and

interface conditions. .2 All materials to be used. .3 Design loading for wind and snow. .4 Loads and their locations to be transferred to supporting structure below the roof

cladding including drag forces. .5 Engineer’s seal covering the design of the roof cladding system. Including girts

and connectors.

.4 Submit letters of assurance, Schedule B prior to installation signed by the speciality engineer responsible for the design of the roofing system. Submit letter of assurance, Schedule C to confirm field review of the installed roofing system.

1.5 MOCK-UP

.1 Prior to starting the installation of the metal roof system provide a mock-up of typical roof components for review by the Consultant.





1.6 WARRANTY

.1 RCABC warranty: Warrant that the roof system is installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and will be free from defective workmanship and to remain watertight and weatherproof with normal usage for 10 years following Project Substantial Performance date.

.2 Provide minimum 25 year extended warranty on finish.


.1 Roofing installers must have a minimum of 3 years experience with the respective roofing product on this project.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL ROOFING

.1 Prefinished sheet steel to meet AAMA 621-02 standard. Third party testing results to be made available to the Consultant upon request.

.2 Prefinished steel with factory applied Kynar, polyvinylidene fluoride. .1 Base Metal to be:

.1 Aluminium-zinc coated (Galvalume) steel sheet conforming to the requirements of ASTM A792 (or A792M) with a minimum coating of AZ50(AZM150).

.2 24 gauge minimum thickness. .2 Colour match: all material to be ordered from one production lot. .3 Paint film thickness to meet the following when tested in accordance with ASTM

D1005: .1 Exposed surface shall have a dry film thickness of 1 ± 0.1 mil. .2 Protected and unexposed surfaces shall have a dry film thickness of a

minimum of 0.5 mil. .4 Acceptable Products:

.1 Cascadia Metals.

.2 Approved alternate. .5 Colour: Weathered Zinc.

.3 Profile to be an interlocking vertical rib system. Width between upstanding ribs is to be a minimum of 12” and a maximum of 18”. Maximum rib height is 2”.

.4 All fastenings to be concealed. Roofing attachment system must include fasteners to connect roofing panels to Z-girts and fasteners to connect shimmed Z-girts to sheathing below membrane.





2.2 ACCESSORIES

.1 Flashings: As per section 07 62 00 Metal Flashing and Trim.

.2 Self adhesive membrane: As per section 07 27 19 Self Adhesive Membrane.

.3 Roof insulation and Z-girts: As per Section 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation.

.4 Drainage mat: Enkamat 7010 by Colbond.

.5 Isolation coating: alkali resistant bituminous paint.

.6 Rubber-asphalt sealing compound: to CAN/CGSB-37.29.

.7 Cleats: of same material, and temper as sheet metal, minimum 50 mm wide. Thickness same as sheet metal being secured.

.8 Access path: from preformed and reinforced sheet metal fastened to upright ribs of metal roof. .1 Details to be reviewed during shop drawing review.

.9 Fasteners: .1 Exposed fasteners (only when permitted by consultant):

.1 Atlas Colour Mate screws with 18-8 stainless steel shank complete with armour plated neoprene washers and coloured head to match prefinished metal.

.2 ITW Buildex Maxiseal fasteners with coloured head to match prefinished metal.

.3 Approved alternative. .2 Concealed fasteners:

.1 ITW Buildex Teks low profile with Climacoat.

.2 Approved alternative. .3 Sheathing Fasteners:

.1 ITW Buildex Rock-on S-12, size as required.


.10 Butyl tape: Butyl tape to meet TT-C-1796-A or approved equivalent.

.11 Closures: Custom made metal Z closure clips. Perforated when required.

.12 Ridge vent insect screen: Stainless steel or fibre glass wire mesh.

.13 Sealants: Refer to Section 07 92 00.

.14 Hidden roofing jacks: 24 gauge, G90, soldered sheet steel with zinc primer paint on soldered joints.





.15 Exposed roof jacks: 24 gauge, G90, soldered sheet steel with zinc primer paint on soldered joints. Finish paint roof jack with colour matched super durable powder coat paint (To meet AAMA 2604). Refer to Railing specification 05 72 00 for paint properties.

.16 Zinc Rich Primer / Paint: .1 Zinc rich, to CGSB 1-GP-181M. To be applied in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendations. .2 Acceptable Products:

.1 ClovaZinc 1 by Cloverdale Paint.

.2 Aervoe #141 Zinc Rich Galvanize.


.17 Touch up paint: Liquid applied from can using small applicator as recommended by manufacturer. Paint to be colour and gloss matched to the roof metal. Submit sample of touched up sheet metal for review by consultant.

2.3 FABRICATION

.1 Fabrication shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements of CAN/CSA-S136, Cold Formed Steel Structural Members. Care shall be taken to protect exposed surfaces and other features that are important to the appearance.

.2 Fabricate all components of the system in the factory, ready for field installation. Make allowances for expansion at all joints.

.3 Form sections square, true and accurate to size, free from distortion and other defects detrimental to appearance or performance.

.4 Apply minimum 0.2 mm dry film thickness coat of isolation coating to both faces of dissimilar metals in contact.

.5 Penetrations through the roof planes are to be fabricated and installed to allow for expansion and contraction of the roof sheet without buckling.

.6 Exterior corners of same profile, material and finish as adjacent material, shop cut and brake formed to right angle, concealed corner brace, hairline exposed joint, pop rivet connections with painted head to match siding.

.7 Accessories: cap flashings, drip flashings, internal corner flashings, copings and closures for head, jamb, sill and corners, to match existing, brake formed to shape, thickness as required to prevent failure due to loads or distortion. Provide thermal clips, galvanized, proprietary items to suit siding profile and wall system.





3 EXECUTION

3.1 ROOF WORK PROCEDURE

.1 Remove the existing roof cladding system. This will include all sloped metal roof areas, sloped shake roof areas, and flashings adjacent to the sloped roofs.

.2 Replace damage sheathing as directed by Consultant. Work to be included under contingency.

.3 Provide new roof framing as indicated and as required.

.4 Install self adhesive membrane as indicated. Refer to the Section 07275 Self Adhesive Membrane. Refer to details for detailing at roof penetrations and edge flashings.

.5 Install new roof cladding system complete with Z-girts, insulation, drain mate and associated accessories.

.6 Install gutter and rainwater leaders at indicated. Refer to section 07620 Metal Flashing and Trim.

.7 Clean roof surface.

3.2 INSPECTION

.1 Prior to installation of metal roof, confirm site conditions are compatible with manufacturer’s recommendations and the roof cladding shop drawings. Inspect existing assemblies / substrate and ensure all conditions will provide satisfactory performance of the replacement roof (such as framing, sheathing, self adhesive membrane, clearances for perimeter seals, and adequate ventilation, etc.). Notify the Consultant in writing of any discrepancies.

.2 All membrane surfaces shall be firm and dry, without ridges, warps or voids, defects and shall be fully adhered to the supporting sheathing.

3.3 METAL ROOF WORK

.1 Fabricate and install metal roofing in accordance with the approved shop drawings. Follow RCABC recommended practices.

.2 Remove any strippable protective coating on the panels and flashings prior to installation and in any case do not allow the strippable coating to remain on the panels in extreme heat, cold, or in direct sunlight or other UV source.

.3 Install all perimeter flashings and transitions to other building components. Provide self adhesive membrane tie-ins as detailed.





.4 Install flashings and roof jacks around penetrations to the roof system as per the approved shop drawings and detail drawings. The roof cladding system to provide a complete weather tight installation. Provide tie-in of self adhesive membrane to new flashings and roof jacks. Flanges from exposed roof jacks are to extend across the flat section of the roof profile and up the standing seams on both sides of the penetration area.

.5 Notify Consultant in writing any discrepancies between job site conditions and drawings as approved.

.6 All panels to be continuous from ridge to eave.

.7 Flash roof penetrations with material matching roof panels, and make watertight.

.8 Form seams in direction of water flow and make watertight.

.9 Install closures as required complete with colour matching sealants.

.10 Provide ridge vent with insect screen, membrane support flashing and ridge cap.

3.4 PROTECTION

.1 All persons working on or around metal roofing surfaces must wear soft rubber-soled footwear.

.2 During metal roof work, the membrane surface must be continually protected from damage by workers, ladders and other construction activity. Any damage must be repaired promptly.

.3 Any metal roofing material, surfaces or finishes damaged, disfigured, marred or scratched, are to be replaced at no cost to the owner.

3.5 CLEAN-UP AND CLOSE-OUT

.1 As work progresses, remove excess scrap and keep working surface free from debris on a daily basis.

.2 Touch-up areas as required or directed with manufacturer’s standard touch-up paint. Follow instructions for application carefully.

.3 Leave project at completion free from stains and scrap. Wash panel surface with water if necessary.





7 THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07 62 00 METAL FLASHINGS AND TRIM page 1 of 7

1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Work includes: labour, materials, equipment and services necessary to provide flashings and trim as indicated including: cross cavity, cap, base, window and door head and sill, balcony, deck, cricket, saddle, roof, counter flashings, gutters and downpipes.

1.2 REFERENCES


.2 American Architectural Manufacturer’s Association (AAMA) .1 Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Coil Coated

Architectural Hot Dipped Galvanized (HDG) and Zinc-Aluminum Coated Steel Substrates.

.3 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) .1 ASTM A792 /A792M Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc

Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. .2 ASTM A653 / 653M Standard Specification for Sheet Steel, Zinc-Coated

(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. .3 ASTM D523 Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss. .4 ASTM B32 Standard Specification for Solder Metal.

.4 Aluminum Association: .1 Designation System for Aluminum Finishes. .2 Specifications for Aluminum Sheet Metal Work in Building Construction.

.5 Canadian Standards Association (CSA) .1 CSA B111 Wire Nails, Spikes and Staples.

.6 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-93.1 Sheet Aluminum Alloy, Prefinished, Residential. .2 CAN/CGSB 1.171-98, Inorganic Zinc Coating.

.7 SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

.8 SSPC Paint 20, Zinc Rich Primer (Type I, Igorganic, and Type II, Organic).

.9 Canadian Roofing Contractors Association (CRCA).

.10 Roofing Contractors Association of British Columbia (RCABC).




7 THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07 62 00 METAL FLASHINGS AND TRIM

Page 2 of 7 1.3 SAMPLES & SUBMITTALS


.2 Submit duplicate 150 x 150 mm (6” x 6”) samples of each type of sheet metal material, colour and finish.

.3 Submit documentation identifying sheet metal source, testing results to specified standards and finish.

1.4 MOCK-UPS

.1 Provide for approval prior to fabrication and installation and as part of the exterior wall assembly, mock-up for review by the Consultant, a sample of each flashing assembly detailed for the project, including but not limited cap and cross cavity flashing, window/door head and sill flashing, saddle and cricket flashing, step and diverter flashing, base and drip edge flashing and custom flashing fabrications.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PREFINISHED SHEET STEEL

.1 Form all exposed flashing (that are not custom soldered), of prefinished sheet steel according to the following: .1 Prefinished sheet steel to meet AAMA 621-02 standard. Third party testing

results to be made available to the Consultant upon request. .2 Prefinished steel with factory applied Kynar, polyvinylidene fluoride.

.1 Base Metal to be: .1 Aluminum-zinc coated (Galvalume) steel sheet conforming to the

requirements of ASTM A792 (or A792M) with a minimum coating of AZ50(AZM150).

.2 24 gauge minimum thickness. .2 Colour match: all material to be ordered from one production lot. .3 Paint film thickness to meet the following when tested in accordance with

ASTM D1005: .1 Exposed surface shall have a dry film thickness of 1 +/- 0.1 mil. .2 Protected and unexposed surfaces shall have a dry film thickness of

a minimum of 0.5 mil.





Page 3 of 7

.4 Film Hardness to meet the following when tested in accordance with ASTM

D3363: .1 The hardness of the paint film to be measured by means of Eagle

Berol pencils using a flat round head applied at a 45 degree angle to paint film.

.2 Paint film to exhibit a minimum hardness of “HB-H”. Pencil hardness is specified as the first pencil number that will not rupture the paint film.

.5 Acceptable Products: .1 Cascadia Metals .2 Approved alternate

.6 Colour: “Weathered Zinc” or approved alternate from manufacturer’s standard colour range. Both top and underside of flashing exposed to view to be finished with the same colour.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

.1 Isolation coating: alkali resistant bituminous paint.

.2 Washers: of same material as sheet metal, 1 mm thick with rubber packings.

.3 Touch-up paint: as recommended by prefinished material manufacturer.

.4 Cleats, clips, and splice plates: of same material, coating, and temper as sheet metal, minimum 50mm wide. Thickness same as sheet metal being secured.

.5 Fasteners: .1 Into wood:

.1 Steel pan head screws with coarse thread for wood. .1 #8 x 1” (minimum) long stainless steel suitable for metal flashing

application. Stainless to be 300 Series when exposed otherwise 300 or 400 Series is acceptable.

.2 For exposed conditions use hex-head stainless steel screws, with neoprene washer, hex heads coloured to match flashing.

.2 Into masonry, concrete, stone: .1 One piece steel screw set into predrilled hole in concrete or masonry for

medium duty connections. .1 1/4” diameter x 1-1/2” long Kwik Con II Stainless by Hilti. Hex head

for easier installation, Philips head for softer materials such as concrete block. Provide stainless steel washers to hold metal securely. Minimum 5/8” diameter.

.2 For exposed conditions, provide stainless steel washer with bonded neoprene gasket.





Page 4 of 7

.2 Steel pan head screws with stainless steel washers set into plastic plugs predrilled into concrete or masonry for lighter duty connections. Plastic plug version is required in softer materials such as brick or stucco. .1 #8 x 1” long stainless steel pan head screws with 5/8” diameter

stainless steel washers. For exposed conditions, provide washers with bonded neoprene gaskets. Stainless to be 300 Series when exposed otherwise 300 or 400 Series is acceptable.

.2 Plastic plugs to be 1-1/8” long Mungo plugs, MUN 6 by UCAN. .3 Into sheet steel:

.1 Steel pan head screws with fine thread for metal. Can be self tapping or self drilling. .1 #8 x 1/2” (minimum) long stainless steel suitable for metal flashing

application. Stainless to be 300 Series when exposed otherwise 300 or 400 Series is acceptable.

.2 For exposed conditions use pan head stainless steel screws, with neoprene washer, heads coloured to match flashing.

.4 Into structural steel (non-exposed): Self drilling screws, corrosion resistant capable of salt spray testing per ASTM B117 providing 2000 hours red rust and 30 cycles Kesternich SO2. .1 Leland Industries Inc DT2000 Long Life Coated Plating System - #10 x 3/4”

complete with washers as required. .2 Provide washers to match the screw coating or stainless. In exposed

conditions, provide washers with bonded neoprene gaskets. Minimum 5/8” diameter washers.

.6 Overflows and Scuppers: .1 16oz. Copper, manufactured by Menzies or pre-approved alternative. Sizes and

profiles as indicated. All copper assemblies to be heat welded if used in an assembly that is torch heated during construction.

.2 2mm thick aluminum complete with 75mm (minimum) welded flange and 38mm (minimum) diameter scupper pipe (unless noted otherwise). Scupper pipe is not to be painted.

.3 Isolate from dissimilar materials including concrete.

.7 Solder: to ASTM B32 Standard Specifications For Metal Solders

.8 Touch-up paint: as recommended by prefinished material Manufacturer.

2.3 GUTTERS AND RAINWATER LEADERS

.1 Form gutters, downpipe adapters, debris deflectors, and hoppers from minimum 0.55 mm thick prefinished aluminum sheet metal. Rainwater leaders to be minimum 1mm thick prefinished aluminum. .1 Gutters Size and Profile: Size in accordance with Charts 1-1, 1-2, and Table 1-4,

and 1-5, SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.





Page 5 of 7 .1 Minimum size and Profile:

.1 6” by 4-3/4” OGEE with leafguard/debris deflector.

.2 5” by 3-3/4” OGEE with leafguard/debris deflector. .2 Gutters to be internally reinforced to resist ice and snow. .3 Gutter colour to match Metal Roof Colour. .4 Provide cut out at gutter to match the size of hopper opening.

.2 Rainwater leaders to be a minimum 2.5” diameter or 2” x 3”. .1 Colour to match wall cladding or roof cladding depending on location.

Provide Consultant with full range of manufacturer’s standard colour options.

.2 Provide pipe clean out at ground floor level.

.2 Slope, location of expansion joints, fastening system: design gutters and rainwater leaders to conform with Chapter 1 - “Roof drainage Systems” SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. .1 Provide all goosenecks, outlets, strainer baskets, connectors to existing storm

drainage system, and necessary fastenings. .2 Provide 900 x 900 mm (18” x 18”) concrete paver splash pads.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 FABRICATION

.1 Fabricate metal flashings and sheet metal work other than aluminum in accordance with applicable CRCA 'FL' series details and SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

.2 Fabricate aluminum flashings and other sheet aluminum work in accordance with Aluminum Association Aluminum Sheet Metal Work in Building Construction.

.3 Form pieces in 2400 mm maximum lengths. Make allowance for expansion at joints. Use maximum length sections possible to minimize joints.

.4 Hem exposed edges on underside 12 mm. Mitre and seal corners with sealant.

.5 Form sections square, true and accurate to size, free from distortion and other defects detrimental to appearance or performance.

.6 Apply isolation coating to metal surfaces to be embedded in concrete or mortar.

.7 Form joints between lengths of flashing sections with standing seams whenever possible. S-locks can only be used if approved by the Consultant.

.8 All exposed or visible metal flashing and trim to be finished in selected colour as indicated including exposed rear faces of end dams, joints, etc. No exposed or visible steel or aluminum flashing work to be unfinished.

.9 Fabricate custom flashing details and saddles to minimize solder joints.





Page 6 of 7

.10 Install sealant at flashing joints.

.11 Metal Flashings including window / door head and sill flashing, cross cavity flashing, drip edge flashing, base flashing, etc.: .1 Form all flashing surfaces as shown on drawings. Minimum slope of 1 in 4 to the

exterior to be used where not shown. .2 Form flashings, copings and fascias to profiles indicated.

.12 Reglets And Cap Flashings: .1 Prefinished sheet metal as detailed and in accordance with RCABC Roofing

Practices Manual and SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual details. .2 Provide slotted fixing holes and hot dipped galvanized steel/plastic washer

fasteners.

.13 Scuppers: .1 Install scuppers as indicated. .2 Provide necessary fastenings. .3 Isolate metal scuppers from dissimilar materials such as concrete or mortar.

.14 Metal Vents: .1 Form all metal vents to profiles indicated. .2 Fully solder to continuously seal corners and connections.

.15 Custom flashing fabrications: .1 Shop-fabricate custom flashing as indicated. .2 Form custom flashing fabrications to minimize the number of metal seams and

joints. Whenever possible form flashing with standing or breadpan seams. .3 Use clinched joints whenever possible to avoid soldering. .4 Soldered joints must be pre-approved by the Consultant.

.1 Fully solder joints.

.2 Neutralize solder flux with neutralizing bath prior to painting. .5 Paint off site after fabrication to colour specified. Type and method of paint

application must be pre-approved by the Consultant. Paint must be a baked on finish application after fabrication.

3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Install sheet metal work in accordance with RCABC details, SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual and Aluminum Sheet Metal Work in Building Construction as shown.

.2 Use concealed fastenings except where approved before installation.

.3 Provide underlay under sheet metal as required. Secure in place and lap underlayment joints 100 mm.




7 THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07 62 00 METAL FLASHINGS AND TRIM Page 7 of 7

.4 Counterflash bituminous flashings at intersections to roof and deck with vertical surfaces and curbs. Flash joints using S-lock and standing seams forming tight fit over hook strips.

.5 Lock end joints and caulk with sealant.

.6 Install surface mounted reglets true and level, and caulk top of reglet with sealant.

.7 Install head and sill flashings at windows and doors in one continuous piece wherever possible.

.8 Install flashings lapped “shingle” style with membranes to divert water to the exterior.

.9 Install all flashings so that all surfaces have a minimum slope of 1:4 to the exterior.

.10 Cross Cavity Wall Flashings:

.1 Fit flashings together so that one end of each section is free to move in the joint.

.2 Provide end dams when flashings terminate. Caulk end dam to flashing and adjacent material to make watertight.

.3 Provide crickets where required to divert moisture to the exterior face of cladding assemblies.

.11 Gutters And Rainwater Leaders:

.1 Install gutters and secure to building at 300 mm (12”) on centre with gutter screws through plywood strapping. Slope gutters to drain locations as required in Table 1-4 of the SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. Provide closure flashing just above gutters to hide exposed eave membrane.

.2 Provide welded aluminum overflow scupper pipe extensions to the end of the gutters to permit the collected water to spill beyond the building face as detailed.

.3 Install debris deflectors at gutters.

.4 Install splash pads at all rainwater leaders that are not connected to drainage piping.

.12 Metal Vents

.1 Install metal vents as indicated.

.13 Scuppers:

.1 Install scuppers as indicated. To secure scupper in oversized cored holes use Hilti HY-150 adhesive.

.14 Custom Flashing Fabrications:

.1 Install custom soldered flashing fabrications as indicated.





7 THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07 71 00 SEISMIC JOINT ASSEMBLIES page 1 of 5

1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

.1 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

.1 This Section includes the following:

.1 Elastomeric sheet‑covered foam, bellow‑type roof seismic control joint assemblies.


.1 Section 06 10 00: Rough Carpentry

.2 Section 07 52 16: SBS Roofing

.3 Section 07 62 00: Metal Flashings and Trim

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

.1 General: Provide roof and wall seismic control joint covers that, when installed, remain watertight within movement limitations specified by manufacturer.

.2 Movement: Provide roof and wall seismic control joint covers that accommodates 4 in. (100 mm) of horizontal movement, or 8 in. (200 mm) of horizontal movement as indicated on Architectural and Structural Drawings.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

.1 General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

.2 Product data for each type of roof joint cover specified.

.3 Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of roof joint covers including plans, sections, details of components, anchorage details, intersections, transitions, and fittings and attachments to other units of Work.

.4 Furnish manufacturer’s standard-size samples of proposed joint cover.


.1 Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed installation of roof joint covers similar in material, design and extent to that indicated for this project and with a record of successful in‑service performance.

.2 Fabrications: Provide factory-fabricated corners, transitions, intersections and terminations, fully covered under the joint cover manufacturer’s warranty. Field-fabricated corners, transitions, intersections and terminations not permitted.





1.7 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING

.1 Coordinate delivery and installation of joint covers to prevent damage and provide timely integration of units with roofing membranes and flashings.

1.8 WARRANTY

.1 General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. Note: Include the following where JM Single Ply, Built-Up, or Modified Bitumen systems are specified to provide a total system guarantee.

.2 Warranty Period: 10 years after date of Substantial Completion.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

.1 Johns Manville Expand-O-Flash.


2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

.1 Stainless Steel: AISI Type 304, complying with ASTM A 167, 2D annealed finish, soft, except where harder temper is required for forming or performance; minimum 0.018 in. (0.46 mm) thick.

2.3 FLEXIBLE SHEET MATERIALS AND INSULATION

.1 EPDM Membrane: Nonreinforced flexible White EPDM conforming to ASTM D 4637, 60 mil (1.3 mm to 1.6 mm) thick.

.2 Bellow Supports: Closed cell foam, minimum thickness of 3 /8 in. (9.5 mm) for 4 in. (10.1 cm) bellow widths, 1/2 in (1.3 cm) for 6 in. and 8 in. (15.2 cm and 20.3 cm) bellow widths.

.3 Insulation: Johns Manville Microlite® “L” specialty fiber glass insulation wrapped in 4 mil minimum thickness polyethylene sleeve and supported by continuous neoprene-coated nylon fabric vapor retarder

.1 Or approved alternate

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES

.1 Termination Bar: 1 in. (2.5 cm) wide prepunched extruded aluminum bar.





.2 Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant fasteners compatible with flange metal and equivalent in corrosion resistance, of proper length and type for substrate.

2.5 ROOF SEISMIC CONTROL JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES

.1 General: Provide manufacturer’s standard assemblies of sizes and types indicated, including prefabricated corner, transition, termination and joint‑intersection units, splicing units, adhesives, coatings and other components as recommended by joint cover manufacturer for a complete installation. Fabricate assemblies specifically for required applications.

.2 Exposed Metal‑flanged, Bellow‑type Roof Seismic Control Joint Cover: Provide assemblies consisting of exposed elastomeric sheet over foam bellow supports, adhesively and mechanically combined to exposed metal flanges by bifurcation process, either flat or angle formed to fit detail.

.1 Style: CF, EJ, and/or CF‑EJ, to suit conditions. See architectural and envelope drawings. Use style -INS on all.

.2 Joint Bellow Widths: 4 in. (10.1 cm) and 8 in. (20.3 cm)

.3 Membrane Cover: White EPDM.

.4 Intersection Styles: PF, FF, EG, and/or EW as required to suit conditions. See architectural and envelope drawings.

.5 Transition Styles: PF-, FF-, EG-, and/or EW- as required to suit conditions. See architectural and envelope drawings.

.6 Metal Flanges: Stainless steel.

.7 Insulate joint with integrally attached insulation system, factory sized for width and depth of joint.

.3 Membrane-covered, Bellow‑type Roof Seismic Control Joint Cover with Concealed Attachment Flanges: Provide assemblies consisting of exposed elastomeric sheet adhesively attached to foam bellow supports and attachment flange fabric.

.1 Style: EJ/WC-INS

.2 Joint Bellow Widths: 4 in. (10.1 cm) and 8 in. (20.3 cm) as indicated on Architectural and Envelope drawings.

.3 Membrane Cover: White EPDM.

.4 Intersection Style(s): PF, FF, EG, and/or EW as required to suit conditions. See architectural and envelope drawings.

.5 Transition Styles: PF, FF, EG, and/or EW as required to suit conditions. See architectural and envelope drawings.

.6 Concealed Attachment Flanges: 1 3/8 in. (3.5 cm) wide by .015 in. (0.4 mm) thick tin strip wrapped with neoprene-coated nylon fabric.





.7 Insulate joint with integrally attached insulation system, factory sized for width and depth of joint.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Verify that deck, curbs, roof membrane, base flashing and other items affecting work of this Section are in place and positioned correctly.

.2 Substrate Conditions: Do not begin installation until substrates have been inspected and are determined to be in satisfactory condition, with blocking fully anchored at proper location and elevation. All surfaces shall be smooth, dry, clean and free of fins or sharp edges, loose or foreign materials, oil or grease. No work shall proceed when moisture is present on the roof or in the materials that require adhesive attachment.

3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for handling and installing roof joint covers and materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated.

.2 Coordinate installation of roof joint covers and associated work so that complete assemblies comply with assembly performance requirements.

.3 Extend roof joint covers over curbs, parapets, fascia and other elements in the construction profile, with factory‑fabricated corners, transitions, intersections and terminations to provide continuous, uninterrupted, waterproof assemblies.

.4 Provide uniform profile throughout length of each installation; do not stretch elastomeric sheets.

.5 Nail anchorage flanges securely to curbs, cant strips and other substrates as recommended by manufacturer. Coordinate installation of joint covers with adjacent construction for weathertight assembly.

.6 Flash flanges into roof system per roof system manufacturer’s requirements.

.7 Splice adjoining sections, corners, transitions, intersections, terminations and expansion slots using expansion joint manufacturer-furnished splice kit. Clean splice area to assure proper adhesion of splice strip. Adjacent sections shall be aligned and uniform in profile.

.8 Exposed Metal‑flanged, Bellow‑type Roof Seismic Control Joint Cover: Allow 1/2 in. (1.3 cm) spacing at splices and flange cuts for longitudinal expansion of flanges. Prime metal flanges to assure proper adhesion of splice strip. Follow joint manufacturer’s requirements for type of roofing system used for the project.]

.9 Membrane-covered, Bellow‑type Roof Seismic Control Joint Cover with Concealed Attachment Flanges: Allow 1/2 in. (1.3 cm) spacing at splices. Adhere membrane cover to substrate with compatible adhesive or mastic. Set termination bar in mastic for water cut-off, secure with termination bar fasteners.





3.3 PROTECTION OF ROOF JOINT COVERS

.1 Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer that ensures that roof joint cover assemblies are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.





7 THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING page 1 of 10

1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

.1 Firestopping systems to maintain fire-rated assemblies indicated on Drawings, including the following:

.1 Fire resistive joint fire containment.

.2 Fire containment for single membrane penetrations.

.3 Penetrations through fire-rated vertical and horizontal assemblies.

.4 Firestop sealants.

.5 Firestop pillows.

.6 Firestop composite sheets.

.7 Firestop tapes.

.8 Firestop wrap strips.

.9 Firestop putty.

.10 Firestop sprays.

.11 Through penetration firestopping.

.2 Wall fire barrier protection system for sealing seismic control joint openings at, but not limited to, locations indicated on Architectural drawings.


.1 Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

.2 Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants.

.3 Section 09 21 00 - Gypsum Wall Board.

.4 Section 09 21 16 Shaft Wall Assemblies

.5 Division 22 - Plumbing.

.6 Division 23 - HVAC

.7 Division 26 - Electrical.

.8 Division 27 – Electrical

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

.1 UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.

.2 UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

.3 UL 1479 - Standard for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.




.4 UL 1709 - Rapid Rise Fire Tests of Protection Materials for Structural Steel.

.5 UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems.

.2 ASTM International (ASTM):

.1 ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

.2 ASTM E 119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.

.3 ASTM E 814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.

.4 ASTM E 1399 - Standard Test Method for Cyclic Movement and Measuring the Minimum and Maximum Joint Widths of Architectural Joint Systems.

.5 ASTM E 1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire Resistive Joint Systems.

.6 ASTM E 1529 - Standard Test Methods for Determining Effects of Large Hydrocarbon Pool Fires on Structural Members and Assemblies.

.7 ASTM E 1725 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Fire-Resistive Barrier Systems for Electrical System Components.

.8 ASTM E 2307 - Fire Tests of Perimeter Fire Barrier Systems Using Intermediate Scale, Multi-Story Test Apparatus.

.3 FM Global (FM) - FM4991 - Standard for Approval of Firestop Contractors.

.4 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

.1 NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

.2 NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.

.5 Underwriters Laboratories (UL) - UL Building Materials Directory; Through-Penetration Firestops Systems (XHEZ), Joint Systems (XHBN), Firestop Devices (XHJI), Forming Materials (XHKU), Wall Opening Protective Materials (CLIV), and Fill, Void or Cavity Materials (XHHW).


.1 Provide systems that are listed by at least one the following:

.1 Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL), in "Fire Resistance Directory".

.2 Any other qualified independent testing and inspection agency that conducts periodic follow-up inspections and is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

.2 Provide firestop products that are flexible enough to allow for pipe vibration in a through penetration application.

.3 Provide firestop sealants and sprays for construction joint applications that are flexible enough to satisfy the movement criteria per the test standards ASTM E 1399, ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079.





.4 Provide products that meet the intent of the L rating classification for the movement of smoke per UL 1479 for through penetrations and UL 2079 for construction joints.

.5 Provide products identical to those tested and listed for classification by UL,or any other qualified independent testing agency.

.6 Provide products that bear classification marking of qualified independent testing agency.

.7 Where firestop systems not listed by any listing agency are required due to project conditions, submit a substitution proposal with evidence specified.

.8 Use only products specifically listed for use in listed systems.

.9 Provide products that are compatible with each other, with the substrates forming openings, and with the items, if any, penetrating the firestopping, under the conditions represented by this project, based on testing and field performance demonstrated by manufacturer.

.10 Firestopping materials must meet and be acceptable for use by all building codes and NFPA codes cited in this section.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00.

.2 Shop Drawings: For each firestopping system, provide the following:

.1 Listing agency's detailed drawing showing opening, penetrating item(s), and firestopping materials, identified with listing agency's name and number or designation and fire rating achieved. .

.2 For proposed systems that do not conform strictly to the listing, submit listing agency's drawing marked to show modifications and approved by firestop system manufacturer.

.3 Product Certificates: Submit certificates of conformance signed by firestop system manufacturer certifying that materials furnished comply with requirements.

.4 Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's product data sheets on each material to be used in firestop systems. Information on manufacturer's product data sheet should include:

.1 Product characteristics including compliance with appropriate UL/ANSI test standards.

.2 Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.

.5 Installation Instruction: Furnish manufacturer's installation instructions.


.1 General: Firestop systems shall be installed with approved methods using materials that have been tested and classified to produce an approved assembly.





.2 Manufacturer Qualifications: All primary products specified in this section will be supplied by a single manufacturer with a minimum of twenty five (25) years experience.

.3 Installer Qualifications: Firm must be qualified by having experience, staff, and be properly trained to install the specified products, and meets the following criteria:

.1 Contractor is certified by the manufacturer.

.2 Contractor is acceptable to manufacturer.

.3 Contractor is acceptable to authority having jurisdiction.

.4 Contractor has completed the manufacturer's certified product installation training.

.5 Contractor must provide a list of completed projects as evidence of experience; include project name and address, owner's name and address, and architect's name and phone number.

.6 Certificate: Contractor should provide certificate of qualification.

.4 Codes: Where manufacturer's application procedures are in conflict with those of the code authority having jurisdiction, the more strict guidelines will prevail.

.5 Pre-installation Meetings: Meetings to agree on firestop requirements, conditions, manufacturer's instructions.


.1 Deliver and store products until ready for installation in manufacturer's original unopened packaging, legibly marked with manufacturer's name and product identification, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life, listing agency's classification marking, curing time, and mixing instructions if applicable.

.2 Store and handle in such a manner as to prevent deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, and other causes; follow manufacturer's instructions.

.3 Store and dispose of hazardous materials, and materials contaminated by hazardous materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.


.1 Coordinate construction and cutting of openings so that each particular firestop system may be installed in accordance with its listing, including sizing, sleeves, and penetrating items.

.2 Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install firestopping under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

.3 Provide ventilation as required by firestopping manufacturer, including mechanical ventilation if required.





1.9 WARRANTY

.1 At project closeout, provide to Owner or Owners Representative an executed copy of the manufacturer's standard limited warranty against manufacturing defect, outlining its terms, conditions, and exclusions from coverage.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

.1 Acceptable Manufacturer:

.1 3M Fire Protection Products,

.2 MM Systems Corp


.2 Single Source: To maintain control and integrity of the firestop applications a single manufacturer should be used. Specific UL or approved listing agencies systems applicable to each type of firestop condition should be supplied by one manufacturer.

2.2 SCOPE/APPLICATION

.1 Provide installed firestop protects that limit the spread of fire, heat, smoke, and gasses through otherwise unprotected openings in rated assemblies, including walls, partitions, floors, roof/ceilings, and similar locations, restoring the integrity of the fire rated construction to its original fire rating.

.2 Provide firestop systems listed for the specific combination of fire rated construction, type of penetrating item, annular space requirements, and fire rating, and the following criteria:

.1 F-Rating: Equal to or greater than the fire-resistance rating of the assembly in which the firestopping will be installed.

.2 T-Rating: In habitable areas where penetrating items are exposed to potential contact with materials on fire side(s) of rated assembly, T-rating must equal its F-rating.

.3 L-Rating: L-rating of 1 cfm per linear foot (5.5 cu m/h/m) maximum at ambient temperatures.

.4 Wall Penetrations: Systems must be symmetrical, with the same rating from both sides of the wall.

.5 Testing: Determine ratings in accordance with ≈STM E 814 or UL 1479.

.3 Provide firestopping systems listed for construction gaps per the specific combination of fire-rated construction type, configuration, gap dimensions, and fire rating, and the following criteria:

.1 Fire resistance rating must be equal to or greater than that of the assembly in which it is to be installed.





.2 Movement capability must be appropriate to the potential movement of the gap, demonstrated by testing in accordance with ASTM E 1399 for minimum of 500 cycles at 10 cycles per minute.

.3 L-Rating: L-rating of 1 cfm per linear foot (5.5 cu m/h/m) maximum.

.4 Determine ratings in accordance with UL 2079.

2.3 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS

.1 3M Fire Barrier Cast-in-Place Devices: Firestopping device for use prior to a concrete pour. Adjustable height with pull tabs, straight edge design for close placement to walls and adjacent devices.

.1 Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2, or 3 hour fire rated systems.

.2 3M Fire Barrier Ultra RC Pack: One piece metal collar assembly encasing intumescent material for firestopping of pipes and cables through rated walls and floors.

.1 Fire Resistance: For use in 1 or 2 hour fire rated systems.

.3 3M Fire Barrier Ultra Plastic Pipe Device: Intumescent device for firestopping of plastic pipe and cables through rated walls and floors.

.1 Configuration: One-piece metal collar, with locking latch and bendable tabs to secure; equipped also for conventional anchoring.

.2 Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2 or 3 hour fire rated systems.

.4 Specify either FS 195+ Wrap Strip or 3M Interam Ultra GS Wrap Strip when specifying this product. See "Q" or "R" below. 3M Fire Barrier RC-1 Restricting Collar: For firestopping of plastic pipes from 4 inches (102 mm) to 10 inches (254mm) in diameter.

.1 Material: 28 gauge steel.

.2 Size: 25 foot (7.6 m) roll.

.5 3M Fire Barrier CP25WB+ Sealant: Intumescent water-based latex caulk. No-sag, fast drying, paintable, red in color.

.1 Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2, 3 or 4 hour fire rated systems.

.6 3M Fire Barrier IC 15WB+ Sealant: Intumescent latex based sealant. No-sag, fast drying, paintable.


.7 3M FireDam 150+ Acrylic Latex Sealant: Single part, water based, acrylic latex sealant. No-sag, low-shrinkage, low VOC.


.8 3M Fire Barrier Watertight Silicone 3000 WT Sealant: Water-tight intumescent silicone sealant for filling voids in concrete gypsum, metal, plastic, wood and insulation.






.9 3M Fire Barrier 1000 NS Silicone Sealant: Non-slump firestopping sealant for floor and wall openings.

.1 Hardness (≈STM C 661): 1000 NS: 20 - 25.

.2 Service Temperature (≈STM C 1299): -60 - 300 degrees F (-51 - 149 degrees C).

.3 Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2 or 3 hour fire rated systems..

.10 3M Fire Barrier Moldable Putty+: One-part, 100 percent solids intumescent firestop. Remains pliable, flexible and easily re-enterable. Non-toxic synthetic formula.

.1 Type: Stick or Pad


.11 3M Fire Barrier 2001 Silicone RTV Foam: Two-part, liquid-silicone elastomer, foams in place when mixed. For use sealing large or complex openings such as cable bundles, cable trays and conduit banks.


.12 3M Fire Barrier Mortar: For sealing openings in concrete and masonry walls and floors. Self-Leveling, non-sag, low VOC.


.13 3M Fire Barrier Self-Locking Pillow: Self-contained, intumescent firestop pillow with interlocking strips. Meets fire rating without the use of wire mesh.


.14 3M Fire Barrier CS-195+ Composite Sheet: Organic/inorganic intumescent elastomeric sheet, bonded on one side to a layer of 28 gauge galvanized steel. Other side reinforced with steel-wire mesh and covered with aluminum foil. Re-enterable.

.1 Thickness: Nominal 0.3 inch (7.6 mm).

.2 Thermal Expansion: 8 - 10 times original size.

.3 Tensile Strength (≈STM D412): 93.6 psi (645 kPa)/489 percent.

.4 Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2, 3 or 4 hour fire rated systems..

.15 3M Interam Ultra GS Wrap Strip: Graphite based, flexible, largely inorganic, intumescent mat. For use firestopping around non-metallic piping.


.16 3M Fire Barrier FS-195+ Wrap/Strip: One-part, organic/inorganic intumescent strip with foil on one side. May be cut to fit irregular shapes.

.1 Length: 24 inch (610 mm).

.2 Width: 1 or 2 inches.






.17 3M Fire Barrier Pass Through Devices: One-Piece device for firestopping of cable penetrations through rated walls and floors.


2.4 FIRESTOPPING FOR CONSTRUCTION GAPS

.1 3M FireDam 150+ Acrylic Latex Sealant: Single part, water based, acrylic latex sealant. Endothermic, no-sag, low-shrinkage,low VOC.


.2 3M Fire Barrier 2000 NS Silicone Sealant: Non-slump sealant for wall joints.

.1 Service Flexibility: Accommodate vibration from normal building movement.

.2 Pipe Size Capability: Maximum pipe size of 24 inches (610 mm).

.3 Compression/Extension Recovery: +/- 31 percent of original joint width.


.3 3M Fire Barrier 2000+ Silicone Sealant: Elastomeric, firestopping sealant.

.1 Compression/Extension Recovery: +/- 15 percent of original joint width.


.4 3M FireDam Spray 200: Water based, spray applied firestopping for use at head-of-wall, wall-to-wall, floor-to-floor and perimeter joints. Paintable, low VOC.

.1 Compression/Extension Recovery: +/- 25 percent of joint width.


2.5 FIRESTOPPING FOR SINGLE MEMBRANE PENETRATIONS

.1 3M Fire Barrier Moldable Putty+: One-part, 100 percent solids intumescent firestop. Remains pliable, flexible and easily re-enterable. Non-toxic synthetic formula.

.1 Type: Pad.


.2 3M Endothermic Mat E-5A-4: Endothermic heat absorbing mat.

.1 Type: Mat.

.2 Fire Resistance: For use in 1 or 2 hour fire rated systems.

2.6 FIRESTOPPING AT SEISMIC CONTROL JOINTS

.1 MM Pyroflex/PF Series Wall Fire Protection System.

.1 Series ASCL: Corner Wall/Surface Mount





.2 Nominal Joint Opening: 4”.

.3 Fire Resistance: For use in 2 hour fire rated systems.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


.2 Conduct tests according to manufacturer's written recommendations to verify that substrates are free of oil, grease, rolling compounds, incompatible primers, loose mill scale, dirt and other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of firestopping.

.3 Verify that items penetrating fire rated assemblies are securely attached, including sleeves, supports, hangers, and clips.

.4 Verify that openings and adjacent areas are not obstructed by construction that would interfere with installation of firestopping, including ducts, piping, equipment, and other suspended construction.

.5 Verify that environmental conditions are safe and suitable for installation of firestopping.

.6 If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 PREPARATION

.1 Prepare substrates in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

.2 Install masking and temporary coverings as required to prevent contamination or defacement of adjacent surfaces due to firestopping installation.

3.3 INSTALLATION

.1 Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's detailed installation instructions and procedures.

.2 Install so that openings are completely filled and material is securely adhered.

.3 Where firestopping surface will be exposed to view, finish to a smooth, uniform surface flush with adjacent surfaces.

.4 After installation is complete, remove combustible forming materials and accessories that are not part of the listed system.

.5 Repair or replace defective installations to comply with requirements.

.6 At each through penetration, attach identification labels on both sides in location where label will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping.





.7 Clean firestop materials off surfaces adjacent to openings as work progresses, using methods and cleaning materials approved in writing by firestop system manufacturer and which will not damage the surfaces being cleaned.

.8 Notify authority having jurisdiction when firestopping installation is ready for inspection; obtain advance approval of anticipated inspection dates and phasing, if any, required to allow subsequent construction to proceed.

.9 Do not cover firestopping with other construction until approval of authority having jurisdiction has been received.


.1 Owner will engage an independent testing agency to inspect installed firestopping and to prepare reports indicating whether the installed work complies with the contract documents.

.2 Notify testing agency at least 7 days prior to date when firestopping installation will be ready for inspection; obtain advance approval of general schedule and phasing, if any, required to allow subsequent construction to proceed.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

.1 Remove left over material and debris from Work area. Use necessary means to protect film before, during, and after installation.


.3 Install identification Labels for Through Penetration and Construction Joint Systems: Pressure sensitive self-adhesive vinyl labels, preprinted with the following information:

.1 The words "Warning - Through Penetration Firestop System - Do not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage."

.2 Listing agency's system number or designation.

.3 System manufacturer's name, address, and phone number.

.4 Installer's name, address, and phone number.

.5 General contractor's name, address, and phone number (if applicable).

.6 Date of installation.





7 THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS page 1 of 6

1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY .1 Work described in this section includes but is not limited to the following:

.1 Sealing of interior finishes including at wood and drywall trims around window and door perimeters.

.2 Sealing of all exterior window, door and other penetration perimeters at new rainscreen cladding assemblies.

.3 Sealing of joints and penetrations.

.4 Caulking and sealants not specified in other Sections.

.5 Sealing junctions of dissimilar materials.

1.2 REFERENCES


.1 CAN/CGSB 19.24 Multicomponent, Chemical-Curing Sealing Compound.

.2 CAN/CGSB 19.13 Sealing Compound, One-Component, Elastomeric, Chemical Curing.


.1 ASTM C1193, Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealers.

.2 ASTM C920 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants

.3 Sealant, Waterproofing and Restoration Institute, Sealants: The Professional Guide


.1 Conform to the requirements of CaGBC LEED 2009 Indoor Environmental Quality (IEQ) Credit 4.1 – Low Emitting Materials: Adhesives and Sealants. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) limits of adhesives and sealants applied on site, and used on the interior (inboard side of the air barrier within the wall and roof assemblies) of the building to comply with the South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule #1168.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

.1 LEED Product Summary Sheet: Furnish the Architect with a completed form for each


.2 MSDS Sheets: Provide the Architect with MSDS information for each adhesive, sealant,

paint, primer, coating and stain, including relevant VOC information.





.3 Sealant manufacturer’s project recommendations stating recommended surface preparation for each substrate, and type of primer required (if necessary) for proposed sealant.

.4 Submit samples of each type of material and colour.

1.5 MOCK-UPS

.1 Construct mock-up of each typical condition to show location, joint preparation, colour, size, shape and depth of joints complete with back-up material, primer, caulking and sealant. Typical conditions include but are not limited to window perimeters and stucco joints. Sealant mock-ips are to be fabricated without primer and may be part of finished work upon approval.

.2 Provide 48 hours notification to the Consultant and sealant manufacturer prior to application of mock-up for review. Cured adhesion and application to be reviewed by the Consultant and manufacturer before proceeding with sealant work.

.3 Manufacturer to review mock-ups as required.

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

.1 Comply with requirements of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) regarding use, handling, storage, and disposal of hazardous materials; and regarding labelling and provision of material safety data sheets acceptable to WCB.

.2 Conform to manufacturer's recommended temperatures, relative humidity, and substrate moisture content for application and curing of sealants including special conditions governing use.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SEALANT MATERIALS

.1 Sealants acceptable for use on this project to be listed on CGSB Qualified Products List issued by CGSB Qualification Board for Joint Sealants. Where sealants are qualified with primers use only those primers.

2.2 SEALANT MATERIAL DESIGNATIONS

.1 Type 1 - Interior perimeter seal of windows and doors and other self adhesive membrane applications:

.1 To bond aggressively to self adhesive membrane at openings. The bond is to be confirmed by Contractor, Manufacturer and Consultant prior to any interior sealant work proceeding. Colour to match adjacent finish and to be selected by the Consultant from the range of manufacture’s standard colours.


.1 Dow Corning Contractor Weatherproofing Sealant (CWS).






.2 Type 2 - Acrylic sealant for interior finish & junctions of dissimilar materials: .1 Confirm compatibility with finish. Colour to match adjacent finish and to be

selected by the Consultant from the range of manufacturer’s standard colours.

.2 Acceptable products: .1 Dap – Alex-Plus. .2 Dap – Dynaflex 230. .3 Approved alternative.

EXTERIOR SEALANT .3 Type 3 Exterior Joints:

.3 Single component neutral cure silicone to CAN/CGSB 19.13, colour to match adjacent finish and to be selected by the Consultant from the range of manufacturer’s standard colours.

.4 Acceptable materials: .1 Dow Corning 795. .2 Dow Corning 790 (where both sides consist of cementitious

substrates). .3 Approved alternative.

.4 Type 4 Gutter applications: .1 Acceptable products:

.1 Tremco Gutter Seal.

.2 Approved alternative. .5 Type 6 Air Barrier Sealant:

.1 Single component neutral cure silicone to CAN/CGSB 19.13.

.2 Acceptable products: .1 Dow Corning 758. .2 Approved alternative.

2.3 PRIMER:

.1 As recommended by manufacturer.

2.4 PREFORMED COMPRESSIBLE AND NON-COMPRESSIBLE BACK-UP MATERIALS: .1 Backer Rod:

.1 Compressible closed cell standard foam backer rod (hard) for use with all types of sealants not requiring curing from backside.

.2 Compressible closed and open cell foam backer rod (soft) for use with all types of sealants not requiring curing the backside and not in joints that are subject to submergence. Rod must not be susceptible to outgassing if cut.

.3 Open cell foam backer rod for use with any sealant type requiring curing from backside such double sealed joints. Do not use in joints subject to submergence in water.





.4 Size: oversize 30 to 50%.

.2 Refer to the Sealant Manufacturer for specific products that are recommended with their sealants.

.3 Bond Breaker Tape:

.1 Polyethylene bond breaker tape that will not bond to sealant.

2.4 JOINT CLEANER

.1 Non-corrosive and non-staining type, compatible with joint forming materials and sealant recommended by sealant manufacturer.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 PROTECTION .1 Protect installed work of other trades from staining or contamination.

3.2 PREPARATION OF JOINT SURFACES

.1 Examine joint sizes and conditions to establish correct depth to width relationship for installation of backup materials and sealants.

.2 Clean bonding joint surfaces of harmful matter substances including existing sealants, dust, rust, oil grease, and other matter that may impair work.

.3 Do not apply sealants to joint surfaces treated with sealer, curing compound, water repellent, or other coatings unless tests have been performed to ensure compatibility of materials. Remove coatings as required.

.4 Ensure joint surfaces are dry and frost free.

.5 Examine joint sizes and correct as required to allow for anticipated joint movement and to achieve proper width/depth ratio per manufacturer’s recommendation for specified sealant.

.6 Where necessary to prevent staining, mask adjacent surfaces prior to priming and caulking.

.7 Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.





3.3 BACKUP MATERIAL

.1 Install backer rod to consistently achieve correct joint depth and shape, with approximately 30% compression. Install backer rod without stretching, twisting, braiding or puncturing its outer skin. For high heat locations use high heat resistant foam backer rod.

.2 Apply bond breaker tape where required and to manufacturer's instructions. 3.4 PRIMING

.1 Prime sides of joints in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions immediately prior to caulking. Primer shall only be used once it has been reasonably demonstrated that adequate adhesion without primer cannot be obtained during mock-up process.

.2 Prime only as much area as can be sealed in the same day.

3.5 MIXING

.1 Mix materials in strict accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions.

3.6 APPLICATION

.1 Sealant:

.1 Apply sealant as detailed and in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

.2 Mask edges of joint where irregular surface or sensitive joint border exists to provide neat joint.

.3 Apply sealant in continuous beads.

.4 Apply sealant using gun with proper size nozzle.

.5 Use sufficient pressure to fill voids and joints solid.

.6 Form surface of sealant with full bead, smooth, free from ridges, wrinkles, sags, air pockets, embedded impurities.

.7 Tool exposed surfaces before skinning begins to ensure firm full contact at joint interfaces, to give slightly concave and uniform shape free of ridges, wrinkles, sags, air pockets and embedded impurities. Care must be taken when using tooling aids to prevent contamination of substrates and sealant.

.8 Minimum exterior sealant joint width to be 3/8 inch (9.5mm), with minimum sealant depth to be 1/4 inch (6mm).

.9 Minimum exterior fillet beads to be 3/8 by 3/8 inch (9.5 x 9.5 mm), with bond breaker used at all exterior joint locations.

.10 Remove excess compound promptly as work progresses and upon completion.

.11 Remove masking tape immediately after tooling of joints.





.2 Curing.

.1 Cure sealants in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions.

.2 Do not cover up sealants until proper curing has taken place.

.3 Cleanup.

.1 Clean adjacent surfaces immediately and leave work neat and clean.

.2 Remove excess and droppings, using recommended cleaners as work progresses.

3.7 SEALANT SCHEDULE

1. Sealant and primer selection to be approved by the consultant and manufacturer during mock-ups prior to the undertaking of the work.

2. Interior perimeter sealant joints of windows and doors: Type 1.

3. Seal interior finish joints & junction of dissimilar materials: Type 2.

4. Foil faced self adhered membrane transition flashings and termination bars: Type 3.

5. Perimeters of exterior openings where frames or penetrations meet exterior facade of building – new rainscreen or existing stucco assemblies: Type 3.

6. Exterior cladding surface joints: Type 3.

7. Self adhered membrane to urethane membrane transitions: Type 3.

8. Duct extensions to existing duct assemblies: see Mechanical Specifications.

9. Sealant joints in eavestroughs and gutters. Type 4.

10. Tyvek: Type 6.



Issued for Tender - 08 September 2011 8 OPENINGS SECTION 08 06 10 DOOR SCHEDULE page 1 of 1 GENERAL NOTES REGARDING DOOR SCHEDULE .1 This schedule is meant as a guide; refer to drawings to confirm dimensions and details. .2 For detailed information on door types, refer to relevant specification section.

.3 For frame details, refer to architectural drawings. .4 All interior door, side and transom lites to be single glazed. .5 All exterior doors to be double glazed.

QUEENSBOROUGH COMMUNITY EXPANSION DOOR SCHEDULE 08 SEPTEMBER 2011page 2 of 4

DOOR # ROOM NAME DOOR SIZE DOOR TYPE HARDWARE REMARKS

WID

TH x

H

EIG

HT

(INC

HES

)

THIC

KNES

S (IN

CH

ES)

FIRE

RA

TIN

G

(HO

URS

)

REQ

UIR

ED

UN

DERC

UT

DOO

R TY

PE

ALU

M:

SC W

OO

D

Hol

low

Met

al

FIN

ISH

FRO

M

TO FRA

ME

TYP

WO

OD

PRSD

STE

EL

ALU

M

FIN

ISH

STD.

TEM

PER.

SA

FETY

SIDE

LITE

TRA

NSO

M

CLO

SER

H/C

con

trol

EXIT

DEV

ICE

LOC

KSET

WEA

THER

ST

RIP

HO

LD O

PEN

AST

RAG

AL

ELEC

STR

IKE

CA

RD R

EADE

R

TRA

CK

THRE

SH.

D100.1 VESTIBULE 1 2 - 36 x 96 -- A1 X -- 100 EXT CW X -- X X X X X X EO X X X X X Motorized Operator - both leafs, Card ReaderD100.2 VESTIBULE 1 2 - 36 x 96 -- A2 X -- 101 100 SF X -- X X X X X X P X Motorized Operator - both leafsD101.1 LOBBY 2 - 36 x 96 1 3/4 1.5 M1 X PT 102 202 PS1 X PT X EO X X X X Hold Open Door Stop / Card Reader AccessD102.1 LOBBY 180 x 132 1.5 FS X - 101 102 -- Roll Down Fire Shutter - See Section 08 33 00D103.1 ATRIUM 2 - 34 x 84 1 3/4 1.5 M1 X PT GYM 103 PS1 X PT X X X P New rated door + frame in existing openingD103.2 ATRIUM 36 x 96 3/4 M2 X PT ST01 103 PS2 X PT X X X X P X X Card Reader + Buzzer AccessD103.3 ATRIUM 2 - 36 x 96 -- A2 X -- 400 103 SF X -- X X X X EOD103.4 ATRIUM 1 - 36 x 96 -- A2 X -- 402 103 SF X -- X X X X X EODST2.1 EXIT 2 36 X 96 1 3/4 -- M4 X PT ST02 EXT PS3 X PT X X X X No access from exterior - blankD104.1 VESTIBULE 2 2 - 36 x 96 1 3/4 -- A2 X -- 103 104 SF X -- X X X X PD104.2 VESTIBULE 2 2 - 36 x 96 1 3/4 -- A1 X -- 104 EXT CW X -- X X X X X EO X X X X Card Reader D105.1 JANITOR 36 x 96 1 3/4 0 W2 X PT 104 105 PS3 X -- STD106.1 FAMILY WC 36 x 96 1 3/4 -- W2 X PT 103 106 PS3 X -- PD109.1 CHAIR STORAGE 2 - 36 x 84 1 3/4 -- W2 X PT 109 GYM PS3 X PT ST Hardware to be flush or recessed in doorD110.1 EQUIP. STORAGE 2 - 36 x 84 1 3/4 -- W2 X PT 110 GYM PS3 X PT ST Hardware to be flush or recessed in doorD111.1 GYM SERVERY 36 x 96 1 3/4 -- M1 X PT 112 111 PS3 X PT EOD111.2 SERVERY SHUTTERS 2 - 36 x 48 1 3/4 -- W2 X PT GYM 111 PS3 X PT * Lock from inside with throw boltD112.1 VESTIBULE 3 2 - 30 x 84 EXIST. -- EXIST X PT HALL 112 PT Demo - Separate PriceD112.2 VESTIBULE 3 2 - 36 x 96 EXIST -- EXIST X PT GYM 112 PT Paint onlyD112.3 VESTIBULE 3 2 - 36 x 96 -- A1 X -- 112 EXT CW X -- X X EO X X XD113.1 VESTIBULE 4 2 - 36 x 84 3/4 M2 X PT 102 113 PS2 X PT X X X X XD113.2 VESTIBULE 4 34 x 84 3/4 M3 X PT 113 KITCH. PS2 X PT X

D201.1 LIBRARY STORAGE 30 x 96 1 3/4 -- W2 X PT 200 201 PS3 X PT ST Keyed separately from MasterD202.1 LIBRARY STUDY 36 x 96 1 3/4 -- A2 X -- 200 202 AS X -- X DB X Lockable from Library onlyD202.2 LIBRARY STUDY 36 x 96 1 3/4 -- A2 X -- 102 202 AS X -- X DB X Keyed access onlyD203.1 LIBRARY BOOK RETURN 36 x 96 1 3/4 3/4 W2 X PT 203 200 PS2 X PT DB X Fire rated Book Return

D300.1 RECEPTION 127 x 132 0 SS X PF 300 101 PF Smoke Shutter - See Section 08 33 00D300.2 RECEPTION 113 x 132 0 SS X PF 300 103 PF Smoke Shutter - See Section 08 33 00D301.1 MANAGER OFFICE 36 x 96 1 3/4 -- W4 X CI 300 301 SF X -- EOD302.1 SOFT ROOM 36 x 96 1 3/4 -- W4 X CI 304 302 SF X -- EOD303.1 POLICE OFFICE 36 x 96 1 3/4 -- W4 X CI 304 303 SF X -- EO X X Card Reader AccessD303.2 POLICE OFFICE 2 - 33 X 96 1 3/4 -- W4 X Cl 303 CLOSET - X RP X Biparting w/ roller catch + dummy leversD304.1 ADMIN. HALL 36 x 96 1 3/4 0 A2 X -- 103 304 SF X -- EO X X X Card Reader AccessD305.1 PROGRAM OFFICE 36 x 96 1 3/4 -- W4 X CI 304 305 SF X -- EOD306.1 ADMIN. STORAGE 36 x 96 1 3/4 -- W4 X CI 304 306 PS3 X -- ST

PUBLIC AREAS

LIBRARY

ADMINISTRATION

LOCATION FRAME GLASS



WID

TH x

H

EIG

HT

(INC

HES

)

THIC

KNES

S (IN

CH

ES)

FIRE

RA

TIN

G

(HO

URS

)

REQ

UIR

ED

UN

DERC

UT

DOO

R TY

PE

ALU

M:

SC W

OO

D

Hol

low

Met

al

FIN

ISH

FRO

M

TO FRA

ME

TYP

WO

OD

PRSD

STE

EL

ALU

M

FIN

ISH

STD.

TEM

PER.

SA

FETY

SIDE

LITE

TRA

NSO

M

CLO

SER

H/C

con

trol

EXIT

DEV

ICE

LOC

KSET

WEA

THER

ST

RIP

HO

LD O

PEN

AST

RAG

AL

ELEC

STR

IKE

CA

RD R

EADE

R

TRA

CK

THRE

SH.

D307.1 SERVER 36 x 96 1 3/4 -- W4 X CI 307 304 PS3 X -- P X Card ReaderD308.1 FLEX OFFICE 1 36 x 96 1 3/4 -- W4 X CI 304 308 SF X -- X EOD308.2 FLEX OFFICE 1 2 - 27 x 96 1 3/4 -- W4 X Cl 308 CLOSET - X RP X Biparting w/ roller catch + dummy leversD309.1 STAFF WC 36 x 96 1 3/4 -- W4 X CI 304 309 PS3 X PT PRD310.1 STAFF ROOM 36 x 96 1 3/4 -- W4 X CI 304 310 PS3 X PT PD311.1 FLEX OFFICE 2 36 x 96 1 3/4 -- W1 X CI 304 311 SF X -- EOD311.2 FLEX OFFICE 2 36 x 96 1 3/4 -- W1 X CI 401 311 SF X -- EO

D312.1 MEETING ROOM 36 x 96 1 3/4 -- W4 X Cl 103 312 SF X -- EO X Card Reader

D400.1 MULTI-PURPOSE 1 4 - 57 x 96 -- A3 X -- 400 EXT AS X -- X X Sliders Locked From Inside OnlyD400.2 MULTI-PURPOSE 1 2 - 36 x 96 1 3/4 -- W2 X CI CLOSET 400 PS3 X PT EOD400.3 MULTI-PURPOSE 1 2 - 36 x 96 1 3/4 -- W2 X CI CLOSET 400 PS3 X PT EOD400.4 MULTI-PURPOSE 1 36 x 96 1 3/4 -- W2 X PT CLOSET 400 PS3 X PT STD401.1 COMMUNITY KITCHEN 36 X 96 -- A1 X -- 401 EXT SF X -- X X DB X XD402.1 MULTI-PURPOSE 2 4 - 69 x 96 -- A3 X 402 EXT AS X -- X X Sliders Locked From Inside OnlyD402.2 MULTI-PURPOSE 1 36 X 96 -- A1 X -- 402 EXT SF X -- X X DB X XD402.3 MULTI-PURPOSE 2 2 - 36 x 96 1 3/4 -- W2 X PT CLOSET 402 PS3 X PT STD402.4 MULTI-PURPOSE 2 42 x 132 1 3/4 -- W2 X PT CLOSET 402 - Flush panel door without frameD402.5 MULTI-PURPOSE 1 10 - 36 x120 3 1/2 -- SS C 400 402 -- -- See Section 10 22 26 - Operable Partition

D500.1 CHILDCARE ENTRY 36 x 96 1 3/4 3/4 W3 X PT 104 500 SF X -- X C X Card Reader AccessD501.1 CHILDCARE OFFICE 36 x 96 1 3/4 -- W1 X PT 500 501 SF X -- EOD502.1 CHILDCARE CUBBIES 34 x 96 -- A1 X -- 502 EXT CW X -- X X EO X XD503.1 CHILDCARE ACTIVITY 36 x 96 -- A1 X -- 503 EXT CW X -- X X EO X XD503.2 CHILDCARE ACTIVITY 2 - 24 x 96 -- W2 X PT CLOSET 503 PS3 X PT ST Keyed separately from MasterD503.3 CHILDCARE ACTIVITY 2 - 24 x 96 -- W2 X PT CLOSET 503 PS3 X PT ST Keyed separately from MasterD503.4 CHILDCARE ACTIVITY 324 x 96 -- SG X -- 503 506 -- X Security Grille - See Section 08 34 00D504.1 CHILD WC 36 x 96 -- -- - -- 503 504 PS3 X PT Frame onlyD505.1 ADULT WC 36 x 96 -- W2 X PT 503 505 PS3 X PT PRD507.1 CHILDCARE STORAGE 36 x 96 -- W2 X PT 506 507 PS3 X PT ST

D600.1 EXIT 2 36 x 96 3/4 M3 X PT 600 ST01 PS2 X PT X X PD601.1 MECHANICAL 42 x 96 3/4 M3 X PT 603 601 PS2 X PT STD602.1 JANITOR 36 x 96 0 M3 X PT 602 603 PS3 X PT ST

FITNESS

MULTI-PURPOSE

CHILDCARE




WID

TH x

H

EIG

HT

(INC

HES

)

THIC

KNES

S (IN

CH

ES)

FIRE

RA

TIN

G

(HO

URS

)

REQ

UIR

ED

UN

DERC

UT

DOO

R TY

PE

ALU

M:

SC W

OO

D

Hol

low

Met

al

FIN

ISH

FRO

M

TO FRA

ME

TYP

WO

OD

PRSD

STE

EL

ALU

M

FIN

ISH

STD.

TEM

PER.

SA

FETY

SIDE

LITE

TRA

NSO

M

CLO

SER

H/C

con

trol

EXIT

DEV

ICE

LOC

KSET

WEA

THER

ST

RIP

HO

LD O

PEN

AST

RAG

AL

ELEC

STR

IKE

CA

RD R

EADE

R

TRA

CK

THRE

SH.

D604.1 WC 1 36 x 96 -- W2 X PT 603 604 PS3 X PT PRD605.1 WC 2 36 x 96 -- W2 X PT 603 605 PS3 X PT PRD606.1 FITNESS 2 - 36 x 96 -- A2 X -- 600 606 SF X X X EO X Card ReaderD606.2 EXIT 1 42 x 96 3/4 M2 X PT 606 ST 1 PS2 X PT X X PD606.3 ELEVATOR MACHINE RM 36 x 96 -- W2 X PT 607 606 PS3 X PT STD606.4 ATRIUM BRIDGE 36 x 96 -- A1 X -- 606 EXT CW X X EO X X

ENVELOPE REMEDIATIONDOOR # ROOM NAME DOOR SIZE DOOR TYPE HARDWARE REMARKS

WID

TH x

H

EIG

HT

(INC

HES

)

THIC

KNES

S (IN

CH

ES)

FIRE

RA

TIN

G

(HO

URS

)

REQ

UIR

ED

UN

DERC

UT

DOO

R TY

PE

ALU

M:

SC W

OO

D

Hol

low

Met

al

FIN

ISH

FRO

M

TO FRA

ME

TYP

WO

OD

PRSD

STE

EL

ALU

M

FIN

ISH

STD.

TEM

PER.

SA

FETY

SIDE

LITE

TRA

NSO

M

CLO

SER

H/C

con

trol

EXIT

DEV

ICE

LOC

KSET

WEA

THER

ST

RIP

HO

LD O

PEN

AST

RAG

AL

ELEC

STR

IKE

CA

RD R

EADE

R

TRA

CK

THRE

SH. Refer to ER Drawings for all doors in this section.

(ER)W01 ROYAL ROOM 44± x 96± -- A1 X -- EXT CW X -- X X X X X X(ER)W01R PORT ROOM 44± x 96± -- A1 X -- EXT CW X -- X X X X X X(ER)W05 VEST. 2 - 36± x 84± -- A1 X -- EXT CW X -- X X X X X X X(ER)D01 WRECK ROOM 44± x 84± -- M4 X PT EXT PS3 X PT X X X X(ER)D01R LIBRARY 44± x 84± -- M4 X PT EXT PS3 X PT X X X(ER)D02 MECH. ROOM (2F) 36± x 84± -- M4 X PT EXT PS3 X PT X X(ER)D03 UNHEATED STORAGE 2 - 36± x 84± -- M4 X PT EXT PS3 X PT X X X(ER)D04 UNHEATED STORAGE 44± x 84± -- M4 X PT EXT PS3 X PT X X



QUEENSBOROUGH COMMUNITY CENTRE

EXPANSION AND RENOVATION Issued for Tender – 08 September 2011


8 OPENINGS SECTION 08 06 70 DOOR HARDWARE page 1 of 23

1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

1.01 WORK INCLUDES

A Supply only of all finish hardware as listed on plans and specs.

B Supply only of finish hardware to aluminum door supplier as listed. Balance by aluminum door supplier.

C Supply only of signage as listed.

D Only cabinet locks as detailed on hardware schedule shall be supplied under this contract

1.02 RELATED WORK

A Installation of finish hardware.

B Cabinet hardware supplied and installed under millwork section – except cabinet locks were noted on schedule

C Co-ordination of related trades (ie. Wood doors/hollow metal/division 16)


1. Product qualification

A Bidders requesting equals not listed, must submit a request for equal product information and if requested product sample within ten (10) days of tender closing.

B Where items are noted as no substitute these items shall be supplied as listed.

C Products listed as acceptable under section 2.01

D the hardware supplier shall make provision for final inspections as called for by the general contractor, to determine that doors and frames were properly prepared to receive the hardware and that the proper hardware was used on each opening.

E the hardware supplier must employ an individual who is an a.h.c. or have a minimum of 5 years experience in suppling of finish hardware on similar projects. This individual will be experienced in hardware scheduling and detailing, and be available to supply direction on applying and adjusting of hardware.

F a base specification has been established for each product type to assure proper quality levels. This includes manufacturers name, brand and catalogue number.

1.04 REFERENCES

The following documents shall be used in detailing, furnishing, scheduling, estimating and installing of specified items.

A. Current nfpa 101 life safety code

B. Current nfpa 80 fire doors and windows





1.05 SUBMITTALS

a make all submitals in accorance with section 01 33 00

B hardware schedules shall be submitted in a form in conformance with d.h.i sequences and formats for hardware schedules.

C six (6) copies of the finish hardware schedule shall be submitted to the general contractor for the architects approval.

D one (1) copy of approved hardware schedule must be returned to hardware supplier before hardware is ordered.

E hardware supplier must provide when requested by architect 3 copies of manufacturers cut sheets showing all products specified on hardware schedule and when requested by architect supply samples of hardware to be used.

F hardware supplier to supply template information to all affected trades. Including wiring diagrams supplied to division 16.

G the hardware supplier shall assist the architect and owner in preparing a keying schedule using d.h.i document keying. Procedures, systems and nomenclature.

H all submitals shall be submitted no later than 45 days from reciept of purchase order.

I provide maintenance instructions to owners representive

1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A hardware shall be delivered to jobsite in manufacturers original packages, and shall be identified in such a manner as to correspond with approved hardware schedule hardware shall be ordered so that it will be available on time for project requirements.

B some items may be delivered direct to fabricators for factory installations. These items to be identified as such on hardware schedule. These items once delivered & signed for shall become the responsibilty of the fabricator.

C general contractor shall assign a secure lock up area once hardware is delivered to jobsite. It is the general contractors responsibility to ensure proper security and distribution of hardware once hardware is delivered to site.

D all items must be delivered with complete screws, fastners, templates, and installation instructions

1.07 COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS

A the hardware supplier shall ensure that all hardware listed and not listed shall compy with all local, provincal and national codes. Failure to do so shall render the supplier responsible for the cost rectification. Any discrepancies or omissions, listed in the hardware shall be reported to the consultant.





1.o8 WARRANTIES

A the hardware supplier shall warrant all hardware supplied on hardware schedule for not less than one (1) year from substantial completion. If manufactures warranties exceed one year general warranty they shall apply.

2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

Hinge Pivots

.1 Hagar Hinge Canada Ltd. Box 124, Kitchner, Ontario

.2 Stanley Hardware Div Of Stanley Inc. 57 Gerrard St. Hamilton, Ontario

.3 Mckinney

Locking Devices

.4 Schlage Lock (Ingersoll-Rand) 1076 Lakeshore Rd E. Mississauga, Ontario

.5 Sargent Lock Co.

Door Closers Surface/Concealed/Floor

.6 Sargent.

.7 L.C.N. (Ingersoll-Rand) 1076 Lakeshore Rd E. Mississauga, Ontario

Exit Devices

.8 Von Duprin (Ingersoll-Rand) 1076 Lakeshore Rd E. Missauga, Ontario

.9 Sargent Lock Co.

Coordinators

.10 Ives.

.11 Rockwood

Flush Bolts Manual And Automatic

.12 Hager Architectual Hdwe., P.O. Box 124, Kitchner, Ont.

.13 Ives, 50 Ives Place, New Haven, Connecticut

.14 Rockwood

Protection Plates And Push/Pulls

.15 Rockwood.

.16 Gallery Toronto, Ontario





Wall And Floor Stops

.17 Rockwood.

.18 Gallery Toronto, Ontario

Overhead Door Holders

.19 Rixson Checkmake 9100w Belmont Ave, Franklin Park, Ill.

.20 glynn johnson, 4422 north ravenswood ave, chicago, ill.

weatherstrip, thresholds, astragals

.21 pemko mfg., 4226 transport st., ventura california

.22 draftseal

Electro/Mechanical Components

To Be Co-Ordinated With Div. 16

Locksets

.23 Sargent, Harmony As Listed

Closers

.24 L.C.N. (Ingersoll-Rand) 1076 Lakeshore Rd E, Misissauga, Ontario

.25 Sargent

Electic Strikes

.26 Von Duprin 1076 Lakeshore Rd E., Mississauga, Ontario

.27 Hes

Panics

.28 Von Duprin (Ingersoll-Rand) 1076 Lakeshore Rd E., Mississauga, Ontario

.29 Sargent

Mag Locks

.30 Locknectics

.31 Securitron

Auto Operators

.32 Besam

.33 Gyro Tech

Key Switches

.34 Securitron

.35 Locknectics





2.02 MATERIALS

A. Screws and fastners

1 All screws used to attach devices to door or frame to be phillips head. Other screws conform to mfg recommendations

2 All door closers and exit devices to c/w thru bolts

3 All hinge screws shall be self-clearing

4 Combination screws will not be accetable

5 Screw length shall be based on door thickness and not require jobsite modification

6 Sufficient screws shall be supplied to ensure all devices are installed with full complement of screws

B. Hinges

All hinges shall be anti-friction type through-out heavy duty or special application as detailed

1 Exterior doors

A. Hagar bb1191 4 ½ x 4 x nrp low frequency

A.1 stanley fbb191 4 ½ x 4 x nrp “

C.2 mckinney ta314 4 ½ x 4 x 626

Doors over 1 ¾” thick, hinges shall be 5” high

Same criteria as above

2 Interior doors

A. Hagar bb1279 4 ½ x 4 low frequency

A.1 stanley fbb179 4 ½ x 4 “

C.2 mckinney ta714 4 ½ x 4 x 626

3 Use only template which conform to ansi a 156.7 wherever available

4 Mineral core wood labeled doors without special hinge reinforcement are to be hung on half surface ball bearing hinges using thru-bolts and gromet nuts.





5 Door thickness width hinge height hinge width

1 3/8” 32” 3 ½” 3 ½”

1 3/8” over 32” 4” 3 ½”

1 ¾” 36” 4 ½” 4” or 4 ½”

1 ¾” over 36” 4 ½” 4” or 4 ½”

hd where called for

2 ¼” to 42” 5” 4 ½” h duty 4 ½”

Number of hinges per door provide quantities as follows

For doors less than 5’ high 1 pair

For doors 5’0” to 7’6” high 1 ½” pair and one

Additional hinge per 2 ½’ of additional height

When projection of door trim is such as to prevent desired degree of opening the proper hinge width shall be provided to allow the door to clear the trim.

c. Flush bolts

1 All flush bolts shall be supplied with dust proof strikes

Were detailed on hardware schedule

2 Hardware supplier to ensure proper length of rod be supplied

Manual

A hagar ha1250x c26d

B gallery

Automatic

D glynn johnson fb8 or fb7

E ives 559 or 559

D. CO-ORDINATORS

Co-ordinators shall be provided as detailed on hardware schedule

A glynn johnson cor x pair size

B rockwood





E LOCKS

1 All locks shall be of mortise construction unless otherwise noted in hardware schedule

2 Functions shall be listed on hardware sets or in hardware schedule

3 Special condition locksets as detailed on hardware schedule

4 All locks shall be 2 ¾” backset

5 All cases shall be one size

6 Heavy guage steel armoured front with wrought brass scalps c/w adjustability of 1/8” on 2” bevel

F LOCK TRIM

1 As detailed on hardware schedule

G. EXIT DEVICES

1 All devices shall be mounted with thru-bolts where applicable

2 All devices shall be shall be constructed in such a manner as to avoid undue noise caused by touch par retraction

3 All devices shall have concealed mounting screws

4 All devices shall have covers that will cover stock 86 or 161 cut-outs and fit door stiles as narrow as 3 13/16”

5 All devices shall be ul listed for accident hazard or fire exit hardware, or ul listed for a, b, c, d, or e fire labelled

6 Any outside trim shall be similar in design as to that specified on locks or as scheduled

7 Devise may be rim or mortise as function demands

A von dupriln

B sargent

H. DOOR CLOSERS

1 All closers shall be of universal type, capable of being non handed regular arm mount, parallel mounted or top jamb mounted

2 Contractor to adjust each closer to suit individual opening requirements

3 All closers to be thru-bolt mounted

4 All closers shall be installed as to allow largest degree of opening that door swing will allow

5 Parallel mounting shall be used whenever possible





6 Closers shall be listed for use on labelled doors

7 Special function and types as noted on schedule

8 Finishes of closer covers and arms shall be of paint grade

A l.c.n.

B sargent

I. Push plates

1 Push plates shall be of stainless steel

2 Finish shall match pulls and protection plates

3 Size to be as scheduled

4 Guage shall be .050

5 Confirm door stile size and adjust push plate width if necessary

6 All plates to be beveled 4-sides

A gallery

B hagar

J. Door pulls

1 All door pulls shalll have back plate the same as specified under push plates but drilled for necessary mounting holes

2 All pulls shall be 9” center to center and 1’ diameter or as scheduled

3 Where called for pulls shall be mounted back to back

4 Pulls to be manufactured from stainless steel finish to match push plates

A gallery

B hagar

K. Protection plates

1 Protection plates shall be manufactured from stainless steel .050 guage

2 Finish shall match push and pulls

3 Kickplate size on labelled doors shall conform to ul specs

4 Hardware supplier shall check with division 15 for location of louvers

5 Kickplates shall be sized as follows: push side less 2” pull side less 1” off nominal door size

6 Kickplates, armour plates, edge guards shall be bevelled 4 sides

7 Supplier to refer to hardware schedule for exact location,sizes,and types required





8 Edge guards to be bevelled to suit doors

A gallery

B rockwood

L. Door stops and holders

1 Where at all possible wall mounted stops shall be used, and suitable backing be provided

2 Where overhead holders are used degree of opening shall match that of door closer if used, if not than maximum degree of opening that conditions will allow be used

3 All stops to c/w fasteners suitable for wall, floor, or frame conditions

4 Finish to be 626

A hagar

B gallery

M. Thresholds and weatherstriping

1 Use ul approved materials where labelled openings are specified

2 Do not use any thresholds that will prevent the smooth passage of any wheeled carts or chairs

3 Width of thresholds shall be as scheduled

4 Material for thresholds shall be alum

A pemko

b draftseal

N. Electro / mechanical hardware

1 Co-ordinate voltage wiring diagrams and template information with division 16

2 Insure all components meet ul approval and are approved for use by nfpa 101

O auto operators

A gyro tech

B besam





2.03 FINISH

.1 finish shall be as follows

A. Hinges 626

B. Locks levers & trim 626

C. Panics bodies 628 crossbar 630

D. Closers paint finish to match

E. Push/pulls stainless steel 630 base s.s.

F. Armour plates/kicks/ stainless steel 630 s.s.

G. Stops & holders 626 base brass

H. Thresholds alum base alum

I. Weather strip white base poly-vinyl

J. Mag locks 628 base brass

2.04 KEYING

.1 hardware supplier shall arranged a conference between owner, architect, and supplier to determine proper keying. A keying schedule shall be submitted to owner and architect for approval.

.2 note: special keying requirements shall be noted on keying schedule.

.3 key schedule shall be submitted within 45 days from receipt of purchase order.

Keys and construction keying

.1 if called for on hardware schedule during constuction period all locks shall be construction keyed. C/w 1 key per lock and 8 construction master keys and 1 extractor key.

.2 if called for on hardware schedule extractor key to be held by architect until final keying to be implemented..

.3 all keys shall be stamped d.n.d.

.4 all cylinders shall be c/w 2 keys or 3 keys per keyed alike group.

.5 6 – only of each master keys, grand master of great grand shall be supplied directly to architect for turn over to owner.





3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

.1 after installation has been completed the hardware supplier shall have a qualified hardware consultant check the project to determine:

a proper installation of hardware

b installation of products was according to hardware schedule

C locks with correct keying were installed in correct opening

D check operation and adjustment of all opertable hardware

E the hardware supplier will list any deficiencies or variations in letter form with copies being sent to the architect and general contractor

3.02 INSTALLATION

1 All hardware shall be mounted as per d.h.i recommended locations for builders hardware.

2 This publication must be sent to all affected trades and general contractor

3 Hardware supplier is to check jobsite to ensure proper installation of hardware.

3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

.1 before building turn-over general contractor shall adjust and clean all hardware. Special attention shall be paid to universal door closers to ensure proper spring tension is used.

.2 where hardware found defective, repair or replace, or correct as directed.

.3 as directed by owner and architect, general contractor shall remove all construction keyed cylinders and check to see if final keying is acceptable.

3.04 PROTECTION

.1 contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection and storage of all hardware from the time of delivery until completion of project.

.2 contractor shall discuss protection with affected trades.

.3 contractor shall immediately notify hardware supplier of any shortages or discrepancies between packing list and schedule.





.4 contractor or contractors designated appointee shall sign for every delivery or accept that all goods are supplied as stated on packing list.

4 HARDWARE SCHEDULE - FOLLOWS

8 OPENINGS

SECTION 08 06 70 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE

page 13 of 23

Set AL # 1 D100.2,

1 Continuous Hinges MKC-‐12-‐HD x Alum. Mck1 Auto Operators SW100 Besam

Operators c/w full width header1 Actuators USPBR451 x C26D Besam1 Motion sensor USBODYGUARD3-‐C Besam1 Lock out relay Lockout relay to suit SM900 operator Besam1 Closer EN351 x Del Sarg1 Panics AD8410 x 106 control x C32D Sarg1 Panics AD8410 x C32D Sarg2 Pulls 1180-‐1 x 18 in x C32D Gal1 Key switch MKC x C26D c/w Cylinder

Key switch to turn on/off Auto Operator by Authorized Key holder

Thresholds, Weatherstrip, Door Sweeps, MeetingStiles supplied and installed by Door supplier.Auto operators to be installed on active leaf onlyAuto operators to be bid as supply and install by hardware supplier.

Set AL # 2 Dr. D100.1

1 Continuous Hinges MKC-‐12-‐HD x Alum. Mck1 Continuous Hinges MKC-‐12-‐HD x Alum. c/w QC8 E-‐Lynx connection Mck1 E-‐Lynx QC-‐1500P x (Hinge to Junction Box) Sarg1 E-‐Lynx Qc-‐C-‐003 x ( Hinge to exit device) Sarg1 Power Supply BPS-‐24-‐1 Sec1 Auto Operators SM900 Besam

8 OPENINGS


page 14 of 23Operators c/w full width header

1 Lock out relay Lock out relay to suit Operator Besam1 Actuators USPBJMS1 Besam1 Motion sensor USBODYGUARD3-‐C Besam1 Card Reader Supplied by Owner 1 Closer EN351 x Del Sarg1 Panics 56-‐AD8410 x 106 control x C32D ( Active Leaf) Sarg1 Panics AD8410 x C32D ( Inactive leaf) Sarg2 Pulls 1180-‐1 x 18 in x C32D Gal1 Key Switch MKC x C26D c/w Cylinder

Key switch to turn on/off Auto Operator by Authorized Key holder

Thresholds, Weatherstrip, Door Sweeps, MeetingStiles supplied and installed by Door supplier.

Auto operators to be installed on active leaf onlyAuto operators to be bid as supply and install by hardware supplier.

Owner is responsible for supply and install of card reader and junction box. Termination and commissioning by others. Hardware supplier responsibility ends at Junction box

Set AL # 3 Dr D304.1

1 Continuous Hinges MKC-‐12-‐HD x Alum. Mck1 Lockset 4210 x 4569 x C26D AR1 Electric Strike Hes 1006 x KM x 2004 x C32D x E-‐Lynx Hes1 E-‐Lynx QC-‐1500 x (EL Strike to Junction Box) Sarg1 Card reader Supplied by Owner 1 Power Supply BPS-‐24-‐1 Sec1 Cylinder #41 x C26D Sarg1 HO Closer EN351EHT x 350D x 24DC Sarg

Closer connected to fire alarm by others 1 Timer DT-‐7

Timer to allow Electric Strike to be set for hoursof operation by authorized user.

Thresholds, Weatherstrip, Door Sweeps,supplied and installed by Door supplier.

8 OPENINGS


page 15 of 23Set AL # 4 Dr D202.1, D202.2,D606.4

1 Continuous Hinges MKC-‐12-‐HD x Alum. Mck1 Lock MS1850 x C26D Sarg2 Pulls 1180-‐1 x C32D x B to B mounting Gall2 Cylinder #41 x C26D Sarg1 Closer EN351 x Drop Plate Sarg1 Floor stop 218 x C26D Gal

Thresholds, Weatherstrip, Door Sweeps,supplied and installed by Door supplier.

Set AL # 5 Dr. D401.1, D502.1

1 Continuous Hinges MKC-‐12-‐HD x Alum. Mck1 Closers EN351 -‐25-‐CPS x 350D Sarg1 Panic AD8410 x 106 control x C32D Sarg1 Cylinders #41 x C26d Sarg1 Pulls 1180-‐1 x C32D Gal

Thresholds, Weatherstrip, Door Sweeps, Flush boltsMeeting Stiles supplied and installed by Door supplier.

Set AL # 6 Dr. D104.1

2 Continuous Hinges MKC-‐12-‐HD x Alum. Mck1 Auto Operators SW100 Besam

Operators c/w full width header1 Lock out relay Lock out relay to suit Operator Besam1 Actuators USPBJMS1 Besam1 Motion sensor USBODYGUARD3-‐C Besam1 Panic AD8410 x 106 control x C32D Sarg1 Closers EN351 -‐25-‐CPS x 350D Sarg2 Pulls 1180-‐1 x C32D Gal1 Timer DT-‐7

Timer to allow Auto operator to turned off or on as directed by key holder.

Thresholds, Weatherstrip, Door Sweeps, Meeting Stiles supplied and installed by Door supplier.

8 OPENINGS


page 16 of 23Set AL # 7 Dr. D112.3

2 Continuous Hinges MKC-‐12-‐HD x Alum. Mck1 Panic AD8410 x 106 control x C32D Sarg1 Panic AD8410 x C32D Sarg2 Closers EN351 -‐25-‐CPS x 350D Sarg2 Pulls 1180-‐1 x C32D Gal

Thresholds, Weatherstrip, Door Sweeps, Meeting Stiles supplied and installed by Door supplier.

Set AL # 8 Dr. D104.2

1 Continuous Hinges MKC-‐12-‐HD x Alum. Mck1 Continuous Hinges MKC-‐12-‐HD x Alum. c/w QC8 E-‐Lynx connection Mck1 Auto Operators SM900 Besam

Operators c/w full width header1 Actuators USPBR451 x C26D Besam1 Motion sensor USBODYGUARD3-‐C Besam1 Lock out relay Lockout relay to suit SM900 operator Besam1 E-‐Lynx QC-‐1500P x (Hinge to Junction Box) Sarg1 E-‐Lynx Qc-‐C-‐003 x ( Hinge to exit device) Sarg1 Power Supply BPS-‐24-‐1 Sec1 Reader Supplied by owner 1 Closers EN351 -‐25-‐CPS x 350D Sarg1 Panic 55-‐56-‐AD8410 x C32D Sarg1 Panic AD8410 x C32D Sarg2 Pulls 1180-‐1 x C32D Gal



8 OPENINGS


page 17 of 23Set AL # 9 Dr. D606.1

1 Continuous Hinges MKC-‐12-‐HD x Alum. Mck1 Continuous Hinges MKC-‐12-‐HD x Alum. c/w QC8 E-‐Lynx connection Mck1 E-‐Lynx QC-‐1500P x (Hinge to Junction Box) Sarg1 E-‐Lynx Qc-‐C-‐003 x ( Hinge to exit device) Sarg1 Power Supply BPS-‐24-‐1 Sec1 Reader supplied by owner 2 Closers EN351 -‐25-‐CPS x 350D Sarg1 Panic 56-‐8410 x 106 control x C32D Sarg1 Panic 8410 x C32D Sarg2 Pulls 1180-‐1 x C32D Gal



Set AL # 10 Dr. D103.3, D103.4

2 Continuous Hinges MKC-‐12-‐HD x Alum. Mck2 Closers EN351 x 350D Sarg1 Panic AD8410 x 106 control x C32D Sarg1 Panic AD8410 x C32D Sarg2 Pulls 1180-‐1x C32D Gal


Set AL # 11 Dr. D503.1, D402.2

1 Continuous Hinges MKC-‐12-‐HD x Alum. Mck1 Closers EN351 x 350D Sarg1 Panic AD8510 x C32D Sarg

Thresholds, Weatherstrip, Door SweepsMeeting Stiles supplied and installed by Door supplier.

8 OPENINGS


page 18 of 23

Set Al # 12 Dr D402.1, D400.1

2 Cylinders #41 x C26D SargBalance of door hardware supplied complete by door supplier

Set # 1 DR D103.1,D113.1

8 Hinges TA714 4 1/2 x 4 x C26D Mck2 Panics NB-‐12-‐8713 x 710ETL X C32D Sarg2 Closers EN351 x PS Sarg2 Meeting Stiles 18061CNB x 36 in Pem2 Sweeps 18061CNB x 36 in Pem1 Threshold 171A x 72 Pem1 Smoke Seal S88 x 24 Pem

Set # 2 DR D101.1

7 Hinges TA714 4 1/2 x 4 x C26D Mck1 Hinges QC12-‐TA714 4 1/2 x 4 x C26D Mck1 Card Reader Supplied by owner1 Panic 12-‐8710 x ETB X C32D Sarg1 Panic 12-‐8776-‐ETB-‐C32D Sarg1 E-‐Lynx QC-‐1500P x (Hinge to Junction Box) Sarg1 E-‐Lynx QC-‐C-‐036 x ( Hinge to exit device) Sarg1 Power Supply BPS-‐24-‐1 Sec2 Closers EN351EHT x 24VDC Sarg

Connection to fire alarm by others2 Meeting Stiles 18061CNB x 36 in Pem2 Sweeps 18061CNB x 36 in Pem1 Threshold 171A x 72 Pem1 Smoke Seal S88 x 24 Pem


8 OPENINGS


page 19 of 23Set # 3 DR D400.4, D111.1,D201.1, D507.1

4 Hinges TA714 x 4 1/2 x 4 x C26D Mck1 Lockset 28-‐8204 x LNB X C26D Sarg1 Floor/Wall Stop Gal1 Kickplate 10 x 2 in less door width x C32D ( Dr 400.4 only) Gal

Set # 4 Dr D501.1,D311.1, D308.1,D302.1,D301.1,D305.1

4 Hinges TA714 x 4 1/2 x 4 x C26D Mck1 Lockset 28-‐8205 x LNB X C26D Sarg1 Floor/Wall Stop 218 x C26D Gal

Set # 5 Dr D303.1,D307.1,D311.2

3 Hinges TA714 x 4 1/2 x 4 x C26D Mck1 Hinges QC12-‐TA714 4 1/2 x 4 x C26D Mck1 Card Reader Supplied by owner 1 EL Lockset 28-‐RX8271 X LNB x C26D Sarg1 Power Supply BPS-‐24-‐1 Sec1 E-‐Lynx QC -‐C300 Sarg1 E-‐Lynx QC-‐1500P Sarg1 Floor/Wall Stop 218 x C26D Gal

Set # 6 DR D306.1

4 Hinges TA714 x 4 1/2 x 4 x C26D Mck1 Lockset 28-‐8204 x LNB X C26D Sarg1 Floor/Wall Stop 218 x C26D Gal

Set # 7 Dr D303.2, D308.3

8 Hinges TA714 4 1/2 x 4 x C26D Mck2 Dummy Knobs 7U93 x LB x C26D Sarg2 Roller Latches GH404H x C26D Gal

8 OPENINGS


page 20 of 23Set # 8 Dr D400.2,D400.3, D402.3

8 Hinges TA714 x 4 1/2 x 4 x C26D Mck1 Lock 28-‐8204 x LNB X C26D Sarg2 Flush Bolts 401B x C26D Gal2 Kickplates 10 x 2 in less door width x C32D Gal

Set # 9 Dr D106.1, D505.1, D604.1,D605.1

4 Hinges TA714 x 4 1/2 x 4 x C26D Mck1 Privacy 49-‐28-‐8265 x LNB x C26D Sarg1 Closer EN351 x Del Sarg1 Floor/Wall Stop 218 x C26D Gal1 Kickplate 10 x 2 in less door width x C32D Gal

Set # 10 Dr D309.1

4 Hinges TA714 x 4 1/2 x 4 x C26D Mck1 Privacy 49-‐28-‐8251 x LNB x C26D Sarg1 Closer EN351 x Del Sarg1 Floor/Wall Stop 218 x C26D Gal1 Kickplate 10 x 2 in less door width x C32D Gal

Set # 11 Dr D310.1

4 Hinges TA714 x 4 1/2 x 4 x C26D Mck1 Lockset 28-‐8237 x LNB x C26D Sarg1 Closer EN351 Sarg1 Floor/Wall Stop 218 x C26D Gal1 Kickplate 10 x 2 in less door width x C32D Gal

Set # 12 Dr D105.1, D601.1, D602.1, D606.3

4 Hinges TA714 x 4 1/2 x 4 x C26D Mck1 lockset 28-‐8204 x LNB X C26D Sarg1 Closer EN351 Sarg1 Smoke seal S88 x 21 Pem1 Threshold 171A x 36 Pem1 Floor/Wall Stop 218 x C26D Gal1 Kickplate 10 x 2 in less door width x C32D Gal

8 OPENINGS


page 21 of 23

Set # 13 DR Dst2.1

4 Hinges TA714 4 1/2 x 4 x C26D x NRP Mck1 Panics 8910 X C32D Sarg1 Cylinders 41 x C26D Sarg1 Closers EN351 x PS Sarg1 Sweeps 18061CNB x 36 in Pem1 Threshold 171A x 36 Pem1 Smoke Seal S88 x 17 Pem

Set # 14 DR D600.1

4 Hinges TA714 4 1/2 x 4 x C26D Mck1 Panics 12-‐8915 X ETB x C32D Sarg1 Closers EN351 Sarg1 Sweeps 18061CNB x 36 in Pem1 Threshold 171A x 36 Pem1 Smoke Seal S88 x 17 Pem

Set # 15 DR D606.2

4 Hinges TA714 4 1/2 x 4 x C26D Mck1 Panics 12-‐8913 X ETB x C32D Sarg1 Closers EN351 Sarg1 Sweeps 18061CNB x 36 in Pem1 Threshold 171A x 36 Pem1 Smoke Seal S88 x 17 Pem

8 OPENINGS


page 22 of 23

Set # 16 DR 103.2

3 Hinges TA714 x 4 1/2 x 4 x C26D Mck1 Hinges QC12-‐TA714 4 1/2 x 4 x C26D Mck1 Panics 12-‐8876-‐ETB-‐C32D Sarg1 E-‐Lynx QC-‐1500P x (Hinge to Junction Box) Sarg1 E-‐Lynx Qc-‐C-‐003 x ( Hinge to exit device) Sarg1 Power Supply BPS-‐24-‐1 Sec1 Closer EN351 x PS Sarg1 Card Reader Supplied by owner Sarg1 Sweeps 18061CNB x 36 in Pem1 Threshold 171A x 36 Pem1 Smoke Seal S88 x 17 Pem1 Stop 218 x C26D


Set # 17 Dr D109.1, D110.1, D503.2,D503.3

8 Hinges TA714 x 4 1/2 x 4 x C26D Mck1 Lock 8204 X inside trim only x C26D Sarg1 Flush Drop Ring GSH 414 x C26D Gal2 Flush Bolts 401B x C26D Gal2 Kickplates 10 x 2 in less door width x C32D ( outside) Gal2 Kickplates 10 x 1 in less door width x C32D ( inside) Gal

Set # 18 Dr D111.2

1 Length Track KT14 x 6 ft Draf4 Hangers KT149B Draft8 Flush Bolts Eclipse Draft

Set # 19 Dr D203.1

4 Hinges TA714 x 4 1/2 x 4 x C26D Mck1 Lockset 28-‐8204 x LNB X C26D Sarg1 Closer EN351 Sarg

8 OPENINGS


page 23 of 23Set # 20 DR 402.4

8 Hinges TA714 x 4 1/2 x 4 x C26D Mck1 Deadlock 4876 x C26D Sarg1 Cylinder #41 x C26D Sarg

Set # 21 Dr 500.1

3 Hinges TA714 x 4 1/2 x 4 x C26D Mck1 Hinges QC12-‐TA714 4 1/2 x 4 x C26D Mck1 Card Reader Supplied by owner Sarg1 Lockset RX8271 x LNB x C26D Sarg1 Power Supply BPS-‐24-‐1 Sec1 E-‐Lynx QC -‐C300 Sarg1 E-‐Lynx QC-‐1500P Sarg1 Closer EN351 x PS Sarg1 Threshold 171A x 36 Pem1 Kickplates 10 x 2 in less door width x C32D ( outside) Gal1 Kickplates 10 x 1 in less door width x C32D ( inside) Gal1 Floor/Wall Stop 218 x C26D Gal

Set # 22 Hardware supplier to supply to Millwork Tradethe following cabinet locks. Millwork trade to install in cabinets as directed by design authority.Prior to ordering hardware supplier shall confirmdrawer thickness. All Cabinet locks to be keyed into overall keying sytem.

38 Cabinet Locks 1674 x C26D Sarg




8 OPENINGS SECTION 08 12 00 PRESSED STEEL FRAMES page 1 of 3 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED

.1 Supply and install all hollow welded pressed steel frames. See Section 08 06 10 Door Schedule and refer to drawings.

1.2 RELATED WORK

.1 Section 06 20 00 Finish Carpentry: Installation of pressed steel frames and wood doors.

.2 08 06 10 Door Schedule

.3 Section 08 14 00 Wood Doors: Supply of doors to fit frames.

.4 Section 08 80 00 Glazing: Glazing for side lites and windows.


.1 Conform to the requirements of CaGBC LEED 2009 Materials and Resources Credit 4 – Recycled Content to achieve a minimum of 50% post-consumer recycled content in all steel products.

.2 Conform to the requirements of CaGBC LEED 2009 Credit 4.2 – Low Emitting Materials: Paints and Coatings. Paints and coatings applied on-site, and used on the interior of the building (inboard side of the air barrier within the wall and roof assemblies) must comply with the following criteria:

.1 Clear finishes, stains, primers, and shellacs are not to exceed the VOC content limits established in SCAQMD Rule 1113, Architectural Coatings, rules in effect on January 1, 2004.

1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit shop drawings, indicating each type of door, frame, steel core and material thickness, mortises, reinforcements, anchorages, locations of exposed fasteners, openings and arrangement of standard hardware. Include schedule identifying each unit, with door marks and numbers relating to numbering on drawings and Door Schedule herein.

.2 Indicate doors and frames bearing UL labels for ratings and opening classifications.

.3 LEED Product Summary Sheet: Furnish the Consultant with a completed form for each

construction material used. See Appendix 1 for Sample Product Summary Sheet. 1.5 OPENING SIZES

.1 Method of measuring width of opening shall be measured from inside to inside of frame jamb rabbets. Height of opening shall be measured from the finished floor, exclusive of floor coverings, to the head rabbet of the frame.

.2 Doors shall be sized so as to fit the above openings and allow a 3 mm maximum

clearance at jambs and head of frame.




8 OPENINGS SECTION 08 12 00 PRESSED STEEL FRAMES page 2 of 3

.3 A clearance of 19 mm maximum shall be allowed between the bottom of the door and the finished floor, exclusive of floor coverings, except as noted on drawings and required by Mechanical. Refer to Section 08 06 10: Door Schedule.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE & STANDARDS

.1 Materials and manufacture shall be in accordance with the Canadian Steel Door and Frame Manufacturer's Association Manufacturing Metric Standard for Doors, Windows, & Frames.

.2 Install labeled steel fire rated doors and frames to NFPA 80, "Fire Doors and Windows".

.3 Welding shall conform to CSA W59-1984.

1.7 DELIVERY & STORAGE

.1 Deliver all hollow metal work to the site fully protected and with adequate location and installation information.

2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PRESSED STEEL FRAMES

.1 Frames: Frames shall be 16 gauge cold rolled steel stock, zinc wiped coated galvanized steel. Frames shall be welded type, one piece construction, thermally broken and insulated at exterior locations. Mitres to be cut accurately and securely welded on the inside of the profile. Welded joints to be ground flush and sanded to a smooth uniform finish. Frames to have factory applied touch up after fabrication and welding. Knock Down Frames are not acceptable.

.2 Fire Rating: Labeled frames shall be provided for all openings requiring fire protection

ratings as determined and scheduled by the Architect. Such frames shall be constructed as tested and approved by a nationally recognized testing agency having a factory inspection service.

.3 Anchors: Provide adjustable anchors of manufacturer's standard to each frame as

required.

.4 Spreaders: Two channel or angle spreaders to be welder to door jambs at bottom of door opening to ensure proper alignment.

.5 Hardware Preparation: Frames shall be blanked, reinforced, drilled, and tapped for

mortised butts and strike. Mortised butts and strike cutouts to be protected with metal guard boxes where required.

Frames shall be reinforced when required for surface mounted hardware. Hardware preparation and location shall be in accordance with ANSI standard.

.6 Door Bumpers: Each door opening to be prepared for single rubber bumpers, three for

each opening.




8 OPENINGS SECTION 08 12 00 PRESSED STEEL FRAMES page 3 of 3

3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Installation under Section 06 20 00, Finish Carpentry. 4 SCHEDULES

.1 Refer to Section 08 06 10 Door Schedule.

.2 Refer to Drawings for Pressed Steel Frame door and window scope.





8 OPENINGS SECTION 08 14 00 WOOD DOORS page 1 of 3 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED

.1 Supply all wood doors as shown on the drawings and as indicated in Section 08 06 10: Door Schedule and as specified herein.


.1 Section 06 40 00: Architectural Woodwork: Wood door and frame installation

.2 08 06 10 Door Schedule

.3 Section 08 12 13: Pressed Steel Frames 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Wood doors to be fabricated to the Standards of the Architectural Woodwork Manufacturer's Association of Canada for Custom Grade, and this specification where it exceeds. A copy of AWMAC Quality Standards shall be made readily available for reference purposes.


.1 All wood in this Section to be locally-sourced, as per requirements of CaGBC LEED 2009 Materials and Resources Credit 5: Regional Materials:

.1 Wood is to be harvested within 800 km of the site of manufacture.

.2 The site of manufacture is to be located within 800 km of the Project Site.


.3 All wood products in this Section, to be certified by the Forest Stewardship Council

(FSC) and to be supplied with chain-of-custody documentation as per requirements of CaGBC LEED 2009 Materials and Resources Credit 7: Certified Wood.

.4 Conform to the requirements of CaGBC LEED 2009 Indoor Environmental Quality (IEQ) Credit 4.1 – Low Emitting Materials: Adhesives and Sealants: .1 Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) limits of adhesives and sealants used on the

interior (inboard side of the air barrier within the wall and roof assemblies) of the building, and applied on-site, to comply with the following criteria:


1.5 SUBMITTALS

.1 LEED Product Summary Sheet: Furnish the Consultant with a completed form for each


.2 MSDS Sheets: Provide the Consultant with MSDS information for each adhesive,

sealant, paint, primer, coating and stain applied on site, with relevant VOC information highlighted.




8 OPENINGS SECTION 08 14 00 WOOD DOORS page 2 of 3

.3 FSC Documentation: Provide the Consultant with the following:




1.6 SAMPLES

.1 Submit samples of each wood species which is to receive finish to the Consultant for review.

.2 Submit minimum 12” x 12” finished sample of each door type to the Consultant for review.

1.7 GUARANTEE

.1 Provide a written guarantee covering all doors by this section, against deformation, warping, and other defects for a period of five (5) years for solid core wood doors and three (3) years for glazed wood doors, after "Substantial Performance" of main contract.

.2 Replace defective doors: hang and finish as specified at no additional cost to Owners.

1.8 STORAGE & DELIVERY

.1 Deliver direct from factory with all cutouts factory sealed and protected to prevent damage and deterioration.

2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SOLID CORE WOOD DOOR

.1 Paint-Grade:

.1 Premium Commercial Grade

.2 Paint Grade flush face, edge glued, solid low density core strips 2" wide maximum.

.3 Interior Doors to be 1.5” thick.

.2 Wood Veneer:

.1 Particleboard Core—Shall conform to ANSI A208.1 LD-2 32lb. density core, extra heavy duty.

.2 Stiles shall be l 3/8” double-banded laminated hardwood. No finger joints allowed in outer band and outer band to be at least 3/8” wide same species lumber as face veneer.

.3 Rails will be 2-5/8” minimum mill option solid wood or structural composite lumber (SCLC). Stiles and rails shall be securely bonded to the core then abrasively planed as an assembly before veneering.




8 OPENINGS SECTION 08 14 00 WOOD DOORS page 3 of 3

.4 Face – Each face of the door shall consist of 1 face veneer and 1 crossband, securely bonded to the core utilizing Type I waterproof adhesive, resulting in 5 plies. Face veneers shall have minimum thickness of 1/50 and the individual pieces of veneer forming the face must be edge glued (spliced) together. Total thickness of the veneer is 1/8".

.5 Veneer – Quality shall be governed by AWMAC standards.

.1 Grade: “A”

.2 Species: Maple

.3 Cut: Plain sliced

.4 Matching: Book matched

.3 Fire rated solid core doors shall be constructed to ULC and shall have required fire-rating labels attached.

2.2 WEATHER STRIPPING

.1 All rated doors to be fitted with concealed weather stripping and to be properly sealed. 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION

.1 Doors to be machined for hardware ready for installation prior to site delivery.

.2 Maintain straight uniform clearances at jambs 2 mm and head 3 mm.

.3 Trim taken from any edge in fitting a door not to exceed 3 mm.

.4 Prior to application of sealer, give all faces and edges a thorough sanding to remove all scuffs, marks, roughness, etc.

.5 Thoroughly seal all edges and areas exposed by fitting to openings and machining for

hardware, including door tops and door bottoms, with two (2) coats of sealer immediately after fitting.

3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Installation under Section 06 20 00, Finish Carpentry. 4 DOOR SCHEDULE 4.1 Refer to Section 08 06 10 Door Schedule.





8 OPENINGS SECTION 08 33 00 COILING FIRE & SMOKE RATED DOORS page 1 of 6 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

.1 Provide all materials, labor, equipment and services necessary to furnish, deliver and install all work under this section as shown on the contract documents, specified herein, and as specified by the job conditions. The doors include: .1 Overhead Coiling Fire Rated Door with 2 hour rating. .2 Overhead Coiling Smoke Shutter

.2 Doors are to operate as part of the building’s fire protection systems and will be

connected to the fire alarm system.

.3 Doors are to be operated daily by electronic controls as security closures. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Metal Fabrication. Section 05 50 00 .2 Rough Carpentry. Section 06 10 00 .3 Door Schedule Section 08 06 10 .4 Access Panels & Doors: Section 08 31 00 .5 Electrical: Division 26

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Procedures: Furnish submittals in accordance with the general requirements specified.

.2 Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.

.3 Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches (150 mm) square, representing actual product, color, and patterns.

.4 Shop Drawings: Furnish shop drawings for architect's approval. Include elevations,

sections, and details indicating dimensions, materials, finishes, conditions for anchorage and support of each door. Shop drawings shall be based on site measurements.

.5 Certifications:

.1 Submit manufacturer’s Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Warnock Hersey (WH) or Factory Mutual Research (FM) laboratory test report verifying product compliance in accordance with the required fire and smoke ratings.

.2 Provide manufacturer’s ICC Evaluation Service report confirming compliance of the fire door assembly in accordance with the requirements of the Building Code.

.6 Product Literature: Submit manufacturer's technical literature describing the product to

be used under this section.

.7 Maintenance and Operating Manuals: Furnish complete manuals describing the materials, devices and procedures to be followed in operating and maintaining all doors under this section. Include manufacturer's brochures and parts lists describing the actual materials used in the product.




8 OPENINGS SECTION 08 33 00 COILING FIRE & SMOKE RATED DOORS page 2 of 6



.1 Fire & Smoke Rated Assemblies: Provide all doors with fire and smoke resistance rating required to comply with governing regulations which are inspected, tested, listed and labeled by UL, WH or FM and complying with NFPA 80 for class of opening. Provide units tested in accordance with the requirements of UL 10B, UL 1784, NFPA 252, ASTM E-152. Provide testing laboratory label permanently fastened to each fire and smoke door assembly.

.2 Regulatory Requirements:

.1 Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, ordinances and regulations of federal, state and municipal authorities having jurisdiction.

.2 Listed by the ICC Evaluation Service in accordance with the applicable sections of the Building Code.

.3 Testing: Provide documentation from a certified testing agency that the fire door’s self-

closing governor mechanism and fire door operator have been tested for a minimum of 50,000 cycles and 500 self closing trip tests.

.4 Manufacturer Requirements: Door manufacturer shall have been in the business of and

have experience in manufacturing the type of product covered under this specification section as well as giving credible service for a minimum of five (5) years. Provide list of at least ten (10) completed projects which include the products covered under this section.


.1 General: Deliver and store materials in manufacturer's original packaging, labeled to

show name, brand and type. Store materials in a protected dry location off the ground in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1.6 WARRANTY

.1 Door Warranty: Furnish one (1) year written warranty signed by the manufacturer and installer agreeing to repair or replace work which has failed as a result of defects in materials or workmanship. Upon notification within the warranty period, such defects shall be repaired at no cost to the owner.

2 PRODUCTS 2.3 2 HR COILING FIRE RATED DOOR

.1 Manufacturer: Coiling fire and smoke rated doors shall be: .1 Auto-Set System model FSFD-M-SS as manufactured by McKeon Door Company .2 Approved equal.





.2 MATERIALS: .1 Curtain: Shall be assembled of interlocking stainless steel slats, cold rolled. Slats

shall have endlocks locking each end of alternate slats to act as a wearing surface, and maintain slat alignment. Curtain shall be 22 gauge minimum or gauge required by UL, WH or FM which ever is greater.

.2 Slats: Shall be of a cross section not less than 3" wide by 7/8" deep.

.3 Bottom Bar: Shall consist of two (2) angles, each not less than 2" x 2" x 1/8" stainless steel formed to fit slats. Bottom bar shall be provided with slotted holes to allow for thermal expansion.

.4 Guides: Each guide assembly shall be fabricated of a minimum 3" x 3" steel support angle or tube, a 2" x 3" inner guide stainless steel angle and a 3" x 3" outer guide stainless steel angle. Support tubes shall be constructed with a slip joint at the top to provide for thermal expansion and guide angles shall be provided with slotted holes to allow for thermal expansion. Provide UL classified smoke seals on each guide assembly. Assembly shall have been tested and approved under UBC 7-2-1997 Part II.

.5 Mounting Brackets: Fabricated of hot rolled 3/16” steel plate minimum, brackets shall be provided to house ends of the counterbalance barrel assembly.

.6 Hood: Shall be provided to entirely enclose curtain and counterbalance barrel assembly. Hood shall be fabricated 22 gauge stainless steel and designed to match brackets. Top and bottom shall be bent and reinforced for stiffness.

.7 Provide UL approved lintel smoke seals. Assembly shall have been tested and approved under UBC 7-2-1997 Part II.

.8 Counterbalance Assembly: Fire door shall be counterbalanced by means of adjustable steel helical torsion springs attached to shaft enclosed in pipe with required mounting blocks or rings for attachment of curtain. Grease sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings shall be attached to the spring barrel, which shall be fabricated of hot-formed structural quality carbon steel seamless pipe.

.9 Electric Motor Operator: Fire door shall be provided with a compact power unit designed and built by the door manufacturer. Operator shall be equipped with an adjustable screw-type limit switch to break the circuit at termination of travel. High efficiency planetary gearing running in an oil bath, shall be furnished together with a centrifugal governor, magnetic operated brake and a fail-safe magnetic release device, completely housed to protect against damage, dust and moisture. An efficient overload protection device, which will break the power circuit and protect against damage to the motor windings shall be integral with the unit. Operator is to be housed in a NEMA type 1 enclosure.

.10 Motor: Shall be intermediate duty, thermally protected, ball bearing type with a class A or better insulation. Horsepower of motor is to be 1/3hp minimum or of manufacturer's recommended size, which ever is greater. Motor to be compatible with power supply.





.11 Starter: Shall be size "0" magnetic reversing starter, across the line type with mechanical and electrical interlocks, with 10 amp continuous rating and 24 volt control circuit.

.12 Reducer: Planetary gear type, 80% efficiency minimum.

.13 Brake: Magnetically activated, integral within the operator's housing.

.14 Control Station: Provide flush mount key switch control station marked open, close and stop.

.15 Self-Closing Mechanism: The fire door is to be designed with a centrifugal governor as an integral part of the operator's construction. The automatic release mechanism shall be activated by the fire alarm. When activated the door is released and begins to close due to gravitational force. The speed of the door is governed by a centrifugal governor, designed to match the normal operating speed of the door, at a rate of not greater than 9" per second or less than 6" per second.

.16 Magnetic Release with 10 Second Time Delay: A fail-safe magnetic release device shall be built into the operator as an integral part of the release mechanism. When power is interrupted to the release mechanism by the smoke detector or fire alarm, the door shall begin to self-close. In the event of power failure the time delay shall prevent the fire door from closing for a period of 10 seconds. Once the 10 seconds have lapsed, the fire door shall self-close. Once power has been restored to the release mechanism the automatic reset time delay as well as the fire door shall automatically reset themselves.

.17 Obstruction Sensing Safety Edge: The fire door shall be designed with an obstruction sensing safety edge. In the event that the safety edge meets an obstruction during the normal closing operation, the door shall stop, reverse and return to the open position. In the event the safety edge meets an obstruction during the self-closing operation, the door shall come to rest on the obstruction and once the obstruction has been removed the fire door shall continue to the fully closed position.

.18 Easy Trip Test Feature: The fire door shall be designed so that it may be trip tested simply by cutting power to the operator. By turning the power switch off, the door shall self-close. Once the fire door has satisfactorily closed, it shall be reset simply by turning the power back on. No ladders or tools shall be needed to reset the door or the time delay unit.

.19 True Test Panel: Fire doors shall be provided with a True Test panel. The test panel shall activate all the fire doors to close via gravity not power and shall be in accordance with NFPA Bulletin 80. Only one test panel shall be required to test all the fire doors on this project.

.20 Finish: After completion of fabrication, clean all metal surfaces to remove dirt. All steel components shall receive two coats of rust inhibitive primer. All exposed stainless steel components shall be of type 304 with number 4 polish finish.




8 OPENINGS SECTION 08 33 00 COILING FIRE & SMOKE RATED DOORS page 5 of 6 2.4 COILING SMOKE RATED DOORS

.1 Manufacturer: Coiling fire and smoke rated doors may be:

.1 Fire King model 631 w/ Smoke Baffle and Jamb Mounted Slats # F-265i, as manufactured by Overhead Door Company.

.2 Approved equal.

.2 Wall Mounting Condition:

.1 Between jambs mounting.

.3 Curtain: Interlocking slats, Type FE-138 fabricated of anodized aluminum. Endlocks attached to alternate slats to maintain curtain alignment and prevent lateral slat movement.

.4 Finish:

.1 Slats and hood clear anodized aluminum.

.2 Non-galvanized exposed ferrous surfaces shall receive one coat of rust-inhibitive primer.

.5 Bottom Bar: Extruded aluminum tubular shape with astragal.

.6 Guides: Extruded aluminum.

.7 Brackets: Steel plate to support counterbalance, curtain and hood.

.8 Counterbalance: Helical torsion spring type housed in a steel tube or pipe barrel.

.9 Hood: Provided with intermediate support brackets as required and fabricated of:

.1 Galvanized primed steel.

.10 Operation:

.1 Electric motor compatible with power supply.

.2 Electric Motor Operation: Provide UL listed electric operator, size as recommended by manufacturer to move door in either direction at not less than 2/3 foot nor more than 1 foot per second.

.1 Sensing Edge Protection:

.1 Electric sensing edge.

.2 Operator Controls:

.1 Key operation with open, close, and stop controls.

.2 Controls for interior location.

.3 Controls flush mounted.

.3 Locking:

.1 Two point dead locks with mortise cylinder/s.





3 EXECUTION 3.3 EXAMINATION

.1 Examine surfaces and field conditions to which this work is to be performed and notify architect if conditions of surfaces exist which are detrimental to proper installation and timely completion of work.

.2 Verify all dimensions taken at job site affecting the work. Notify the architect in any

instance where dimensions vary.

.3 Coordinate and schedule work under this section with work of other sections so as not to delay job progress.

3.4 INSTALLATION

.1 Perform installation using only factory approved and certified representatives of the door manufacturer.

.2 Install door assemblies at locations shown in perfect alignment and elevation, plumb,

level, straight and true.

.3 Adjust door installation to provide uniform clearances and smooth non-binding operation.

.4 Install wiring in accordance with applicable local codes and the National Electrical Code Standard. Materials shall be UL listed.

.5 Test door closing sequence when activated by the building's fire alarm system. Reset

door after successful test. 3.5 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

.1 Protect installed work using adequate and suitable means during and after installation until accepted by owner.

.2 Remove, repair or replace materials, which have been damaged in any way.

.3 Clean surfaces of grime and dirt using acceptable and recommended means and

methods. 4 SCHEDULE 4.3 2 HOUR COILING FIRE-RATED DOOR - Refer to Door Schedule and Drawings for size and

location. 4.4 COILING SMOKE RATED DOOR - Refer to Door Schedule and Drawings for size and location.





8 OPENINGS SECTION 08 34 00 SECURITY GRILLES page 1 of 3

1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Supply and install manually operated folding grilles.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS:

.1 Metal Fabrication. Section 05 50 00

.2 Rough Carpentry. Section 06 10 00

.3 Door Schedule Section 08 06 10

.4 Access Panels & Doors: Section 08 31 00

.5 Electrical: Division 26

1.3 SUBMITTALS


.2 Verification Sample: Provide the Consultant with a sample of the finished grille curtain for approval.

.3 Shop Drawings: Furnish shop drawings for Consultant's approval. Include elevations, sections, and details indicating dimensions, materials, finishes, conditions for anchorage and support of each door. Shop drawings shall be based on site measurements.

.4 Maintenance and Operating Manuals: Furnish complete manuals describing the materials, devices and procedures to be followed in operating and maintaining all doors under this section. Include manufacturer's brochures and parts lists describing the actual materials used in the product.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MODEL:

.1 Classic 126 as manufactured by Amstel Manufacturing


2.2 CURTAIN:

.1 The product shall incorporate 2” (51 mm) high truss-like plates at the top and bottom of the closure. Construct of 5/16” diameter vertical rods on 3-1/2” (89 mm) centers linked by flat horizontal bars 1/8” (3 mm) by 5/8” (16 mm) by 7¾” (197 mm). Bars are vertically spaced every 12” (305 mm) with 7/16” (11mm) diameter sleeves over alternating rods.





2.3 MATERIALS:

.1 Aluminum is to be 6063 aluminum alloy with T-5 temper.

2.4 LOCKING:

.1 Members are to be vertical stiles fabricated from rectangular tubing 1.3” (33 mm) x 2.4” (62 mm). Members using floor bolts include dust free, stainless top floor sockets.

.2 Lead and trailing end members are to be cylinder controlled lock stiles with self-adjusting, cold rolled steel floor bolts and top bolts through the top of the track into the support.

.3 Intermediate locking members with cold rolled steel floor bolts are supplied for (up to) every 10’-0” (3048 mm) of curtain.

.4 Bipart assemblies are supplied as required. One lock member will retain a hookbolt deadlock activated by keyed or thumbturn cylinders. A second intermediate locking member with a steel floor bolt shall include a full height channel to accept the hookbolt deadlock.

2.5 TRACK:

.1 Overhead track is to be 1.3” (33 mm) wide x 1.8” (46 mm) high and is to accept 1-1/8” (29 mm) diameter roller trolleys. Rollers are to bear on 0.27” (7 mm) thick aluminum surface within the track. Track curves, where indicated, are to have 10” (254 mm) or 14” (356 mm) radii.

2.6 FINISH:

.1 Standard factor finish: 0.0004” (10 micron) clear anodizing.

2.7 WEIGHT AND STACKING:

.1 Grille weights are to be expressed in lbs./sq. ft. and kg/sq.m of clear opening:

.1 Classic 126 - 1.2 lbs./sq. ft. (5.9 kg/sq.m)

.2 Minimum stacking shall be 1.05”/linear foot of opening plus 3.5” for each locking member or 87.5 mm/meter of opening plus 89 mm per locking member.

.3 Grille support must be able to carry the weight of a fully stacked door at any point along its length. Support is to carry the total weight / the total stacking.





3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION AND EXAMINATION:

.1 Contractor shall make structural or other preparation of the opening to receive track and grille, provide finish or trim to the opening, construct finish or trim to the opening and construct storage pockets as necessary. Site preparations are to be detailed by approved shop drawings.

.2 Examine all conditions under which grilles are to be installed. Notify contractor of unsatisfactory conditions.

.3 Verify track layout and grille dimensions, especially the finished floor (or counter) to the underside of the support dimensions, by actual measurements.

3.2 INSTALLATION:

.1 Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s shop drawings and instructions.

3.3 MAINTENANCE:

.1 Grille curtain shall be cleaned regularly with a mild soap that is approved for use on aluminum

.2 Roller trolleys are to be lubricated at least every 4 months with WD-40 or equivalent.

3.4 WARRANTY:

.1 The standard warranty shall cover the repair or replacement of defective components or assembly labour for a period of one year following the installation of grille.





8 OPENINGS SECTION 08 41 00 INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOORS AND WINDOWS page 1 of 7 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED .1 Furnish all labour, material, equipment and services necessary for the complete design,

fabrication, supply and installation of all aluminum storefronts and entrances as shown on drawings, as scheduled and as specified herein.

.2 The work of this section shall include, but shall not necessarily be limited to the following: .1 Aluminum storefront. .2 All glass and glazing of above installations. .3 All necessary reinforcing members, brackets, anchors, screws, bolts, etc. to ensure a

first class installation and to ensure compliance with specified performance criteria. .5 All fastenings, anchors, brackets, straps, shims, bolts, nuts, etc. required to be

attached to building structure for the support of the aluminum framing. .6 Sealant between aluminum work and adjoining construction. 1.2 RELATED WORK .1 Section 07 62 00: Sheet Metal Flashing .2 Section 07 92 00: Joint Sealants .3 Section 08 71 00: Finish Hardware .4 Section 08 80 00: Glazing - Supply of glass and glazing. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 The firm producing and executing this work of this section shall have minimum five (5)

years experience in work of similar scope and nature to that specified. .2 Work of this section shall be fabricated, installed, glazed and adjusted by experienced

workmen in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, reviewed shop drawings and referenced standards.

.3 Drawings and specifications for work of this section are based on products manufactured

by Metro Aluminum Products Ltd and/or Kawneer products. 3.5 SUBMITTALS


.2 Verification Sample: Provide the Consultant with a sample of the finished frame material for approval.




8 OPENINGS SECTION 08 41 00 INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOORS AND WINDOWS page 2 of 7 1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Provide Shop Drawings which clearly indicate materials and large scale details for head,

jamb and sill, profiles of components, elevations of unit, anchorage details, location of isolation coating, description of related components and exposed finishes and fasteners.

.2 Shop drawings shall be sealed by a professional engineer registered in BC. The Engineer

who sealed the shop drawings, or his designated representative, shall provide field review of the installation.

.3 No work shall be fabricated until the shop drawings and all other related submittals and

samples have been reviewed by the Consultant. 1.5 SAMPLES AND SUBMITTALS


.2 Submit duplicate samples of aluminum finish, and glass. Submit one representative model of each type window and door. Show frame, sash, sill, glazing and weatherproofing method, surface finish and hardware. Include 150 mm (6") long samples of head, jamb, sill and mullions to indicate profile.

1.6 MAINTENANCE .1 Provide data for maintenance and cleaning in accordance with instructions in Section 01

30 00: Submittals. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING .1 Deliver, store and handle window/door units in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions. Securely tie or fasten operating parts to prevent movement during transport or handling.

.2 Store window/door units on site on raised wood blocking, protected from elements,

physical damage or corrosive materials. Store upright, in accordance with final installation.

1.8 WARRANTY .1 Provide a written guarantee for the complete installation provided under this section

against defective material and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of Substantial Completion.

.2 Warrant all storefront systems as follows: .1 Framing and weather-stripping materials against leakage, defects and malfunction

under normal use for a period of ten (10) years. .2 Sealed units against defective hermetic seals including intrusion of moisture or dirt,

internal condensation, deterioration of internal glass coatings and other visual evidence of seal failure or performance failure for a period of five (5) years.

.3 Hardware against manufacturing defects or malfunction under normal use for a period of two (2) years.




8 OPENINGS SECTION 08 41 00 INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOORS AND WINDOWS page 3 of 7 1.9 DESIGN & PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS .1 Generally: Notwithstanding the approved type of storefront framing, skylights and

entrances as specified herein, design, fabricate, and install component parts of the exterior aluminum framing to meet or exceed the following criteria:

.2 Fasteners: All fastenings and fixings shall be concealed. .3 Markings: Labels and trademarks, including applied labels, shall not be visible on the

finished work, except identification of safety glass as required by code. .4 Structural Performance: a) Deflection of framing members and glass, under full design load, shall not exceed

1/175 of clear span. b) The aluminum framing shall be designed and installed to withstand local positive and

negative wind pressure loads and seismic restraint requirements in accordance with requirements of the National Building Code 2005.

c) Structural performance shall conform to ASTM E330-79. d) Head members and anchors for aluminum framing shall be designed and installed to

accommodate deflection of the building structure over. e) Aluminum framing shall be designed to accommodate expansion and contraction of

component materials, without harmful buckling, glass breakage, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects.

2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS – GENERAL .1 The work of this section is based on products supplied by Metro Aluminum Ltd Canada

Ltd. Alternate supplier is Kawneer Canada Ltd, or pre-approved equivalent. Whatever alternative products are offered, submit supporting technical literature, samples, drawings, and performance data for comparison 10 days prior to closing date.

.2 Extrusions shall be 6063 T5 alloy and temper. Formed aluminum components shall be

sheet of alloy and temper suitable for their purpose and finish. .3 Fasteners shall be 300 series stainless steel or 400 series stainless steel cadmium plated

and of sufficient size and quantity to perform their intended function. .4 Weathering and glazing gaskets shall be extruded black, closed cell or dense elastomer

of durometer appropriate to the function. 2.2 ALUMINUM FINISH .1 Clear Anodized: All exposed aluminum sections shall be given an anodic oxide treatment

in accordance with Aluminum Association specification AA-M12C22A31, Standard Clear.




8 OPENINGS SECTION 08 41 00 INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOORS AND WINDOWS page 4 of 7 2.3 INTERIOR ALUMINUM STOREFRONT

.1 Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with non-staining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

.2 Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, non-staining, non-bleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. Where exposes shall be stainless steel.

.3 Perimeter Anchors: When steel anchors are used, provide insulation between steel material and aluminum material to prevent galvanic action

.4 Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

.5 Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions. Handle storefront material and components to avoid damage. Protect storefront material against damage from elements, construction activities, and other hazards before, during and after storefront installation.

.6 Approved Types:

.1 Metro Aluminum 1750 Series (2” x 4.5”)

.2 Kawneer Trifab VG 400

.3 Approved alternate 2.5 ALUMINUM ENTRANCE DOORS .1 Doors, rails and stiles designed and engineered for dual moment corner construction. .2 Doors to be machined for hardware ready for installation prior to site delivery and are to

include the following: a) Single acting off-set pivots b) Overhead Closers specified in hardware spec. e) Prepared to allow for specified locks and door handles f) Thresholds g) Square glass stops for sealed units .3 Approved Types: .1 Metro Aluminum 1750 Swing Door. .2 Kawneer 350 Swing Door. .3 Approved alternate. 2.6 GLAZING

.1 Glazing: As specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing."

.2 Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, extruded EPDM rubber.




8 OPENINGS SECTION 08 41 00 INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOORS AND WINDOWS page 5 of 7

.3 Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type.

.4 Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to which sealants will not develop adhesion.

.5 Glazing Sealants: For structural-sealant-glazed systems, as recommended by manufacturer for joint type, and as follows:

.1 Weatherseal Sealant: ASTM C 920 for Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, G, A, and O; single-component neutral-curing formulation that is compatible with structural sealant and other system components with which it comes in contact; recommended by structural-sealant, weatherseal-sealant, and aluminum-framed-system manufacturers for this use.

2.7 HARDWARE .1 Manufacturer's standard for door configuration and type of operation indicated on

drawings. See also Section 08 06 70: Door Hardware. 2.9 SEALANT .1 To conform to requirements of 07 92 00 Joint Sealants .2 To CGSB. 19-GP-9. .2 One part silicone sealant providing weather resistance and high adhesion characteristics

to aluminum and adjacent materials – .3 Dow Corning 795; CGE Silpruf; or multi-component Tremco Dymeric; or other approved

alternative. 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION .1 Windows and doors shall be constructed in a neat workmanlike manner. All corners of

the frame, sash and door shall be miter cut and fusion welded. Welds to be dressed, finished to match the surrounding surfaces.

.2 Reinforce as required to comply with referenced codes. Reinforcing shall be hot-dipped

galvanized steel profiles designed to fit the particular profile shape of the frame, sash or door and shall be concealed and fastened in the center chambers of the profile.

.3 Provide holes in glazing rebates and rebates in frames to ensure baffled internal

weepage, drainage and pressure equalization. .4 Prevent anodic action of dissimilar materials.




8 OPENINGS SECTION 08 41 00 INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOORS AND WINDOWS page 6 of 7 3.2 EXAMINATION .1 Examine substrate and conditions under which work under this section is to be

performed. Do not proceed with work under this section until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

.2 Ensure that work installed by other Sections is adequate to support work of this Section.

Co-ordinate with other trades, in setting out and setting of inserts, anchors, etc., as work proceeds. Supply all inserts, bolts and other fixings required.

3.3 ERECTION .1 Install storefront and entrances in accordance with reviewed shop drawings,

manufacturer's recommendations and referenced standards. .2 Set members level, plumb and square, as required and in proper alignment with other

work. .3 Make allowance for deflection of structure, to ensure that the structural loads are not

transmitted to storefront or doors. .4 Adjust operable parts for correct function. .5 Leave protective window markings in place until final cleaning of building. .6 Install sills with uniform wash to exterior, level in length, straight in alignment with plumb

up stands and faces. Cut sills to fit window opening. Secure sills in place with anchoring devices located at ends and evenly spaced 600 mm o.c. in between.

.7 Fasten expansion joint cover plates and drip deflectors with self tapping stainless steel

screws. Maintain 6 mm to 9 mm space between butt ends of continuous sills. For sills over 1220 mm length, maintain 3 mm to 6 mm space at each end.

3.4 SEALING .1 Seal joints between frame members and other non-operating components with sealant. .2 Seal joints between windows and window sills and doors and door sills with sealant. Bed

sill expansion joint cover plates and drip deflectors in bedding compound. Caulk between sill upstand and window/door frame. Caulk butt joints in continuous sills.

.3 Apply sealant in accordance with Section 07 92 00, Sealants. Conceal sealant within sill

work except where exposed use is permitted by Consultant. 3.5 ADJUSTING Adjust all doors and hardware to operate smoothly, without binding or jambing or undue

pressure.




8 OPENINGS SECTION 08 41 00 INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOORS AND WINDOWS page 7 of 7 3.6 CLEANING & PROTECTION .1 Clean surfaces as recommended by the manufacturer of the material. .2 Where windows are installed sometime prior to occupancy, mark glass with non-alkaline

whiting or similar non-abrasive material. Do not use putty or printed paper signs.





8 OPENINGS SECTION 08 44 00 EXTERIOR ALUMINUM DOORS AND WINDOWS page 1 of 12

1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Furnish all labour, materials, equipment and services necessary for the design, fabrication, supply and installation of the glass and aluminum curtain wall system as indicated on the drawings and as hereinafter specified.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Building Codes: .1 British Columbia Building Code (BCBC). .2 British Column Energy Efficiency Act. .3 National Building Code of Canada (NBCC). .4 National Energy Code for Buildings. .5 ASHRAE 90.1 Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential

Buildings. .6 City of New Westminster bylaws.

.2 Structural Design Standards: .1 CSA W59.2 Weld Aluminum Construction. .2 CAN/CSA S157 Strength Design in Aluminum. .3 CAN/CGSB 12.20-M Structural Design of Glass for Buildings.

.3 Product Evaluation Standards: .1 CAN/CSA–A440 Windows. .2 CAN/CSA–A440.1 User Selection Guide to CSA standard CAN/CSA–A440

Windows. .3 CAN/CSA–A440.2 Fenestration Energy Performance. .4 CAN/CSA-A440.4 Installation. .5 CAN/CGSB 12.8 Insulating Glass Units.

.4 Manuals of Recommended Practices: .1 Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association of Canada (IGMAC):

.1 Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units

.5 Laboratory Test Methods: .1 ASTM E283 Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through

Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors Under Specified Pressure Difference Across Specimen

.2 ASTM E330 Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference

.3 ASTM E331 Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference

.4 ASTM E547 Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference





.6 Field Test Methods: .1 ASTM E783 Standard Test Method for Field Measurement of Air Leakage though

Installed Exterior Windows and Doors .2 ASTM E1105 Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration

of Installed Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls, by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference

.3 AAMA 501.2 Quality Assurance and Diagnostic Water Leakage Field Check of Installed Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems

.7 Finishing Standards .1 AAMA 611 Voluntary Specifications for Anodized Architectural Aluminum .2 AAMA 2603 Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test

Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels .3 AAMA 2604 Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test

Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels

.4 AAMA 2605 Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels

.8 Other Standards .1 AAMA CW–10 Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum from Shop to Site. .2 AAMA 609 & AAMA 610 Cleaning and Maintenance of Architecturally Finished

Aluminum.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit all documentation and samples for review by Consultants at one time, prior to fabricating curtain wall(s).


.3 Quality Control Documents: .1 Submit copies of test reports to establish that products used comply with air

leakage and water penetration performance requirements. .2 Submit test reports or calculations to establish that products used comply with

energy performance criteria. .3 Submit test reports to establish that products used comply with condensation

resistance criteria. .4 Submit letter from insulating glass fabricator stating current IGMAC compliance

number and identifying the types of edge construction covered by that number. .5 Submit letter from glazing contractor confirming that all products will be supplied

and installed according to the descriptive and performance requirements of this specification. Identify any specified requirements that are in error or cannot legitimately be met, and provide alternatives which meet the intent of the specification for the Consultant’s approval.





.4 Evidence of Qualifications .1 Submit evidence that glazing contractor is a member in good standing of the

Glazing Contractors Association of British Columbia.

.5 Shop Drawings: .1 Show scale elevations, sections, dimensions, and quantity of units. Indicate rough

opening requirements and maximum tolerances of adjacent construction. .2 Provide full size details of all perimeter and interface conditions. Show

relationship to other work, including attachment of flashings, air and water barriers, and location of caulking. Show extrusion profiles and engagement of glass and infill materials.

.3 Show methods of structural reinforcement and attachment to building, including provisions for thermal movement and building movements. Identify all structural fasteners.

.4 Schedule glass types and sealed unit makeup. Identify finishes, sealants, location of isolation coatings, and any other information required to indicate compliance with contract documents.

.5 Submit shop drawings under seal of Registered Professional Engineer registered in the Province of BC.

.6 Commitment For Field Review:

.1 Submit Schedule B “Assurance of Professional Design and Commitment for Field Review” and “Summary of Design and Field Review Requirements,” with shop drawings.

.7 Samples:

.1 Submit color samples of specified finishes.

.2 Submit samples of materials requested without cost to the owner (metal, glass, fasteners, frame sections, hardware).

.8 Maintenance Data: .1 Submit maintenance data for incorporation into project maintenance manual:

.1 Data for maintenance and cleaning of aluminum finishes.

.2 Data for cleaning of glass.

.3 Data for maintenance of operable vent and door operating hardware.

.9 Warranties.

.10 Letter of Compliance: .1 Submit the necessary documentation indicating compliance with the requirements

of the Authority having Jurisdiction and the approved drawings which formed the basis of the General Review Commitment Certificate.


.1 Submit all documentation specified to show that all products meet or exceed the requirements of this specification.





.2 Glass and glazing work under this section to conform to IGMAC “Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units.”

.3 Sealed insulating unit manufacturer to be a member in good Standing of IGMAC, and be prepared to submit evidence of current membership to the Consultant on demand.

.4 Curtain Wall contractor to be a member in good standing of the Glazing Contractors Association of British Columbia, and have a minimum of five years uninterrupted experience in successfully carrying out projects of similar size. Contractor to document past experience on request.

.5 Welding of aluminum work to complete with CSA W59.2.

.6 Laboratory test reports to be prepared by qualified independent testing laboratories accredited by the Standards Council of Canada.

.7 Energy performance calculations to be submitted under the seal of a qualified Registered Professional Engineer.

.8 Engage a Registered Professional Engineer licensed to practice in the province of British Columbia to: .1 Design the curtain wall system, including glass and glazing, to meet the specified

structural performance criteria in addition to the minimum requirements of the BCBC.

.2 Supervise the preparation of shop and erection drawings.

.3 Field review the fabrication and installation of the products to ensure they comply with those drawings and the specified structural performance criteria.

.4 The cost of the above engineering and field reviews to be included as part of the cost for work under this section.

.9 Field test representative area(s) of curtain wall selected by Consultant for air leakage and water penetration by a recognized independent testing agent. .1 Test area(s) to be selected by Consultant. .2 Testing Agency to be selected and retained by the Owner, at the Owner’s cost. .3 Unit failing to meet performance requirements to be replaced by the Contractor.


.1 Deliver, store and handle materials so as to avoid damage, following the recommendations contained in AAMA publication CW-10, “Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum from Shop to Site”.

.2 Keep handling to a minimum. Do not move the materials except as needed to install the curtain wall.

.3 Store materials inside when possible, in a clean, well-drained area free of dust and corrosive fumes. Keep water away from stored assemblies.

.4 Contractor to provide designated interior storage in a clean dry area free of dust and corrosive fumes. If interior storage cannot be provided, cover materials with tarpaulins

.5





or plastic hung on frames so as to provide air circulation and prevent contaminants from contacting aluminum or glass.

1.6 SITE CONDITIONS

.1 Do not install any aluminum work or glazing until all nearby welding, grinding, sandblasting, waterproofing, mortar work and acid etching are complete.

.2 Report to the Consultant in writing any defects in existing work, or unsatisfactory site conditions. Start no work until conditions are satisfactory. Starting work shall imply acceptance of existing conditions and surfaces.

.3 Glaze with compounds, sealants, or tapes only when glazing surfaces are at room temperatures recommended by the manufacturer, and when the substrates are free of moisture.

.4 When temperature of glazing surfaces is below that recommended by sealant manufacturer, obtain Consultant’s approval for glazing methods and protective measures, which are to be used under these conditions.

1.7 SCHEDULING/ COORDINATION

.1 Schedule activities such as welding, sandblasting and grinding of steel or concrete, mortar work, acid etching and any other work harmful to aluminum finishes or glass, to be completed before start of metal and glass installation.

.2 When such activities must be carried out in the vicinity of stored or installed aluminum work or glass, provide hoarding or other suitable protection recommended by glazing contractor and curtain wall installer.

.3 Coordinate the installation of anchors and structural connections with the appropriate Sections.

.4 Coordinate the installation of air barriers with Section 07275 Self Adhesive Membrane, 07620 Metal Flashing and Trim, and 07900 Sealant.

.5 Coordinate work with related trades to ensure rough openings, structural supports, curbing and flashing are installed correctly to complement the work of this section

.6 Coordinate wiring access and power supply requirements for electrically operated hardware with Division 26.

1.8 WARRANTIES

.1 Curtain wall(s) to be free from defects in material and workmanship, and continue to perform satisfactorily for one year from the date of Substantial Performance of the Work.

.1 Satisfactory performance means compliance with the performance criteria and the testing and construction standards of this specification, and with the reviewed shop drawings. This includes the performance of finishes, hardware, glass and glazing materials, structural attachment, sealants and flashings.

.2 Correct all deficiencies, which appear during the warranty period, including removal and replacement of failed sealed insulating units, at no cost to the Owner.





.2 Provide manufacturer’s standard warranty stating that the sealed insulating units will be free from material defects obstructing vision for a period of five years from the date of substantial completion. Contractor to obtain, on behalf of the owner, copies of standard product warranties in excess of one year, from the respective manufacturers.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

.1 Curtain wall framing system to be exterior glazed pressure equalized rainscreen type with mullion spacing shown on drawings.

.2 System to be of stick built construction.

.3 Framing system to be structurally supported by wood/steel/concrete framing as shown on drawings. Provide slip connections to allow for noiseless thermal movement of curtain wall framing, and for deflection or settling of support structure.

.4 Provide flashings to perimeters of curtain wall as detailed on drawings.

.5 Provide perimeter air barriers continuous with building air barrier system as shown on drawings. .1 When flexible membrane is sued for the air seal, curtain wall installer to ensure it

is fully sealed to adjacent air seal materials provided by others, and mechanically fastened to glazing pocket of curtain wall framing.

.2 Design air barrier connections to allow for structural movements and deflections without failure.

.6 Insulate perimeter of curtain wall as shown on drawings and in keeping with sound construction practice, to reduce heat loss and minimize condensation. Insulation to be located outside the plane of the air barrier.


.1 Air tightness: maximum allowable rate of air leakage not to exceed 1.10 m³/h/m² (0.06ft³/min/ft²) of sample curtain wall area when tested according to ASTM E283 at an air pressure difference of 75 Pa (1.57 lbf/ft²).

.2 Water tightness: no uncontrolled water leakage through the curtain wall test specimen when tested according to ASTM E547 at air pressure difference of 500 Pa. .1 Water leakage is defined as any uncontrolled water that appears on any normally

exposed interior surfaces that is not contained or drained back to the exterior, or that can cause damage to adjacent materials or finishes. Water contained within drained flashings, gutters, and sills is not considered water leakage.

.2 The collection of up to 15cc (0.5 oz) of water in a 15 minute test period on top of an interior stop, stool or pan flashing integral to the curtain wall system shall not be considered water leakage.

.3 Overall U value of windows and doors not to exceed 0.35 Btu/h·ft²·F.





.4 Submit form of Energy Performance Calculations: Provide computer simulated energy analysis for typical portion of curtain wall shown on Window Schedule.

2.3 STRUCTURAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

.1 Design aluminum work according to: CAN/CSA S157. Limit deflection under full design loads to L/175.

.2 Design glass according to:

.1 CAN/CGSB–12.20–M89.

.3 Design wind pressures on curtain wall(s):

.1 Figures are service load, and use an importance factor of 1.15:

.1 1.4 RPa positive

.2 1.4 RPa negative

.4 Maximum building structure movements due to both live and seismic loads:

.1 Differential Vertical deflections between slabs edges or edge beams: ### (specify absolute or relative amounts of movement)

.2 Horizontal drift between floors in any direction: 50 mm (2”).

.5 Allow for deflection of building structure. Ensure no building structural loads are imposed on curtain wall.

.6 Thermal Movement: design curtain wall components to accommodate expansion and contraction caused by exterior metal surface temperature fluctuations.

.1 Curtain wall to perform throughout the temperature range without buckling or imposing damaging loads on glass, structural members, fasteners, joint seals, or other detrimental effects.

.2 Operating windows and doors to function normally over this temperature range.

2.4 MATERIALS

.1 All materials used internally or externally to be corrosion resistant, non-staining, non-bleeding, and compatible with adjoining materials.

.2 Metals:

.1 Aluminum extrusions: 6063 alloy, T5, T6 or T54 temper.

.2 Aluminum sheet and plate: 1100 or 5005 alloy for anodized finishes, 3003 or 5052 for other coatings.

.3 Hardware:

.1 All components of corrosion resistant material compatible with aluminum.





.4 Anchors and fasteners:

.1 Exposed fasteners and anchors: aluminum, 300 series stainless steel, or nickel-plated brass.

.2 Concealed fasteners and anchors: aluminum, cadmium plated steel, zinc plated steel, or stainless steel.

.3 Concealed anchors: aluminum, or carbon steel painted after fabrication with zinc chromate or other primers not containing lead.

.5 Sealants:

.1 Sealants between aluminum framing and adjacent construction: provide joint sealants, primers and packing materials, as per section 07900 Sealant.

.2 Sealants within curtain wall framing: as recommended by curtain wall framing manufacturer.

.6 Air barriers:

.1 Perimeter air barrier to be galvanized steel or mil finish aluminum sheet, flexible membrane, or sealant.

.2 Air barrier material to be compatible with materials to which it is attached.

.7 Infill (spandrel) panels:

.1 Metal faced bonded panels, faced (one) sides:

.1 Exterior skin: anodized aluminium to match curtain wall frame.

.2 Backing/core material: mineral wool insulation as per Section 07 21 00

.3 Adhesive: as recommended my manufacturer

.4 Interior skin: anodized aluminium to match curtain wall frame.

.5 Bond components materials to form a stable and durable composite unit.

.2 Mechanically assembled panels: construct hollow box type insulated panels as shown on architectural drawings:

.1 Exterior facing (metal or glass): anodized aluminium to match curtain wall frame.

.2 Insulation: mineral wool insulation as per Section 07 21 00

.3 Interior backpan: anodized aluminium to match curtain wall frame.

.4 Backpan joints to be air tight. Seal pans to aluminum framing to create effective air seal without bridging thermal break. Fix insulation to backpan with impaling pins and self-locking washers. Do not rely on adhesives alone to retain insulation. Vent insulated cavity to outside air.

.8 Glazing materials:

.1 Exterior and interior glazing gaskets or tapes: manufacturer’s standard, as used in assemblies tested to meet performance criteria for air infiltration and water penetration.

.2 Glass setting blocks and edge blocks: silicone with an 85 ± 5 Shore A durometer hardness. Block material to be compatible with sealed unit edge sealant. Setting blocks for sealed units with silicone edge seals must be silicone.





.9 Glass and glazing

.1 Type as scheduled on Architectural drawings, and as specified in Section 08 80 00 Glazing.

.2 All glass products to meet the requirements of Section 08 80 00 Glazing.

2.5 FABRICATION

.1 Fabricate curtain wall framing to shapes, sizes and configurations shown on reviewed shop drawings.

.2 Build square, true, accurate to size, and free from defects affecting appearance and performance.

.3 Fabricate and assemble aluminum framing according to manufacturer’s instructions. Replicate details of construction of tested assemblies.

.4 Do not bridge thermal barriers with flashings or other conductive materials.

.5 Conceal fasteners whenever possible.

.6 Isolate aluminum from dissimilar metals, except small areas of stainless steel, zinc or white bronze, using shims, barrier tapes, plastic films, or asphalt based paint.

2.6 FINISHES

.1 Finish exposed areas of flashings and trim to match aluminum curtain wall framing. Hardware to have manufacturer’s standard finish.

.2 All exposed surfaces to be free of visible defects and scratches.

.3 Anodized finishes to be continuous, fully sealed and free from powdery surfaces.

.4 Finishing products:

.1 Clear anodized coating, AAMA 611 Class II.

2.7 ACCEPTED PRODUCTS

.1 1600 Wall Series as manufactured by Kawneer

.2 2500 Curtain Wall as manufactured by Metro Aluminum

.3 Or pre-approved alternative. Approval of alternates to be confirmed in advance of tender closing by Addendum only.




8 OPENINGS SECTION 08 44 00 EXTERIOR ALUMINUM DOORS AND WINDOWS page 10 of 12 3 EXECUTION

3.1 OPENINGS, LINES AND GRADES

.1 General Contractor to:

.1 Provide rough openings and supporting walls in the sizes and locations indicated in the contract documents, and establish and maintain grid lines and elevation benchmarks at convenient points adjacent to curtain wall.

3.2 INSPECTION

.1 Verify that openings and support structure are dimensionally within allowable tolerances, in accordance with reviewed shop drawings, plumb, level, clean, and provide a solid anchoring surface.

.2 Take site dimensions before fabrication. Ensure fabricated work will fit openings and that allowance is made for structural movements and that required clearances to other work will be maintained.

.3 Ensure all flashings built in or provided by others will integrate with the work of this section to divert all moisture to the exterior.

.4 Do not begin to install curtain wall until all conditions are satisfactory.

3.3 INSTALLATION

.1 Install curtain wall framing according to reviewed shop drawings and manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations.

.2 Install framing in prepared openings plumb, level, and square, and in relation to established lines and elevations shown on reviewed shop and erection drawings.

.3 Secure work to allow for anticipated movements of the building structure and thermal movements within the aluminum framing system, without failure of sealants or compromising performance of the curtain wall system.

.4 Conceal all fasteners except where unavoidable for structural anchorage or application of hardware.

.5 Protect aluminum from galvanic action. Ensure all aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete, masonry, mortar, plaster or other dissimilar materials are protected with suitable separating material.

.6 Set aluminum sills level in their length, with minimum 5% slope to exterior. Metal sills that allow water to pond against framing or caulking will not be accepted.

.7 Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air barrier materials with Section 07 27 19 Self Adhesive Membrane, 07 62 00 Metal Flashing and Trim, and 07 92 00 Sealant. Ensure building air barrier is effectively sealed to curtain wall.





.8 Install glass and glazing materials as scheduled on the reviewed shop drawings and according to the requirements of Section 08 80 00 Glazing.

.1 Preformed gaskets to be continuous in one piece, cut oversize to allow for shrinkage, and installed with tightly fitting corners. Do not stretch gaskets

.9 Handle and install glass to prevent edge damage. Use rolling block to rotate large units. Do not install glass, which shows edge damage.

.10 Caulk joints between aluminum framing and surrounding materials in accordance with the requirements of Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealants.

.11 Follow sealant manufacturer’s recommendations for proper joint design, including use of joint fillers, primers, and bond breakers, as required to suit jobsite conditions. Ensure all surfaces to be sealed are clean and free of dust and construction debris.

3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES

.1 Provided specified tolerances in surrounding work allow, and clearances on reviewed shop drawings are maintained, erect aluminum framing to the following tolerances: .1 Maximum variation from plane or location shown on reviewed shop drawings to be

3 mm in 3000 mm of length (1/8” in 10’), or 13 mm (1/2”) in total length. .2 Maximum offset from true alignment between two identical members abutting end

to end in line to be 1.6 mm (1/16”). .3 Square: maximum difference in length of diagonals to be 3 mm (1/8”). .4 Corner offset: maximum offset from true alignment at glazing pocket corner joints

to be 0.8 mm (1/32”). .5 Bow: 1.6 mm (1/16”) in 1200 mm (4’) of length.


.1 Conduct on-site tests for air and water infiltration with curtain wall manufacturer’s representative present. Owner’s representative will select area(s) to be tested.

.2 The installed performance of the curtain wall system, (including) (excluding) the joint to other building components, to conform to: .1 Air infiltration: Air infiltration rate shall not exceed 0.06 cfm/ft2 (0.3 l/s · m2) at a

static air pressure differential of 6.24 psf (300 Pa) through the curtain wall test area.

.2 Water penetration: no uncontrolled water leakage through any part of the curtain wall when tested in situ according to ASTM E 1105 at an air pressure difference of 500 Pa, when subjected to 3 cycle(s) of 5 min.

.3 Test curtain wall system including perimeter joint and interface with adjacent building construction.

.4 Test area(s) selected by Consultant.





.5 Correct deficiencies in joints which fail to meet specified requirements, and all joints having similar deficiencies, at no cost to the owner.

.6 Cost for successful tests (original test and retests) will be paid by the Owner. Cost for all unsuccessful tests (original test and retests) to be paid by the responsible contractor.

.7 Testing agency to be selected and retained by the Owner at the Owner’s cost.

.8 Units failing to meet the performance requirements will be replaced by the Contractor.

3.6 PROTECTION

.1 Contractor to take all precautions necessary to protect materials, before and after installation, from lime, mortar, water run-off from concrete or copper, careless handling of tools, weld spatter, acids, roofing tar, solvents, abrasive cleaners, and other items that could damage the glass surfaces and aluminum finishes. Do not rely on use of protective plastic films to protect materials.

.2 Contractor to protect installed work from damage caused by grinding and polishing compounds, plaster, cement, lime, acid or other contaminants, and the work or activities of other trades.

.3 Install protective cover to aluminum work and glazing where there is a high risk of damage. Use heavy Kraft paper or non-staining, non-hardening plastic films.

.4 Consult with curtain wall contractor to determine appropriate protective measures.

3.7 ADJUSTMENT

.1 Adjust operating hardware to operate smoothly and fit tightly when closed and locked, and be properly aligned with frames.

3.8 CLEANING

.1 Remove all protective materials from metalwork and glazing. Remove all labels, and deposits which affect appearance or operation

.2 Aluminum work

.1 Clean anodized finishes according to AAMA 609 & 610

.3 Glass

.1 Clean glass surfaces according to instructions provided by glass fabricator or window/door manufacturer.

.2 Class cleaning solutions to conform to CAN/CGSB-2.55.

.4 Do not use vigorous cleaning methods. Avoid scratching glass or aluminum finish. Contractor to be responsible for damages resulting from the use of other cleaning methods.





8 OPENINGS SECTION 08 44 00 ALUMINUM SKYLIGHTS page 1 of 11

1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Work includes labour, materials, equipment and services for design, supply and installation of aluminium skylights, as indicated.


.1 Supply and installation of aluminum framed skylights with aluminum extruded sections with thermal break, pressure plates, interior gutter drainage system, exterior glazed with insulating glass units and with pressure plates and caps at vertical locations and structural silicone glazing at horizontal locations (as required). Skylights to include all interface support brackets and/or angles to allow support by the existing and new structural systems. Included in the work is the modification to the extent of the skylights to work around existing structural elements.

1.3 REFERENCES


.2 Glazing Contractors Association of BC (GCABC): .1 Glazing Systems Specifications Manual.

.3 Canadian Standard Association (CSA): .1 CAN/CSA S157 Strength Design in Aluminum. .2 CSA W47.2 Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Aluminum. .3 CSA G40.21 Structural Quality Steel. .4 CAN/CSA A440-00 Windows. .5 CSA W59.2 Welded Aluminum Construction.

.4 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB): .1 CAN/CGSB 12.20 Structural Design of Glass for Buildings. .2 CAN/CGSB 1.108 Bituminous Solvent Type Paint. .3 CAN/CGSB 63.14 Plastic Skylights.

.5 Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association of Canada (IGMAC): .1 Glazing Recommendations for Sealed Insulating Glass Units .2 Guidelines for Sloped Glazing.

.6 Laboratory Test Methods: .1 American Society fro Testing and Materials (ASTM):

.1 ASTM E283 Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.

.2 ASTM E330 Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.





.3 ASTM E331 Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

.4 ASTM E547 Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference.

.7 Field Test Methods: .1 American Society fro Testing and Materials (ASTM):

.1 ASTM E783 Standard Test Method for Field Measurement of Air Leakage though Installed Exterior Windows and Doors.

.2 ASTM E1105 Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls, by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference.

.2 American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): .1 AAMA 501.2 Quality Assurance and Diagnostic Water Leakage Field Check

of Installed Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems.

.8 Finishing Standards .1 AAMA 611 Voluntary Standards for Anodized Architectural Aluminum. .2 AAMA 2603 Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test

Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. .3 AAMA 2604 Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test

Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.

.4 AAMA 2605 Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminium Extrusions and Panels.

.5 AAMA 609 & 610 Cleaning and Maintenance Guide for Architecturally Finished Aluminum.

.9 Other Standards .1 AAMA CW–10 Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum from Shop to Site.


.1 Design fabricate and install assembly to withstand the positive and negative pressures on the skylight in accordance with the BCBC requirements for snow, wind (use 1 in 30 values) and seismic and L/240 maximum deflection; however, in no instance shall the maximum deflection be greater than 13 mm.

.2 Provide a continuous interlocking rigid PVC thermal break around the perimeter of each glazing unit forming an unbroken thermal separation of the interior and exterior environments.

.3 Provide for expansion and contraction of all parts for an exterior temperature range from -15oC to +65oC and a building interior temperature range from +10oC to +35oC. Movement shall not displace, twist, distort or buckle any part of the assembly and shall be absorbed into freely functioning expansion and contraction joints through a system of moving bearing and supports.





.4 Air tightness: maximum allowable rate of air leakage to be 1.10m3/h/m of crack length when tested according to ASTM E283 at an air pressure difference of 75 Pa.

.5 Water Resistance: no water to penetrate the skylight assembly, or be retained within any frame member, when tested in accordance with ASTM E1105 at air pressure difference of 500 Pa or tested in accordance with AAMA 501.2 without the pressure caps and exterior seals in place. There is to be no “water infiltration” as defined by CSA A440.

.6 Condensation Resistance: skylight framing to have a minimum Temperature Index of 58, as determined by CSA A440.

.7 Durability: The life expectancy of the skylight assemblies is a minimum of 25 years. It is expected that with adequate maintenance, the skylight assemblies will maintain the air tightness, water tightness, and structural performance requirements over their expected life. For the purpose of measuring durability, the air and water leakage performance of the windows shall be not less than that specified for field testing.

.8 An air seal consistent with the rain screen principle shall be continuously installed at the glass line perimeter and connected to the structure as an integral part of the design to provide a complete impervious air and vapour barrier.

1.5 MOCK-UP

.1 Construct mock-ups for each skylight configuration. Accepted mock-ups may form part of completed work.

.2 Allow 48 hours for inspection of mock-ups by Consultant before proceeding with remaining skylights.


.1 Provide copies of test reports showing system complies with above paragraph "Performance Requirements", as requested by the Consultant.

.2 Fabricator shall have a minimum of 5 years of successful experience in the fabrication and erection of glazed aluminum framed skylight systems of similar sizes, shapes and finishes to the units required for this project and shall have ample facilities to produce, furnish and supply the units as required for installation without delay to the Work.

.3 Retain a professional engineer registered in B.C. experienced in structural design in glass and aluminum to design system and connections, to ensure the adequacy of the structural aspects of the design, manufacture, and installation of system.

.4 Glass and glazing work to conform to IGMAC ‘Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units’ and ‘Guidelines for Sloped Glazing’.

.5 Employ an organization qualified by the Canadian Welding Bureau under CSA W47.1 (for steel) and CSA 47.2 (for aluminum) to do any welding required.





.6 Field testing of representative area(s) of skylight assemblies may be performed as selected by Consultant for air leakage and water penetration. Cost of initial testing to be paid for by the Owner. Retesting of assemblies that failed to meet the project requirements may be performed at the Contractors expense as determined by the Consultant. The contractor will correct any deficiencies and apply corrections to other locations as required to achieve specified performance criteria.

1.7 SUBMITTALS


.2 Submit shop drawings for the review and written approval of the Consultant prior to fabrication.

.3 Shop Drawings

.1 Show scale elevations, sections, dimensions, and quantity of units. Indicate rough opening requirements and maximum tolerances of adjacent construction.

.2 Provide full size details of perimeter and interface conditions. Show relationship to other work, including attachment of flashings, continuity of air and moisture barriers, and location of sealants. Show extrusion profiles and engagement of glass and infill materials.

.3 Show methods of structural reinforcement and attachment to building, including provisions for thermal movement and building movements. Identify structural fasteners.

.4 Schedule glass types and sealed unit makeup. Identify materials to be used including finishes, sealants, gaskets, shims, location of isolation coatings, and any other information required to indicate compliance with contract documents.

.5 Submit shop drawings under seal of Registered Professional Engineer.

.4 Commitment For Field Review

.1 Submit Schedule B, “Assurance of Professional Design and Commitment for Field Review “and “Summary of Design and Field Review Requirements,” together with shop drawings.

.2 Provide C-B Letter of Assurance.

.5 Submit samples of each of the following with finishes selected on actual base metal as requested by the Consultant: Aluminum framing: horizontal/vertical junction, 600 mm long.

.6 Show design loads and temperature range on the shop drawings.


.1 Deliver, store and handle materials so as to avoid damage, following the recommendations contained in AAMA publication CW-10, “Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum from Shop to Site”.





.2 Keep handling to a minimum. Do not move the materials except as needed to install the curtain wall.

.3 Store materials inside when possible, in a clean, well-drained area free of dust and corrosive fumes. Keep water away from stored assemblies.

.4 Contractor to provide designated interior storage in a clean dry area free of dust and corrosive fumes. If interior storage cannot be provided, cover materials with tarpaulins or plastic hung on frames so as to provide air circulation and prevent contaminants from contacting aluminum or glass.

1.9 PROTECTION

.1 Contractor to take all precautions necessary to project materials, before and after installation, from lime, mortar, water run-off from concrete or copper, careless handling of tools, weld spatter, acids, roofing tar, solvents, abrasive cleaners, and other items that could damage the glass surfaces and aluminum finishes.

1.10 SITE CONDITIONS

.1 Do not install any aluminum work or glazing until all nearby welding, grinding, sandblasting, waterproofing, mortar work and acid etching are complete.

.2 Report to the Consultant in writing any defects in existing work, or unsatisfactory site conditions. Start no work until conditions are satisfactory. Starting work shall imply acceptance of existing conditions and surfaces.

.3 Glaze with compounds, sealants, or tapes only when glazing surfaces are at temperatures recommended by the manufacturer, and when the substrates are free of moisture.

.1 When temperature of glazing surfaces is below that recommended by sealant manufacturer, obtain Consultant’s approval for glazing methods and protective measures, which are to be used under these conditions.

1.11 SCHEDULING/ COORDINATION

.1 Schedule activities such as welding, sandblasting and grinding of steel or concrete, mortar work, acid etching and any other work harmful to aluminum finishes or glass, to be completed before start of metal and glass installation.

.1 When such activities must be carried out in the vicinity of stored or installed aluminum work or glass, provide hoarding or other suitable protection as required and in conjunction with the recommendation by glazing contractor and skylight installer.

.2 Coordinate the installation of anchors and structural connections with the appropriate Sections.

.3 Coordinate the installation of air and moisture barriers.

.4 Coordinate work with related trades to ensure rough openings, structural supports, curbing and flashing are installed correctly to complement the work of this section.





.5 Coordinate wiring access and power supply requirements for electrically operated hardware as required.

1.12 WARRANTIES

.1 New glazing assemblies to be free from defects in material and workmanship, and continue to perform satisfactorily for five years (10 years for glass sealed units) from the date of Substantial Performance of the Work.

.1 Satisfactory performance means compliance with the performance criteria and the

testing and construction standards of this specification, and with the reviewed shop drawings. This includes the performance of finishes, hardware, glass and glazing materials, structural attachment, sealants and flashings.

.2 Correct all deficiencies, which appear during the warranty period, including removal and replacement of failed sealed insulating units, at no cost to the Owner.

.2 Provide manufacturer’s standard warranty stating that the sealed insulating units will be free from material defects obstructing vision for a period of ten years from the date of substantial completion. Contractor to obtain, on behalf of the owner, copies of standard product warranties from the respective manufacturers to be included in the project maintenance manual.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 IDENTIFIED MANUFACTURER /PRODUCT

.1 The following products have been identified and could meet the requirements of this specification. Reference of these products does not relieve the manufacturer of the responsibility to comply fully with all specified and illustrated criteria. .1 Kawneer Company Canada Limited: 2000 Series. .2 Approved alternative.

2.2 MATERIALS

.1 Aluminum: Extruded sections of AA6063-T5 alloy.

.2 Glass: Insulating, tempered clear glass units as specified in Section 08 80 00.

.3 Supporting angles, plates, bars, rods, and other steel accessories: mild steel CAN/CSA-G40.21-M87, hot dipped galvanized to ASTM A123 min. coating of 610 g/m3, thickness as required to sustain imposed load and in no case less than 4.8 mm thick.

.4 Sealant: .1 Sealants and primers to be as recommended by manufacturer unless noted

otherwise.





.2 Corner blocks: Thermoplastic sealant as approved by manufacturer and consultant. .1 Tremco TRS 600 .2 Approved alternative.

.3 Frame joints, glazing, structural, weather seals and other sealant areas within skylight system: neutral cure silicone to meet ASTM C719 (±50% movement minimum) and as recommended by manufacturer. .1 Dow Corning 795 with primer. .2 Approved alternative.

.4 Other: refer to section 07 92 00 Sealant.

.5 Dielectric separator: Bituminous paint CAN/CGSB-1.108-M89.

.6 Thermal separator: Polyvinylchloride, 50 Shore A durometer hardness +5.

.7 Anti-rotation blocks: Extruded PVC.

.8 Fasteners: Stainless steel, of suitable size and grade to sustain imposed loads. .1 Exposed fasteners to be 300 series stainless steel. .2 Concealed fasteners partially exposed to moisture to be 300 or 400 series

stainless steel or Leyland Industries DT2000.

.9 Sheet aluminum flashings: Alloy 1100, F temper, 0.040” minimum thickness exposed sheet finished to match framing.Galvanized sheet metal as used as liner and back-pan, 24 gauge minimum (use heavier gauge as required for mechanical strength) with minimum AZ50(AZM150) galvanizing.

.10 Steel supports and reinforcing to be hot dipped galvanized and size as required.

.11 Membrane: Refer to section 07 27 19 Self Adhesive Membrane.

.12 Insulation: Refer to section 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation.

2.3 FABRICATION

.1 Fabricate all work to high quality standards and to approved shop drawings to provide the specified performance standards.

.2 Fabricate components free of twists, bends or visual distortion. Seal or continuously weld corner joints.

.3 Fabricate all fittings and anchors required to securely install skylights to building and frame structures.





.4 Skylights: provide extrusions with raised leg capable of containing water which will pass by the primary seals and into the glazing rabbet and at the same time elevating the sealed units so that the units do not rest at the level of the water, which will exist to the height required to flow for drainage. All functions or overlaps are to be designed in such a fashion as to drain from upper to lower in shingle fashion and so that the flow of water will not be disrupted in the lower member/element and will not cause the water to bridge any sealing joints. The water should drop or flow directly from rabbet to rabbet to waterproof membrane.

.5 Vertical glazing: provide pressure equalized and drained exterior glazed system of aluminum vertical and horizontal members connected by sheer blocks.

.6 Condensation pans: provide sealed and continuous aluminum condensation pans below skylight assemblies.

.7 Provide all closures, caps, trims, flashing, accessories as required for a complete installation.

2.4 ALUMINUM BREAKSHAPES

.1 Shop fabricate sheet aluminum to profiles and sizes indicated.

.2 Brake aluminum to profiles prior to painting and/or anodizing unless permission has been given in writing by the Consultant for breaking subsequent to finishing.

2.5 FINISHES

.1 Finish to meet: .1 Thermosetting enamel coating meeting requirements of CAN/CSA-A440 and

CAN/CGSB-82.1: .2 AAMA 2604 with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.2 mils. Multi-stage cleaning

and chemical conversion pre-treatment system is required. .3 Specular gloss range is to be 45 to 55 in accordance with ASTM D 523. .4 Acceptable products:

.1 AAMA 2604-98 Acrynar by PPG

.2 AAMA 2605-98 Duranar by PPG


.2 Colour: .1 Exterior surfaces: Anodized aluminum and as approved by Consultant; .2 Interior surfaces: Anodized aluminum and as approved by Consultant.

.3 Associated components of the skylight system including metal panels are to match the finish of skylight framing. Hardware to have the manufacturer’s standard finish.





.4 Minor scratches and blemishes shall be repairable with the coating manufacturer’s recommended product or system. Such repairs shall match the original finish for colour and gloss and shall adhere to the original finish as per the adhesion requirements for the original paint .1 Finish exposed areas of flashings and trim to match finish of aluminium frame of

curtain wall systems.

.5 All exposed surfaces to be free of visible defects and scratches. .1 Anodized finishes to be continuous, fully sealed and free from powdery surfaces.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION /PREPARATION

.1 Obtain all measurements affecting work of this Section from job site.

.2 Install as required and verify position of opening framing to receive skylight system.

.3 Ensure concealed gutters are properly framed and waterproof membrane has been completed before installing skylights.

.4 Ensure building air/vapour/moisture barrier membranes can be properly sealed to skylight system.

3.2 FABRICATION

.1 Fabricate units square and true with maximum tolerance of plus or minus 1.5 mm.

3.3 INSTALLATION

.1 Install and glaze skylights in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions as modified by reviewed shop drawings and instructions herein.

.2 Erect components in proper alignment.

.3 Skylights shall be installed, glazed and adjusted by experienced workmen in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings. All items in this section shall be set in their correct locations and shall be level, square, plumb and all proper elevations and alignment with other work.

.4 Install membrane support flashings to provide continuous support of membranes.

.5 Install membranes as required to provide continuous air/moisture barriers within and at interfaces of skylight system.

.6 Protect skylights and other materials from damage during and after installation until acceptance by the general contractor. Thereafter it shall be the responsibility of the general contractor to maintain protection and provide final cleaning.





.7 Install metal sills and flashing with uniform wash to exterior, level in length, straight in alignment with plumb building framing faces. All metal flashings shall be installed with a minimum 5% slope to the exterior.

.8 The cavity between the frame and the rigid roof insulation at the perimeters shall be insulated with semi rigid fibreglass insulation, with a minimum 10mm drainage gap between the insulation and flashing or panel.

.9 All aluminum frame surfaces and flashings that contact dissimilar metals and interior finishes, shall be coated with a suitable alkali-resistant material such as a bituminous paint or epoxy resin solution.

.10 Condensation gutter at sill is to be continuous. Make watertight all joints in gutter system. Seal around penetrations with silicone sealant.

.11 Seal joint connections of framing with butyl tape 3.5mm minimum thick and sealant. Extend tape to seal joint between interior gaskets. Provide drips at ends of condensation gutters.

.12 Allow space between the curb and the counterflashing for the metal base flashing to be installed.

.13 Build-in and provide any supplementary reinforcing, framing required by assembly load requirements.

.14 Install glazing to details and instructions, using material specified.

.15 Gaskets shall be keyed in place and sized for glazing system for both inside and outside. Snap covered and pressure plates shall be of a continuous length from corner to corner, and be fitted at corners to allow for thermal expansion.

.16 All preformed gaskets shall be of a continuous length corner to corner and shall be cut over length to allow for shrinkage of gaskets. Gaskets shall be installed from the starting junction and installed by pushing back toward the starting corner. Do not stretch gaskets.

.17 Seal all joints in gaskets.

.18 Install ramp seals as required to prevent retention of water at pressure caps where applicable.

.19 Clean all contact surfaces of glazing with solvent and wipe dry. Ensure all glazing channels are clean, true to line, and free of dirt or debris and that weep and drainage vents are open.

.20 Install anti-rotation aluminum or PVC channel and mechanically fasten with stainless steel screws, to retain members.

.21 Insulation installation: Groove vertically at plane of membrane as required to provide drainage.

.22 Exterior flashings installed in neat shingle fashion with allowance for movement.





3.4 CLEANING

.1 Remove all protective materials from metalwork and glazing. Remove all labels, and deposits which affect appearance or operation. Remove all excess sealants from exposed surfaces.

.2 Aluminium work .1 Clean anodized finishes according to AAMA 609 & 610.

.3 Glass .1 Clean glass surfaces according to instructions provided by glass fabricator or

window/door manufacturer. .2 Glass cleaning solutions to conform to CAN/CGSB-2.55

.4 Do not use vigorous cleaning methods. Avoid scratching glass or aluminium finish. Contractor to be responsible for damages resulting from the use of other cleaning methods.





8 OPENINGS SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING & MIRRORS page 1 of 8

1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Furnish all labour, materials, equipment and services necessary for the supply and installation of miscellaneous glass, as indicated on the drawings, as scheduled, and as specified herein.

.2 The work shall include, but shall not necessarily be limited to, the supply and installation of the following:

.1 Glass in entrance doors, curtain wall glazing, interior door sidelights, storefront and transoms.

.2 Fire-rated glazing materials.

.3 Unframed mirrors in Washrooms.

.4 Other glass as indicated or scheduled.

.5 All glazing channels, and glazing materials required to install above glass.

.3 This Subcontractor shall be responsible for the complete installation of all interior miscellaneous glass and glazing. Cooperate with the Contractor and other trades having a bearing on this work, to secure a satisfactory installation.

1.2 RELATED WORK

.1 Section 08 12 00 Pressed Steel Frames

.2 Section 08 20 00 Wood Doors

.3 Section 08 41 00 Interior Aluminum Doors and Windows

.4 Section 08 44 00 Exterior Aluminum Windows and Doors

1.3 REFERENCES


.2 Glazing Systems Specifications Manual by GCA of BC

.3 IGMAC ‘Glazing Recommendations for Sealed Insulating Glass Units’

.4 IGMAC ‘Sloped Glazing Guidelines’

.5 GANA ‘Glazing Manual’

.6 CAN/CGSB-2.55, Glass Cleaner

.7 CAN/CGSB-19.18, Sealing Compound, Silicone Base, Solvent Curing.

.8 CAN/CGSB-19.2, Glazing compound, non-hardening, modified oil type.

.9 CAN/CGSB-12.1, ‘Glass Safety, Tempered or Laminated’

.10 CAN/CGSB-12.3, ‘Glass, Polished Plate or Float, Flat, Clear’





.11 CAN/CGSB-12.8, Insulating Glass Units

.12 CAN/CGSP-12.9, ‘Spandrel Glass’

.13 CAN/CGSB-12.11, ‘Glass, Wired, Safety’

.14 CAN/CGSB-12.20 ‘Structural Design of Glass for Buildings’

.15 ASTM C 1048, ‘Standard Specification for Heat-treated Flat Glass – Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass’

1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

.1 Structural Design:

.1 Design glass according to CAN/CGSB-12.20. Limit glass deflection to L/175, to a maximum of 20mm for any single light of glass.

.2 Design for loads as applicable by BCBC including wind (positive and negative), snow, seismic and other as required.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


.2 Submit samples of all glass to the Architect for approval.

.3 Quality Control Documents:

.1 Submit letter from insulating glass fabricator stating current IGMAC compliance number and identifying the types of edge construction covered by that number.

.4 Maintenance Data:

.1 Submit maintenance data for cleaning glass and polycarbonate units for inclusion in the project maintenance manual.

.5 Warranties:

.1 Provide manufacturer’s limited warranty.


.1 Glass and glazing work of this section to conform to good glazing practice as described in the IGMAC ‘Glazing Recommendations for Sealed Insulating Glass Units’, IGMAC ‘Sloped Glazing Guidelines’, and the GANA ‘Glazing Manual’.

.2 All glass to bear manufacturer’s labels identifying glass type and thickness. Labels to remain on glass until final cleaning.

.3 Sealed insulating unit manufacturer to be a member in good standing of IGMAC, and be prepared to submit evidence of current membership to the Consultant upon request.





1.7 MOCK-UP

.1 The first glazing unit installed will serve as mock-up to show location, size, shape and depth of new glazing tape, glazing spline, and sealants. Do not proceed with any other glazing work until the mock-up has been reviewed and approved by the Consultant.


.1 Cases of glazing units must be kept upright, and blocked or strapped to prevent falling. Storage areas should be ventilated and dry. Units should not be stored in direct sunlight, and cases stored outside must be covered and ventilated to prevent damage from rain and condensation.

.2 When removing glazing units from cases or handling loose units extreme care must be taken to prevent breakage, edge damage or seal damage. Carry glazing units upright using straps or vacuum cups on both sides. Do not slide glazing units on their sealed edges.

.3 Loose units must be set at a slight tilt off vertical on blocks at quarter points. Blocking must be tapered or wedged to provide a flush support to the edge of the units at right angles to the unit surfaces so that individual lites cannot slide out of alignment causing seal failure or breakage.

1.9 WARRANTY

.1 All glass to be free from defects in material and workmanship, and continue to perform satisfactorily for a period of 10 years from the date of Substantial Performance of the Work.

.1 Satisfactory performance means compliance with the performance criteria and the testing and construction standards of this specification, and with the reviewed shop drawings. This includes the performance of glass and glazing materials, structural attachment, and sealants.

.2 Correct all deficiencies which appear during the warranty period, including removal and replacement of failed sealed insulating units, at no cost to the Owner.

.2 Provide manufacturer’s standard warranty stating that the sealed insulating units will be free from material defects obstructing vision for a period of ten years from the date of substantial completion.

.1 Contractor to obtain, on behalf of the owner, copies of standard product warranties from the respective manufacturers.





2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS

.1 All materials to be new, and to comply with the quality, fabrication and testing standards listed below:

.1 Float glass, Glazing Quality to CAN/CGSB-12.3

.2 Heat treated glass (tempered and heat strengthened): flatness and visual quality tolerances to CAN/CGSB-12.1

.3 Glass fabrication (holes, notching) of heat treated glass, to fabrication requirements of ASTM C1048-92

.4 Laminated glass: interlayer to be minimum 0.76 mm (0.030”) thick for sloped glazing.

.5 Safety glass: to CAN/CGSB-12.1

.6 Fire-rated glazing:

.1 Fire rating listed and labeled by UL for fire rating scheduled at opening locations on drawings.

.2 Permanently label each piece of glass with the UL logo and fire rating.

.3 ULC Standard CAN4-S104: Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

.4 ULC Standard CAN4-S106: Fire Tests of Window Assemblies.

.5 CAN/ULC-S101M: Standard Methods of Fire Endurance Tests.

.7 Insulating glass: to CAN/CGSB-12.8, unit manufacturer to be IGMAC certified.

.1 Edge Seal: twin primary seals of polyisobutylene; stainless steel spacer-bar frame with sealed corners, and filled with desiccant; secondary seal outside of spacer bar, bonded to both sheets of glass and bar, of silicone.

.8 Glass thickness as required to meet code requirements. Minimum thickness is 3mm (1/8”).

.9 All double-glazed units to be Argon-filled.

.10 South, West, East-facing, and Horizontal Glazing:

.1 Tempered clear glass

.2 Low E coating on the #2 surface

.3 Interior pane to be clear safety-laminated glass

.4 Exterior pane to be tempered

.11 North-facing Glazing:

.1 Tempered clear glass

.2 Low E coating on the #3 surface





.3 Interior pane to be clear safety-laminated glass

.4 Exterior pane to be tempered

.12 Typical Interior Glazing

.1 Both panes to be tempered clear glazing

.13 Fire-rated Glazing

.1 Wired glass to meet wall assembly requirements.


.1 Cardinal LoE3-366, ¾”, Double Pane


2.2 GLAZING ACCESSORY MATERIALS

.1 Setting Blocks: extruded, Silicone, shore "A" 80-90 Durometer hardness, width to match glazing unit thickness.

.2 Glazing Tape:

.1 Typical:

.1 Preformed, 100% solids macro-polyisobutylene butyl, paper release incorporating an integral spacer rod sized to provide adequate glazing clearances and pressures. Minimum thickness of 1/8”.

.2 .Acceptable Materials: Tremco (Canada) Polyshim II.

.2 For fire-rated glazing materials:

.1 Closed cell polyvinyl chloride (PVC) foam, coiled on release paper over adhesive on two sides, maximum water absorption by volume of 2 percent, to maintain fire rating of wall type.

.3 Foam Tape

.1 Silicone compatible, self adhesive polymer foam spacer.

.2 Acceptable Materials: Norton Thermalbond V2100 Spacer - 1/4” thick.

.4 Glazing Splines and Gaskets: Frame manufacturer's standard dry neoprene glazing splines and gaskets. Provide keyed type for fixed glazing stops and keyed or roll-in type for removable glazing retaining devices. Size glazing splines to provide recommended edge clamping pressure.

.5 Glazing sealants are to be neutral cure silicone and must be compatible with each other and all must be compatible with the insulating glass unit sealant.

.6 Sealants used as heel beads, or air and weather seals, in contact with the unit must remain pliable under all temperature conditions.





.7 The glazing contractor shall verify with the sealant manufacturer that the life expectancy and performance of the product to be used is satisfactory and should obtain the correct application techniques including the use of primers if required.

2.3 FABRICATION

.1 Fabricate units to requirements of CAN/CGSB-12.8 using dual seal consisting of a polyisobutylene primary seal and a silicone secondary seal. Maintain separation of panes with non-corrosive desiccant filled spacer core. Dehydrate air space and hermetically seal inner and outer panes at periphery with flexible sealant.

.2 Separators shall be made of stainless steel.

.3 Each glazing unit shall be legibly and permanently marked so that the marking is visible after installation of the glazing unit, with the manufacturer's name or trade name and the year of manufacture.

.4 Metal spacer core shall be straight and evenly set into the glass units and the primary sealant shall not extend past the inside edge of the spacer core by more than 1 mm.

.5 Insulating glass units shall be manufactured to conform to IGMAC recommendations and the manufacturer shall be a member of IGMAC.

.6 Both primary and secondary seals shall provide a completely continuous seal around the perimeter of each unit. Glazing units containing discontinuities in either the primary or secondary seals at the corners or along the length of the spacer bars will not be accepted.

.7 All preformed tapes or gaskets shall be of a continuous length corner to corner and shall be cut over length to prevent stretching. Joints splices and corners shall be mitred and sealed.

.8 Glazing units with vents, crushes, or shells along any edge of the glass will not be accepted

3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

.1 Install materials according to instructions from product manufacturers. Ensure materials which contact each other are compatible.

3.2 EXAMINATION

.1 Prior to installation, examine openings and frames prepared into which glazing is to be installed. Verify that all openings to receive glazing are square and plumb, correctly sized, and within acceptable tolerances to maintain uniform face and edge clearances. Notify Consultant of conditions which will prevent proper installation of work on this section. Do not glaze unsatisfactory locations until such conditions have been made good.





.2 Field check all dimensions prior to fabricating glazing units.

3.3 REMOVALS

.1 Remove all required glazing stops, glazing splines, pressure plates, snap caps and all other accessories required to allow installation of the glazing units.

3.4 GLAZING - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

.1 Remove protective coatings and clean contact surfaces with manufacturer approved solvent and wipe dry.

.2 Clean sealing surfaces at perimeter of glass and sealing surfaces of rabbets and stop beads before applying tapes, splines or gaskets. Use solvents and cleaning agents recommended by manufacturer of sealing materials. Ensure surfaces are free of moisture and frost.

.3 Install glazing tapes, splines and gaskets uniformly with accurately formed corners and bevels. Ensure that proper contact is made with glass and rabbet interfaces.

.4 Place setting blocks as per manufacturer’s instructions. Use two setting blocks placed at quarter points (1/4 of the unit width from each corner) or not closer than 150 mm (6") from the corners of the unit. Block thickness of 6 mm (1/4") is recommended. Thickness may be less for small units in sash glazing. Setting block width should slightly exceed the thickness of the glazing unit to support all component lites of glass equally. Setting blocks should be a minimum of 25 mm (1") long for every 1 sq. m. (10 sq. ft.) of glass area with a minimum length of 50 mm (2 inches).

.5 Provide edge clearances as recommended by the glass manufacturer and to a minimum of 3mm between the edge of the glazing units and the adjacent frame.

.6 Install dry glazing splines in one continuous strip around the perimeter of the window. Glazing spline must be installed in such a way to prevent rebound of the spline once installed. Spaces between the ends of the spline due to improper cutting or rebound will not be accepted.

.7 Edge clamping pressure should be sufficient to achieve an air and water-tight seal but should not exceed 1.75 N/mm (10lbs/inch) to avoid the risk of unit damage. Preshimmed tape should be compressed 16% of nominal tape thickness for 1/8" and 3/16" tape and 20% for 1/4" tape.

3.5 GLAZING

.1 Install new glazing spline on the interior glazing fin seal corners and splices water and air tight.

.2 Install glazing units, rest on setting blocks, ensure full contact and adhesion with glazing tape or spline at the perimeter.





.3 Provide required edge and face clearances and glass bite.

.4 Ensure vent and weep holes and passages remain free of obstructions.

.5 Install spacer tape or spline, pressure plate and snap caps.

.6 Install silicone sealant at corners and non-positively sloped surfaces of snap caps and pressure plates to ensure positive drainage.

.7 Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt and other substances from glass and adjacent surfaces at completion of glazing work.

3.6 FINAL CLEANING

.1 Remove all protective materials, labels and other deposits from glazing.

.2 Clean glass according to manufacturer’s recommendations.

.3 Glass cleaning solutions to meet CAN/CGSB-2.55 to avoid damage to glass surface. Confirm with manufacturer prior to cleaning of polycarbonate sealed units to confirm appropriate cleaning methods.

.4 Do not use vigorous cleaning methods. Avoid scratching glass. Notify Consultant of any scratched units for review.

.5 Clean and restore stained or damaged surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Replace damaged or defective glass at no cost to the Owner.

.6 The Contractor shall complete a final cleaning of all glazing and frames. This final cleaning is to be performed after rehabilitation work as directed by the Consultant.



Issued for Tender - 08 September 2011


9 FINISHES SECTION 09 06 00 SCHEDULE OF FINISHES page 1 of 4 1 SEE ATTACHED FINISH SCHEDULE

QUEENSBOROUGH COMMUNITY CENTRE EXPANSIONFINISH SCHEDULE

page 1 of 4

URBAN ARTS ARCHITECTURE SEPTEMBER 08, 2011

Room # Room Name Floor Base Walls Ceiling NOTESGROUND FLOOR N E S W Material Height

100 VESTIBULE 1 Tile 1 Tile 1 Glazing Glazing Siding GWB-Pt Wd Soffit, St 11'0" Ply backing for Signage (Education - LEED) + TVEFG 12" PLWS PLWS

101 LOBBY Tile 1 Tile 1 GWB-Pt GWB-Pt GWB-Pt GWB-Pt, PLWS Wd. Structure, St 26'0" Acoustic Panel (AWP) - allow for 100 sqft - location TBD12" Glazing, PLWS Glazing Glazing Fire Shutter Fire Shutter - See Section 8

102 LIVING ROOM Tile 1 Tile 1 Pt Pt Pt Pt Pt varies New tile, paint and refinish existing wall surfaces(existing building) 12" PLWS PLWS PLWS PLWS St existing Wd Separate Price #1

103 ATRIUM Tile 1 Tile 1 open GWB, Pt, PLWS GWB, Pt GWB, Pt / Wd Soffit, St 11'0" Acoustic Panel (AWP) - allow for 475 sqft - location TBD/Skylight12" Glazing, AWP Glazing, PLWS PLWS Wd Structure,St 26'0" See Millwork Drawings for valence details at reception desk

104 VESTIBULE 2 EFG Tile 1 Glazing Siding Glazing GWB, Pt Wd Soffit 11'0"12" PLWS

105 JANITOR Tile 1 Tile 1 GWB-Pt GWB-Pt GWB-Pt GWB-Pt GWB-Pt 9'0" Ply backing for Shelving12" Tile 2 Tile 2 Tile behind sink to 7'0" AFF

106 FAMILY WC Tile 1 Tile 1 GWB-Pt GWB-Pt GWB-Pt GWB-Pt GWB-Pt 9'0" Ply backing for WC Accessories + Change Table12" Tile 2 Tile 2 Tile 2 Tile 2 Tile to 8'-0" AFF

107 WOMEN'S WC Tile 1 Tile 1 GWB-Pt, PLWS GWB-Pt GWB-Pt GWB-Pt GWB-Pt 9'0" Ply backing for WC Accessories12" Tile 2, mirror PLWS Tile 2, PLWS Tile to 8'-0" AFF

108 MEN'S WC Tile 1 Tile 1 GWB-Pt, PLWS GWB-Pt GWB-Pt GWB-Pt GWB-Pt 9'0" Ply backing for WC Accessories12" Tile 2, mirror PLWS PLWS Tile 2 Tile to 8'-0" AFF

109 CHAIR STORAGE Conc Rubber Ply, Pt Ply, Pt Ply, Pt Ply, Pt Wd Structure 13'4" Plywood to 8'-0" AFFGWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt

110 EQUIP. STORAGE Conc Rubber Ply, Pt Ply, Pt Ply, Pt Ply, Pt Wd Structure 13'4" Plywood to 8'-0" AFFGWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt

111 GYM SERVERY Res Flr 4 Res Flr 4 GWB-Pt GWB-Pt GWB-Pt GWB-Pt GWB-Pt 9'0" Ply backing for MillworkFlooring welded to wall base

112 VESTIBULE 3 Tile 1 Tile 1 GWB-Pt, GWB-Pt GWB-Pt, PLWS GWB-Pt GWB-Pt 11'-0"Glazing PLWS Glazing PLWS

113 VESTIBULE 4 Tile 1 Tile 1 GWB-Pt GWB-Pt GWB-Pt GWB-Pt Wd Soffit, St Match New Fire rated walls to U/S of roof structure to enclose space(existing building) 12" PLWS Glazing PLWS Glazing exist. New Partition and glazing at east wall.

114 ROYAL RM VESTIBULE Tile 1 Tile 1 Pt Pt Pt Pt 9'-0" Separate Price #2(existing building) 12" PLWS Open PLWS exist.

115 WEST CORRIDOR Tile 1 Tile 1 Pt Pt Pt Pt Pt 9'-0" Separate Price #2(existing building) 12" PLWS PLWS Open PLWS exist.

116 MEN'S WC Tile 1 Tile 1 Tile 2 Tile 2 Tile 2 Tile 2 Pt 9'-0" Separate Price #2(existing building) 12" exist.

117 WOMEN'S WC Tile 1 Tile 1 Tile 2 Tile 2 Tile 2 Tile 2 Pt 9'-0" Separate Price #2(existing building) 12" exist.

118 GYMNASIUM PLWS PLWS PLWS PLWS New plastic laminate over existing plywood only to a height of 7'-0" (existing building) Remove existing p.lam wainscotting

200 LIBRARY Carpet Tile Rubber GWB-Pt GWB-Pt GWB-Pt GWB-Pt ACT/ 11'0"/9'0" Ply backing for Shelving Res Flooring behind Info Desk(partially existing building) Res Flr 1 AWP AWP, TB AWP Wd. Structure, St 13'4" See Millwork Drawings for valence details at reception desk

201 LIBRARY STORAGE Res Flr 1 Rubber GWB-Pt GWB-Pt GWB-Pt GWB-Pt GWB-Pt 9'0"(existing building) TB

202 LIBRARY STUDY Carpet Tile Rubber GWB-Pt GWB-Pt GWB-Pt GWB-Pt ACT 9'0"(existing building) Glazing Glazing

203 BOOK RETURN Res Flr 1 Rubber GWB-Pt GWB-Pt GWB-Pt GWB-Pt Ex. Structure 13'4" Book Return Slots - See Section 10

300 RECEPTION Res Flr 1 Rubber GWB-Pt GWB-Pt GWB-Pt GWB-Pt ACT 9'0" Smoke/ Security Shutter-see Section 8, South wall - 43" AFF


page 3 of 4


Room # Room Name Floor Base Walls Ceiling NOTESGROUND FLOOR N E S W Material Height

Glazing See Millwork Drawings for valence details at reception desk301 MANAGER OFFICE Carpet Tile Rubber GWB-Pt GWB-Pt GWB-Pt GWB-Pt ACT 9'0"

Glazing Glazing302 SOFT MEETING RM Carpet Tile Rubber GWB-Pt GWB-Pt GWB-Pt GWB-Pt ACT 9'0"

Glazing303 POLICE OFFICE Carpet Tile Rubber GWB-Pt GWB-Pt GWB-Pt GWB-Pt ACT 9'0"

Glazing304 ADMIN. HALL Res Flr 1 Rubber GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt ACT 9'0" Aluminum Base under glazing, see Elevations

Alum Glazing TB Glazing TB305 PROGRAM OFFICE Carpet Tile Rubber GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt ACT 9'0"

Glazing Glazing306 ADMIN. STORAGE Res Flr 1 Rubber GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt ACT 9'0" Ply backing for Shelving

307 SERVER Res Flr 5 Rubber GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt ACT 9'0" Ply backing for Shelving

308 FLEX OFFICE 1 Carpet Tile Rubber GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt ACT 9'0"Glazing

309 STAFF WC Tile 1 Tile 1 GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB-Pt 9'0" Ply backing for WC Accessories12" Tile 2 Tile 2 Tile 2 Acrylic Shower Surround, Tile to 8'0" AFF

310 STAFF ROOM Res Flr 1 Rubber GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt ACT 9'0" Tile BacksplashTile 3

311 FLEX OFFICE 2 Res Flr 1 Rubber GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt ACT 9'0"Glazing Glazing TB

312 MEETING ROOM Res Flr 1 Rubber GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt ACT 9'0" Ply backing for Pen Rail, TV, wall hooks + cabinet mountingPWC PWC Glazing GWB, Pt 8'2"

400 MULTI-PURPOSE 1 Res Flr 1 Rubber GWB, Pt GWB, Pt/AWP open GWB, Pt ACT 8'2"AWP Glazing Glazing Wd. Structure, St 13'4"

401 COMMUNITY Res Flr 4 Res Flr 4 GWB, Pt GWB, Pt open GWB, Pt ACT 8'2" Flooring welded to wall baseKITCHEN Tile 3 Ceiling Tiles to be High Washability

402 MULTI-PURPOSE 2 Res Flr 1 Rubber open GWB / ACT Glazing GWB / ACT ACT 11'0"Glazing Wd. Structure, St 13'4"

500 CHILDCARE ENTRY Res Flr 1 Rubber GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt open ACT 8'2"PLP, TB Glazing

501 CHILDCARE OFFICE Res Flr 1 Rubber GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt ACT 8'2"Glazing Glazing Glazing

502 CHILDCARE CUBBIES Res Flr 1 Rubber open GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt Wd. Structure, St 13'4"

503 CHILDCARE Res Flr 1 Rubber GWB, Pt GWB, Pt Glazing GWB, Pt ACT/ 11'0" See Millwork Drawings for ply panelling + sill details at South andACTIVITY ROOM PLP / AWT PLP / PWC GWB, Pt PLP Wd. Structure, St 13'4" West Elevations

504 CHILDCARE WC Tile 1 Tile 1 GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt 9'0" Ply backing for WC Accessories12" Tile 2 Tile 2, mirror Tile 2 Tile 2 Tile to 8'0" AFF

505 ADULT/HC WC Tile 1 Tile 1 GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt 9'0" Ply backing for WC Accessories12" Tile 2 Tile 2 Tile 2 Tile 2, mirror Tile to 8'0" AFF

506 CHILDCARE SERVERY Res Flr 2 Rubber GWB, Pt GWB, Pt open GWB, Pt ACT 8'-2"PLP PLP

507 CHILDCARE STORAGE Res Flr 1 Rubber GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt Wd. Structure, St 13'4" Ply backing for Shelving

ST01 EXIT 1 Res Flr 1 Rubber GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt Wd. Structure, St open Tactile warning strip @ top of stairsTreads/Risers Glazing, Pt Glazing Glazing Ply backing for handrails

ST02 EXIT 2 Res Flr 1 Rubber GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt Wd. Structure, St varies Tactile warning strip @ top of stairsTreads/Risers Play backing for handrails


page 4 of 4


Room # Room Name Floor Base Walls Ceiling NOTESSECOND FLOOR N E S W

600 FITNESS Res Flr 2 Rubber GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt, Mirror ACT 10'-0" Ply backing for cleaning stations (3), mirrors, ramp handrailRes Flr 3 Mirror, glazing Mirror, PLWS Mirror TB, Glazing Wd. Structure, St Varies Non slip Res Flr 3 on Ramp only

601 MECHANICAL Fluid App. Rubber GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt Wd. Structure, St open Refer to Mechanical Drawings for wall mounted equipment and provideblocking.

602 JANITOR Tile 1 Tile 1 GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt 8'2" Ply backing for Shelving12" Tile 2 Tile 2 Tile 2 Tile at sink area to 7'0" AFF

603 FITNESS HALL Res Flr 2 Rubber GWB, Pt open GWB, Pt GWB, Pt ACT 8'2"

604 WC 1 Tile 1 Tile 1 GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt 9'0" Ply backing for WC Accessories12" Tile 2 Tile 2 Tile 2 Tile 2, mirror

605 WC 2 Tile 1 Tile 1 GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt Millwork GWB, Pt 9'0" Ply backing for WC Accessories12" Tile 2 Tile 2, mirror Tile 2 Tile 2

606 ATRIUM BRIDGE Res Flr 1 Rubber GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt Wd. Soffit, St 8'2" Ply backing for TV, see elevationGlazing Glazing Glazing

607 ELEVATOR Res Flr 1 Rubber GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt GWB, Pt Wd. Structure openMACHINE RM

LEGEND ACT Acoustic Ceiling TileAFF Above Finish FloorAWP Acoustic Wall PanelConc ConcreteCpt Tile Carpet TileGWB Gypsum Wall BoardEFG Entrance Floor GrillPt PaintPLP Plastic Laminate PanelingPWC Presentation Wall CoveringFluid App Fluid Applied Flooring - see Section 09 90 00 - PaintingRes Flr 1 Resilient Flooring - LinoleumRes Flr 2 Resilient Flooring - Sports Floor Rubber TileRes Flr 3 Resilient Flooring - Non Slip RubberRes Flr 4 Resilient Flooring - Non Slip LinoleumRes Flr 4 Resilient Flooring - Anti StaticRubber Rubber BaseSiding Cedar Siding to match exterior, stain finishStair Treads Formed Resilient Flooring Stair TreadsSt StainTBD To be determinedTile 1 Porcelain Floor TileTile 2 Porcelain Wall TileTile 3 Ceramic Wall TileTB Tack Board SurfaceWd WoodPLWS Plastic Laminate Wainscotting - Refer to Interior Elevations + Section 06 40 00 - Millwork




9 FINISHES SECTION 09 20 00 GYPSUM WALL BOARD page 1 of 8

1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

The work in this section includes but is not limited to:

.1 Expansion and Renovation: .1 All new drywall surfaces.

.2 Envelope Remediation:

.1 Interior drywall repairs.

.2 Installation of interior finishes and trims.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Association of Wall and Ceiling Contractors of British Columbia: .1 AWCC Specifications Standards Manual.

.2 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) .1 ASTM C1396 / C1396M – 09a Standard Specification for Gypsum Wallboard.

.3 Canadian Standards Association (CSA) .1 CSA A82.27 Gypsum Wallboard .2 CSA A82.31 Gypsum Wallboard Application .3 CSA B111 Wire Nails, Spikes and Staples .4 CAN/CSA-G164 Hot Dipped Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles.


.1 Conform to the requirements of CaGBC LEED 2009 Materials and Resources Credit

4 – Recycled Content to achieve a minimum of 50% post-consumer recycled content in all steel products.

.2 Conform to the requirements of CaGBC LEED 2009 Materials and Resources Credit 4 – Recycled Content to achieve a minimum of 75% (combined pre and post-consumer) recycled content in all gypsum wall board. Paper face on gypsum wall board to be 100% recycled content.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

.1 Interior finishes shall be completed by competent tradesmen, experienced and qualified in the work that is required.





1.5 SUBMITTALS / SAMPLES

.1 LEED Product Summary Sheet: Furnish the Architect with a completed form for each construction material used. See Appendix 1 for sample Product Summary Sheet.

.2 Provide for approval, prior to installation, samples of materials to be used for the interior finish repair in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittals and Section 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry.

.3 Submit samples as required by Consultant.

1.6 Mock-up

.1 Undertake mock-ups of typical interior finish work including window and door trim, sill and drywall repair, and interior work related to siding repair as shown in Architectural and Envelope Drawings.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Gypsum Wall Board .1 EXPANSION AND RENOVATION:

.1 Standard Gypsum Wallboard to conform to Section 9.6 – Part 2, Item 1.1, AWCC Specifications Standards Manual, .1 Thickness: 5/8”

.2 Fire-Rated Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Type X fire-rated water-resistant gypsum backing board.

.1 Thickness: 5/8 inch (16 mm).

.2 ENVELOPE REMEDIATION .1 Standard Gypsum Wallboard to conform to Section 9.6 – Part 2, Item

1.1, AWCC Specifications Standards Manual, thickness and type to match existing.

.2 Gypsum Wallboard Accessories: .1 Metal Corner beads: minimum 0.40 mm (28 ga) Z 180 zinc coated sheet steel

to ASTM 525. .2 Metal Casing Beads: minimum 0.45 mm (28 ga) Z180 zinc coated sheet steel

to ASTM 525; “L” type or “J” type as required; beading angle or casing with one side knurled for joint filling.

.3 No plastic or PVC bead will be accepted.

.4 Paper Faced Metal Corner and Casing Beads: Sheet metal laminated to exposed paper tape; with metal flanges 19 mm to 32 mm wide as applicable.

.5 Vinyl mouldings: vinyl mouldings for joint treatment of vinyl faced gypsum wallboard.

.6 Aluminum mouldings: Extruded aluminum mouldings with clear anodized finish, meeting AAMA specifications.





.3 Gypsum Wallboard Joint Treatment: .1 Joint filler compound: dry-set mortar to conform to ANSI A-118.1 or latex

modified mortar to conform to ANSI A-118.4. .2 Joint tape: 50 mm wide coated alkali-resistant fibre glass tape. .3 Water: Fresh, clean, potable, free from deleterious matter of alkalis.

.4 Mechanical Fasteners by substrate: .1 Wood: Nails and staples to CSA B111, for interior areas. Wood screws to

CSA B35.4. Stainless steel, type and size to suite application. .2 Gypsum Wallboard: to ASTM C1002, self –drilling, self-threading case

hardened screws with Phillips type head to provide minimum stud penetration of 15.9 mm.

.3 Metal Framing: to ASTM C1002.

3 EXECUTION – ENVELOPE REPAIR


.1 Gypsum wallboard and joint treatment shall not be applied to surfaces that are damp or contain frost. Ensure framing components plumb and true, dry and sound. Report in writing, any discrepancies to the Consultant.

3.2 PREPARATION

.1 Carefully remove and store in a safe location until reinstatement all millwork, furniture, blinds, curtains, radiator covers, and all other materials requiring removal to facilitate repair of drywall and installation of wood trim and millwork.

.2 Provide suitable protection for window and door frames and other interior finishes which do not receive a drywall finish.

3.3 GYPSUM WALLBOARD REPAIRS

.1 As required, repair all damaged drywall so that it is ready for top coat paint application. All patches to be done to match the existing wall finishes to be unnoticeable after painting. Quality of patching will be reviewed by the Consultant for acceptance.

.2 Attach casing beads, if required, against windows and doors to allow drywall to finish flush.

.3 Attach corner beads to all exterior corners requiring repairs. Ensure that beads are applied securely.

.4 All casing beads, corners and stops must be applied plumb and square.

.5 Plan the gypsum wallboard installation to avoid butt-end joints if possible to reduce the amount of joint finishing.





.6 Keep vertical joints at least 300 mm from the jamb lines of doors, windows and other openings.

.7 Prepare existing drywall damaged areas by neatly cutting out drywall which is not securely attached or is fractured. Do not save small areas of drywall if one slightly larger patching piece will cover then entire plane of the wall. Cut infill drywall sheets so that the patched areas fit together neatly with the butt edges of boards in moderate contact; do not force into place. Remove ragged edges or burrs with rasp or sandpaper from existing and new wallboard edges.

.8 Gypsum wallboard shall be cut by scoring and breaking, or by sawing, working from the face side. Cutouts for pipes, fixtures, or other small openings shall be scored in outline on both sides before knocking out, or shall be cut with a saw.

3.4 FASTENER APPLICATION: .1 Screws shall be driven with a power screw-gun and set with countersunk head

slightly below the surface of the gypsum wallboard. The paper face of the gypsum wallboard shall not be broken by the screw.

.2 Perimeter screw spacing to be not less than 9 mm nor more than 12 mm from edges and ends.

.3 Screw spacing for other locations to be at 300 mm on centre.

.2 Provide additional backing or blocking where necessary to permit proper attachment and patching of wallboard. Edges or ends of boards parallel to framing shall be continuously supported.

.3 Mix joint compounds according to manufactures recommendations.

.4 All joints between adjoining wallboard panels to be filled solid with jointing compound and then taped with alkali-resistant fibreglass tape.

.5 Allow joint compounds to dry minimum of 24 hours, then sand, apply 2nd coat and immediately double back to fill out to a smooth, dense surface, free of blemishes and irregularities. Board edges butting against existing finishes to be filled and lightly feathered to conceal joint.

.6 All plaster repairs to match existing work in texture and finish including ceilings. Apply base and finish coats to match the thickness of the existing plaster. Finish all plaster repairs flush and smooth with existing.

.7 Prime paint all patched areas with suitable latex primer.

.8 Apply interior paint in accordance with Section 09 90 00 Paint.

4 EXECUTION – EXPANSION AND RENOVATION

4.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.





.2 Examine substrates to which gypsum board construction attaches or abuts. Verify pre-set hollow metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of gypsum board construction.

4.2 PREPARATION

.1 Ceiling Anchorage: Ensure that inserts and other structural anchorage provisions have been installed to receive ceiling anchors in a manner that will develop their full strength and at spacing required to support ceiling.

4.3 INSTALLATION

.1 Gypsum board - General:

.1 Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: Install and finish gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216.

.2 Locate exposed end-butt joints as far from center of walls and ceilings as possible, and stagger not less than 24 inches (610 mm) in alternate courses of board.

.3 Install ceiling boards across framing in the manner which minimizes the number of end-butt joints, and which will avoid end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger end joints a minimum of 24 inches (610 mm).

.4 Install wall and partition boards vertically unless otherwise noted.

.5 Install exposed gypsum board with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged, or damp boards. Butt boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) open space between boards. Do not force into place.

.6 Locate either edge or end joints over supports, except in horizontal applications or where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Position boards so that like edges abut, tapered edges against tapered edges, and mill-cut or field-cut ends against mill-cut or field-cut ends. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions.

.7 Attach gypsum board to supplementary framing and blocking provided for additional support at openings and cut-outs.

.8 Form control joints and expansion joints at as recommended by Gypsum Association, with space between edges of boards prepared to receive trim accessories.

.1 Maximum distance between control joints: 30 linear feet (9144 mm).

.2 Control joint locations to be pre-approved by Architect for visual effect.





.9 Cover both faces of partition framing with gypsum board in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chase walls that are properly braced internally.

.1 Fit gypsum board around ducts, pipes, and conduits.

.10 Isolate perimeter of non-load bearing drywall partitions at structural abutments. Provide 1/4 to 1/2 inch (6 mm to 13 mm) space and trim edge with "U" bead edge trim. Seal joints with acoustical sealant. See also 07 92 00.

.11 Where sound-rated drywall construction is indicated on Drawings, seal construction at perimeters, control and expansion joints, openings, and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant including a bead at both faces of partitions. Comply with ASTM C919 and manufacturer's recommendations for location of edge trim, and close off sound-flanking paths around or through construction, including sealing of partitions above acoustical ceilings.

.1 For double-layer partition systems, construction above acoustical plaster ceilings may be installed with base layer only.

.12 Space fasteners in gypsum boards per referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations

.2 Accessories:

.1 General: Where feasible, use the same fasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as required to fasten gypsum board to the supports. Otherwise, fasten flanges to comply with manufacturer's recommendations.

.2 Install metal corner beads at external corners.

.3 Install metal edge trim whenever edge of gypsum board would otherwise be exposed or semi-exposed, except where plastic trim is indicated on Drawings. Provide type with face flange to receive joint compound except where "U" bead (semi-finishing type) is indicated.

.4 Install gypsum board reveals where indicated on Drawings.

4.4 JOINT TREATMENT

.1 General:

.1 Inspect areas to be joint treated, verifying that the gypsum board fits snugly against supporting framework.

.2 In areas where joint treatment and compound finishing will be performed, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 degrees F (13 degrees C) for 24 hours prior to commencing the treatment, and until joint and finishing compounds have dried.

.3 Apply the joint treatment and finishing compound by machine or hand tool.





.4 Provide a minimum drying time of 24 hours between coats, with additional drying time in poorly ventilated areas.

.2 Embedding Compounds:

.1 Apply to gypsum board joints and fastener heads in a thin uniform layer.

.2 Spread the compound not less than 3 inches (76 mm) wide at joints, center the reinforcing tape in the joint, and embed the tape in the compound. Then, spread a thin layer of compound over the tape.

.3 After this treatment has dried, apply a second coat of embedding compound to joints and fastener heads, spreading in a thin uniform coat to not less than 6 inches (152 mm) wide at joints. Feather edges.

.4 Sand between coats.

.5 When thoroughly dry, sandpaper to eliminate ridges and high points.

.3 Finishing Compounds:

.1 After embedding compound is thoroughly dry and has been completely sanded, apply a coat of finishing compound to joints and fastener heads.

.2 Feather the finishing compound to not less than 12 inches (305 mm) wide.

.3 When thoroughly dry, sandpaper to obtain a uniform smooth surface, taking care to not scuff the paper surface of the board.

4.5 LEVEL OF FINISH

.1 Level of finish shall be as per Gypsum Association publication, GA-214-M as noted herein.

.1 Finish types are noted on Drawings or Finish Schedule.

.2 Sand between each coat of compound as required to remove ridges and other imperfections.

.2 Typical level of finish Type 4:

.1 Tape embedded in joint compound at joints and interior angles, wiped with joint knife leaving thin coat of compound over tape.

.2 Cover tape with two separate coats of joint compound.

.3 Accessories covered with three separate coats of joint compound.

.4 Fasteners covered with three separate coats of joint compound.

.5 Joint compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Sand to achieve a smooth paint-ready surface.





4.6 TOLERANCES

.1 Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch (1.5 mm) in 10 feet (3048 mm) in any direction.

4.7 CLEAN UP

.1 Clean all dirt, debris, excess material etc. as a result of rehabilitation work.

.2 Notify the Consultant immediately following completion of all interior work and cleaning within a room or other area of the building.





9 FINISHES SECTION 09 21 16 SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES page 1 of 5 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Supply and install the following vertical shaft enclosures:

.1 ULC W452, System A – to achieve minimum 3/4 hour rating

.2 ULC W452, System C – to achieve minimum 2 hour rating

.2 Extent of wall assemblies indicated on architectural drawings


.1 Section 07 84 00 Firestopping

.2 Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealants

.3 Section 09 21 00 Gypsum Wall Board

.4 Section 09 90 00 Paint

1.3 DEFINITIONS

.1 Shaft Wall: An assembly of steel framing, gypsum boards and other materials used to enclose elevator shafts, stairways, air shafts and mechanical components.

.2 Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C11 for definition of terms for gypsum board construction not defined in this document.


.1 The systems are UL/ULC Listed for fire resistance

.2 Oscillation tested to one million cycles to ensure performance of the life of the building

.3 UL/ULC Listed fire damper application

.4 Air Pressure Loads —

.5 Deflection Limit —

.6 STC Rating—STC 50


.1 Conform to the requirements of CaGBC LEED 2009 Materials and Resources Credit 4 – Recycled Content to achieve a minimum of 50% post-consumer recycled content in all steel products.

.2 Conform to the requirements of CaGBC LEED 2009 Materials and Resources Credit 4 – Recycled Content to achieve a minimum of 75% (combined pre and post-consumer) recycled content in all gypsum wall board. Paper face on gypsum wall board to be 100% recycled content.

1.6 SUBMITTALS


.2 Product and System Data – Submit system folder SA926, which can be downloaded at www.cgcinc.com (or approved alternate data).




9 FINISHES SECTION 09 21 16 SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES page 2 of 5

.3 Submit certification of manufacturer compliance with fire and sound requirements indicated.

.4 Deliver materials in their original unopened packages bearing manufacturer identification.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING.

.1 Protect materials from wetting and damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic and other causes.

.2 Warning: Store all Gypsum Panels flat. Panels are heavy and can fall over, causing serious injury or death. Do not move unless authorized.


.1 All materials shall be suitably protected from the weather during installation to prevent damage to the shaft wall.

.2 Install gypsum panels following environmental conditions, room temperatures and ventilation specified in Manufacturer’s Gypsum Construction Handbook.


.1 Protect Shaft Wall System and components from moisture before, during and after installation. Eliminate sources of moisture immediately.

.2 Fire-Resistance Rated Assemblies: Provide UL/ULC Design Number (e.g., U415) for basic systems.

.3 Preinstallation Conference – Conduct conference at project site. Review methods and procedures for work related to Approved Manufacturer’s Shaft Wall System assemblies.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER:

.1 Supply materials which comply with requirements of fire-resistance rated assemblies indicated in Drawings and Specifications.

.2 Acceptable Product/Manufacturer:

.1 CGC Shaft Wall System


2.2 MATERIALS

.1 Gypsum Liner Panels—ASTM C442, C1396, 25.4 mm (1”) Gypsum Liner Panels, 100% recycled green face and back paper, beveled edge, 610 mm (24”) wide, lengths as required. Stamped with UL/ULC Classification label documenting UL/ULC Classifications for fire resistance, surface burning characteristics, and non-combustibility. Panels should also be identified with the following language: “SHEETROCK Gypsum Liner Panel, A Component of CGC Inc. Fire Rated Systems.”





.2 Wallboard:

.1 ULC W452, System A: 15.9 mm (5/8”), 1220 mm (4’-0”) wide, tapered edge, SHEETROCK Gypsum Panels, FIRECODE Core, lengths as required. Identified with UL/ULC Classification label.

.2 ULC W452, System C: 19.1 mm (3/4”), 1220 mm (4’-0”) wide, tapered edge, SHEETROCK Gypsum Panels, ULTRACODE Core, lengths as required. Identified with UL/ULC Classification label.

.3 Gypsum Base for Gypsum Veneer Plaster—15 (or approved alternate).9 mm (5/8”), 1220 mm (4’-0”) wide, GRAND PRIX Gypsum Base FIRECODE Core (or approved alternate), lengths as required.

.4 Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Base Joint Treatment Materials—See Section 09 21 00.

.5 Fasteners - Screws: (10 mm (3/8”)) (13 mm (1/2”)) Type (S) (S-12) pan head; 16 mm (5/8”) TYPE S-12 low profile head; (25 mm (1”)) (42 mm (1-5/8”)) (56 mm (2-1/4”)) TYPE S bugle head. Type G Screws: 38 mm (1-1/2”).

.6 Metal Trim—No. (200A) (200B) (401) (402) (701B) (801B).SHEETROCK/BEADEX (or approved alternate) Paper Faced Metal Bead and Trim.

.7 CGC Steel C-H Studs (or approved alternate):

.1 Minimum depths

.1 ULC W452, System A: 212CH-18

.2 ULC W452, System C 400CH-18

.2 Hot-dipped galvanized,

.3 Lengths as required, and not to exceed maximum allowable.

.8 CGC Steel Jamb Struts (or approved alternate) to match thickness of wall, and not to compromise fire rating of assembly.

.9 Runner fasteners, power-driven type, to withstand required single shear and bearing force when driven through structural head or base and without exceeding allowable design stress in runner, fastener or structural support (obtain locally).

.10 Acoustical Sealant – See Section 07 92 00.

.11 Sound Batts – See Section 07 21 00.

.12 Zinc Control Joint #093.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Examine substrates and abutting assemblies with installer present. Proceed with installation after conditions determined to be satisfactory.

3.2 PREPARATION

.1 Check that system components are available to construct CGC Shaft Wall System (or approved alternate).





.2 Other Fire-Resistive Elements/Materials: Coordinate installation of Shaft Wall assembly with sprayed fire-resistive materials and other fire-resistive elements so that both elements remain complete and undamaged.

3.3 SHAFT WALL INSTALLATION

.1 Steel Framing and Gypsum Liner Panels

.1 Position steel J-runners at floor and ceiling with the short leg toward finish side of wall.

.2 Securely attach runners to structural supports with powder actuated fasteners at both ends and max. 610 mm (24”) o.c.

.3 For attachment to steel frame construction install floor and ceiling J-Runners and J-Runners or E-Studs on columns and beams before steel is fireproofed.

.4 For attachment to structural steel use Z-shaped stand-off clips secured to structural steel before fireproofing application.

.5 Remove spray-fireproofing from J-Runners and E-Studs before installing gypsum liner panels.

.6 For wall heights less than maximum available panel height cut gypsum liner panels no more than 25 mm (1”) less than floor-to-ceiling height and erect vertically between J-Runners.

.7 Where shaft wall height shaft exceed maximum available panel length pieces of gypsum liner panel must be butted together at factory cut ends.

.1 Position gypsum liner panel end joints within upper and lower third points of wall.

.2 Stagger joints top and bottom in adjacent panels.

.3 Screw studs to runners on walls over 4800 mm (16”).

.8 Cut C-H Studs 10 mm (3/8”) to not more than 13 mm (1/2”) less than floor-to-ceiling height.

.9 Install C-H Studs between gypsum liner panels with liner securely engaged.

.10 Terminations: Install full-length steel E-Studs or J-Runners vertically at T-intersections, corners, door jambs, and columns.

.11 Openings: Frame with vertical E-Stud or J-Runner at vertical edges, horizontal J-Runner at head and sill. Reinforce as shown in this product literature. Suitably frame all openings to maintain structural support for wall.

.12 Steel Hinged Door Frames: Install floor-to-ceiling steel E-Studs each side to act as strut-studs.

.13 Attach strut-stud (see 3.2.A.12 or 3.2.A.13) to floor and ceiling runners with two 10 mm (3/8”) TYPE S-12 pan head screws. Attach strut-studs to jamb anchors with 13 mm (1/2”) TYPE S-12 screws. Over steel doors, install a cut-to-length section of J-Runner and attach to strut-studs with 10 mm (3/8”) TYPE S-12 screws.





.2 Resilient Channels

.1 Install Resilient Channels horizontally to face of studs, within 150 mm (6”) of floor and ceiling.

.2 Apply Resilient Channels a maximum of 610 mm (24”) o.c. vertically (with open face up).

.3 Attach Resilient Channels to studs with 10 mm (3/8”) TYPE S screws driven through holes in mounting flange.

.4 Splice channel by nesting directly over stud; screw-attach through both flanges. Reinforce with screws at both ends of splice.

.5 Install 13 x 75 mm (1/2” x 3”) wide continuous gypsum filler strips to top and bottom runner.

.6 Gypsum Panel application with Resilient Channel: Apply base layer horizontally to resilient channels with end joints staggered. Fasten with 25 mm (1”) TYPE S screws 300 mm (12”) o.c. Apply face layer vertically with joints staggered; attach to channels with 42 mm (1-5/8”) TYPE S screws 300 mm (12”) o.c.

.3 Gypsum Panels

.1 Gypsum panels and fastening must be per the corresponding fire-resistance design number that is the basis of design.

.2 System A—ULC Design W452 and U415 Design or U469, 1 hour fire-resistance rating. Apply one layer 15.9 mm (5/8”) SHEETROCK FIRECODE Core Gypsum Panels to studs and runners with 25 mm (1”) TYPE S or S-12 (typical) Screws. Fastener Spacing – Space screws 300 mm (12”) o.c. for vertical panel application, 200 mm (8”) o.c. for horizontal panel application.

.3 System C—ULC Design W452, ULC W508, or UL Design U415, 2 hour fire-

resistance rating. Apply one layer SHEETROCK ULTRACODE 19.1 mm (3/4”) thick Gypsum Panels, with long edges parallel or perpendicular to framing, secured with 32 mm (1-1/4”) long TYPE S screws spaced 203 mm (8”) along the long edges, and 305 mm (12”) in the field when installed parallel, or 203 mm (8”) along the butt ends and in the field when installed perpendicular. Joints perpendicular to framing need not be backed by steel framing. Screws along side joints offset 102 mm (4”). Requires minimum 102 mm (4”) deep framing. Requires minimum 76 mm (3”) thick mineral fibre batts from rock or slag.

3.4 ACCESSORY APPLICATION

.1 Gypsum Panel Joints—Finish all face layer joints and internal angles with a CGC Interior Finishing System (or approved alternate) installed according to manufacturer’s directions.

.2 Corner Bead—Reinforce all vertical and horizontal exterior corners with Paper Faced Bead.





9 FINISHES SECTION 09 30 00 TILING page 1 of 5 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED .1 Furnish all labour materials equipment and services necessary for the supply and

installation of all stone and ceramic tile, as indicated on the drawings, as scheduled, and as specified herein.

.2 Work of this section shall include but shall not necessarily be limited to the supply

and installation of: .1 Ceramic floor tile .2 Ceramic wall base (12” typical height) .3 Ceramic wall tile .4 All setting beds, mortar, additives, grout and tile accessories required to

complete the above installations. .5 Divider strips at termination of floor tile. 1.2 RELATED WORK .1 Section 09 90 00: Painting. .2 Section 07 92 00: Joint Sealants 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Tiling work to conform to standards of the Terrazzo Tile and Marble Association of

Canada (TTMAC) as a minimum except where otherwise specified herein. .2 All work to be done by an approved Tiling Contractor with at least five (5) years

experience in work of similar scope and nature to that specified, employing skilled tile setters.


.1 All adhesives and sealants applied on site, and used on the interior of the building (inside of air barrier) must comply with the requirements of CaGBC LEED 2009 NC Indoor Environmental Quality Credit 4.1 – Low Emitting Materials: Adhesives and Sealants. Requirements include, but are not limited to, the following:

.1 Adhesives, Sealants and Primers: South Coast Air Quality Management

District (SCAQMD) Rule #1168 - volatile organic compounds (VOC) limits correspond to an effective date of July 1, 2005 and rule amendment date of January 7, 2005.

.2 Aerosol adhesives must comply with Green Seal Standard for Commercial

Adhesives GS-36 requirements in effect on October 19, 2000.




9 FINISHES SECTION 09 30 00 TILING page 2 of 5

.2 All work in this section must comply with the requirements of CaGBC LEED 2009 NC Indoor Environmental Quality Credit 4.1 – Low Emitting Materials: Flooring Systems. Requirements include, but are not limited to, the following: .1 All hard surface flooring must be certified as compliant with the most current

FloorScor standard. 1.4 SUBMITTALS


.2 Upon receipt of final design information, submit sample of each tile for architect's review. Failure of on-site work to match approved sample will be cause for rejection of work.

.3 Submit samples of grout colours available from manufacturer’s standard range for

selection by Architect. .4 Provide 2% minimum of each type and colour of tile and trim and grout for future

repairs. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING .1 Deliver all tile, grout, additives, etc., to the job site with manufacture’s labels and

seals intact. .2 Store all material, including grout materials, in a dry and secure location, away from

ground contact. 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 TILE .1 General: All tiles to conform to minimum standards of CAN2-75-M77, all first quality,

no seconds. .2 Porcelain Floor Tile: Type 1 – Floor + Base: 24” x 24” brushed porcelain SO Matte “Grigio/Grey” as supplied by Olympia Tile. Type 2 – WC Shower Floor

24” x 24” brushed porcelain SO Matte “Grigio/Grey” as supplied by Olympia Tile, cut into 4” x 4” tiles.

.3 Ceramic Wall Tile: Type 3 - Washroom Walls:

12” x 24” matte porcelain White Series “Matte” as supplied by Ames.




9 FINISHES SECTION 09 30 00 TILING page 3 of 5 .4 Ceramic Glazed Wall Tile: Type 4 – Kitchen backsplashes: 6” x 6” glazed ceramic Ceramic Festiva Series – colour to be determined - as

supplied by DalTile. 2.2 MORTAR & GROUT .1 Cement: White or grey Portland to CAN3-A5-M77. .2 Water: Clean fresh, and free of deleterious substances .3 Hydrated Lime: To CSA. A82.43-1950 (1992). .4 Sand: Clean, washed, and sharp, to CSA. A82.56M. .5 Additive: Latex type of approved manufacturer. .6 Leveling Coat (by volume) 1 part cement 1/5 to 1/2 part lime 4 parts dry sand .7 Bond Coat Mix (by volume) 1 part cement 1/3 part lime 1 part water .8 Latex Grout Mix Factory prepared mixture to be used to produce hard, durable, impervious,

permanent grouted joint; as manufactured by Crest Cements Fontile, Mapei, Laticrete, or other approved manufacturer.

Colours to be selected by Architect. 2.3 ADHESIVE .1 Organic adhesive CTA #11. Minnesota Mining & Manufacturing of Canada Ltd.

Glidden 711 or approved alternative. 2.4 ANTI-FRACTURE MEMBRANE .1 Anti-fracture membrane to be laid under all ceramic floor tile. 2.5 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE .1 Provide waterproof membrane under all Second Floor Washrooms.




9 FINISHES SECTION 09 30 00 TILING page 4 of 5 2.6 SLATE .1 Tumbled finish, dimensions as per Architectural Drawings .2 Approved product: .1 Pamas Slate, colour: IS209G “Ocean Green” 3 EXECUTION 3.1 JOB CONDITIONS .1 Remove from site all damaged or broken items caused by improper handling or

storage. .2 Ensure that all materials are fresh before starting work by recommended tests on site

to ensure proper permanent bonds. .3 Check that conditions of temperature, humidity, traffic, and usage are suitable as

required by Installation Manual specifications. Minimum temperature not to be less than 10˚C.

.4 Concrete surfaces must be cured 7 days minimum. .5 Ensure that backing materials installed under other Sections is secure and adequate,

plumb, level and within required tolerances. 3.2 APPLICATION .1 Confirm layout with Architect prior to installing tile. .2 Cut and fit tiles neatly around corners, fittings and obstructions. .3 Thin set tile to concrete substrate. Substrate to be filled with leveling compound to

slope to drain as required. .4 Contractor is to visually inspect all tile for uniformity of colour and thickness, etc.,

prior to installation. Chipped, cracked or split tile and edges are not acceptable. .5 Make joints even and uniform width in accordance with samples, plumb, straight, true

and even with adjacent tile to a tolerance plus or minus 1/16" over 94". .6 Variations in the floor and wall surfaces shall be evened and minimized by the tile

mortar bed. .7 Apply tiles to full perimeter of wall areas and heights indicated and as scheduled.

Replace all defective tiles.




9 FINISHES SECTION 09 30 00 TILING page 5 of 5 3.3 GROUTING .1 Generally: Clean face of tile and free from all mortar, thoroughly work grout into

joints to completely fill joints. .2 Ceramic Wall Tile: Using coloured latex grout as specified to TTMAC Detail No. 200-

5A. All to give a flush hard joint. .3 Floor Tile: Using coloured latex grout with waterproof additive as specified, to

TTMAC Detail No. 200-14. 3.4 CLEANING & ADJUSTING .1 After grout has set up, clean surface to tiles with plastic wool and water and wipe and

polish with a soft dry cloth. .2 Replace defective, upset, or misaligned tile. Make good skips, voids, or excess

grouting. 3.5 SEALING .1 Seal tile and grout with products approved by the TTMA, and as listed in the TTMA

Maintenance Guide.





9 FINISHES SECTION 09 51 00 ACCOUSTIC TILE & T-BAR page 1 of 3

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

.1 Furnish all labour, materials, equipment, and services necessary for the supply and installation of acoustic tile ceilings and t-bar for suspended acoustic tile ceilings, as indicated on the drawings, as scheduled, and as specified herein.

.2 Work of this section shall include but shall not necessarily be limited to the supply and installation of acoustic tile, suspension system, wall and edge mouldings, and framing within suspension system for recessed lighting and diffusers.

.3 Include also the design, fabrication, supply, and installation of seismic bracing restraint for acoustic tile suspension systems as specified.

1.2 RELATED WORK

.1 Section 07 21 00: Thermal Insulation

.2 Section 09 21 00: Gypsum Wall Board

.3 Division 23, Mechanical: Diffusers

.4 Division 26, Electrical: Light fixtures.


.1 Design seismic restraint for suspension system to the requirements of the BC Building Code 1998. Seismic restraint provisions shall follow ASTM E580-78.

.2 All acoustic tile and suspended ceiling systems work shall be carried out by skilled applicators experienced in the installation of the products specified.


.1 Conform to the requirements of CaGBC LEED 2009 Materials and Resources Credit 4: Recycled Content to achieve a minimum of 50% pre-consumer recycled content in all acoustic ceiling tile.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


.2 Upon receipt of final design information, submit (minimum 6” x 6”) sample of each tile for architect's review. Failure of on-site work to match approved sample will be cause for rejection of work.





.3 Extra Materials:

.1 Provide the owner with 2% of full-size acoustic tile material used, for use as maintenance materials. Label clearly and package materials to protect from being soiled or damaged.

.2 Provide the owner with 2% of suspension material used, for use as maintenance materials. Label clearly and package materials to protect from being soiled or damaged.

1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submit engineered shop drawings showing details of seismic restraint for suspended ceilings.


.1 Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

.2 Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.

.3 Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaged units in any way.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ACOUSTIC TILES

.1 Standard white square edge acoustic ceiling panels

.2 Typical dimension: 24" x 24"

.3 Smooth, clean, washable finish with anti-microbial treatment

.4 NRC rating of 0.70 or better

.5 ASTM E1264 Classification: Type IV, Form 2, Pattern E, Fire Class A


.1 Typical: “Ultima 1910HRC”, Square Lay-In as manufactured by Armstrong

.2 At Community Kitchen: “Ultima High Washability 1935”, Square Lay-in as manufactured by Armstrong.


2.2 CEILING GRID SYSTEM

.1 24" x 24" suspended t-bar ceiling grid, hot dipped galvanized steel with white finish.





.2 Approved manufacturers:

.1 Armstrong Prelude


3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install suspension system in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions and to conform with ceiling patterns indicated on Reflected Ceiling Plans.

.2 Support hangers for ceiling system independent of walls, columns, pipes, and ducts and erect plumb and securely fastened to the structure.

.3 All finished acoustic and wood ceiling tile surfaces shall be installed without visible undulations, to lines and levels indicated on the drawings. Assembled grid shall be level to within 3mm in 3658mm.

.4 Make joints square tight and flush.

.5 Install acoustic tile into suspension system only after all mechanical, electrical, and other work above ceilings and finish painting have been completed.

3.2 SEISMIC RESTRAINT

.1 Supply and install seismic restraint to suspension system as required by BC Building Code 1998 and best trade practices.

3.3 ADJUST & CLEAN

.1 At completion, replace any defective or marked tile or exposed suspension system. Adjust and level suspension system as required.

.2 Remove from site any and all excess material. Leave completed areas neat, clean, and in perfect order.





9 FINISHES SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING page 1 of 5 1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

.1 Furnish all labour materials equipment and services necessary for the supply and installation of the following as indicated on the drawings, as scheduled, and as specified herein:

.1 Resilient flooring

.2 Slip-resistant resilient flooring

.3 Sports flooring

.4 Wall base and accessories

.5 Stair treads


.1 Section 06 40 00: Architectural Woodwork


.1 All work to be installed by skilled workers with 3 years minimum experience in floor laying and to the requirements of BC Floor Covering Association Manual (latest edition) as applicable for the types and conditions that apply.

1.4 LEED 2009 REQUIREMENTS

.1 All adhesives and sealants used on the interior of the building (inside of air barrier) must comply with the requirements of CaGBC LEED 2009 NC Indoor Environmental Quality Credit 4.1 – Low Emitting Materials: Adhesives and Sealants. Requirements include, but are not limited to, the following:

.1 Adhesives, Sealants and Primers: South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule #1168 - volatile organic compounds (VOC) limits correspond to an effective date of July 1, 2005 and rule amendment date of January 7, 2005.

.2 Aerosol adhesives must comply with Green Seal Standard for Commercial Adhesives GS-36 requirements in effect on October 19, 2000.

.2 All interior flooring must comply with the requirements of CaGBC LEED 2009 NC Indoor Environmental Quality Credit 4.1 – Low Emitting Materials: Flooring Systems. Requirements include, but are not limited to, the following:

.1 All hard surface flooring must be certified as compliant with the most current FloorScor standard.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

.1 Samples: Submit for Architects review, samples of all flooring and base colours prior to ordering materials.




9 FINISHES SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING page 2 of 5

.1 Shop Drawing: Submit layout of sports floor tile pattern for review by Architect.

.2 Maintenance Data: Submit, at completion, maintenance data including procedures for recommended cleaning and polishing, for each specified type of resilient floor coving installed.

.3 LEED Submittals:

.1 Submit a completed LEED Product Information Sheet (Appendix 1), including product manufacturing location, recycled content, and volatile organic compound information (VOC), for each component of the flooring systems, including, but not limited to, adhesives, sealants, vinyl, linoleum, rubber and wall base.

.4 Submit documentation from manufacturer confirming each product’s compliance with FloorScor Standard.

1.2 EXTRA MATERIAL

.1 Provide 2% minimum of floor area for each type and colour used, for future patching.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

.1 All materials to be used in this contract shall be of the highest quality as manufactured by nationally recognized manufacturers and of the type indicated on drawings and these specifications.

2.2 LINOLEUM FLOOR

.1 Physical Properties:

.1 2.5 mm thick.


.1 Main Colour: Marmoleum Vivace

.2 Accent Colour: Marmoleum Real


2.3 STATIC DISSIPATIVE FLOOR

.1 Physical properties:

.1 Electrical resistance of < 1-10 8 Ω (EN1081)

.2 2.5 mm thick






.1 Marmoleum Ohmex

.2 Colour: 73032 “Mist Grey”


2.4 SLIP-RESISTANT LINOLEUM FLOOR c/w COVED BASE


.1 Slip Resistance: >0.6 SCOF

.2 Wear layer thickness: 2.0 mm – Contractor to install level with adjacent resilient flooring.

.3 Provide integral coved base


.1 Johnsonite Granit Safe-T


.3 Colour: 690 “Semolina”

2.5 SPORTS FLOOR:


.1 24” x 24” tiles in 1” thick configurations with a high density, wear surface

.2 cylindrical support feet that allow underside cable routing, and maximum resiliency.

.2 Recycled Content: 100% Post-Consumer content in underlay and wear surface

.3 Noise Reduction Coefficient: (ASTM C423) 0.10 sabine/ft²

.4 Impact Insulation Class:(ASTM E492) 49

.5 Sound Transmission Coefficient: (ASTM E413) 51

.6 Colors: to be specified by Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors.


.1 EVERLAST with Nike Grind UltraTile Recycled Rubber Molded Tiles and Adhesives manufactured by ECORE for indoor commercial applications.


2.6 STAIR NOSING, TREAD, LANDINGS, RAMPS:


.1 Rubber, solid colour, round studded surface for high traffic areas.

.2 Integrated riser at stair

.3 Contrasting colour rubber insert at stair to assist the visually impaired





.2 Approved Products:

.1 STAIRS:

.1 Johnsonite Roundel Rubber Stair Tread with integrated riser and contrasting solid colour insert as follows:

.1 Tread/Riser Colour: 20 “Charcoal”

.2 Contrasting strip colour: 55 “Silver Gray”

.3 Texture: Raised Round


.2 RAMPS:

.1 Johnsonite “Roundel” 24 x 24 Rubber Tile

.2 Surface Texture: Raised Round (RT-RD)

.3 Colour: 20 “Charcoal”

.4 Thickness: 3.175 mm

.5 OR approved alternate

.3 TACTILE WARNING STRIPS:

.1

2.7 EDGE STRIP: At open edges Flooring Reducer 1/8" thick taper, 1" wide.

2.8 RUBBER BASE:


.1 100 mm coved rubber base to specified areas only. Vinyl not acceptable. Integral coved base to be provided in areas with slip-resistant floor.


.1 Armstrong,

.2 Johnsonite.


.4 Colour to be selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard range.

2.9 PRIMERS AND ADHESIVES: Waterproof types with volatile organic compounds (VOCs) to comply with LEED 2009 Credit 4.1 – Low Emitting Materials: Adhesives and Sealants, and as recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer for specific material on applicable substrate.

2.10 LEVELING COMPOUND: Leveling and filler compound to be two-component type, consisting of liquid latex and dry premixed filler, as recommended by flooring manufacturer.





2.11 SEALER AND WAX: As recommended by flooring manufacturer for building use.

2.12 TACTILE WARNING STRIPS

3 EXECUTION

3.1 SURFACE CONDITION

.1 Examine areas to receive the work of this section. Commencement of work implies acceptance of conditions as they exist and no extra will be allowed for failure to ensure satisfactory substrate conditions.

.2 Allow concrete floors to cure 28 days minimum before laying flooring. Perform hydrology tests on new concrete slabs to ensure that the moisture content is sufficiently low to accept successful application of flooring

.3 Ensure temperature of surrounding area is within the recommended range of minimum 18˚C and maximum 21˚C. Avoid concentrated or irregular heating.

3.2 PREPARATION

.1 Remove all grease, dust and dirt remaining, fill cracks, holes, joints, with approved joint filler and rough grind to eliminate all irregularities.

.2 Carry out any additional preparation or work as may be required including leveling, in order to ensure a satisfactory installation.

.3 Where required prime surfaces with primers recommended by adhesive manufacturer

3.3 INSTALLATION

.1 LINOLEUM:

.1 Generally: Install in accordance with sheet manufacturer’s directions.

.2 Confirm location of seams with Architect on site prior to commencing work.

.3 Run sheets with seams parallel to building lines and to produce minimum number of seams.

.4 Double cut seams to ensure tight joints.

.5 Apply cement thinly and evenly as recommended by manufacturer.

.6 Roll flooring as work progresses and on completion with 100 lbs. minimum segmented roller, to remove all air bubbles and ensure uniform adhesion, if necessary weight with sand bags.

.7 Extend under free standing millwork and cut flooring neatly around fixed objects.





.8 Terminate flooring at centre line of door in openings where adjacent floor finish or colour is dissimilar.

.2 SPORTS FLOOR

.1 Lay tile according to approved shop drawings and manufacturer’s instructions.

.3 BASE & ACCESSORIES

.1 Edge Strip: Apply edge strip at all open ends of resilient flooring.

.2 Base: Fit joints of base tight and install in longest possible lengths. Miter internal corners of base. Install preformed external corner pieces.

3.4 PROTECTION & CLEANING

.1 Do not allow loads or traffic on flooring for at least 48 hours after installation.

.2 Do not flood with water for at least two (2) weeks after installation.

.3 Clean, seal and wax new floors in strict accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions

.4 Protect traffic lanes with heavy paper.





9 FINISHES SECTION 09 68 00 CARPETING page 1 of 4 1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

.1 Furnish all labour materials equipment and services necessary for the supply and installation of carpet tile and accessories, as indicated on the drawings, as scheduled, and as specified herein.

.2 Work of this section shall include but shall not necessarily be limited to the supply and installation of the following:

.1 Glue-down carpet tile to floor areas as indicated on drawings

.2 Glue-down carpet tile for operable partition – both sides

.3 All accessories, including adhesives, carpet nosing strips, and as required for carpeting.

.4 Preparation of subfloors to receive carpeting.

1.2 RELATED WORK

.1 Section 09 65 00: Resilient flooring.

.2 Section 09 30 00: Tile.


.1 Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI) - Green Label Plus Certification

.2 Lightfastness: AATCC 16 – E

.3 Smoke density: ASTM E – 662


.1 All adhesives and sealants used on the interior of the building (interior side of air barrier) must comply with the requirements of CaGBC LEED 2009 NC Indoor Environmental Quality Credit 4.1 – Low Emiting Materials: Adhesives and Sealants. Requirements include, but are not limited to, the following:

.1 Ahesives, Sealants and Primers: South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule #1168.

.1 Volatile organic compounds (VOC) limit for carpet adhesive is 50 g/L.

.2 Aerosol adhesives must comply with Green Seal Standard for Commercial Adhesives GS-36 requirements in effect on October 19, 2000.

.2 All interior flooring must comply with the requirements of CaGBC LEED 2009 NC Indoor Environmental Quality Credit 4.1 – Low Emiting Materials: Flooring Systems. Requirements include, but are not limited to, the following:

.1 All carpet installed in the building shall meet the testing and product requirements of the Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI) Green Label Plus program.

.2 All carpet cushion installed in the building shall meet the testing and product requirements of the Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI) Green Label program.




9 FINISHES SECTION 09 68 00 CARPETING page 2 of 4

.3 Total recycled content, as defined in CaGBC LEED NC 2009, Materials and Resources Credit 4: Recycled Content, to be minimum 65%. Post-consumer Recycled Content to be minimum 25%.

1.5 GUARANTEE

.1 Provide a written guarantee that the carpeting is guarantied against deterioration and failure of material, seams and other defects of material and workmanship detrimental to appearance and performance under normal traffic conditions, for a period of one (1) year, and that all defects will be made good, without cost to Owner. In addition provide manufacturer's guarantee to cover defects in carpet material for ten (10) years against unraveling, colour fading, shrinkage, curling, delaminating, or deterioration of backing materials.

.2 Any carpeting not complying with the above guarantees at any time during the

guarantee periods shall be replaced (labour and material) promptly at no cost to the Owner.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIAL

.1 Provide 2% minimum of each type and colour of carpet used, for future patching and

maintenance. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 All work shall be by qualified tradesmen; experienced in the installation of carpets; installed according to the best trade practice for a first class job.

.2 All work to be performed in strict accordance with National Floor Covering

Association (NFCA) specification manual and the manufacturer’s recommendations for type and condition of work that apply.

1.8 SUBMITTALS

.1 LEED Submittals: .1 Submit a completed LEED Product Information Sheet (appendix A), including

product manufacturing location, recycled content, and volatile organic compound information (VOC), for each component of the flooring system.

.2 Submit documentation from manufacturer confirming each product’s compliance with

CRI Green Label Plus Program.

.3 Samples: Upon request, furnish the Architect with complete duplicate colour samples of carpeting, all tagged with full identification. Also submit copies of manufacturer’s printed trade specifications and installation procedures for all types of specified carpet. Submit samples of nosing strips to Architect for colour selection.




9 FINISHES SECTION 09 68 00 CARPETING page 3 of 4

.4 Layout Plans: Submit to Architect plans showing proposed location of carpet tile layout, and open edges for carpeting specified. Do not begin installation without receipt of Architects approval of layout plan.

.5 Maintenance Manuals: At completion of installation, furnish Owner with four (4)

copies of complete maintenance instructions for cleaning and care of carpeting.

2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET 1: Floor Applications

.1 Carpet Tile: .1 Tufted Textured Loop 14 oz yarn weight .2 Size - 24” x 24” .3 Backing - GlasBac .4 100% solution dyed Nylon .5 Soil and Stain Protection .6 Anti-microbial Treatment .7 Green Label Plus Certification .8 47 – 50% Recycled content

.2 Warranties: 10 year Commercial Limited.


.1 Interface “Primary Stitch” with ReTile backing

.2 Approved alternate 2.2 CARPET 2: Operable Partition Wall Application

.1 Carpet for Operable Partition: .1 Tufted Textured Loop .2 Size - 24” x 24” .3 Backing - GlasBac .4 100% solution dyed Nylon .5 Soil and Stain Protection .6 Anti-microbial Treatment .7 Green Label Plus Certification .8 47 – 50% Recycled content

.2 Warranties: 10 year Commercial Limited


.1 Interface “Monochrome” with GlasBac RETile backing in 5 colours





9 FINISHES SECTION 09 68 00 CARPETING page 4 of 4 2.3 ACCESSORIES

.1 Leveling Compound: To be purpose made to carpet manufacturer’s recommendations. Leveling and filler compound to be two component types, consisting of liquid latex and dry pre-mixed filler. Ensure compatibility with carpet and adhesive.

.2 Adhesive: Direct glue down application of carpeting shall comply with LEED 2009

VOC requirements.

.3 Tapes and other Accessories: as recommended by carpet manufacturer.

.4 Edge Moulding & Reducer Strips: Submit samples for Architect’s selection. 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

.1 Prepare substrate in accordance with NFCA manual and adhesive manufacturer’s directions.

.2 Substrate surfaces shall be dry and free of all foreign matter. All ridges, high spots

and impressions shall be ground smooth and filled; cracks and scaling should be filled and ground away. Thoroughly vacuum substrate surfaces to be carpeted.

.3 Where necessary, feather substrate with leveling compound to allow for difference in

floor materials. 3.2 GLUE-DOWN INSTALLATION

.1 Install carpet and associated materials in accordance with NFCA manual.

.2 All carpeting shall have perfectly straight seams, free from pleats and all other

defects, uniformly stretched and securely fixed.

.3 Tile layout to be confirmed with Architect.

.4 Apply adhesive in strict accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Roll carpet to ensure complete contact with the adhesive.

3.3 PROTECTION & CLEAN-UP

.1 Upon completion of work, vacuum clean and cover traffic areas with heavy duty polyethylene walk sheets. Avoid static loads on newly installed carpeting until adhesives are thoroughly set.





9 FINISHES SECTION 09 72 00 PRESENTATION ERASABLE WALL COVERING page 1 of 2 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED

.1 Furnish all labour materials equipment and services necessary for the supply and installation of presentation erasable wall covering and accessories.


.1 Section 09 25 00: Gypsum Wall Board Assemblies .2 Section 09 90 00: Painting 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Flexible erasable surface to meet physical performance requirements for Type II medium weight wall covering as listed in G.S.A. Federal Specification CCC-W-408A.

.2 Adhesion of vinyl coating to the fabric backing shall be tested in accordance with

ASTM D-751. .3 Manufacturer shall be certified to ISO 9001. 1.4 REFERENCES

.1 ASTM D-1308, Method B-24 – Standard Test Method for Stain Resistance .2 ASTM E-84 Tunnel Test – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics

of Building Materials .3 Chemical Fabrics and Film Association (CFFA) CFFA-W-101-A, B, C, and D – Quality Standard for Vinyl Coated Fabric Wallcovering 1.5 SUBMITTALS

.1 LEED Submittals: Submit a completed LEED Product Information Sheet (Appendix A), including, but not limited to, product manufacturing location, recycled content, and volatile organic compound information (VOC), for each construction product.

.1 Samples: Submit for Architects review, samples of presentation wall covering and

colour options prior to ordering materials. .2 Shop Drawing: Submit layout of area in Meeting Room for review by Architect. .3 Maintenance Data: Submit, at completion, maintenance data including procedures for

recommended cleaning and polishing, for each specified type of resilient floor coving installed.

1.6 GUARANTEE

.1 Presentation Wall Covering shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer, by written certificate, for a period of five (5) years from the date of Substantial Performance, against any defects in the design, materials, and workmanship and that any defects will be made good by the manufacturer at no additional cost to the Owner.




9 FINISHES SECTION 09 72 00 PRESENTATION ERASABLE WALL COVERING page 2 of 2 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Manufacturer: Walltalkers: Contact: Levey Industries @ 778-836-6835 or

www.walltakers.com, or approved equal. .2 Product: Flexible wet erase surfaces: Koro-rite: Supported vinyl material, consisting

of a through-pigmented, polyvinyl chloride, adhered to polyester drill backing with the patented PolyFox™ liquid fluorinated pre-polymer top coating applied to the surface.

.3 Colour: White Sand .4 Fire Rating (ASTM E-84): Class A 2.2 ACCESSORIES

.1 Adhesive: Heavy-duty pre-mixed clay-based wallcovering adhesive as approved by

flexible dry erase surface manufacturer. .2 Substrate Primer/Sealer: Clear or pigmented primer formulated for use with vinyl

and/or polyester flexible dry erase surfaces as approved by dry erase surface manufacturer.

3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION .1 Examine areas to receive presentation erasable wall covering with Installer present.

Correct unsatisfactory conditions. Start of work indicates acceptance of conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION .1 A temperature above 55° F (13° C) must be maintained in both installation and

storage areas for 72 hours before, during, and after installation. .2 Wall surface shall be smoothed or prepared to a Level 5 finish per PDCA

requirements. 3.3 INSTALLATION .1 The beginning of installation constitutes acceptance of surface conditions. .2 Install in accordance with sheet manufacturer’s directions. .3 Install the flexible erasable surface horizontally to minimize noticeable seams.

Erasable surface should be overlapped and double cut on the wall or table trimmed and edges butted for full height application only.

.4 Do not crease the flexible erasable surface. Use a seam roller to apply light pressure

to flatten the edges. END OF SECTION 09 72 00




9 FINISHES SECTION 09 84 00 ACOUSTIC WALL PANELS page 1 of 4

1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Section Includes supply and install of all cementitious wood fiber plank acoustical Wall panel system and installation accessories.


.1 09 21 00 Gypsum Wall Board

.2 09 90 00: Paint

.3 09 51 00: Acoustical Ceilings

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 ASTM International:

.1 ASTM C635 Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings.

.2 ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

.3 ASTM E1264 Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products.

.2 Ceilings and Interior Systems Construction Association (CISCA):

.1 CISCA Code of Practices.


.1 Recycled Content


.1 Performance Requirements: .1 Provide acoustical wall panel assembly designed and tested to provide

surface burning characteristics (ASTM E84) as follows:

.1 Flamespread: 0.

.2 Smoke Developed: 0.

.2 Provide acoustical wall panel system which has been manufactured, fabricated and installed to provide Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) rating as follows:

.1 NRC rating = 1.0

1.6 SUBMITTALS

.1 LEED Submittals: Submit a completed LEED Product Information Sheet (Appendix 1), including, but not limited to, product manufacturing location, recycled content, and volatile organic compound information (VOC), for each construction product and material.

.2 Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions.

.3 Recommended procedures for normal cleaning and removal of stains including precautions in use of cleaning materials that may be detrimental to surfaces.





.1 Samples: Submit selection and verification samples: 6 inch × 6 inch (152 × 152 mm)

sample for each wall panel unit required, showing full range of exposed texture to be expected in completed work and one 8 inch × 10 inch (203 × 254 mm) sample for each fabric color available.

.2 Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: Submit the following:

.1 Test Reports: Upon request, submit certified test reports from recognized test laboratories.

.2 Certificates: Submit manufacturer’s certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements.


.1 Installer Qualifications: Utilize an installer having demonstrated experience on projects of similar size and complexity.

.2 Regulatory Requirements and Approvals:

.1 Corps of Engineers Guide Specification:

.1 CE-219.01.

.2 International Code Council (ICC): .1 ICC-ES Evaluation Report ESR-1112.

.3 Underwriters’ Laboratories of Canada (ULC) label.

.1 Structural Cement-Fiber Unit-535X

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING

.1 General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirement Section.

.2 Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer.

.1 Prevent soiling, physical damage or wetting.

.2 Store cartons open at each end to stabilize moisture content and temperature.

1.9 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS .1 Environmental Requirements:

.1 Do not install acoustical panels until building is closed in and HVAC system is operational.

.2 Locate materials onsite at least 24 hours before beginning installation to allow materials to reach temperature and moisture content equilibrium.

.3 Maintain the following conditions in areas where acoustical materials are to be installed 24 hours before, during and after installation:

.1 Relative Humidity: 65 - 75%.

.2 Uniform Temperature: 55 - 70 degrees F (13 - 21 degrees C).





1.10 MAINTENANCE .1 Extra Materials: Provide 2% additional materials in full panel sizes for use by owner

in building maintenance and repair.

.2 Provide new unopened cartons of extra materials, packaged with protective covering for storage, identified with appropriate labels.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ACOUSTICAL WALL PANEL SYSTEM

.1 Approved proprietary Acoustical wall panels systems include the following:

.1 Tectum Finale Wall Panels: .1 Material: Aspen wood fibers bonded with inorganic hydraulic cement.

.1 Thickness: 1 inch (25.4 mm) baseboard + 1 inch (25.4 mm) Tectum furring with SoniCor fiber core between the furring.

.2 Edge: Long edges beveled

.3 Width: As per Drawings – Final dimensions to be confirmed on site.

.4 Length: As per Drawings – Final dimensions to be confirmed on site.

.5 Color: Factory painted white

.6 Mounting Style: [“A”] screw attached to suitable substrate.


2.2 ACCESSORIES

.1 Provide accessories as follows:

.1 Tectum Painted Head Drywall Screws: .1 Material: Steel.

.2 Length: as required to suit conditions.

.3 Color: White

.2 Tectum Moulding: .1 Material: Plastic.

.2 Designation: [CHC] [CHH].

.3 Tectum Touch-Up Paint:

.1 Color: White

3 EXECUTION

3.1 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS

.1 Comply with the instructions and recommendations of the acoustical wall panel system manufacturer.

.2 Install materials in accordance with governing regulations, fire resistance rating requirements and industry standards applicable to work.

.1 Comply with CISCA Code of Practices.





3.2 EXAMINATION

.1 Site Verification of Conditions:

.1 Examine surfaces scheduled to receive suspended or directly attached acoustical units for unevenness, irregularities and dampness that would affect quality and execution of work.

.2 Do not proceed with installation of wall panel system until unacceptable conditions are corrected.

3.3 INSTALLATION .1 Screw head to be flush with panel surface.

.2 Securely affix wall panels by means of splines attached vertically to smooth wall or furring strips. Engage vertical kerfs on the edges of the wall panels with splines. Apply adhesive or use Velcro hook and loop fastening where necessary.

.3 Cover field cut edges by means of trim or other moldings.

3.4 CLEANING

.1 Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel, trim, moldings and suspension members to comply with manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.

.2 Touch up any minor finish damage.

.3 Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.

3.5 PROTECTION .1 Protect installed work from damage due to subsequent construction activity,

including temperature and humidity limitations and dust control, so that the work will be without damage and deterioration at the time of acceptance by the Owner.





9 FINISHES SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING page 1 of 12

1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 The work described in this section includes interior and exterior paint application of Expansion and Renovation Work, and of Envelope Remediation Work.

1.2 SURFACES NOT TO BE PAINTED

.1 The following factory finished items do not require painting: .1 Pre-finished metal flashing

.2 Pre-finished metal cladding

.3 Mechanical louvers

.4 Shop finished metal fabrications

.5 Factory finished cabinets, counters, casework, and paneling.

.6 Plastic laminates

.2 The following surfaces are not to be painted:

.1 Concealed ceiling spaces and walls above ceilings.

.2 Surfaces scheduled as having no finish in Finish Schedule.

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 Master Painters Institute (MPI):

.1 New Surfaces - Architectural Painting Specification Manual, latest edition

.2 Existing Surfaces - Maintenance / Repainting Manual, latest edition

.2 Canada Green Building Council (CaGBC) LEED 2009 for New Construction (NC).

1.4 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED

.1 This section of work shall include all labour, materials, tools, scaffolds and other equipment services and supervision required to cover with paint the surfaces of the building or structure, the building services and accessories not otherwise protected or covered, as shown on the “Finish Schedule”, to the full intent of the drawings and specifications.

.2 All finished areas that are affected by the work (new and existing) are to be fully prepared and painted in accordance with this specification.

.3 All surfaces to receive painting are to be fully finished, suitable for the application of pre-treatments, surface preparation, priming and coating in accordance with the MPI Manuals.






.1 All paints and coatings applied on site, and used on the interior of the building

(defined as inside the air barrier), to conform with the requirements of CaGBC LEED 2009 NC Indoor Environmental Quality Credit 4.2 – Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and Coatings. Requirements include, but are not limited to the following:

.1 Architectural paints and coatings applied to interior walls and ceilings must not

exceed the volatile organic compound (VOC) content limits established in Green Seal Standard GS-11, Paints, First Edition, May 20, 1993.

.2 Anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to interior ferrous metal substrates

must not exceed the VOC content limit of 250 g/L established in Green Seal Standard GC-03, Anti-Corrosive Paints, Second Edition, January 7, 1997.

.3 Clear wood finishes, floor coatings, stains, primers, and shellacs applied to

interior elements must not exceed the VOC content limits established in South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1113, Architectural Coatings, rules in effect on January 1, 2004.

1.6 QUALITY CONTROL

.1 Retain purchase orders, invoices and other documents to prove that material used in contract meets requirements of specification and produce when requested by Consultant.


.1 Conform to MPI’s Painting Architectural Specification Manual and the Maintenance Repainting Manual, latest editions.

.2 Qualification of the Manufacturer: The paint products of the Paint Manufacturer shall be listed in the MPI Manuals under “Paint Product Recommendation” section, or approved alternative.

.3 Qualification of Applicators: The contractor shall have a minimum of five (5) years proven satisfactory experience. This contractor shall maintain a qualified crew of painters throughout the duration of the work who shall be qualified to fully satisfy the requirements of this specification.

1.8 WARRANTY

.1 Provide 2 year MPDA Warranty, or a 2 year maintenance period.

1.9 SAMPLES AND MOCK-UPS

.1 Submit duplicate samples in accordance with Section 01 30 00.

.2 When requested by the Consultant, prepare and paint designated surface, area or room to workmanship standards of the MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual for review and approval. When approved, surface, area, room and/or items shall become acceptable standard of finish quality for similar on-site painting work.





.3 When requested by the Consultant, prepare and repaint designated surface, area or room to workmanship standards of the MPI Maintenance/Repainting Manual for review and approval. When approved, surface, area, room and/or items shall become acceptable standard of finish quality for similar on-site repainting work.

.4 Apply coating test area to an agreed mock-up location to confirm method of application, material compatibility, adherence, bond, texture, finish and colour for each paint colour and type. Test area to be a minimum of 1 square metre.

1.10 SUBMITTALS

.1 LEED Submittals: Submit a completed LEED Product Information Sheet (Appendix A), including, but not limited to, product manufacturing location, recycled content, and volatile organic compound information (VOC), for each construction product and material used for the Project.

.2 Identification: furnish the architect with full identification of the make of paints selected for this project from the mpi approved manufacturers, including manufacturer’s name, product name, and specific voc data (in g/l, less water).

.3 Colour Boards: The architect will determine all colours and issue a schedule showing

where the various colours shall be applied. No extra allowed for repainting surfaces which do not conform.

.4 Samples: Prepare sample boards, in duplicate, painted with the type of paint and

application and deliver to Consultant’s office, as required until colours and textures are satisfactory and approved. Sample panels are to be minimum 11” x 17”.

.5 Maintenance: Provide an itemized list complete with manufacturer, paint type, and colour coding for all colours used for Owner’s later use in maintenance.

1.11 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

.1 Deliver and store materials in manufacturer’s original container, sealed with labels intact.

.2 Ensure dry delivery and storage of materials and equipment at site.

.3 Indicate on containers or wrappings: .1 Manufacturer's name and address. .2 Type of paint. .3 Compliance with applicable standard. .4 Colour number in accordance with established colour schedule.

.4 Store materials and equipment in a well ventilated place with temperature range 10 to 30° C.


.1 Safety: comply with requirements of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) regarding use, handling storage, and disposal of hazardous materials.





.2 Apply paint finishes only when temperature and ventilation at location of installation can be satisfactorily maintained within manufacturer’s recommendations.

.3 Substrate, ambient temperature and humidity must be within limits prescribed by manufacturer.

.4 Provide temporary heating where permanent facilities are not available to maintain minimum recommended temperatures.

.5 Apply paint finish only in areas where dust is no longer being generated by related construction operations such that airborne particles will not affect the quality of the finished surface.

.6 Apply paint only when surface to be painted is dry, properly cured and adequately prepared.

.7 Maximum moisture content of substrates as follows: .1 Plaster and Wallboard – 12% .2 Wood – 15% .3 Concrete – 12%


.1 Investigate structural problems related to safe execution of preparation of structure to be painted and report unsatisfactory conditions to Consultant before beginning work.

.2 Report to Consultant conditions of deteriorated materials found during preparation, not previously disclosed.

.3 Report to Consultant at the beginning of the Work if the existing exposed concrete elements of the building have some delaminated coatings to ensure repairs are made well in advance of painting.

1.14 PROTECTION

.1 Protect paint and painting equipment before use and during length of contract from climatic elements.

.2 Protect structure from markings and other damage. Protect completed work from paint droppings. Use non-staining coverings.

.3 Remove all electrical plates, surface hardware, fittings and fastenings, prior to painting operations. These items shall be carefully stored, cleaned and replaced on completion of work in each area. No solvent shall be used to clean hardware that will affect the finish of the hardware.

.4 Provide for protection of passing pedestrians and the general public.





1.15 SCHEDULING OF WORK

.1 Submit work schedule starting and final completion dates for approval by Consultant.

.2 Take measures necessary to complete work within approved scheduled time. Change in schedule must be approved by Consultant.

.3 Co-ordinate execution with other work at site.

1.16 ALTERNATIVES

.1 Products conforming to this specification must be identified in writing by contractor for approval by Consultant.

.2 Changing manufacturers' brands, sources of supply of painting materials from those previously approved must be approved by Consultant.

.3 Request for alternative approval must be submitted in writing and be accompanied by full literature and recommendations from manufacturers concerned.

1.17 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

.1 At project completion, provide 4 litres (1 gallon) of each type and colour of paint from same production run (batch mix) used in unopened cans, properly labelled and identified for Owner’s last use in maintenance. Store where directed.

1.18 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1 Paint, stain and wood preservative finishes and related materials (thinners, solvents, etc.) are regarded as hazardous products and are subject to regulations for disposal. Obtain information on these controls from applicable [Provincial] [State] [Local] government departments having jurisdiction.

.2 All waste materials shall be separated and recycled. Where paint recycling is available, collect waste paint by type and provide for delivery to recycling or collection facility. Materials that cannot be reused must be treated as hazardous waste and disposed of in an appropriate manner.

.3 Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste, including used sealant and adhesive tubes and containers, in containers or areas designated for hazardous waste.

.4 To reduce the amount of contaminants entering waterways, sanitary/storm drain systems or into the ground the following procedures shall be strictly adhered to:

.1 Retain cleaning water for water-based materials to allow sediments to be filtered out. In no case shall equipment be cleaned using free draining water.

.2 Retain cleaners, thinners, solvents and excess paint and place in designated containers and ensure proper disposal.

.3 Return solvent and oil soaked rags used during painting operations for contaminant recovery, proper disposal, or appropriate cleaning and laundering.

.4 Dispose of contaminants in an approved legal manner in accordance with hazardous waste regulations.





.5 Empty paint cans are to be dry prior to disposal or recycling (where available).

.6 Close and seal tightly partly used cans of materials including sealant and adhesive containers and store protected in well-ventilated fire-safe area at moderate temperature.

.5 Set aside and protect surplus and uncontaminated finish materials not required by the Owner and deliver or arrange collection for verifiable re-use or re-manufacturing.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 All materials (primers, paints, coatings, varnishes, stains, lacquers, fillers, thinners, solvents, etc.) Shall be in accordance with the MPDI manuals “approved product” listing and shall be from a single manufacturer for each system used.

.2 Typical interior paints:

.1 Acceptable manufacturers:

.1 General Paint

.2 Benjamin Moore

.3 Glidden

.4 Pratt & Lambert.

.3 Cedar Cladding:

.1 Accepted product:

.1 BOMOL Semi-transparent, semi-flat, Waterborne oil combination (solvent free)


.4 Exposed Glulam Beam ends:

.1 Accepted Product:

.1 MPI Approved, satin finish

.5 Reclaimed Glulam Beams:

.1 Accepted Product:

.1 MPI Approved, satin finish

.6 To meet CaGBC LEED 2009 (Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design) program requirements, use materials conforming to above Sentence 1.4: LEED REQUIREMENTS.

.7 Other paint materials such as linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, etc. shall be the highest quality product of an approved manufacturer listed in the MPI Manuals and shall be compatible with other coating materials as required.





.8 All materials and paint shall be lead and mercury free and shall have low VOC or cure free of blemishes or sags.

.9 Where required, paints and coatings shall meet flame spread and smoke developed ratings designated by local Code requirements and/or authorities having jurisdiction.


.1 Painting equipment to best trade standards for type of product and application.

.2 Consultant will determine areas where power tools or equipment may be used for both preparing and painting of substrate.

2.3 MIXING AND TINTING

.1 Unless otherwise specified, paints shall be ready-mixed. Re-mix prior to application to ensure colour and gloss.

.2 Paste, powder or catalyzed paint mixes shall be mixed in strict accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

.3 Perform all colour tinting operations prior to delivery of paint to site.

.4 Where thinner is used, addition shall not exceed paint manufacturer’s recommendations.

.5 Confirm with manufacturer that the addition of tinting components will not significantly affect performance characteristics.

2.4 GLOSS / SHEEN

.1 Paint gloss shall be defined as the sheen rating of applied paint, in accordance with the following values:

.1 Flat or matte – 0–5 units at 60 degrees to a maximum of 10 units at 85 degrees.

.2 Eggshell, velvet or low lustre – 5–25 units at 60 degrees to a minimum of 10 units at 85 degrees

.3 Satin – 20–35 units at 60 degrees

.4 Semi-gloss – 35–65 units at 60 degrees

.5 Gloss – 65 units or greater at 60 degree.

.2 Finish (i.e. gloss level) of all painted surfaces shall be as indicated by Consultant.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 CONDITION OF SURFACES

.1 Prior to commencement of work of this section, thoroughly examine all conditions and surfaces scheduled to be repainted and report in writing to the Consultant any conditions or surfaces that will adversely affect work of this section.





.2 No repainting or painting work to commence until all such adverse conditions and defects have been corrected and surfaces and conditions are acceptable to the Consultant.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

.1 Report to the Architect any condition adversely affecting this work. Do not commence work until all deficiencies have been corrected.

.2 Prepare all surfaces in accordance with the requirements of MPI Manuals.

.3 Protect all adjacent surfaces and areas from painting operations and damage by drop cloths, shields, masking, templates, or other suitable protective means and make good any damage caused by failure to provide such protection.

.4 Remove and securely store all miscellaneous hardware and surface fittings and fastenings including by not limited to electrical plates, mechanical louvers, light fixtures and trim, mouldings, etc. prior to repainting and replace upon completion. Carefully clean and replace all such items upon completion of repainting work in each area. Do not use solvent or reactive cleaning agents on items that will mar or remove finishes.

.5 Sand, clean dry etch, neutralize and/or test all surfaces under adequate illumination, ventilation and temperature requirements.

.7 Wood, plywood and millwork: All wood surfaces shall be clean and dry with moisture content readings of less that 15%. Remove all foreign matter prior to prime coat applications. Knots, pitch streaks and sappy sections shall be spot coated with sealer. Fill all nail holes and fine cracks after primer had dried and sand between prime and following coats except final coat. Back prime interior and exterior woodwork and all cut ends.

.8 Cedar Siding: Prepare surfaces as directed in MPI manuals and Western Red Cedar Lumber Association practical guides.

.9 Drywall: Surfaces shall be in a ready condition to paint. Remove contamination, prime surface to show defects. Any imperfections showing after application of the prime coat shall be corrected by drywall contractor.

.10 Mildew Removal: Scrub with a solution of T.S.P. and bleach, rinse with clear water and allow surface to dry completely.

.11 Concrete surfaces: .1 Prepare surfaces as directed in MPI Maintenance / Repainting Manual. .2 Include power washing to clean off surface dirt. .3 Fill all concrete to receive paint finish.

.12 Galvanized Iron and Aluminum: Clean, wash with solvent and apply etching primer. .13 Steel and Iron:

.1 Remove all dirt, oil, grease, rust, scale; where this cannot be removed by wire brush or sanding (sandblast or power chip to bright metal by supplier or installer), wash with solvent.





.2 Chemically treat with phosphoric acid solution all welds, nuts, bolts and

damaged areas.

3.3 PAINT APPLICATION

.1 Do not paint unless substrates are acceptable and/or until al environmental conditions (heating, ventilation, lighting, weather conditions and precipitation, or completion of other work) are acceptable for application of products.

.2 Cold weather painting, when temperatures are less than 10 degrees C, is only permitted when paints formulated for lower temperatures are used and manufacturer’s limitations are observed for maximum humidity levels and minimum temperatures. Contractor to submit technical information regarding paint manufacturer’s recommendations for cold weather work and protection.

.3 Paint and repaint all surfaces requiring paint, stain or coating to minimum MPI Manual finish requirements with application methods in accordance with best trade practices for type and application of materials used.

.4 Painting coats specified are intended to cover surfaces satisfactorily when applied at proper consistency and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation.

.5 Method of application and uniform coats of specified film thickness be in agreement with paint supplier and Consultant.

.6 Apply each coat at the proper consistency.

.7 Sand lightly and dust between coats to achieve an anchor for the next coat and to remove defects visible from a distance up to 1000 mm.

.8 Do not apply finishes on surfaces that are not sufficiently dry. Unless manufacturer’s directions state otherwise, each coat shall be sufficiently dry and hard before a following coat is applied.

.9 Interior woodwork which is to receive a paint or enamel finish shall be back-primed upon arrival at the job site with enamel undercoating paint.

.10 All interior gypsum board surfaces requiring repairs as a result of exterior wall rehabilitation shall be sanded, primed and painted.

.11 Exterior:

.1 To exterior surfaces a minimum of 3 coats.

.2 Exterior wood that is to receive a paint finish shall be back-primed upon arrival at the job site with exterior primer paint.

.3 Back-prime all cut ends of exterior woodwork.

3.4 REFINISHING OF EXISTING GLULAM BEAMS AND WOOD DECKING

.1 Existing glulam beams and exposed wood decking in Expansion and Renovation Work are to be refinished as follows:

.1 Sand existing finish to reveal original wood





.2 Stain wood to achieve matching finish with new, finished structural wood members.

3.5 MECHANICAL / ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND RELATED SURFACES:

.1 Unless otherwise specified or noted, paint all “unfinished” conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork and other mechanical and electrical equipment with color and texture to match adjacent surfaces, in the following areas:

.1 where exposed-to-view in all exterior and interior areas. .2 in all interior high humidity interior areas. .3 in all boiler room, mechanical and electrical rooms.

.2 In unfinished areas leave exposed conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork and other

mechanical and electrical equipment in original finish and touch up scratches and marks. Do not paint over nameplates.

.3 Paint the inside of all ductwork where visible behind louvers, grilles and diffusers

beyond sight line with primer and one coat of matt black (non-reflecting) paint. Paint the inside face of light valances gloss white.

.4 Refer to Mechanical and Electrical specifications for painting, banding, stenciling of

other surfaces / equipment.


.1 Painted, repainted and primed surfaces shall be considered to lack uniformity and soundness if any of the following defects are apparent: .1 Runs, sags, hiding or shadowing by inefficient application methods. .2 Evidence of poor coverage at rivet heads, plate edges, lap joints, crevices,

pockets, corners and re-entrant angles. .3 Damage due to touching before paint is sufficiently dry or any other

contributory cause. .4 Damage due to application on moist surfaces are caused by inadequate

protection for the weather. .5 Damage and/or contamination of paint due to window blown or air born

contaminants. .6 Evidence of poor paint bonding. .7 Painted, repainted or primed surfaces rejected by the Consultant shall be

made good at the expense of the Contractor.

.2 Examine surface for adequate preparation.

.3 Check all materials for correctness.





3.7 CLEAN-UP

.1 Removal of all paint where spilled, splashed, splattered or sprayed as work progresses using means and materials that are not detrimental to affected surfaces.

.2 Keep work area free from an unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials and debris.

.3 Remove combustible rubbish material and empty paint cans each day and safely dispose of same in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

.4 Clean equipment and dispose of wash water / solvents as well as all other cleaning and protective materials, paints, thinners, paint removers/strippers, in accordance with the safety requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

.5 Protect area where paint has been applied and avoid scuffing newly applied paint.

4 SCHEDULES

4.1 PAINT SCHEDULE

.1 The following titles and codes refer to Master Painters Institute Painting Specification Manual Premium grade unless otherwise noted.

4.2 EXTERIOR SURFACES

.1 Cedar siding: .1 EXT 6.4L Semi-Transparent Stain, W.B., Premium Grade.

.2 Cedar fascia, barge board:

.1 EXT 6.3N Semi-Transparent Stain, W.B., Premium Grade.

.3 Concrete Vertical Surfaces: (including horizontal soffits) .1 EXT 3.1G Water repellent non-paintable finish.

.4 Horizontal Concrete Surfaces

.1 EXT 3.2G Clear Sealer

.5 Cementitious Composition Board Surfaces: (vertical surfaces, horizontal soffits) .1 EXT 3.3A Latex [insert gloss level] finish.

.6 Structural Steel and Metal Fabrications:

.1 EXT 5.1B Inorganic Zinc / High performance acrylic [insert gloss] finish.

.2 EXT 5.1D Alkyd [insert gloss] finish.

.7 Galvanized Metal: (misc. steel, etc.) .1 EXT 5.3B Alkyd [insert gloss] finish.

.8 Glue Laminated Beams:

.1 EXT 6.1D Semi-transparent stain finish.





.9 Dimension Lumber: (underside of decking, siding, etc.) .1 EXT 6.2E Semi-transparent stain finish.

.10 Dressed Lumber: (including doors, door and window frames, casings, battens,

smooth fascias, etc.) .1 EXT 6.3B Alkyd [satin] finish. .2 EXT 6.3D Semi-transparent stain finish. .3 EXT 6.3E Semi-transparent stain / alkyd varnish [satin] finish.

4.3 INTERIOR SURFACES:

Paint interior surfaces in accordance with the following MPI Painting Specification Manual requirements:

.1 Concrete Vertical Surfaces:

.2 Concrete Horizontal Surfaces: (floors and stairs)

.1 INT 3.2G Waterborne concrete floor sealer.

.3 Galvanized Metal: (door frames, etc.) .1 INT 5.3C Alkyd semi-gloss finish.

.4 Glue Laminated Beams and Columns:

.1 INT 6.1G Semi transparent stain finish.

.5 Dimension Lumber: (columns, beams, exposed joists, underside of decking (including underside of existing decking to be refinished, etc.) .1 INT 6.2G Fire retardant clear satin finish. .2 INT 6.2J Semi transparent stain / polyurethane varnish matte finish.

.6 Dressed Lumber: (including doors, door and window frames, casings, moldings, etc.)

.1 INT 6.3B Alkyd semi-gloss finish.

.2 INT 6.3C Semi-transparent stain finish.

.3 INT 6.3T Fire retardant clear satin finish.

.7 Wood Paneling and Casework: (partitions, panels, shelving, millwork, etc.) .1 INT 6.4C Alkyd semi-gloss finish. .2 INT 6.4G Semi-transparent stain / polyurethane varnish matte finish. .3 INT 6.4T Fire retardant clear matt finish

.8 Plaster and Gypsum Board: (gypsum wallboard)

.1 INT 9.2A Latex eggshell finish.

.2 INT 9.2C Alkyd eggshell finish. (all Kitchen + WC + Shower areas)

.9 Window and door trims: .1 INT 6.3B, Custom Grade, Semi Gloss Finish.





.10 Cedar siding: .1 New materials: INT 6.4T Institutional Low Odor/VOC, Premium Grade, Flat

Finish. .2 Existing materials: RIN 6.4D Institutional Low Odor/VOC, Premium Grade, Flat

Finish.

4.4 INTERIOR COLOUR SCHEDULE: .1 PENDING





9 FINISHES SECTION 09 96 46 INTUMESCENT COATINGS page 1 of 5

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

.1 Preparing surfaces to receive fireproofing.

.2 Protection of adjacent surfaces from overspraying.

.3 Spray application of water based, intumescent, fireproofing on interior, exposed structural steel wide flange columns, HSS beams, pipe columns, and related exposed structural steel to provide rated fireproofing.

1.2 RELATED WORK

.1 Section 05120 - Structural Steel.

.2 Section 05210 - Steel Joists.

.3 Section 05310 - Steel Decking.

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 ASTM D 256 - Impact Resistance Test.

.2 ASTM D 638 - Tensile Strength.

.3 ASTM D 695 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength.

.4 ASTM D 790 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength.

.5 ASTM D 1002 - Standard Test Method for Bond Strength.

.6 ASTM D 1044 - Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance Test.

.7 ASTM D 4541 - Bond Strength.

.8 H ASTM E 84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

.9 ASTM E 119 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.

.10 U.L., Inc. - Fire Resistance Directory.

.11 SSPC-SP-1 Solvent Cleaning - Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC).

.12 SSPC-SP-2 Hand Tool Cleaning - Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC).

.13 SSPC-SP-3 Power Tool Cleaning - Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC).

.14 SSPC-SP-6 Commercial Blast Cleaning - Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC).


.1 All paints and coatings applied on site, and used on the interior of the building (defined as inside the air barrier), to conform with the requirements of CaGBC LEED 2009 NC Indoor Environmental Quality Credit 4.2 – Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and Coatings.






.1 Intumescent fireproofing system to provide a fire rating of two hours.

1.6 SUBMITTALS


.2 Submit product data under provisions of Section Section 01 30 00 Submittal requirements.

.1 Indicate product characteristics, performance, and limitation criteria

.3 Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions under provisions of Section 01 33 00 Submittal requirements.

.4 Submit manufacturer’s certificate.

.5 Submit test reports.

.6 Submit certified test reports indicating the following:

.1 Fire test reports of fireproofing application to substrate materials similar to project conditions.

.2 U.L. Design Listings from U.L., Inc.

.7 Submit applicator’s current certification, by product manufacturer, as a factory trained and manufacturer approved installer of this product.


.1 Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum five years documented experience.

.2 Applicator: Company specializing in applying the work of this Section with minimum 3 years documented experience and approved by manufacturer.

1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

.1 Conform to applicable code for fire resistance ratings.

.2 Submit certification of acceptability of fireproofing materials to authority having jurisdiction and to Architect.

1.9 MOCKUP

.1 Provide mockup of applied intumescent fireproofing.

.2 Provide testing and analysis of mockup to manufacturer’s published data.

.3 Apply sample section of 100 sq ft in size to representative substrate on site.





.4 Comply with project requirements as to thickness, density, fire rating, and finish texture.

.5 Examine installation to determine variances.

.6 If accepted, mockup will demonstrate minimum standard for the Work. Mockup may remain as part of the Work.


.1 When temperature is less than 40F, follow manufacturer’s field instructions for cold weather installation. Do not apply when surface temperature is less than 5 degrees F above the dew point.

.2 Provide ventilation in areas to receive fireproofing during and 72 hours, minimum, after application, to dry materials and dissipate solvent odors.

.3 Maintain non-toxic, unpolluted working area. Provide temporary enclosure to prevent spray from contaminating air.

1.11 WARRANTY

.1 Provide one year manufacturer’s warranty.

.2 Provide one year applicator’s warranty.

.3 Warranty: Fireproofing to remain free from cracking, checking, dusting, flaking, spalling, separation, and blistering. Reinstall or repair such defects or failures.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

.1 Albi Manufacturing, East Berlin, CT (860) 828-0571; “ALBI CLAD TF.”


2.2 MATERIALS

.1 Intumescent Fireproofing: Single component, water based, factory mixed, asbestos free, intumescent material blended for uniform texture; conforming to the following requirements:

.1 Bond Strength: ANSI/ASTM E 736

.2 Bond Impact: ASTM E 760, no cracking, flaking, or delamination.

.3 Dry Density: ASTM E 605

.4 Surface Burning Characteristics, ASTM E84:

.5 Flame Spread: 2.

.6 Smoke Developed: 5.





.2 Primer: Albi 487S, 490W, or type recommended or approved by fireproofing manufacturer.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

.1 Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.

.2 Verify that clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items required to penetrate fireproofing are in place.

.3 Verify ducts, piping, equipment, or other items which would interfere with application of fireproofing are not positioned until fireproofing work is complete.

.4 Verify that voids and cracks in substrate are filled, and projections are removed where fireproofing is exposed to view as a finish material.

.5 Beginning of installation means applicator accepts existing substrate.

3.2 PREPARATION

.1 Work in accordance with SSPC guidelines SSPC-SP-1, SSPC-SP-2, SSPC-SP-3, or SSPC-SP-6 as appropriate to prepare substrate.

.2 Clean substrate of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter which may effect bond of fireproofing.

.3 Seal all penetrations or open ended fireproofing termination by chamfering at a 45 degree angle and sealing with high heat silicone sealant.

.4 Install reinforcement over structural members as indicated on Drawings, or U.L. Fire Resistance Directory Listings.

3.3 PROTECTION

.1 Protect floor areas from this Work by completely covering with tarps or 4 mil polyethylene sheets.

.2 Protect adjacent surfaces and equipment from damage by overspray, fall-out, and dusting.

.3 Close off and seal ductwork in areas where fireproofing is being applied.

3.4 APPLICATION

.1 Apply primer and fireproofing in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Do not apply to surfaces which would prohibit proper adhesions.

.2 Apply primer according to primer manufacturer’s recommendations. Provide primer “cut-back” three inches for bolted connections and 12 inches for welded connections.





.3 Apply fireproofing in sufficient thickness to achieve rating, with as many passes necessary to cover with monolithic blanket of uniform hardness, density and texture. Spray, and roll smooth the finished surface.


.1 Testing agency to be retained and paid for by the Owner. Any materials that fail testing will be refinished by the Contractor.

.2 Inspections will be performed to verify compliance with requirements.

.3 Patch fireproofing, which has been cut away to facilitate work of other trades, so as to maintain complete coverage of full thickness on appropriate substrate.

.4 Correct unacceptable Work and provide further inspection to verify compliance with requirements, at no cost.

3.6 CLEANING

.1 Remove excess material, overspray, droppings, and debris.

.2 Remove fireproofing from materials and surfaces not specifically required to be fireproofed.





10 SPECIALTIES SECTION 10 11 00 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS page 1 of 3

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

.1 Supply and install the following visual display units as indicated on the drawings and specified herein:

.1 Tack boards

.2 White boards

.3 Display Rails and accessories for hanging informational, directional, art, and regulatory notices with rigid track that does not bend.

1.2 RELATED WORK

.1 Section 09 21 00: Gypsum Board

1.3 SUBMITTALS


.2 Shop Drawings: Indicate size and description of components, base material, surface finish inside and out, hardware and locks, attachment requirements, electrical requirements and connections.

.3 Tack Boards: Submit Manufacturer's full range of colour for selection by Architect.

.4 Display Rails: one (1) sample of each of the components for the system to be installed to the Consultant for verification


.1 Conform to the requirements of CaGBC LEED 2009 Materials and Resources Credit 4 – Recycled Content to achieve a minimum of 50% post-industrial recycled content in all tackboard.


.1 Manufacturer shall have a minimum of five (5) years documented experience producing products specified in this section.

1.6 WARRANTIES

.1 Materials and Workmanship for Tracks, Cables, Rods, Hooks and Frame Stabilizer: One (1) year (the “Limited Warranty Period”) from the date of purchase

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 WHITEBOARD:

.1 Non-magnetic unframed whiteboard.

.2 Product # NBB1230, as supplied by Richelieu Hardware, or approved equal.





2.1 TACKBOARD

.1 Unframed Tackboards

.1 1/4”thick

.2 self-healing,

.3 burlap backed cork, laminated to a 1/4” hardboard backing.


.1 Forbo Bulletin Board Cork


.2 Factory Framed Tackboards:

.1 Tackboard Surface: 1/4” thick cork laminated to a 1/4” hardboard backing

.2 Trim: Factory built, approx. 5/16" face, extruded aluminum trim with satia Anodize Finish

.3 Panel Size: as per drawings

.4 Panel Color: To be selected from manufacturer’s full colour range

3 C. Extruded Aluminum Trim with Satin Anodize Finish and Accessories 1. Factory-Built Trim:

4 Series: Specify Series b. Trim Face: Approximately 5/16". c. Finish: (Specify finish - Satin Anodize standard.).

4.2 ART AND DISPLAY HANGING SYSTEMS


.1 AS Hanging Systems, 3600-L Matte Blvd., Brossard QC J4Y 2Z2 Canada. Toll free: 866-935-6949, Phone: 450-619-7999, [email protected], www.ASHanging.com.


.1 Rod based system:

.1 Wall Track: Aluminum : Natural Finish

.2 J-End Rods (Square Profile): Aluminum.

.1 Finish: Silver, satin anodized

.2 J-End Rod Lengths: lengths required to complete track as indicated in Architectural drawings.

.3 Anti-Theft Secure Rod (owner supplied):

.1 Square Profile

.2 Aluminum - satin anodized finish.

.3 Rod Lengths: rods to be owner-supplied.

.4 Hooks: Anti-Theft Secure hooks to be owner-supplied.

.5 Frame Stabilizer: 12.5”/32 cm





3 EXECUTION

3.1 DISPLAY SYSTEM INSTALLATION

.1 Shall be as required for each system in strict accordance with AS Hanging Systems latest edition of the Installation Guide. A minimum of two (2) complete copies of the Installation Guide shall be on the project site at all times. Installation Guide is available for download at www.ASHanging.com.

.2 The wall surface and its substrate determine the type of fasteners to be used for the particular application. It is the responsibility of the installer to select the correct fastener for the particular installation. Failure to do so may cause property damage or personal injury.





10 SPECIALTIES SECTION 10 14 00 SIGNAGE Page 1 of 1 1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

.1 Furnish all labour materials equipment and services necessary for the supply and installation of all interior signage, as indicated on the drawings, as scheduled, and as specified herein.

.2 Work of this section shall include but shall not necessarily be limited to the supply and installation of:

.3 Interior orientation signage, room names and numbers, and Interior washroom door/wall signs/symbols

.4 Exterior Signage: “Queensborough Community Centre” surface applied at front of building as per Drawings.

1.2 CASH ALLOWANCES

.1 Provide the following cash allowances for signage:

.1 Cash Allowance for interior signage $6000.00

.2 Cash Allowance for Exterior Signage: $4000.00

1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Signage company is to submit shop drawings of all signs, symbols, and signage to be installed, clearly indicating the location of each item in elevation drawings dimensioning their position on doors or walls, artwork/graphic layout for each sign, and details of mounting.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

.1 LEED Submittals: Submit a completed LEED Product Information Sheet (Appendix 1), including, but not limited to, product manufacturing location, recycled content, and volatile organic compound information (VOC), for each construction product and material used for the Project.

.2 Submit samples of each type and finish of sign being installed to Consultant for approval prior to fabrication.





10 SPECIALTIES SECTION 10 21 13 TOILET COMPARTMENTS Page 1 of 4

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

.1 Toilet Compartments

.2 Urinal Screens


.1 Wall backing required to secure mounting brackets.

.2 Support for floor-anchored compartments.

.3 Toilet room accessories.

1.3 REFERENCES (including but not limited to)

.1 ANSI A117- 1986 Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People.

.2 UBC - Chapters 5 and 33 Requirements for Handicapped.

.3 Title 24, California Code of Regulations. Parts 2, 3, and 5.

.4 ADA, Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities, Federal Register Volume 56, Number 144, Rules and Regulations.

.5 Fair Housing Amendments Act of 1988, Accessibility Guidelines, Federal Register Volume 56, Number 44.

.6 Current Local Building Code.


.1 Approved Manufacturers

.1 Model numbers for compartments manufactured by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. are listed to establish a standard of quality for design, function, materials, workmanship, and appearance.


.2 Compartments shall be the product(s) of a single manufacturer.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

.1 LEED Submittals: Submit a completed LEED Product Information Sheet (Appendix 1), including, but not limited to, product manufacturing location, recycled content, and volatile organic compound information (VOC), for each construction product and material used for the Project.

.2 Submit samples of each type and finish of sign being installed to Consultant for approval prior to fabrication.





.3 Manufacturer’s Data

.1 Provide required number copies of:

.1 Product data sheets.

.2 Installation instructions.

.3 Replacement parts information.

1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Provide required number of copies of all shop drawings.

.1 Show fabrication and erection of compartment assemblies, to extent not fully described by manufacturer’s data sheets.

.2 Show anchorage, accessory items and finishes.

.2 Provide location drawings for bolt hole locations in supporting members for attachment of compartments.

1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

.1 Deliver items in manufacturer’s original unopened protective packaging.

.2 Store materials in original protective packaging to prevent physical damage or wetting.

.3 Handle so as to prevent damage to finished surfaces.

1.8 WARRANTY

.1 Furnish one-year guarantee against defects in material and workmanship.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONFIGURATIONS

.1 Toilet Compartments shall be:

.1 Floor-Anchored (1541 ClassicSeries)

.2 Urinal Screens shall be:

.1 Floor-Anchored (1541 ClassicSeries)

2.2 COMPONENTS/MATERIALS

.1 Stiles, Panels, Doors, Screens

.1 All surfaces shall be high-pressure laminated plastic NEMA LDS-1985 minimum thickness 0.050" (1.33mm) with matte finish. Color and pattern as selected by architect from Bobrick standard colors.





.2 Stiles, panels, doors, screens: 45-lb density, industrial grade, resin-impregnated, particle board.

.2 Hardware

.1 All hardware to be chrome-plated “Zamac”.

.2 All hardware shall be through-bolted.

.3 Latch

.1 Sliding door latch shall be chrome-plated “Zamac”.

.2 Sliding door latch shall require less than 5-lb force to operate. Twisting latch operation will not be acceptable.

.3 Latch shall be attached to door by theft-resistant, one-way machine screws.

.4 Hinges

.1 Pivot hinges shall be chrome-plated “Zamac”.

.2 Hinges shall be attached to door and stile by through-bolting theft-resistant, chrome one-way shoulder screws into one-way chrome barrel nuts.

.5 Coat Hook and Bumper combination shall be chrome-plated “Zamac”.

.6 Mounting Brackets shall be chrome-plated “Zamac”.

.7 Floor-Anchored Series Leveling Device: 12-gauge 1/2" x 1" (13 x 25mm) steel channel welded to 3/8" x 1" (10 x 25mm) zinc-chromate plated steel bar.

.8 Stile Shoe shall be one-piece, 4" (102mm) high, type-304, 22-gauge (0.8mm) stainless steel with satin finish.

.9 Top shall have 90° return to stile. One-piece shoe capable of adapting to 3/4" or 1" stile thickness and capable of being fastened (by clip) to stiles starting at wall line.

.10 Headrail shall be extruded, satin finish, anodized aluminum (.045" thick / 1.65mm) with anti-grip profile.

2.3 Fabrication

.1 Stiles, Panels, Doors, and Screens:

.1 Bond high-pressure plastic laminate to core material with adhesive specially formulated to prevent delamination. Bond edges prior to bonding face sheets. No splices or joints in faces or edges shall be acceptable unless there are laminate material limitations.

.2 Finish thickness: 1" (25mm) for uniform flush front.





3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

.1 Check areas scheduled to receive compartments for correct dimensions, plumbness of walls and soundness of surfaces that would affect installation of mounting brackets.

.2 Verify spacing of plumbing fixtures to assure compatibility with installation of compartments.

.3 Do not begin installation of compartments until conditions are satisfactory.

3.2 ERECTION

.1 Install compartments rigidly, straight, plumb, and level and in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.

.2 Installation methods shall conform to manufacturer’s recommendations for backing and proper support.

.3 Conceal evidence of drilling, cutting, and fitting to room finish.

.4 Maintain uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors.

3.3 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING

.1 Adjust hardware for proper operation after installation.

.2 Set hinge cam on in-swinging doors to hold doors open when unlatched.

.3 Set hinge cam on out-swinging doors to hold unlatched doors in closed position.

.4 Clean exposed surfaces of compartments, hardware, and fittings





10 SPECIALTIES SECTION 10 22 26 OPERABLE PARTITIONS page 1 of 5 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

.1 Provide all materials, labor, equipment and services necessary to furnish, deliver and install all work under this section as shown on the contract documents, specified herein, and as specified by the job conditions. The partitions include: .1 Manually operated, folding, individual panel, operable partition.


.1 Metal Fabrication. Section 05 50 00

.2 Rough Carpentry. Section 06 10 00

.3 Door Schedule Section 08 06 10

.4 Carpeting Section 09 68 00


.1 Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified in writing by the operable partition manufacturer, as qualified to install the manufacturer’s partition systems for work material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project.

.2 Acoustical Performance: Test operable partitions in an independent acoustical laboratory in accordance with ASTM E90 test procedure to attain no less than the STC rating specified. Provide a complete and unedited written test report by the testing laboratory upon request.

.3 Preparation of the opening shall conform to the criteria set forth per ASTM E557 Standard Guide for the Installation of Operable Partitions.


.1 Conform to the requirements of CaGBC LEED 2009 Indoor Environmental Quality (IEQ) Credit 4.1 – Low Emitting Materials: Adhesives and Sealants:

.1 Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) limits of adhesives and sealants used on the interior (inboard side of the air barrier within the wall and roof assemblies) of the building, and applied on-site, to comply with the following criteria:


.2 Conform to the requirements of CaGBC LEED 2009 Credit 4.2 – Low Emitting Materials: Paints and Coatings. Paints and coatings applied on-site, and used on the interior of the building (inboard side of the air barrier within the wall and roof assemblies) must comply with the following criteria:

.1 Clear finishes, stains, primers, and shellacs must not exceed the VOC content limits established in SCAQMD Rule 1113, Architectural Coatings, rules in effect on January 1, 2004.




10 SPECIALTIES SECTION 10 22 26 OPERABLE PARTITIONS page 2 of 5

1.4 SUBMITTALS


.2 Product Data: Material descriptions, construction details, finishes, installation details, and operating instructions for each type of operable partition, component, and accessory specified.

.3 Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of operable partitions. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, attachments to other construction, and accessories. Indicate dimensions, weights, conditions at openings, and at storage areas, and required installation, storage, and operating clearances. Indicate location and installation requirements for hardware and track, including floor tolerances required and direction of travel. Indicate blocking to be provided by others.

.4 Setting Drawings: Show imbedded items and cutouts required in other work, including support beam punching template.

.5 Samples: Color samples demonstrating full range of finishes available by architect. Verification samples will be available in same thickness and material indicated for the work.


.1 Clearly mark packages and panels with numbering systems used on Shop Drawings. Do not use permanent markings on panels.

.2 Protect panels during delivery, storage, and handling to comply with manufacturer’s direction and as required to prevent damage.

1.6 WARRANTY

.1 Provide written warranty by manufacturer of operable partitions agreeing to repair or replace any components with manufacturing defects.

.2 Warranty period: Two (2) years.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS, PRODUCTS, AND OPERATION

.1 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

.1 Modernfold, Inc.






.2 Products: Subject to compliance with the requirements, provide the following product:

.1 Acousti-Seal #931 manually operated individual panel operable partition.

.3 OPERATION

.1 Series of paired flat panels hinged together in pairs, manually operated, floor supported with no mechanical floor seals.

.4 Final Closure:

.1 Horizontally expanding panel edge with removable crank

2.2 PANEL CONSTRUCTION

.1 Nominal 3-inch (76 mm) thick panels in manufacturer’s standard 48-inch (1220 mm) widths. All panel horizontal and vertical framing members fabricated from minimum 18-gage formed steel with overlapped and welded corners for rigidity. Top channel is reinforced to support suspension system components. Frame is designed so that full vertical edges of panels are of formed steel and provide concealed protection of the edges of the panel skin.

.2 Panel Skin:

.1 1/2-inch (13mm) tackable 100% recycled gypsum board, class "A" rated single material or composite layers continuously bonded to panel frame. Acoustical rating:

.1 50 STC

.3 Panel Trim: No vertical trim required or allowed on edges of panels; minimal groove appearance at panel joints.

.4 Panel Weights:

.1 Non-Steel Skin

.1 50 STC – 8 lbs./square foot

2.3 PANEL FINISHES

.1 Panel face finish shall be:

.1 Carpet:

.1 CARPET 2 as listed in Section 09 68 00: Carpeting.

.2 See Drawings for design and layout of carpet.

.2 Panel Trim: Exposed panel trim of one consistent color from manufacturer’s standard offering.





2.4 SOUND SEALS

.1 Vertical Interlocking Sound Seals between panels:

.2 Roll-formed steel astragals, with reversible tongue and groove configuration in each panel edge for universal panel operation. Rigid plastic astragals or astragals in only one panel edge are not acceptable.

.3 Horizontal Top and Bottom Seals: Continuous contact extruded vinyl bulb shape with pairs of non-contacting vinyl fingers to prevent distortion without the need for mechanically operated parts.

2.5 SUSPENSION SYSTEM

.1 #17 Floor Supported Suspension System

.2 Suspension Tracks: Minimum 11-gage, 0.12-inch (3.04 mm) roll-formed steel track, suitable for either direct mounting to a wood header or supported by adjustable steel hanger brackets, supporting the load-bearing surface of the track, connected to structural support by pairs of 3/8-inch (9.5 mm) diameter threaded rods. Aluminum track is not acceptable.

.3 Exposed track soffit: Steel, integral to track, and pre-painted off-white.

.4 Carriers:

.1 Right Angle Turn: Two carriers of low-friction polymer, reinforced with steel, that permit panels to traverse L, T, and X intersections without mechanical switching, on all panels except hinged closure panels.

.2 “Smart Track™”: Two all-steel trolleys with steel tired ball bearing wheels. Non-steel tires are not acceptable. Suspension system shall provide automatic indexing of panels into stack area using preprogrammed switches and trolleys without electrical, pneumatic, or mechanical activation.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 General: Comply with ASTM E557, operable partition manufacturer’s written installation instructions, Drawings and approved Shop Drawings.

.2 Install operable partitions and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

.3 Match operable partitions by installing panels from marked packages in numbered sequence indicated on Shop Drawings.

.4 Broken, cracked, chipped, deformed, or unmatched panels are not acceptable.

3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

.1 Clean partition surfaces upon completing installation of operable partitions to remove dust, dirt, adhesives, and other foreign materials according to manufacturer’s written instructions.





.2 Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to the manufacturer and

.3 Installer that insure operable partitions are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

3.3 ADJUSTING

.1 Adjust operable partitions to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free from binding, warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.

3.4 EXAMINATION

.1 Examine flooring, structural support, and opening, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of operable partitions. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

.1 Demonstrate proper operation and maintenance procedures to Owner’s representative.

.2 Provide Operation and Maintenance Manual to Owner’s representative.





10 SPECIALITIES SECTION 10 28 00 WASHROOM ACCESSORIES page 1 of 3

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

.1 Furnish all labour materials equipment and services necessary for the supply and installation of all washroom accessories and grab bars, as indicated on the drawings, as scheduled, and as specified herein.

.2 Work of this section shall include but shall not necessarily be limited to the supply and installation of the following items. Items noted as Owner supplied to be installed by Contractor:

.1 Grab Bars

.2 Soap Dispensers (owner supplied)

.4 Paper Towel (owner supplied)

.5 Toilet Paper Dispensers (owner supplied)

.6 Coat Hook

.7 Mirrors

.8 Shower Rod

.9 Mop and Broom Holders

.10 Change Table

.3 Provide templates and rough-in dimensions as required.

1.2 RELATED WORK

.1 Section 06100: Rough Carpentry: Installation of plywood backing.

.2 Section 06200: Finish Carpentry: Installation of washroom accessories and grab bars.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


2 PRODUCTS

2.1 WASHROOM ACCESSORIES

.1 Finishes: All finishes to be satin stainless steel unless otherwise noted.

.2 Grab Bars: 1 ½” (38 mm) diameter two way grab bars, 36" W x 54" (910 x 1370 mm) with peened gripping surface. To comply with NBC 2005 requirements; complete with concealed anchors and fasteners and snap flange cover. Profiles as indicated on drawings. Bobrick or approved alternate.




10 SPECIALITIES SECTION 10 28 00 WASHROOM ACCESSORIES page 2 of 3

2.1 WASHROOM ACCESSORIES (Continued)

.3 Soap Dispenser: Wall surface mounted. (owner supplied)

.4 Paper Towel: Wall surface mounted. (owner supplied)

.5 Toilet Tissue Dispenser: Surface mounted 2 roll dispenser. (owner supplied)

.6 Coat Hook: Hat and Coat hook.

Bobrick B- 6827 or approved alternate

.7 Mirrors: HC Accessible Tilting Mirror, 610 x 910 mm

Bobrick B-294 or approved alternate.

.8 Shower Rod: Heavy Duty Stainless Steel Shower Rod, 1525 mm long

Bobrick B6107 or approved alternate

.9 Mop and Broom Holder: Stainless Steel 760 mm long.

Bobrick B223 or approved alternate.

.10 Baby Change Station: Stainless Steel Recessed Koala Bear Care KB110-SSRE

2.2 WASHROOM ACCESSORIES SCHEDULE

.1 All coat hooks to be installed at back of door unless otherwise noted.

.2 Refer to drawings for installation locations and heights.

.3 Schedule follows on next page.




10 SPECIALITIES SECTION 10 28 00 WASHROOM ACCESSORIES page 3 of 3 ITEM RM # NAME QUANT. NOTES Grab Bars 106

107 108 309 505 604 605

Fam WC Wmn WC Men WC Staff WC HC WC Fit WC Fit WC

Refer to drawings for type quantity, and layout

Paper Towel Dispenser 106 107 108 309 505 600 604 605

Fam WC Wmn WC Men WC Staff WC HC WC Fitness Fit WC Fit WC

1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1

Paper Towel Dispenser 108 109

Wmen WC Men WC

2 1

Soap Dispensers (wall mounted)

106 107 108 309 505 604 605

Fam WC Wmn WC Men WC Staff WC HC WC Fit WC Fit WC

1 1 1 3 2 1 1

Toilet Paper Dispenser 106 107 108 309 504 505 604 605

Fmly WC Wmn WC Men WC Staff WC Child WC HC WC Fit WC Fit WC

1 5 1 1 2 1 1 1

Coat Hooks 106 107 108 309 312 504 505 604 605

Fmly WC Wmn WC Men WC Staff WC Meeting Child WC HC WC Fit WC Fit WC

1 5 1 1 6 1 1 1

Wall mounted back of stall door Back of door back of door Wall mounted back of door back of door back of door Back of door

Mirrors 106 309 505 604 605

Fmly WC Staff WC HC WC Fit WC Fit WC

1 1 1 1 1

Shower Rod 309 505

Staff WC HC WC

1 1

Mop and Broom Holder 105 602

Janitor Janitor

1 1

Baby Change Station 106 Fmly WC 1 Recessed Wall Mounted




10 SPECIALTIES SECTION 10 51 13 LOCKERS page 1 of 4

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

.1 Supply and install all lockers as indicated on the drawings and specified herein, including fill and trim pieces for a complete finished assembly.:

.1 Staff Room Lockers x 12 (3 high).

.2 Fitness recessed wallet lockers x 20

1.2 RELATED WORK

.1 Section 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring.

.2 Section 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry

.3 Section 06 20 00 Finish Carpentry

1.3 SUBMITTALS


.2 Shop Drawings: Indicate size and description of components, base material, surface

finish inside and out, hardware and locks, attachment requirements, electrical

requirements and connections.

.3 Submit Manufacturer's full range of colour chips for selection by Architect.

.4 Provide maintenance data for maintenance of Lockers for incorporation into maintenance manual specified in Section



2 PRODUCTS

2.1 STAFF ROOM LOCKERS:

.1 GENERAL

.1 Type 1 each 305mm x 305mm x 1829mm TRIPLE tier lockers.

.2 Each locker shall be factory assembled into single units only, allowing for non progressive banking site installation. Progressive site assembly not allowed.

.3 The lockers shall be factory assembled into single 610mm x 305mm x 1829mm units allowing for easy installation and relocation in the future.





.2 FRAME

.1 Shall be no less than 1.6mm (16 ga) to ASTM A366 formed steel channel welded to form a one piece construction - complete with heavy duty 11 ga. padlock hasp. Frame to be notched on each side to secure and provide extra strength for shelf.

.2 Frame to be equipped with 3 - 14 1.8mm (14 ga.) 5 knuckle hinges.

.3 BODY

.1 Locker bodies to be fabricated from not less than .60mm (24 ga.) C.R. Steel to ASTM A366. Backs and sides to be provided with continuous lock forming, running the complete height of the locker.

.2 Shall be of riveted construction.

.3 Holes shall be provided for the banking and installation of the lockers.

.4 DOOR

.1 Double pan construction. Outer panel shall be no less than .90mm (20 ga) C.R. Steel to ASTM A366. Inner panel .06mm (24 ga.) C.R. Steel. Sandwich panel construction welded and complete with honeycomb core for strength and sound-deadening.

.2 Rubber bumpers shall be riveted to the door to ensure non-removal by patrons.

.3 Door complete with recessed handle box to accept keyed cylinder camlock. Chrome plated steel inset flush with door face, number plates inset in finger pull.

.4 Keyed cylinder camlock to be keyed different for each locker, complete with master key.

.5 FINISH

.1 All steel surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned in an automatic wash process and undercoated with an iron phosphate treatment utilizing a 5 stage wash and etching process.

.2 The paint finish shall be high quality alkyd baking enamel to 40% - 45% gloss, electro-statically applied to a minimum thickness of 1mm.

.3 Color to be selected from manufacturers standard color selector.

.6 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS

.1 Shanahan’s SML Model Deluxe.


2.2 WALLET LOCKERS

.1 Acceptable Manufacturer:

.1 American Locker Security Systems, Inc., which is located at: 815 S. Main St. ; Grapevine, TX 76051; Toll Free Tel: 800-828-9118; Tel: 817-329-1600; Email: [email protected]; Web: www.americanlocker.com






.2 Construction: Cold Rolled Steel. All joints solid welded.

.1 Box, Top, Bottom: Minimum 20 gauge.

.2 Door: Minimum 16 gauge.

.3 Hinge: Minimum 20 gauge continuous piano hinge.

.4 Shelf and Handle: Minimum 16 gauge.

.5 12 patron doors

.3 Dimensions:

.1 Overall: 30 5/16 inches tall by 19 1/8 inches wide by 7 5/8 inches deep (770mm x 486mm x 194mm).

.2 Compartment: 5 1/2 inches tall by 4 inches wide by 6 3/4 inches deep (140mm x 102mm x 171mm).

.4 Lock: Stainless steel key lock assembly; Coin Select Locking System.

.1 Method of Operation: Coin activated - Coins Retained.

.2 Method of Operation: Coin activated - Coins Returned.

.3 Method of Operation: Token activated.

.4 Method of Operation: Key activated.

.5 Method of Operation: Free service.

.6 Key and cylinder removable for replacement.

.7 Coin slot concealed when door is shut.

.8 Anti-key-turn-back feature.

.2 Identification: Plastic number plates.

.3 Finish:

.1 Factory Paint Finish: Prime and finish with two coats of baked enamel.

.1 Frame and Interior Color: Grey.

.1 Color: As selected by Architect from Manufacturer's standard color offerings.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION







3.2 PREPARATION


.2 Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

.3 Provide blocking in walls as recommended by manufacturer and shown on approved shop drawings.

3.3 LOCKER INSTALLATION

.1 Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

.2 Install lockers secure, plumb, square, and in line.

.3 Arrange locker modules in sequence of locker numbers.

.4 Install lockers to overhang base by 1 inch (25 mm).

.5 Anchor lockers at spacing indicated on approved shop drawings with appropriate anchor devices to suit adjacent materials and finishes.


.1 Before project closeout, unlock, open, and close each locker. Verify that doors and lock mechanisms operate smoothly and properly latch. Adjust as required for proper use.

.2 Demonstration: Demonstrate operation of lockers and explain procedures for maintenance, removable of lock cylinders, ordering replacement keys and cylinders and other procedures to Owner's personnel.

3.5 PROTECTION



.3 Cleaning: Wash exposed surfaces using a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean cloths. Do not use abrasives.





10 SPECIALTIES SECTION 10 21 13 TOILET COMPARTMENTS page 1 of 2

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

.1 Supply and installation of Toilet partitions, complete with doors, as shown on drawings and specified herein.

.2 Supply and installation of Shower partitions, with cubicle curtain track front closure as shown on drawings and specified herein

1.2 RELATED WORK

.1 Section 09 30 00: Ceramic Tile.

1.3 WARRANTY

.1 The work included in this section shall be fully guaranteed by written certification for a period of ten (10) years from the date of substantial performance of the project against any defects in design, materials, and workmanship and that any defects will be made good by the Subcontractor at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


.2 Submit Shop Drawings or Manufacturer's Technical Data for Architects review, indicating layout, panel thickness and composition, installation details, curtain layout and fabrication details, hardware etc.

.3 Provide manufacturer’s standard colour selection cards for colour selection by Architect.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

.1 Ceiling hung, model partition for shower and washroom partitions, phenolic moisture resistant.

.2 Approved manufacturers:

.1 Shanahan’s Manufacturing Ltd.

.2 Bobrick

.3 Bradley

.4 Approved equal.




10 SPECIALTIES SECTION 10 21 13 TOILET COMPARTMENTS page 2 of 2

2.2 DOORS AND PANELS AND PILASTERS:

.1 Shall be 30 mm honeycomb with 20 gauge galvanneal steel panels, welded ground and polished metal partitions and doors, ceiling hung, "Galvanneal" steelcoloured face sheets, with stainless steel shoes.

.2 Colour and pattern to be selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard range. Heights as indicated on drawings.

2.3 HEADRAIL

.1 To be clear anodized aluminum, anti-grip design, outer flanges fitting over pilaster, secured at wall with support brackets.

2.4 HARDWARE

.1 All wall and panel brackets, hinges and housings, door latches, door hooks, and door stop and keeper shall be zinc die castings, chrome polished.

.2 All fastening screws to be #430 stainless steel.

.3 Door hinges to be adjustable for any open position, designed for easy installation and trouble free maintenance. Hinge housings to be recessed into door to give flush appearance.

.4 Concealed door latch to be vandal proof with slotted cover plate (emergency

entrance) positive grip turn knob. Door swing is interchangeable by reversing door latch.

.5 Combination coat hook bumper to be rubber tipped.

.6 Combination door stop keeper to have slotted hole for bolt and continuous rubber

stop.

.7 All hardware shall be vandal resistant and concealed. Door hardware shall be concealed.

.8 All mounting hardware shall be constructed of stainless steel and shall be mounted

inside partition. 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Cubicles and partitions to be shop fabricated to the greatest extent possible.

.2 Partitions and cubicles to be installed by skilled installer recommended by manufacturer in strict accordance with manufacturer’s requirements and the approved shop drawings.





10 SPECIALTIES SECTION 10 26 00 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION page 1 of 3 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY:

.1 Supply and installation of Corner Guard Systems as shown on the drawings, and as specified herein.


.1 Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry:

.2 Section 09 25 00 - Gypsum Wallboard:

.3 Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry 1.3 REFERENCES


.2 ASTM A 276-92 Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


.2 Product Data: Manufacturers product specifications, installation and maintenance instructions.

.3 Shop Drawings: Show locations, extent, and installation details of each system

including method of attachment and adjacent construction.

.4 Samples for Selection Purposes: Actual sections of components are available in a convenient but representative size showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns for each type of wall protection system specified.

.5 Samples for Verification Purposes

.1 Not less than 12 inch (300mm) length of each system component including

corners and end caps in selected colors, textures and patterns. .6 Maintenance Instructions: Manufacturers instructions for maintenance of installed

work.


.1 Single Source Responsibility: Furnish all wall protection system components from a single source.

.2 Manufacturer: A firm regularly engaged in the manufacture of wall protection system

components similar to those specified.




10 SPECIALTIES SECTION 10 26 00 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION page 2 of 3 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1 Deliver materials in manufacturers packages properly labeled for identification and for location in the Project. Comply with manufacturers instructions for storage and handling. Damaged and otherwise unsuitable material, when so determined, shall be immediately removed from the Project site.


.1 Environmental Conditions: Do NOT install wall surface protection systems until the installation area is enclosed and weatherproof, and until the ambient temperature within the building is maintained at not less than 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) for not less than 72 hours prior to installation.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

.1 Furnish Owner at least 2 percent of each type, color and pattern of wall surface protection components used on the Project over and above the amount installed.

.2 Deliver to Owner at time of final inspection of work under this Section and store

where directed in the building. 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

.1 Arden Architectural Specialties, Inc., 151 Fifth Avenue NW, Suite J, St. Paul, Minnesota 55112, (800) 521-1826 or (651) 631-1607, FAX (651) 631-0251.


2.2 WALL SURFACE AND CORNER PROTECTION SYSTEMS

.1 Item 1 - Wallwear Wall Protection Systems - Corner Guard, Model CGSS-F2 Flush mount stainless steel corner guard with 2" wings.

2.3 MATERIALS

.1 Material: stainless steel

.2 Corner Degree: As per Architectural Drawings




10 SPECIALTIES SECTION 10 26 00 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION page 3 of 3


.1 Examine the substrates and conditions under which the work is to be performed, and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

.2 Ensure that surfaces to receive materials specified are properly prepared.

.3 Remove dust and other loose particles that would not be removable following

installation, or would interfere with adhesion of sheet goods and other adhesive applied materials.

3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Install products in accordance with manufacturers instructions, at locations shown on Architectural Drawings.





11 EQUIPMENT SECTION 11 40 00 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT

page 1 of 2

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

.1 Supply and install Owner-supplied Foodservice Equipment as listed in this Section.

1.2 RELATED WORK

.1 Section 06 20 00 Finish Carpentry

.2 Division 22 Plumbing

.3 Division 23 HVAC

.4 Division 26 Electrical

2 MATERIALS

2.3 See Schedule

3 EXECUTION

3.4 EXAMINATION



3.5 PREPARATION


.2 Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

.3 Provide blocking in walls as recommended by manufacturer and shown on approved shop drawings.

3.6 LOCKER INSTALLATION

.1 Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

.2 Install equipment secure, plumb, square, and in line.

.3 Install equipment according to layout in Contract Documents.




11 EQUIPMENT SECTION 11 40 00 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT

page 2 of 2

4 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE


NAME PREFERRED BRAND

REQUEST SPECIFICATION QTY

Electric Range (2 @ Community Kitchen + 1 @ Childcare Kitchen)

Fridgidaire Slide in Induction range

Model: CPCS3085LF With Casters

3

Refrigerator (Community Kitchen)

Habco Model SE46SA 2 doors, 6 shelves, solid swing doors. Door locks Stainless Steel

2

Under-Counter Freezer (Community Kitchen + old Catering kitchen)

Summit SCFF55 Series 2

Under-Counter Dishwasher (Community Kitchen)

Moyer Diebel 501 HT 21 racks per hour High Temperature With Built-in Booster.

1

Stand up dishwasher (Staff Rm + Childcare Kitchen) Refrigerator (Staff Rm + Childcare Kitchen)

Residential Model Dimensions to match Architectural Drawings

2 2

Adjustable Dish Caddies (Community Kitchen)

Model – ADCS Caddy with six dividers

1

Built-in Convention Microwave (Community Kitchen)

KitchenAid

Base model KBHS179SSS 1

Counter Top Microwave (Staff Rm + Childcare Kitchen)

Panasonic NNSD997S 2.2 Cu. Ft 1200 Watts

2

Automatic Coffee Urn (Community Kitchen)

Bunn Model – SRU 3 gallon urn 10 gallon water tank Half batch option (1.5 gal)

1




11 EQUIPMENT SECTION 11 51 00 LIBRARY EQUIPMENT page 1 of 4

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

.1 Supply and install Library book return chutes as indicated on Drawings and herein.

1.2 RELATED WORK

2 MATERIALS

2.1 APPROVED PRODUCT:

.1 TekStar Through-Wall System Single Drop, Catalogue #10-880


2.2 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS:

.1 Chute Housing: .040 inch aluminum housing.

.2 Entry Chute: .063 inch aluminum and angled upwards.

.3 Slide Chute: .063 inch thick Aluminum

.4 Air Bloc: Neoprene (40 Duro) Rubber panels.

.5 All edges are honed smooth.

2.3 CONSTRUCTION METHODS:

.1 Chute housing has four sides, extends 14 inches from the faceplate and covers the wall rough cuts when installed.

.2 Entry chute has upward and downward angle to prevent theft.

.3 Slide Chute to be equipped with un-lockable interlocking system, with ability to pivot, allowing access to electronics and some flexibility in the angle of the chute for special applications.

.4 Interior locking and unlocking switch located at rear of unit along top panel.

.5 Vinyl die cut graphics indicate locked and unlocked position of unit

.6 Neoprene rubber Airbloc panels attach to rear of unit with nylon rivets.

2.4 WEATHER RESISTANCE

.1 Auto closing and sealed depository door prevents entry of rain and snow. Will not blow open in wind. Weather stripping on inside edges of the faceplate and around door to provide further protection from inclement weather.





12 FURNISHINGS SECTION 12 20 00 WINDOW TREATMENTS page 1 of 5 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED

.1 Supply and install Manual Roller Shades (Premium Quality) to all Windows indicated on the Window Schedule, as indicated on the drawings, and specified herein.

1.2 RELATED WORK .1 Section 06 10 00: Rough Carpentry .2 Section 08 50 13: Aluminum Windows .3 Section 09 06 00: Gypsum Board. 1.3 SUBMITTALS .1 PRODUCT DATA: Manufacturer’s descriptive literature shall be submitted indicating

materials, finishes, construction and installation instructions and verifying that product meets requirements specified. Manufacturers recommendations for maintenance and cleaning shall be included.

.2 DRAWINGS AND DIAGRAMS: Wiring diagrams of any motorized components or

units, working and assembly drawings shall be supplied as requested. .3 SAMPLE: Submit Manufacturer's full range of colour for selection by Architect. Supply one sample shade of each type specified in this contract for approval.

Supplied units shall be furnished complete with all required components, mounting and associated hardware, instructions and warranty.

.4 LEED Product Summary Sheet: Furnish the Consultant with a completed form for

each construction material used in the Expansion and Renovation Work. See Appendix 1 for Sample Product Summary Sheet.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: .1 SUPPLIER: Manufacturer, subsidiary or licensed agent shall be approved to supply

the products specified, and to honor any claims against product presented in accordance with warranty.

.2 INSTALLER: Installer or agent shall be qualified to install specified products by prior

experience, demonstrated performance and acceptance of requirements of manufacturer, subsidiary, or licensed agent. Installer shall be responsible for an acceptable installation.

.3 UNIFORMITY: Provide Manual Roller Shades of only one manufacturer for entire

project. .4 JOB CONDITIONS: Prior to shade installation, building shall be enclosed. Interior temperature shall be maintained between 60° F. and 90° F. during and after

installation; relative humidity shall not exceed 80%. Wet work shall be complete and dry.




12 FURNISHINGS SECTION 12 20 00 WINDOW TREATMENTS page 2 of 5 1.5 WARRANTY: .1 Lifetime Limited Warranty. Fabrics to be warranted for minimum 5 years. Specific

product warranties available from manufacturer or its authorized agent. 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER .1 Hunter Douglas Contract/ 12250 Parkway Centre Dr. / Poway, CA 92064/ Phone:

800-727-8953 Fax: 800-205-9819/ Website: www.hunterdouglascontract.com, or architect approved equivalent. Contact the following for project assistance Leo @ Valerie Black.

Product substitutions must be approved by architect minimum of 30 days prior to

supply of blinds. 2.2 MANUAL ROLLER SHADES .1 PRODUCT: Hunter Douglas “Manual Roller Shades” .2 MATERIALS:

a) FABRICS: Inherently anti-static, flame retardant, fade and stain resistant, light filtering, room darkening, & blackout fabrics providing 0% - 15% openness factors. Fabric weights to range between 6.00 oz/sq.yd. – 20.70 oz/sq.yd. containing fiberglass, PVC, polyester, acrylic, vinyl laminates, cotton, & vinyl coatings. Finish selected by architect from manufacturer’s available contract colors.

b) CONTROL SYSTEM: Adjustment-free continuous qualified #10 stainless steel

ball chain ((90-lb. test)) and pulley clutch operating system allows precise control and ensures a uniform look. Clutch will develop no more than ½ pound drag for ease of lifting. Glass reinforced polyester thermopolymer (PBT) plastic components conform to military specification MIL M-24519 and designed for smooth, trouble-free operation.

c) ROLLER: Circular-shaped painted extruded aluminum tubes with thicker wall &

ribs provide additional strength while locking into place the clutch & end plug. 3” outside diameter extruded tube to have a .090 wall thickness. 2” outside diameter extruded tube to have a .072” wall thickness (1 ½” & 1 1/8” tubes have .055” wall thickness) providing strength & durability.

d) END PLUG: Heat stabilized fiber reinforced plastic outside sleeve and center

shaft provide bearing surfaces on which the roller rides ensuring smooth, wear resistant operation.

e) BOTTOM ROD: Extruded aluminum weight in a Sealed Pocket Hem Bar

(excluding thicker fabric) for tracking adjustments and provides uniform look.




12 FURNISHINGS SECTION 12 20 00 WINDOW TREATMENTS page 3 of 5

f) MOUNTING HARDWARE: Manufacturer’s standard .07” nickel-plated,

C1008/1010 cold rolled steel universal brackets including end plug bracket with lock down retainer device.

2.3 FABRICATION .1 Shade measurements shall be accurate to within + 1/8” or as recommended in

writing by manufacturer. 2.4 FABRICS .1 FABRIC selection from the following: BLACK OUT BLINDS (0% Openness) Flocke 11201, Morocco, Pima, Sheerweave 7000, Sheerweave 7100, GreenScreen

Xlite, SOLAR SHADES (1% - 9% Openness) E Screen 7501, E Screen 7503, E Screen 7505, Fiz, GlacierScreen HD1003,

GreenScreen Eco, M Screen 8503, M Screen 8505, M Screen Deco, Sheerweave 2000, Sheerweave 2705, Sheerweave 4000, Sheerweave 4400, Sheerweave 4500, Sheerweave 5000, Star 2115

3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: .1 SUBCONTRACTOR shall be responsible for inspection on site, approval of mounting

surfaces, installation conditions and field measurement for this work. .2 OTHER INTERACTING TRADES shall receive drawings of shade systems,

dimensions, assembly and installation methods from subcontractor upon request. 3.2 INSTALLATION: .1 INSTALLATION shall comply with manufacturer’s specifications, standards and

procedures as detailed on contract drawings. .2 ADEQUATE CLEARANCE shall be provided to permit unencumbered operation of

shade and hardware. .3 CLEAN finish installation of dirt and finger marks. Leave work area clean and free of

debris.




12 FURNISHINGS SECTION 12 20 00 WINDOW TREATMENTS page 4 of 5 .4 DEMONSTRATION: Demonstrate operation method and instruct owner’s personnel in the proper

operation and maintenance of the blinds. 4 SCHEDULE

See following page




12 FURNISHINGS SECTION 12 20 00 WINDOW TREATMENTS page 5 of 5

Room # Room Name Window/Door # Shade type GROUND FLOOR 301 MANAGER OFFICE CW 301.1 1 SF 301.1 1 SF 301.3 1 302 SOFT MEETING RM CW 302.1 1 SF 302.2 1 303 POLICE OFFICE CW 303.1 1 CW 303.2 1 SF 303.1 1 305 PROGRAM OFFICE SF 305.1 1 SF 305.2 1 308 FLEX OFFICE 1 CW 308.1 1 SF 308.2 310 STAFF ROOM CW 310.1 1 312 MEETING ROOM SF 103.1 2 401 COMMUNITY CW 401.1 1 KITCHEN 400 MULTI-PURPOSE 1 D 400.1 1 402 MULTI-PURPOSE 2 CW 402.1 1 D 402.1 1 CW 402.3 1 CW 402.2 1 501 CHILDCARE OFFICE CW 501.3 1 CW 501.2 1 CW 501.1 1 503 CHILDCARE CW 503.1 1 ACTIVITY ROOM CW 503.2 1 CW 503.3 1 CW 503.4 1 CW 503.5 1 CW 503.6 1 SECOND FLOOR 600 FITNESS CW 600.1 1 CW 600.2 1 CW 600.3 1 CW 600.4 1 606 BRIDGE CW 606.1 1 CW 606.2 1

LEGEND

1 Roller shode solar screen blind

2 Roller shade black out blind




12 FURNISHINGS SECTION 12 48 16 ENTRANCE FLOOR GRILLES page 1 of 2 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED

.1 Supply and install all inset foot grilles as indicated on the drawings and specified herein.

1.2 RELATED WORK

.1 Section 09 65 00: Resilient Flooring.

.2 Section 3: Concrete 1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit shop drawing indicating location and dimension of mat.

.2 Submit Manufacturer's full range of colour for selection by Architect. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE


2 PRODUCTS 2.1 RECESSED ENTRANCE GRILLE:

.1 Tread bars shall be 6061-T6 alloy, joined together with 3/8” (9.525 mm) diameter threaded steel rods, with nylon spacers at centres as required. Extruded aluminum frame shall be 6063-T5 alloy, corners to be neatly mitred and held together with corner brackets, for ease of assembly on-site. All aluminum shall be mill finished.

.2 Tread: 125” x 1.25” Aluminum flat bar c/w 55% free area.

.3 Frame Type: GC frame set in concrete edge

.4 Pan Type: 16 gauge aluminum with drain

.5 Acceptable Product: .1 KEN-A-GRILLE FG-1 aluminum foot grille, in size as indicated on drawings, as

manufactured by K.N. Crowder Mfg. Inc. .2 Approved Alternate

.6 Contractor to site measure. 2.2 STAIR NOSING

.1 Stair Nosing to be CT-20/3A extruded aluminum nosing with aluminum oxide grit,

with CT-27 cast metal anchor .2 Acceptable Manufacturer:

.1 K.N. Crowder Mfg. Inc.

.2 Approved Alternate .3 Install to dimensions indicated on drawing.




12 FURNISHINGS SECTION 12 48 16 ENTRANCE FLOOR GRILLES page 2 of 2 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Verify site conditions to ensure recesses are correct size, level, and square.

3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Prepare recess by removing excess debris and concrete.

.2 Install as per instructions on installation details and manufacturer's installation instructions.





14 CONVEYING EQUIPMENT SECTION 14 20 00 ELEVATOR page 1 of 10 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. SECTION INCLUDES: Electric Traction Elevators. B. PRODUCTS SUPPLIED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION: 1. Hoist Beam 2. Pit Ladder C. WORK SUPPLIED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS:

1. Temporary lighting, including temporary lighting in hoistway for machine space with switch located in hoistway on the strike jamb side of top landing door.

2. Hoistway ventilation shall be in accordance with local and national building code requirements.

3. Guide Rail Support shall be structurally adequate to extend from pit floor to top of hoistway, with spans in accordance with requirements of authority having jurisdiction and final layouts.

4. REMOVABLE BARRICADES - at all hoistway openings, in compliance with OSHA 29 CFR 1926.502 in addition to any local code requirements.

5. LIFELINE ATTACHMENTS - capable of withstanding 5000 lb load in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1926.502. Provide a minimum of 2 at the top, front of each hoistway.

6. Pit lighting: Fixture with switch and guards. Provide illumination level equal to or greater than that required by ASME A17.1/CSA B44 2000, or applicable version.

7. Control space lighting with switch. Coordinate switch with lighting for machine space as allowable by code.

8. Access Doors: As required for access to governor. Access door shall be self-closing, self-locking if necessary and operable from the inside without a key.

D. RELATED SECTIONS:

1. Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls 2. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: 3. Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel 4. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications 5. Section 07 16 00 - Cementitious Waterproofing 6. Section 23 00 00 - Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning 7. Section 26 00 00 - Electrical 8. Section 27 30 00 - Voice Communications 9. Section 28 31 00 - Fire Detection and Alarm 10. Section 31 00 00 – Earthwork




14 CONVEYING EQUIPMENT SECTION 14 20 00 ELEVATOR page 2 of 10 E. INDUSTRY AND GOVERNMENT STANDARDS: CC/ANSI A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities 4 ADAAG - Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities 5 ANSI/NFPA 70, National Electrical Code 6 ANSI/NFPA 80, Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows 7 ASME/ANSI A17.1, Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF ELEVATOR

A. Elevator Equipment: KONE EcoSpace™ gearless traction elevator B. Equipment Control: KCM831 C. Quantity of Elevators: 1 D. Landings: 2 E. Openings: 2 Front Openings, 0 Back Openings F. Travel: 14'-0'' (to be confirmed on site prior to manufacture) G. Rated Capacity: 2500 lbs (1134 kg) H. Rated Speed: 150 fpm I. Clear Inside Dimensions (W x D): 6'-8" x 4'-3" J. Cab Height: 8' K. Clear height under suspended ceiling: 7'-7" L. Entrance Width & Type: 3'-6" & Left Opening M. Entrance Height: 7' N. Main Power Supply: 208 Volts + 5%, three-phase O. Operation: Simplex P. Machine Location: Inside the hoistway mounted on car guide rail Q. Control Space Location: Adjacent Room R. Elevator Equipment shall conform to the requirements of seismic zone: Non-Seismic S. Maintenance Service Period: 12 Months

1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. CAR PERFORMANCE

1. Car Speed: ± 5% of contract speed under any loading condition or direction of travel.

2. Car Capacity: Safely lower, stop and hold (per code) up to 125% of rated load.

B. SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

1. Vertical Vibration (maximum): 25 mg 2. Horizontal Vibration (maximum): 25 mg 3. Jerk Rate (maximum): 1.3 ft/sec3 4. Acceleration (maximum) 1.3 ft/sec2 5. In Car Noise: = 55 dB(A) 6. Leveling Accuracy: ±0.2 inches 7. Starts per hour (maximum): 120




14 CONVEYING EQUIPMENT SECTION 14 20 00 ELEVATOR page 3 of 10 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature for each proposed system.

1. Cab design, dimensions and layout. 2. Layout, finishes, and accessories and available options. 3. Controls, signals and operating system. 4. Color selection charts for cab and entrances.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Clearances and travel of car. 2. Clear inside hoistway and pit dimensions. 3. Location and layout of equipment and signals. 4. Car, guide rails, buffers and other components in hoistway. 5. Maximum rail bracket spacing. 6. Maximum loads imposed on building structure. 7. Hoist beam requirements. 8. Location and sizes of access doors. 9. Location and details of hoistway door and frames. 10. Electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

C. Operation and maintenance data: 1. Provide manufacturer's standard maintenance and operation manual. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer: Minimum of ten years experience in the fabrication, installation and service of elevators of the type and performance of the specified. The manufacturer shall have a documented quality assurance program.

B. Installer: The equipment manufacturer shall install the elevator.

C. Inspection and Testing: In accordance with requirements of local jurisdiction, obtain

required permits, inspections and tests. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. If the construction site is not prepared to receive the elevator equipment at the agreed ship date, the General Contractor shall be responsible to provide a safe, dry, and easily accessible storage area on or off the premises. Additional lablor costs for double handling will be the responsibility of the general contractor.

B. Delivered elevator materials shall be stored in a protected environment in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. A minimum storage area of 10 feet by 20 feet is required adjacent to the hoistway.




14 CONVEYING EQUIPMENT SECTION 14 20 00 ELEVATOR page 4 of 10 1.07 WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer warranty for a period of one year. The warranty period is to begin upon Substantial Completion of the Contract. Warranty covers defects in materials and workmanship. Damage due to ordinary use, vandalism, improper or insufficient maintenance, misuse, or neglect do not constitute defective material or workmanship.

1.08 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. The elevator manufacturer shall provide maintenance service consisting of regular examinations and adjustments of the elevator equipment for a period of 12 Months after date of substantial completion. Replacement parts shall be produced by the original equipment manufacturer.

B. Maintenance service be performed during regular working hours of regular working days and shall include regular time call back service.

C. Maintenance service shall not include adjustments, repairs or replacement of parts due to negligence, misuse, abuse or accidents.

2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Provide AC gearless machine room-less elevator systems subject to compliance with the design and performance requirements of this specification. Elevator manufacturers may include but are not limited to the following:

a. Basis of Design: EcoSpace™ traction elevators by KONE, Inc.

(www.kone.com). 2.02 EQUIPMENT: CONTROL COMPONENTS AND CONTROL SPACE

A. Controller: Provide microcomputer based control system to perform all of the functions.

1. All high voltage (110V or above) contact points inside the controller cabinet shall be protected from accidental contact in a situation where the controller doors are open.

2. Controller shall be separated into two distinct halves; Motor Drive side and Control side. High voltage motor power conductors shall be routed and physically segregated from the rest of the controller.

3. Provide a serial cardrack and main CPU board containing a non-erasable EPROM and operating system firmware.

4. Variable field parameters and adjustments shall be contained in a non-volatile memory module.




14 CONVEYING EQUIPMENT SECTION 14 20 00 ELEVATOR page 5 of 10

B. Drive: Provide Variable Voltage Variable Frequency AC drive system to develop high

starting torque with low starting current.

C. Control Space: Locate controller{s} in a room adjacent to the hoistway at the top landing on the machine side of the elevator.

2.03 EQUIPMENT: HOISTWAY COMPONENTS

A. Machine: AC gearless machine, with permanent magnet synchronous motor, direct current electro-mechanical disc brakes and integral traction drive sheave, mounted to the car guide rail at the top of the hoistway.

B. Governor: Friction type over-speed governor rated for the duty of the elevator specified.

C. Buffers, Car and Counterweight: Polyurethane buffer. D. Hoistway Operating Devices:

1. Emergency stop switch in the pit 2. Terminal stopping switches. 3. Emergency stop switch on the machine

E. Positioning System: System consisting of magnets and proximity switches. F. Guide Rails and Attachments: Steel rails with brackets and fasteners.

2.04 EQUIPMENT: HOISTWAY ENTRANCES

A. Hoistway Entrances

1. Sills: extruded. 2. Doors: Hollow metal construction with vertical internal channel

reinforcements. 3. Fire Rating: Entrance and doors shall be UL fire-rated for 1-1/2 hour. 4. Entrance Finish: Brushed Stainless Steel. 5. Entrance Markings Jamb Plates: Provide standard entrance jamb tactile

markings on both jambs, at all floors. Plate Mounting: Refer to manufacturer drawings.

2.05 EQUIPMENT: CAR COMPONENTS

A. Car Frame: Provide car frame with adequate bracing to support the platform and car enclosure.

B. Platform: Platform shall be per manufacturers standard. C. Car Guides: Provide guide-shoes mounted to top and bottom of both car and

counterweight frame. Each guide-shoe assembly shall be arranged to maintain constant contact on the rail surfaces. Provide retainers in areas with Seismic design requirements.

D. Load weighing device shall be strain gauge type mounted to dead-end hitch attached atop the hoistway guide-rail.

E. Steel Cab 1. Panels: Non-removable vertical panels, plastic laminate selected from

standard manufacturer's catalog of choices. 2. Car Front Finish: Brushed stainless steel. 3. Car Door Finish: Brushed stainless steel. 4.





5. Ceiling: a.Standard Translucent Panels - LF-1: Polygal Translucent three

panel suspended ceiling with T-5 Fluorescent lighting and Brushed Aluminum frame.

6. Handrail: i. Round tube brushed aluminum - 1.5 in.. Rails to be located on Back

Wall of car enclosure. 7. Flooring: By others. (Not to exceed 2sqft & 1/2" finished depth.) 8. Threshold: Aluminum

F. Emergency Car Signals 1. Emergency Siren: Siren mounted on top of cab that is activated when the

alarm button in the car operating panel is engaged. Siren shall have rated sound pressure level of 80 dB(A) at a distance of three feet from device. Siren shall respond with a delay of not more than one second after activation of alarm button.

2. Emergency Car Lighting: Provide emergency power unit employing a 12-volt sealed rechargeable battery and totally static circuits shall illuminate the elevator car and provide current to the alarm bell in the event of building power failure.

3. Emergency Exit Contact: An electrical contact shall be provided on the car-top exit.

G. Ventilation: No fan. 2.06 EQUIPMENT: SIGNAL DEVICES AND FIXTURES

A. Car Operating Panel: Provide car operating panel with all push buttons, key switches, and message indicators for elevator operation.

a. Full height car operating panel shall contain a bank of round, mechanical, illuminated buttons marked to correspond to landings served, emergency call button, door open button, door close button, and key switches for lights, inspection, and exhaust fan. Buttons have amber illumination (halo). All buttons to have raised text and Braille marking on left hand side. The car operating display panel shall be amber 7 Segment. All texts, when illuminated, shall be amber. The full height car operating panel shall have a polycarbonate face plate that is shatterproof and impact resistant in a color and pattern per manufacturers standard selection.

b. Additional features of car operating panel shall include:

i. Car Position Indicator within operating panel (amber). ii. Elevator Data Plate marked with elevator capacity and car number on

car top. iii. Help buttons with raised markings. iv. In car stop switch per local code. v. Firefighter's hat. vi. Firefighter's Phase II Key-switch. vii. Call Cancel Button. viii. Pre-programmed integrated ADA phone (complete description of krms

features included as standard)





ix. Help Button/Communicator. Activation of help button will initiate two-way

communication between car and a location inside the building, switching over to alternate location if call is unanswered, where personnel are available to take the appropriate action. Visual indicators are provided for call initiation and call acknowledgement.

x. Firefighter's Phase II emergency in-car operating instructions.

B. Hall Fixtures: Wall mounted hall fixtures shall be provided with necessary push buttons and key switches for elevator operation. Wall mounted hall fixtures shall have a polycarbonate face plate that is shatterproof and impact resistant in a color per manufacturers standard selection. 1.Hall fixtures shall feature round, mechanical, illuminated buttons in raised fixture housings. Hall fixtures shall correspond to options available from that landing. Buttons shall be flat flush in vertically mounted fixture. Hall fixtures should not be jamb-mounted. Hall lanterns shall feature amber illumination.

C. Car Lantern and Chime: A directional lantern visible from the corridor shall be provided in the car entrance. When the car stops and the doors are opening, the lantern shall indicate the direction in which the car is to travel and a chime will sound. The chime will sound once for up and twice for down.

2.07 EQUIPMENT: ELEVATOR OPERATION AND CONTROLLER

A. Elevator Operation 1. Simplex Collective Operation: Using a microprocessor-based controller, operation

shall be automatic by means of the car and hall buttons. If all calls in the system have been answered, the car shall park at the last landing served.

2. Zoned Car Parking. 3. Relative System Response Dispatching.

B. Standard Operating Features to include:

1. Full Collective Operation 2. Fan and Light Control. 3. Load Weighing Bypass. 4. Ascending Car Uncontrolled Movement Protection 5. Top of Car Inspection Station.

C. Additional Operating Features to include:

D. Elevator Control System for Inspections and Emergency

1. Provide devices within controller to run the elevator in inspection operation. 2. Provide devices on car top to run the elevator in inspection operation. 3. Provide within controller an emergency stop switch to disconnect power from the

brake and prevents motor from running. 4. Provide the means from the controller to mechanically lift and control the elevator

brake to safely bring car to nearest available landing when power is interrupted.





5. Provide the means from the controller to reset the governor over speed switch and

also trip the governor. 6. Provide the means from the controller to reset the emergency brake when set

because of an unintended car movement or ascending car over speed. 7. Provide the means for the control to reset elevator earthquake operation.

2.08 EQUIPMENT: DOOR OPERATOR AND CONTROL

A. Door Operator: A closed loop permanent magnet VVVF high-performance door operator shall be provided to open and close the car and hoistway doors simultaneously. Door movement shall be cushioned at both limits of travel. Electro-mechanical interlock shall be provided at each hoistway entrance to prevent operation of the elevator unless all doors are closed and locked. An electric contact shall be provided on the car at each car entrance to prevent the operation of the elevator unless the car door is closed.

B. The door operator shall be arranged so that, in case of interruption or failure of electric power, the doors can be readily opened by hand from within the car, in accordance with applicable code. Emergency devices and keys for opening doors from the landing shall be provided as required by local code.

C. Doors shall open automatically when the car has arrived at or is leveling at the respective

landings. Doors shall close after a predetermined time interval or immediately upon pressing of a car button. A door open button shall be provided in the car. Momentary pressing of this button shall reopen the doors and reset the time interval.

D. Door hangers and tracks shall be provided for each car and hoistway door. Tracks shall

be contoured to match the hanger sheaves. The hangers shall be designed for power operation with provisions for vertical and lateral adjustment. Hanger sheaves shall have polyurethane tires and pre-lubricated sealed-for-life bearings.

E. Electronic Door Safety Device. The elevator car shall be equipped with an electronic

protective device extending the full height of the car. When activated, this sensor shall prevent the doors from closing or cause them to stop and reopen if they are in the process of closing. The doors shall remain open as long as the flow of traffic continues and shall close shortly after the last person passes through the door opening.


A. Field measure and examine substrates, supports, and other conditions under which elevator work is to be performed.

B. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. C. Prior to start of Work, verify hoistway is in accordance with shop drawings.

Dimensional tolerance of hoistway from shop drawings: -0 inches +2 inches. Do not begin work of this section until dimensions are within tolerances.

D. Prior to start of Work, verify projections greater then 2 inches (4 inches if ASME A17.1/CSA B44 2000 applies) must be beveled not less then 75 degrees from horizontal.




ELEVATOR page 9 of 10

E. Prior to start of Work, verify landings have been prepared for entrance sill installation. Traditional sill angle or concrete sill support shall not be required.

F. Prior to start of Work, verify elevator pit has been constructed in accordance with requirements, is dry and reinforced to sustain vertical forces, as indicated in approved submittal. Verify that sumps or sump pumps located within pit will not interfere with installed elevator equipment.

G. Prior to start of Work, verify control space has been constructed in accordance with requirements, with access coordinated with elevator shop drawings, including Sleeves and penetrations.

H. Verify installation of GFCI protected 20-amp in pit and adjacent to each signal control cabinet in control space.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchors, bearing plates, brackets and other related accessories.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment, guides, controls, car and accessories in accordance with manufacturer installation methods and recommended practices.

B. Properly locate guide rails and related supports at locations in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and approved shop drawings. Anchor to building structure using isolation system to minimize transmission of vibration to structure.

C. All hoistway frames shall be securely fastened to fixing angles mounted in the hoistway. Coordinate installation of sills and frames with other trades.

D. Lubricate operating system components in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.

E. Perform final adjustments, and necessary service prior to substantial completion. 3.04 CONSTRUCTION

A. Interface with Other Work: a. Guide rail brackets attached to steel shall be installed prior to application of

fireproofing. b. Coordinate construction of entrance walls with installation of door frames and

sills. Maintain front wall opening until elevator equipment has been installed. B. Ensure adequate support for entrance attachment points at all landings. C. Coordinate wall openings for hall push buttons, signal fixtures and sleeves. Each

elevator requires sleeves within the hoistway wall. D. Coordinate emergency power transfer switch and power change pending signals as

required for termination at the primary elevator signal control cabinet in each group. E. Coordinate interface of elevators and fire alarm system. F. Coordinate interface of dedicated telephone line.

3.05 TESTING AND INSPECTIONS

A. Perform recommended and required testing in accordance with authority having jurisdiction.

B. Obtain required permits and provide originals to Owner’s Representative.




14 CONVEYING EQUIPMENT SECTION 14 20 00 ELEVATOR page 10 of 10 3.06 DEMONSTRATION

A. Prior to substantial completion, instruct Owner’s Representative on the proper function and required daily maintenance of elevators. Instruct personnel on emergency procedures.




31 EARTHWORK SECTION 31 14 00 EARTH REMOVAL AND STOCKPILING

page 1 of 1

1.1 PRODUCT HANDLING

1. DO NOT MOVE OR WORK GROWING MEDIUM OR ADDITIVES WHEN THEY ARE EXCESSIVELY WET, EXTREMELY DRY, OR FROZEN OR IN ANY MANNER WHICH WILL ADVERSELY AFFECT GROWING MEDIUM STRUCTURE. Growing medium whose structure has been destroyed by handling under these conditions will be rejected.

2. Protect growing medium and additives against extreme wetting by rain or other agents, and against contamination by weeds and insects.

3. Stockpile materials in bulk form in area designated by Owner. Provide additional protection by storing under roof or tarpaulins for bulk forms of peat moss and compost. Take all necessary precautions to prevent contamination of component materials from wind blown soils, weed seeds and insects. Contamination of individual components may result in rejection, if used.

1.2 PRODUCTS

1. ON SITE SOIL (TYPE A)

1. On site soil shall be friable “A Horizon” topsoil to the requirements of the B.C. Landscape Standard, excavated and stockpiled on site in an approved location. Excavating and stockpiling work shall be such that the soil is not damaged or contaminated.(Refer to 1.9 Product Handling).

2. Mineral particle sizes in on site soil shall be within the following ranges by weight:

95-100% shall pass a 25mm(1") sieve.

85-100% shall pass a 10mm(3/8") sieve.

0-2% shall pass a 0.02mm sieve.(i.e. max Clay Content of 2%)

3. On site soil shall be suitable for modification by screening and additives to meet the requirements for Screened Growing Medium(Type B as specified) except where specified and approved for use as unscreened On Site Soil(Type A).




31 EARTHWORK SECTION 31 23 00 EXCAVATION AND FILL page 1 of 2

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

.1 Furnish all labour, material, services, and equipment necessary for completion of excavation, backfill, compaction, and grading as indicated on the drawings and hereinafter specified.

.2 The items to be excavated include excavation for construction of foundation and concrete slab, and trenching as required for new and relocated Plumbing and Electrical Services.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENT

.1 Division 15: Piping and bedding for outside services, drains.

.2 Section 01 81 13 Sustainable Design Requirements

.3 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan



.2 All fill material to be locally-sourced, as per requirements of CaGBC LEED 2009 Materials and Resources Credit 5: Regional Materials. Material to be harvested within 800 km of the site of manufacture. The site of manufacture is to be located within 800 km of the Project Site.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Sand Bed: Clean free-draining sand with no organic content.

.2 Granular Sub-Base Backfill Course: Sub-base for service trenches shall consist of well graded sand with less than 5% dry weight passing through a No.200 sieve (0.075mm).

.3 Filter Mat: Amoco 2006 or approve equivalent.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION

.1 Prior to excavation, Contractor is to ascertain locations of all underground utilities such as gas, water, power, sewer, etc. Contractor is to ensure that all of the above utilities have been turned off or removed by the proper authorities prior to commencement. See also Section 00 30 00, City of New Westminster Forms.

.2 The Contractor shall excavate to depth specified by Structural, Plumbing and Electrical Drawings and Specifications.



31 EARTHWORK SECTION 31 23 00 EXCAVATION AND FILL page 2 of 2

.3 Excavation shall be performed to lines, grades, and elevations indicated on drawings, unless otherwise instructed by the Consultant. Slope surface of excavated areas to receive slab on grade to produce positive uniform drainage.

.4 All excavations to be in accordance with Geotechnical Engineer’s requirements. The final excavation for foundation bearing will be inspected by the Geotechnical Engineer to confirm proper bearing soil has been reached and that the surface is undisturbed and free from loose or water softened material.

3.2 DEWATERING

.1 Maintain excavations free from water at all times. Do not discharge into sanitary sewer, or conduct onto adjacent property. All water must be filtered prior to discharging into Drainage Canal. See Section 01 81 13 Sustainable Design Requirements and Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan.

3.3 SHORING & BRACING

.1 Provide all shoring, bracing, etc., necessary to prevent caving in of excavations, trenches, pits, etc. and to meet the safety requirements of the WorkSafe BC.

.2 Any damage done or disturbance, settlement, or collapse caused due to inadequate measures being taken by the Contractor to prevent same, shall be made good immediately at no additional cost to the contract.

3.4 BACKFILLING

.1 Trench:

.1 Backfill in trench as follows:

.1 Granular backfill for service trenches should consist of well graded SAND with less than 5% by dry weight passing the No.200 sieve (0.075mm). The granular backfill should be placed up to the underside of subbase layer in paved areas or up to the underside sub-floor drainage layer in slab areas. The granular backfill should be placed in maximum 300mm lifts and compacted to not less than 95% of Modified Proctor maximum dry density.

.2 Foundations and concrete slab

.1 Provide 150mm thick layer of 19mm x 10mm clear, crushed, angular gravel placed and compacted below the underside of the slab as recommended by Geotechnical Report.

.2 Gravel layers to be covered with 6mil polyethelene sheeting. See methane venting drawings for other details (separate submission).





APPENDIX 01: SAMPLE PRODUCT SUBMITTAL FORM (3 pages)




LEED-NC 2009 Material Submittal Form

To be completed by Subcontractor/Installer

Must be included in each product/material submittal

Materials will not be approved without complete LEED documentation

Complete one Material Certification Data Sheet for each product material.

Attach supporting Manufacturer Product Information or Manufacturer Letter of Certification.

Material or Product: _________________________________________________________

Material Cost (excluding Field Labor and Equipment): ___________________________________

Manufacturer: _______________________________________________________________

Manufacturer Address: ________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

Subcontractor/Installer: ________________________________________________________

Subcontractor/Installer Address: _________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

Subcontractor/Installer Project Manager Signature: __________________________________

Fill out only the sections that apply below MRc4 Recycled Content

Does the material/product contain post-consumer or pre-consumer recycled content?________

Percentage post-consumer recycled content: _______________________________________

Percentage pre-consumer recycled content: ________________________________________

If only some components of material/product contain recycled content, please fill out below:

Component__________________________________________________________________

%Weight of Product ___________________________________________________________

%Post-Consumer______________ %Pre-Consumer _____________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________




MRc5 Regional Materials – Regional Materials (Part I)

Was the material/product manufactured within an 800 km radius of the project?___________

Location of Manufacture: ______________________________________________________

Kilometers from jobsite (as the crow flies): _________________________________________

Method of Transportation_______________________________________________________

MRc5 Regional Materials – Regional Materials (Part II)

Was the material/product extracted, harvested, recovered within an 800 km radius of the project?

Component _________________________________________________________________

%Weight of Product ________________________ _________________________________

Harvest/Extraction Site _________________________________________________________

Distance from Site of Manufacture_________________________________________________

Method of Transportation________________________________________________________

MRc7 Certified Wood

Does the material product contain new wood (FSC and/or non-FSC)?____________________

Please note, recycled wood is not considered “new wood”

Component__________________________________________________________________

% Weight of Product that is New Wood ____________________________________________

% of New Wood that is FSC ____________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

Ensure that copies of vendor invoices for FSC certified wood are submitted with this form




EQc4.1 Low-Emitting Materials: Adhesives & Sealants

Does the adhesive, sealant, or sealant primer meet the VOC limits of South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule #1168?_______________________________________________

Does the aerosol adhesive meet the VOC limits of Green Seal Standard GC-36?___________

Component _________________________________________________________________

VOC content (g/L) ___________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

EQc4.2 Low-Emitting Materials: Paints & Coatings

Do the architectural paints, coatings and primers meet the VOC limits of Green Seal Standard GS-11?

Does the anti-corrosive and anti-rust paint meet the VOC limits of Green Seal Standard GC-03?

Do the clear wood finishes, floor coatings, stains, sealers, and shellacs meet the VOC limits of South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule 1113, Architectural Coatings?

Component _________________________________________________________________

VOC content (g/L) ___________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

EQc4.3 Low-Emitting Materials: Flooring Systems

Do the carpet and carpet underlay meet the VOC limits of Carpet & Rug Institute’s Green

Label Plus program?__________________________________________________________

Does the carpet adhesive meet the requirements of EQc4.1 (VOC limit 50g/L)?____________

Component _________________________________________________________________

Is the hard surface flooring covered by the FloorScore standard?________________________

Are all components of the hard surface flooring systems compliant with IEQc4.1?__________

___________________________________________________________________________

EQc4.4 Low-Emitting Materials: Composite Wood & Agrifiber Products

Does the material contain added urea-formaldehyde resins?

Component _________________________________________________________________

Binder Type _________________________________________________________________




APPENDIX 02: LEED SCORECARD (2 pages)

Queensborough Community Centre 08-Sep-11

66 44 Project Totals (pre-certification estimates) 110 Possible Points

16 10 Sustainable Sites 26 Points

√ CV Prereq 1 Construction Activity Pollution Prevention Required

1 O Credit 1 Site Selection 1

3 2 A Credit 2 Development Density and Community Connectivity 3, 5

1 - Credit 3 Brownfield Redevelopment 1

6 A Credit 4.1 Alternative Transportation: Public Transportation Access 3, 6

1 A Credit 4.2 Alternative Transportation: Bicycle Storage & Changing Rooms 1

3 - Credit 4.3 Alternative Transportation: Low-Emitting & Fuel-Efficient Vehicles 3

2 A Credit 4.4 Alternative Transportation: Parking Capacity 2

1 - Credit 5.1 Site Development: Protect and Restore habitat 1

1 L/A/O Credit 5.2 Site Development: Maximize Open Space 1

1 - Credit 6.1 Stormwater Design: Quantity Control 1

1 - Credit 6.2 Stormwater Design: Quality Control 1

1 - Credit 7.1 Heat Island Effect: Non-Roof 1

1 A Credit 7.2 Heat Island Effect: Roof 1

1 E Credit 8 Light Pollution Reduction 1

7 3 Water Efficiency 10 Points

√ M Prereq 1 Water Use Reduction Required

4 O/L Credit 1 Water Efficient Landscaping 2, 4

2 - Credit 2 Innovative Wastewater Technologies 2

3 1 M Credit 3 Water Use Reduction 2 - 4

14 21 Energy & Atmosphere 35 Points

√ CX Prereq 1 Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems Required

√ M/E Prereq 2 Minimum Energy Performance Required

√ M Prereq 3 Fundamental Refrigerant Management Required

8 11 M/E Credit 1 Optimize Energy Performance 1 - 19

7 - Credit 2 On-Site Renewable Energy 1 - 7

2 CX Credit 3 Enhanced Commissioning 2

2 M Credit 4 Enhanced Refrigerant Management 2

3 - Credit 5 Measurement and Verification 3

2 O/E Credit 6 Green Power 2

S = Structural L = Landscape

C = Construction Manager/Contractor CV = Civil CX = Commissioning Agent

LEED Canada-NC 2009 Anticipated Project Scorecard Y

ES

NO

CERTIFIED 40 - 49 POINTS, SILVER 50 - 59 POINTS, GOLD 60 - 79 POINTS, PLATINUM 80 + POINTS

R

espo

nsib

ility

RESPONSIBILITY O = Owner A = Architect

E = Electrical M = Mechanical

7 7 Materials & Resources 14 Points

√ A Prereq 1 Storage and Collection of Recyclables Required

3 - Credit 1.1 Building Reuse: Maintain Existing Walls, Floors, and Roof 1 - 3

1 - Credit 1.2 Building Reuse: Maintain Interior Non-Structural Elements 1

2 C/A Credit 2 Construction Waste Management 1 - 2

2 - Credit 3 Materials Reuse 1 - 2

2 C/A Credit 4 Recycled Content 1 - 2

2 C/A Credit 5 Regional Materials 1 - 2

1 - Credit 6 Rapidly Renewable Materials 1

1 S/A/C Credit 7 Certified Wood 1

14 1 Indoor Environmental Quality 15 Points

√ M Prereq 1 Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance Required

√ A/O Prereq 2 Environmental Tobacco Smoke (ETS) Control Required

1 M Credit 1 Outdoor Air Delivery Monitoring 11 - Credit 2 Increased Ventilation 1

1 C/M Credit 3.1 Construction IAQ Management Plan: During Construction 11 C/M Credit 3.2 Construction IAQ Management Plan: Before Occupancy 11 C/A Credit 4.1 Low-Emitting Materials: Adhesives and Sealants 11 C/A Credit 4.2 Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and Coatings 11 C/A Credit 4.3 Low-Emitting Materials: Flooring Systems 11 C/A Credit 4.4 Low-Emitting Materials: Composite Wood and Agrifibre Products 11 M/A Credit 5 Indoor Chemical and Pollutant Source Control 11 E Credit 6.1 Controllability of System: Lighting 11 A/M Credit 6.2 Controllability of System: Thermal Comfort 11 M Credit 7.1 Thermal Comfort: Design 11 M/O/A Credit 7.2 Thermal Comfort: Verification 11 A Credit 8.1 Daylight and Views: Daylight 11 A Credit 8.2 Daylight and Views: Views 1

5 1 Innovation in Design 6 Points

1 O/A Credit 1.1 Innovation in Design - Green Housekeeping 1

1 O/A Credit 1.2 Innovation in Design - Education Plan 1

1 O/A Credit 1.3 Innovation in Design - Green Furniture 1

1 AE Credit 1.4 Innovation in Design - Low Mercury Lighting 1

1 - Credit 1.5 Innovation in Design 1

1 A Credit 2 LEED® Accredited Professional 1

3 1 Regional Priority 4 Points

1 - Credit 1 Durable Building 1

1 A Credit 2.1 Regional Priority Credit: SSc4.2 1

1 A Credit 2.2 Regional Priority Credit: SSc4.4 1

1 A Credit 2.3 Regional Priority Credit: MRc7 1




APPENDIX 3: WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN SAMPLE SUBMITTAL FORM (1 page)

Name of Company

Contact Person Telephone No. Project Site/Location

Project Type Complete Deconstruction Partial Deconstruction

Estimated Time for Completion

Building Construction Combustible Noncombustible

Combination (specify)__________________

Building Type Residential Commercial/Industrial

Total Area (m2)

Pre-Demolition Audit Project Summary For Period: to

Material Estimated Generation

Salvaged Recycled Disposed

Facility Remarks/ Comments

Signature Title Date

Explanatory note: Column 1 - “Material” – enter materials targeted for salvage, recycling, and/or disposal Column 2 - “Estimated Generation” – enter the estimated volumes, quantities, or number of salvageable, recyclable, and waste materials generated (consistently in cu. m. or metric tonnes). Column 3 - “Salvaged” – enter the volumes, quantities, or number of materials salvaged (consistently as cu. m. or tonnes) Column 4 - “Recycled” – enter the volumes or quantities of materials recycled (consistenly as cu. m. or tonnes) Column 5 - “Disposed” – enter the volumes or quantities of materials disposed (consistently as cu. m. or tonnes) Column 6 - “Facility” – enter the end-destination of salvaged, recycled, and disposed materials Column 7 - “Remarks/Comments” – enter any additional comments or details as required

QUEENSBOROUGH COMMUNITY CENTRE EXPANSION AND … · a.301.1 detail exterior elevations a.301.2...

Documents

Transcript of QUEENSBOROUGH COMMUNITY CENTRE EXPANSION AND … · a.301.1 detail exterior elevations a.301.2...